VAECO Standard Operating Procedures

Vietnam Airlines Corporation
VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING COMPANY LTD.
STANDARD
OPERATING
PROCEDURES
A: Noi Bai International Airport, Hanoi, Vietnam T: 84-4-38843290 F: 84-4-38865176 W: www.vaeco.com.vn
VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL
PART 1
GENERAL
Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012
Page 1-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 TABLE OF CONTENT
1.1
TABLE OF CONTENT
PART 1
GENERAL ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
PART 2
2.1
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
PART 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
PART 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
PART 6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
TABLE OF CONTENT ......................................................................................... 1.1-1

RECORD OF REVISIONS ................................................................................... 1.2-1
SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT ............................................................................. 1.3-1
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES.............................................................................. 1.4-1
DOCUMENT CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION.................................................... 1.5-1
ABBREVIATION .................................................................................................. 1.6-1
DEFINITION OF TERMS ..................................................................................... 1.7-1
MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 2-1
ORGANIZATION CHARTS .................................................................................. 2.1-1
PROCESSES .............................................................................................. 3-1

BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS ...................................................................... 3.1-1
RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS ..................................................................... 3.2-1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS ......................................................... 3.3-1
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 4-1

GENERAL SAFETY ............................................................................................. 4.1-1
A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY .......................................................................... 4.2-1
ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY ......................................................... 4.3-1
FUEL TANK SAFETY .......................................................................................... 4.4-1
HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY ........................................................................ 4.5-1
OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY ............................................................ 4.6-1
MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION ................................. 4.7-1
SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR ............................................................... 4.8-1
HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES ...................................... 4.9-1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROCEDURES .......................... 5-1

CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION .............................................. 5.1-1
AIRCRAFT WORK ORDER ISSUANCE AND CONTROL.................................... 5.2-1
WORK PACK PREPARATION AND REVIEW ..................................................... 5.3-1
CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS AND DOCUMENT DURING MAINTENANCE
PROGRESS ........................................................................................................ 5.4-1
DOCK CONTROL ................................................................................................ 5.5-1
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENT COMPLETION ..................................................... 5.6-1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD ................................................................ 5.7-1
RAMP AND BASE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................. 6-1

AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK ...................................................................... 6.1-1
A/C ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE ....................................................................... 6.2-1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE ................................................................................ 6.3-1
CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/TASK HAND-OVER)......................... 6.4-1
LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST................................ 6.5-1
RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART/ MATERIALS TO STORE .................................. 6.6-1
Issue: 02, Revision: 06, Date: 04 OCT 2013
Page 1.1-1

PART 1 GENERAL
PART 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
PART 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................ 7-1

WORKSHOP MAINTENANCE REQUEST ........................................................... 7.1-1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE ................................ 7.2-1
COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ......................... 7.3-1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 7.4-1
COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE...................... 7.5-1
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE RECORD HANDLING ....................................... 7.6-1
WORKSHOP SPARE PART & MATERIALS CONTROL...................................... 7.7-1
SEAT COVER AND CURTAIN WASHING CONTROL......................................... 7.8-1
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PROCEDURES .............................................. 8-1
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL ...................................................................... 8.1-1

TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA ..................................................... 8.2-1
MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING ................................................................... 8.3-1
NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE DATA INACCURACIES AND AMBIGUITIES TO
THE AUTHOR...................................................................................................... 8.4-1
TECHNICAL SUPPORT ...................................................................................... 8.5-1
ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE ................................................................... 8.6-1
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION .................................... 8.7-1
ACCEPTANCE OF TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................... 8.8-1
MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT .................................................... 8.9-1
CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT ............ 8.10-1
CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY............................... 8.11-1
MATERIALS PRODUCTION .............................................................................. 8.12-1
TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE...................... 8.13-1
AIRCRAFT SECURITY LOCK ........................................................................... 8.14-1
PART 9
LOGISTICS PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 9-1
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING ............................ 9.1-1

PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING ..................... 9.2-1
SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIALS CONTROL IN STORE .................................... 9.3-1
ROBBERY (CANNIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY ....................... 9.4-1
PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE .......................................................................... 9.5-1
RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS .................................... 9.6-1
STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL ....................................... 9.7-1
DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS ........................................................... 9.8-1
PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROCEDURES ......................................................... 10-1

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL ................................ 10.1-1

SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING .................................................... 10.2-1
QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING .................................................................... 10.3-1
JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES .................. 10.4-1
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION........................................................ 10.5-1
HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION ...................................................................... 10.6-1
INSPECTION OF REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEM (RII) .................................... 10.7-1
Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date: 24 SEP 2014
Page 1.1-2

PART 1 GENERAL
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
10.16
10.17
10.18
10.19
10.20
10.21
10.22
10.23
10.24
10.25
10.26
CERTIFICATE OF RETURN TO SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE

(FOR AIRCRAFT) .............................................................................................. 10.8-1
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION ........................................................................ 10.9-1
RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/ PART REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT ...... 10.10-1
FABRICATION QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................. 10.11-1
MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING ....................................... 10.12-1
SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING....................................... 10.13-1
MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION........................... 10.14-1
QUALITY NOTICE ........................................................................................... 10.15-1
QUALITY AUDIT .............................................................................................. 10.16-1
SUPPLIER CONTROL ..................................................................................... 10.17-1
CERTIFICATED AND NON-CERTIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL ................ 10.18-1
COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING ....................................... 10.19-1
CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES 10.20-1
QUALITY MONITORING ................................................................................. 10.21-1
MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION ......... 10.22-1
ASSESSOR QUALIFYING ............................................................................... 10.23-1
QUALIFYING EXAMINATION .......................................................................... 10.24-1
TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION) ....................................... 10.25-1
INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING ........................................................................... 10.26-1
PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE AND TRAINING PROCEDURES ........................... 11-1

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT ...................................................................... 11.1-1

EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD ......................... 11.2-1
TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT ............................................................. 11.3-1
TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION ............................................................. 11.4-1
TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION ......................................................... 11.5-1
EXAM ARRANGEMENT .................................................................................... 11.6-1
EXAM PREPARATION ...................................................................................... 11.7-1
EXAM IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................................ 11.8-1
TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE .................................... 11.9-1
ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION .............................................. 11.10-1
TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW..................................................................... 11.11-1
PART 12 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES FOR VNA ...................................................... 12-1

12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.10
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION ......... 12.1-1

SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT ...................... 12.2-1
AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL ............................................ 12.3-1
ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING ................................................................ 12.4-1
ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION ........... 12.5-1
SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT ........... 12.6-1
CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM ....................................... 12.7-1
CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 12.8-1
COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ................... 12.9-1
CONTROL OF MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN AMASIS ................................ 12.10-1
Page 1.1-3

PART 1 GENERAL
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
12.17
12.18
VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL ................................................. 12.11-1

CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT ............................................................... 12.12-1
CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS ................................................. 12.13-1
COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT .......................... 12.14-1
HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS ...................................................... 12.15-1
STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR .................................................................... 12.16-1
CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT ........................................ 12.17-1
AIRCRAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 12.18-1
PART 13 FORMS ...................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1
13.2
VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION ...................................... 13.1-1

AUTHORITY AND CUSTOMER FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION 13.2-1
Page 1.1-4

PART 1 GENERAL
1.2
1.2 RECORD OF REVISIONS
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Issue No. Revision No.
Revision Date
Revised by
01
00
15 JUL 2010
01
01
19 MAY 2011
VAECO QAD
02
00
01 FEB 2012
VAECO QAD
02
01
18 APR 2012
VAECO QAD
02
02
08 MAY 2012
VAECO QAD
02
03
20 JUL 2012
VAECO QAD
02
04
28 NOV 2012
VAECO QAD
02
05
25 APR 2013
VAECO QAD
02
06
04 OCT 2013
VAECO QAD
02
07
25 FEB 2014
VAECO QAD
02
08
08 APR 2014
VAECO QAD
02
09
20 AUG 2014
VAECO QAD
02
10
24 SEP 2014
VAECO QAD
Page 1.2-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.3
1.3 SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT
SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT
The following table shows the summary of the latest amendment in the
current issue of the VAECO SOP.
Manual Name
: Standard Operating Procedures
Manual Code
: VAECO SOP
Issue Number
: 02
Revision Number : 10
Part. Chapter - Page
1.2-1
Amendment Summary
To update Record of revision
1.3-1 to 1.3-3
To update Summary of amendment
1.4-1 to 1.4-6
To update List of Effective Pages
1.6-1 to 1.6-2
+ To add some abbreviations.
2.1-8 to 2.1-15
5.1-1 to 5.1-3
+ To add Organizational chart of Cabin Interior

Maintenance Center;
+ To update Organizational chart of several
maintenance centers.
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC to implement
the customer requirements;
+ To add the implementation of training for customer
needs.
5.2-1 to 5.2.2
+ To add the responsibility of director of CIMC to

issue and control A/C work order.
6.6-2
+ To add CIMC responsibility to return defective

component for maintenance works performed in
CIMC.
7.1-1 to 7.1-2
+ To add CIMC responsibility to issue Work Request

for component maintenance in CIMC workshop.
7.2-1 to 7.2-2
+ To add CIMC responsibility to issue worksheet for

component maintenance in CIMC workshop.
7.8-1 to 7.8-2
+ To move responsibility of seat cover and curtain

washing control from CMC to CIMC.
Page 1.3-1

PART 1 GENERAL
Amendment Summary
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC to control hand
tool.
8.9-5,
8.9-9 to 8.9-11
+ To define the responsibility of EGD/ CMC for

issuing T&E operation and maintenance
documents and register fabrication/ equivalency
information of T&E in AMASIS
8.13-1 to 8.13-3
+ To add the case of transfer the T&E owned by a

maintenance center other than CMCs.
8.14-1 to 8.14-2
+ To add the Aircraft security lock procedure.
9.4-1 to 9.4-3
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC to perform

cannibalization during component maintenance
process.
9.6-1 to 9.6-2
+ To add the responsibility of LGD for receiving

defective components from CIMC.
+ To add some new A/C repair staff.
10.1-1 to 10.1-14
+ To revise experience requirement of some ARS

staff categories.
+ To add prerequisite requirement of A/C repair staff
and Painting staff.
+ To divide Cabin repair category into 02 levels.
10.11-1 to 10.11-3
+ To revise responsibility of related department/

center in part fabrication performance and record
keeping.
10.24-1 to 10.24-2
+ To add Interview/ Practical assessment procedure
12.9-1 to 12.9-2
12.10-1 to 12.10-3
12.11-1 to 12.11-3
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for receiving

and implementing to appropriate maintenance
requirement from MCC.
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for issuing WO,
order parts/ materials to perform cabin interior/ IFE
maintenance work.
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for update
component maintenance activities in cabin interior/
IFE shops into AMASIS.
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for preparing
and controlling concession request for cabin
interior/ IFE defects.
Page 1.3-2

PART 1 GENERAL
Amendment Summary
12.13-1 to 12.13-3
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for controlling of

emergency equipment.
12.17-1 to 12.17-2
+ To add the responsibility of CIMC for controlling of

cabin interior/ IFE ADDs.
Page 1.3-3

PART 1 GENERAL
1.5
DOCUMENT CONTROL AND DISTRIBUTION

VAECO develops this SOP manual to provide detail instructions/ procedures
for VAECO activities. This SOP manual is controlled and revised by QA
Department, reviewed by QA Director and approved by the President/ CEO.
This manual does not override any Authorities/ customers requirements and
any manuals approved/ accepted by the competent Authorities/ customers.
SOP manual will be published in PDF format. The users who are VAECO
members will access the current document on VAECO website. The VAECO
Technical Library will update the document on VAECO website whenever
there is a new issue/ revision. The Quality Assurance Department will notify
the changes on home page of VAECO website whenever there are
significant changes.
Page 1.5-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.6
1.6 ABBREVIATION
ABBREVIATION
ABBREVIATION
A/C
AD
BDD
BMC
BTPD
CBT
CEO
CFR
CHDO
CIMC
CITPD
CMC
CSI
CSN
CSO
CTPD
DAD
DRO
EASA
EGD
EO
ER
ETA
FAA
FAR
FOD
GSE
HAN
HCM
HRD
HT
IAW
IFO
IT
JC
LGD
LLP
LEP
MCC
MTE
MEANING
Aircraft
Airworthiness Directive
Business Development Department
Base Maintenance Center
Base Technical Planning Division
Computer Based Training
Chief Executive Officer
Code of Federal Regulations
Certificate-Holding District Office
Cabin Interior Maintenance Center
Cabin Interior Technical Planning Division
Component Maintenance Center
Cycles Since Inspection
Cycles Since New
Cycles Since Overhaul
Component Technical Planning Division
Da Nang
Defect Rectification Order
European Aviation Safety Agency
Engineering and IT Department
Engineering Order
Engineering Request
Estimated Time Arrival
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Aviation Regulations
Foreign Object Damage
Ground Support Equipment
Ha Noi
Ho Chi Minh City
Human Resource Department
Hard Time
In Accordance With
International Field Office
Informatics Technology
Job Card
Logistics Department
Life Limit Part
List of Effective Pages
Maintenance Control Center
Measuring and Test Equipment
Page 1.6-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.6 ABBREVIATION
ABBREVIATION
NDT
NHA
NRC
NRCC
OOP
OPM
PLD
QA
QAD
QCM
QN
RII
RMC
RSM
RSTP
RTPD
RTS
SB
SGN
SRO
T&E
TAR
TC
TCD
TPD
TI
TIPF
TL
TOEFA
TPD
TS
TSI
TSN
TSO
VAC
VACBI
VAECO
VAR
WO
WR
WP
MEANING
Non-Destructive Testing
Next Higher Assembly
Non-Routine Card
Non-Routine Card Continuation
Out Of Phase
Out of Phase Maintenance
Planning department
Quality Assurance
Quality Assurance Department
Quality Control Manual
Quality Notice
Required Inspection Items
Ramp Maintenance Center
Repair Station Manual
Repair Station Training Program
Ramp Technical Planning Division
Return To Service
Service Bulletin
Tansonnhat Airport
Structure Repair Order
Tools and Equipment
Technical Assistance Request
Training Center
Training Director
Technical Planning Division
Technical Instruction
Technical Instruction for Part Fabrication
Technical Library
Test of English For Aviation - Docwise
Technical Planning Division
Technical Service
Time Since Inspection
Time Since New
Time Since Overhaul
Vietnam Airlines Corporation
Video and Computer Based Instruction
Vietnam Airlines Engineering Company Ltd.
Vietnam Aviation Regulation
Work Order
Work Request
Work Pack
Page 1.6-2

PART 1 GENERAL
1.7
1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS
DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM
DEFINITION
ADD Type B
A MEL/ airworthiness related defect that is accepted to

defer the rectification IAW maintenance data such as MEL,
CDL, AMM, SRM, EM, TA
ADD type C
A non-MEL/ non-airworthiness related defect that is

accepted to defer the rectification (this defect is not
specified in any maintenance data and does not concern to
the airworthiness of the A/C).
Airworthiness Approval CAAV Form 1, EASA Form ONE, FAA Form 8130-3 etc.
Tag/ Authorized
Release Certificate
Arrival/ departure KIT
Include but not limited to necessary tool for A/C arrival and
departure activities as: headset, safety pins
Authorized inspection
staff
Person authorized by VAECO to performing inspections

under
the
Company
certificate
and
operations
specifications.
Authorized staff
Person authorized by VAECO to plan, supervise, perform

inspection and approve for return to service the
maintenance, preventive maintenance, or alterations
performed under the VAECO certificate and operations
specifications.
Buy-back
Re-inspection of work performed as a result of previous

required inspection findings.
Critical task
A maintenance task involving some element of removal/

disassembly and installation/ reassembly of several
components of the same type fitted to more than one
system on the same aircraft during a particular
maintenance check.
Dock Control Room
Area for controlling all maintenance document including

processing, completing etc. during specific maintenance
check.
Engineering engineer
Person working in EGD and qualified IAW chapter 10.4.
Foreman
Nominated person by maintenance director, who manage

all maintenance activities for specific work pack.
Maintenance document Documents that used to record and certify for the work to
be done such as Job card, worksheet, NRC, NRCC, JCAS
etc.
Issue: 02, Revision: 05, Date: 25 APR 2013
Page 1.7-1

PART 1 GENERAL
1.7 DEFINITION OF TERMS
TERM
DEFINITION
Maintenance planner
Person working in EGD and qualified IAW chapter 10.4.
MCC controller
Person working in a Maintenance Control Center and

qualified IAW chapter 10.4.
Mechanic
Person working in a Maintenance Centers who is qualified

IAW chapter 10.4.
Over and Above Work
Any additional work which is not originally part of the

contracted work package or variations to existing
documents in contracted work package requested by the
customer.
Production planner
Person working in a Maintenance Center and qualified IAW

chapter 10.4.
Store inspector
Person who authorized to perform the incoming inspection

on parts and/or materials to be used by the VAECO.
Supervisor
Person who authorized to direct the work performed under

the Company certificate and operations specifications.
Sign-off
A statement by the competent person performing or

supervising the work, that the task or group of tasks has
been correctly completed.
Technical librarian
Person qualified IAW chapter 10.4.
Technical service staff
Person working in a Maintenance Center and qualified IAW

chapter 10.4.
Tool controller
Person working in Maintenance Center and qualified IAW

chapter 10.4.
Page 1.7-2

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
PART 2
MANAGEMENT
Page 2-1

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1 ORGANIZATION CHARTS
2.1
ORGANIZATION CHARTS
2.1.1
HUMAN RESOURCE DEPARTMENT
HUMAN
RESOURCE
DEPARTMENT
PERSONNEL
DIVISION
TRAINING &
DEVELOPMENT
DIVISION
COMPENSATION
& BENEFITS
DIVISION
Page 2.1-1

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE DEPARTMENT
QUALITY
ASSURANCE
DEPARTMENT
SAFETY
DIVISION
QUALITY AUDIT
DIVISION
QUALITY
CONTROL
DIVISION (HAN)
QUALITY
CONTROL
DIVISION (HCM)
SAFETY
STANDARD
SECTION
QUALIFYING
SECTION
AVIONIC
SECTION
AVIONIC
SECTION
SAFETY
CONTROL
SECTION
AUDIT SECTION
AIRFRAME
SECTION
AIRFRAME
SECTION
Page 2.1-2

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.3
ENGINEERING AND IT DEPARTMENT
ENGINEERING & IT
DEPARTMENT
MAINTENANCE
PLANNING
DIVISION
TOOL AND
EQUIPMENT
CONTROL
DIVISION
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE
SECTION
GROUND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION
AD/ SB
CONTROL
SECTION
IT SECTION
(HAN)
TOOL SECTION
STRUCTURE
SECTION
TECHNICAL
LIBRARY
SECTION (HAN)
WORK ORDER
SECTION
AIRCRAFT
SYSTEM
SECTION
IT SECTION
(HCM)
PLANNING
SECTION
ENGINE
SECTION
TECHNICAL
LIBRARY
SECTION (HCM)
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
PARTS AND EO
SECTION
AIRCRAFT
ENGINEERING
DIVISION
INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
DIVISION
ELECTRIC/
AVIONIC
SECTION
TECHNICAL
RECORD
SECTION (HAN)
HCM
ENGINEERING
SECTION
TECHNOLOGY
DEVELOPING
SECTION
Issue: 02, Revision: 04, Date: 28 NOV 2012
Page 2.1-3

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.4
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
PLANNING
DEPARTMENT
INVESTMENT
PLANNING
DIVISION
DEVELOPMENT
PLANNING
DIVISION
INVESTMENT
PLANNING
SECTION
GENERAL
PLANNING
SECTION
Page 2.1-4

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.5
LOGISTICS DEPARTMENT
LOGISTICS
DEPARTMENT
STORE
DIVISION
STOCK
CONTROL
DIVISION
SUPPLY
DIVISION
REPAIR
CONTROL
DIVISION
HCM
LOGISTICS
DIVISION
INCOMING
INSPECTION
SECTION
PURCHASE
SECTION
IMPORT/
EXPORT
SECTION
GENERAL
SECTION
STORE
CONTROL
SECTION
SUPPLIER
CONTROL
SECTION
DOMESTIC
SECTION
INCOMING
INSPECTION
SECTION
STORE
KEEPING
SECTION
IMPORT/
EXPORT &
DOMESTIC
SECTION
REPAIR
CONTROL
SECTION
STORE
KEEPING
SECTION
Page 2.1-5

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.6
BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT
BUSINESS
DEVELOPMENT
DEPARTMENT
MARKETING &
SALES DIVISION
CUSTOMER
SUPPORT
DIVISION
Page 2.1-6

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.7
MAINTENANCE CONTROL CENTER
MAINTENANCE
CONTROL
CENTER
MAINTENANCE
CONTROL DIVISION
CONTROL
SECTION
(1, 2, 3, 4)
GENERAL
SECTION
PRODUCTION
PLANNING
DIVISION
AIRBUS/ FOKKER
MAINTENANCE
PLANNING
SECTION
BOEING/ ATR
MAINTENANCE
PLANNING
SECTION
ADD CLEARANCE
PLANNING
SECTION
Page 2.1-7

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.8
HAN BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN BASE
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
(TPD)
AIRFRAME
SQUAD
AVIONIC
SQUAD
POWER
PLANT SQUAD
STRUCTURE
REPAIR
SQUAD
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
SQUAD
TEAM 1
STRUCTURE
REPAIR
SHOP
DOCK
SECTION
TEAM 2
COMPOSITE
SHOP
ELECTRICITY
SECTION
PAINTING
SECTION
AIRCRAFT
CLEANING
SECTION
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
TEAM 1
TEAM 1
PLANNING
SECTION
TEAM 2
TEAM 2
GENERAL
SECTION
TEAM 3
TEAM 3
TEAM 3
STORE
SECTION
TEAM 4
TEAM 4
TEAM 4
HANGAR
SECTION
Page 2.1-8

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.9
HCM BASE MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM BASE
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
DIVISION
AIRFRAME
SQUAD
AVIONIC
SQUAD
STRUCTURE
REPAIR SQUAD
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
SQUAD
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
SECTION 1
(ZONE 100, 200
AND 800)
STURCTURE
REPAIR SHOP
HANGAR
SECTION
PLANNING
SECTION
SECTION 2
(ZONE 300
AND 400)
COMPOSITE
SHOP
CLEANING
SECTION
GENERAL
SECTION
SECTION 3
(ZONE 500, 600
AND 700)
PAINTING
SECTION
Page 2.1-9

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.10
HAN RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN RAMP
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
MAINTENANCE
SQUAD
(1, 2, 3, 4)
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
(1, 2, 3, 4)
A320/ 321/ 330

AIRCRAFT
SECTION
PLANNING
SECTION
F70 & OTHER

ICRAFT
SECTION
INTERNATIONAL
MAINTENANCE
SQUAD
NUMBER 1
SECTION
NUMBER 2
SECTION
CONTROL
SECTION
NUMBER 3
SECTION
GENERAL
SECTION
NUMBER 4
SECTION
INFORMATIC &
DOCUMENT
SECTION
VEHICLE
SECTION
RAMP
SECTIONS
(OUT
STATIONS)
Page 2.1-10

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.11
HCM RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM RAMP
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
(1, 2, 3, 4)
PLANNING
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
SQUAD
(1, 2, 3, 4)
INTERNATIONAL
MAINTENANCE
SQUAD
ATR72 AIRCRAFT
SECTION
NUMBER 1
SECTION
B777 AIRCRAFT
SECTION
NUMBER 2
SECTION
CONTROL
SECTION
A320/ 321
AIRCRAFT
SECTION
NUMBER 3
SECTION
GENERAL
SECTION
A330 AIRCRAFT
SECTION
NUMBER 4
SECTION
INFORMATIC &
DOCUMENT
SECTION
VEHICLE
SECTION
RAMP
SECTIONS
(OUT
STATIONS)
Page 2.1-11

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.12
DAD RAMP MAINTENANCE CENTER
DAD RAMP
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
RAMP SECTIONS
(OUT STATIONS)
DAD RAMP STORE

SECTION
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
PLANNING
SECTION
Page 2.1-12

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.13
HAN COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
HAN COMPONENT
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
(TPD)
CALIBRATION
WORKSHOP
AIRCRAFT
COMPONENT
WORKSHOP
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
CALIBRATION
SHOP
BATTERY
SHOP
PLANNING
SECTION
MEASUREMENT
T&E CONTROL
SECTION
ATEC SHOP
MAINTENANCE
RECORD
SECTION
NDT AND
BORESCOPE
SHOP
SAFETY
EQUIPMENT
SHOP
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
WORKSHOP
TOOL STORE
SECTION
GROUND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION
GROUND
EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE
WORKSHOP
MECHANICAL
SHOP
EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE
SHOP
02 N2 H2O
SHOP
WHEEL
SHOP
ELECTRICAL
COMPONENT
SHOP
Page 2.1-13

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.14
HCM COMPONENT MAINTENANCE CENTER
HCM COMPONENT
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
(TPD)
CALIBRATION &
ELECTRONIC
WORKSHOP
AIRCRAFT
COMPONENT
WORKSHOP
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
WORKSHOP
TECHNICAL
SERVICE
SECTION
CALIBRATION
SHOP
BATTERY
SHOP
TOOL STORE
SECTION
PLANNING
SECTION
T&E CONTROL
SECTION
MECHANICAL
COMPONENT
SHOP
GROUND
EQUIPMENT
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
RECORD
SECTION
NDT AND
BORESCOPE
SHOP
WHEEL &
BRAKE SHOP
EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE
SHOP
OXYGEN SHOP
MECHANICAL
SHOP
OXYGEN,
NITROGEN, H2O
SHOP
Page 2.1-14

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.15
CABIN MAINTENANCE CENTER
CABIN INTERIOR
MAINTENANCE
CENTER
TECHNICAL PLANNING
DIVISION
(TPD)
NORTHERN
CABIN SQUAD
NORTHERN
CABIN
WORKSHOP
SOUTHERN
CABIN SQUAD
SOUTHERN
CABIN
WORKSHOP
CABIN
INTERIOR
SECTION
SECTION 1
INTERIOR
COMPONENT
SHOP
SECTION 1
INTERIOR
COMPONENT
SHOP
IFE SECTION
SECTION 2
IFE SHOP
SECTION 2
SOFT
FURNISHINGS
SHOP
COMPONENT
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
SECTION 3
SOFT
FURNISHINGS
SHOP
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
SECTION 4
CABIN-BASE
SECTION
CABIN-BASE
SECTION
Page 2.1-15

PART 2 MANAGEMENT
2.1.16 TRAINING CENTER
TRAINING
CENTER
TRAINING
DIVISION
ADMINISTRATIVE
DIVISION
INSTRUCTOR
SECTION
PLANNING AND
CONTRACT
SECTION
STANDARD
SECTION
GENERAL
SECTION
SOUTHERN
TRAINING DIVISION
Page 2.1-16

PART 3 PROCESSES
PART 3
PROCESSES
Page 3-1

PART 3 PROCESSES
3.1
3.1 BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS
BASE MAINTENANCE PROCESS

Maintenance cleanliness and
FOD prevention (4.7)
Handling, storage and
disposal of wastes (4.9)
Aircraft towing/ push back
(6.1)
Control of work process and

document in base maint. (5.4)
Aircraft contract maintenance

implementation (5.1)
Dock control (5.5)
Aircraft work request issuance

and monitoring (5.2)
Work pack preparation and
review (5.3)
Management of tool and
equipment (8.9)
AIRCRAFT
TO BE
MAINTAINED
Inspection of require
inspection item (RII) (10.7)
Suspected unapproved parts
reporting (10.13)
MOR/ Malfunction and defect
reporting (10.12)
Maintenance data control

(8.1)
Continuity of maintenance
(Shift/ task handover) (6.4)
Continuity of inspection (10.9)
Hidden Damage Inspection

(10.10)
In-process inspection
(10.5.7.2)
Preliminary inspection
(10.5.7.1)
Aircraft Maintenance
(6.3)
Aircraft maintenance record

(1.1)
Aircraft document completion
(5.6)
Return of A/C parts/ materials
to store (6.6)
Final inspection (10.5.7.3)
CRS/ maintenance
release issuance (10.8)
AIRCRAFT
RETURNED
TO SERVICE
Page 3.1-1

PART 3 PROCESSES
3.2
3.2 RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS
RAMP MAINTENANCE PROCESS
Maintenance cleanliness and

FOD prevention (4.7)
AIRCRAFT
TO BE
MAINTAINED
Aircraft towing/ push back

(6.1)

Contract maintenance
implementation (5.1)
Inspection of require
inspection item (RII) (10.7)
Aircraft work request issuance

and monitoring (5.2)
Suspected unapproved parts

reporting (10.13)
Aircraft maintenance record

(1.1)
Management of tool and

equipment (8.9)
MOR/ Malfunction and defect

reporting (10.12)
Aircraft document completion

(5.6)

(8.1)
Shift/ task handover (6.4)
Return of A/C parts and

materials to store (6.6)
(10.5.7.1)
In-process inspection
(10.5.7.2)
Final inspection (10.5.7.3)
Aircraft Arrival
(6.2.4.2)
Aircraft Maintenance and

Service (6.2.4.3)
Aircraft departure
(6.2.4.4)
AIRCRAFT
RETURNED
TO SERVICE
Page 3.2-1

PART 3 PROCESSES
3.3
3.3 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCESS
Workshop Work request

Issuance and management
(7.1)
Worksheet preparation
(7.2)
AIRCRAFT
COMPONENT
TO BE
MAINTAINED
Maintenance cleanliness
and FOD prevention (4.7)
Tools and equipments

control (8.9)
Suspected unapproved
parts reporting (10.13)
Workshop Spare parts &

materials control (7.7)


(8.1)
MOR/ Malfunction and

defect reporting (10.12)
Component document
handling (7.6)
Hidden Damage Inspection

(10.10)
Shift/ task handover (6.4)
Unserviceable parts return

to store (6.6)
Aircraft component
receiving and preliminary
inspection (7.3)
Component maintenance
performance (7.4)
Component final
inspection and return to
service (7.5)
AIRCRAFT
COMPONENT
RETURNED TO
SERVICE
Page 3.3-1

PART 4 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 4
GENERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
Page 4-1

4.1
GENERAL SAFETY
4.1.1
PURPOSE
4.1 GENAERAL SAFETY
To ensure the basic safety requirements are followed by the VAECO

maintenance staffs in order to achieve the best quality of maintenance work.
4.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied when performing maintenance activities.
4.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
All VAECO personnel shall follow all the requirements set forth in this
instruction.
2.
The staff on duty has responsibilities for:
3.
4.1.4
a.
Following the safety regulations of the jobs.
b.
Informing the manager immediately when the safety problems

occurred or may occur.
The manager has responsibilities for:

a.
Ensuring all his staffs follow safety requirements.
b.
Providing the sufficient safe environment.
c.
Investigating the incident/ accident and issuing the safety report and
sending to QAD.
GENERAL SAFETY OPERATION

1.
2.
Fire accident prevention

a.
Smoking is prohibited in the ramp, the hangar and the aircraft.
b.
The location symbol of the fire bottle must be clear, and the expiry
must be remarkable on each one.
c.
It must be easy to go through/to the pavement, fire lane and fire

hydrant.
d.
The fire extinguisher location shall be established by Administration

department and accepted by QAD. List of all fire extinguishers shall
specify the locations and expiry dates and be controlled by the
Administration department. Fire extinguisher control list shall be
printed out every three months. Fire control team shall perform the
fire extinguishers routine checks and request to replace the expired
or unserviceable one.
Common Safety operation

a.
The entire working zone must be kept neatly clean.
b.
The entire equipments using on the maintenance jobs must be fixed

to prevent the personnel in or around the working area from being
hurt.
c.
The maintenance staff must wear the uniform clothing and safe
shoes in the working area.
Page 4.1-1

3.
4.
4.1 GENAERAL SAFETY
d.
The maintenance staff is prohibited to wear the ring, the ear-ring, the
necklace and so on when working in critical area or cramped area
such as fuel tank etc.
e.
It is prohibited to wear the shoes showing toes in hangar or ramp.
f.
The manager must confirm that maintenance staff had the

necessary safety accessories before doing the maintenance jobs.
g.
All the personnel must have the necessary protective accessories

when go through the danger area.
h.
The personnel must wear the safe rope when doing the jobs on the
high area like as the wing, the aerial ladder truck and the fuselage
top point.
Tools/ equipment safety operation

a.
It is prohibited to be used on the aircraft maintenance when

tools/equipment are damaged or unserviceable.
b.
Electrical operated drills are not allowed for aircraft work due to
possibility of sparking.
c.
Adjustable spanner are not allowed for aircraft work as the bolts or
nuts are prone to be rounded.
d.
The tools/equipment as power tools, electric machinery, electronic

tester, cybernetic equipment and self-propelled vehicles must be
operated by the training-approved man.
e.
The crane and the forklift must be operated by the training-approved

man. The operator must check the brake or other functions one time
before operation and be sure awareness of the loading restriction.
f.
The mechanic must wear cotton-padded clothes and use the airdriven tools and flame-proof lamp/ lights/ torches when performing
jobs in the fuel tank.
g.
The maintenance staff must use the oil-free tools when performing
the oxygen system maintenance jobs.
h.
The maintenance staff cannot tear off/down the unserviceable tag,

safety protection equipment and warning symbols.
Hangar and ramp safety operation

a.
Maintenance staff must follow all airport authority requirements when

working at ramp.
b.
The ramp area must be clean without anything (foreign objects).
c.
The aircraft must be grounded when performing heavy maintenance

visit.
d.
Obey the aircraft maintenance manual notice like as Warning,

Caution and Note for preventing the aircraft from damage and
maintenance staff from being hurt.
Page 4.1-2

5.
6.
4.1 GENAERAL SAFETY
e.
The vehicles must follow the lane on the apron IAW the regulation of
airport authority.
f.
Be careful of striking the protruding flight control surface, antenna,

static discharger and opened panel.
g.
Be careful of tripping up by the power cable, ground wire, air

condition tube or fuel tube.
h.
The tear-off battery from the aircraft must cover the connector with
the plastic cap from circuit shorting.
i.
The personnel must wear the earplug or the ear-flap around the
engine-running aircraft.
j.
The maintenance staff must perform the Walk around inspection to

clear all foreign objects before the aircraft arrival.
k.
It is prohibited to perform the de-fueling or refueling jobs in hangar

except approved by QC manager.
Shop safety operation

a.
All the shops must have the sufficient ventilation and illumination.
b.
The shop working area must have enough distance for going
through and keeping clean and preventing from slipping and falling.
c.
The shop must have a checklist to check and keep the machines
and tools neat and clean.
d.
The power source and switch must have the clear symbol.
e.
The operating staff of power mechanism must take care of the

environment around him/her and wear the protection accessories
like as goggles and ear plug.
f.
The instrument/avionics shop (ATEC, NDT, Calibration shop...) must

have the capability of dust disposal and controlling of the
temperature and the humidity. The maintenance staff must wear the
static-free clothes and wrist-strap when performing maintenance
jobs.
g.
The battery shop must be isolated.
Starting the ground power unit and energizing aircraft electrical system
a.
The ground power unit location must be near by the power

connector, and the exhaust is away from the aircraft.
b.
When the ground power unit is switched on, the operating staff must
watch out the control panel, the ground power unit operation, output
voltage and frequency to ensure they are under the normal
condition. If not, remove the power cable and confirm the cause
before restart.
c.
The maintenance staff must check the switch and the circuit breaker
panel of the aircraft for confirming the electrical system function is
normal before connecting to ground power unit.
Page 4.1-3

7.
8.
4.1 GENAERAL SAFETY
Radioactive ray illumination safety operation

a.
The radioactive objects like fuel-density meter, emergency selfillumination exit light and illuminated switch symbol removed from
the aircraft must process IAW the aircraft maintenance manual.
b.
The fuel-density meter maintenance must be performed by the

authorized staff or under the manufacturer supervision.
c.
The maintenance staff must be careful of the high energy radioactive

rays in the X-ray illumination process. The X-ray equipment must be
operated by the qualified man.
d.
The maintenance staff related radioactive rays operation must wear

the Film Badge or any other measurement that can count the
accumulative quantity contained of the radioactivity. The
maintenance staff assists with replacing the film must do it under the
qualified operation.
e.
X-ray operation area must be separated and marked for no-entry.
The weld safety operation

a.
It is possible to cause the fire accident when performing the weld or

cutting operation, so the operator must prepare for the fire
extinguisher on hand.
b.
As any possible to remove the movable combustibles from operation

area, and cover the unmovable ones with the metal plates or the
incombustibility materials.
c.
The gas bottles must be fixed carefully from toppling down.
d.
Be careful of the acetylene leaking in the closed environment and

causing the flammable or explosive situation to explode. The
maintenance staff cannot contact the oxygen bottle with the oily
gloves, hands or rags, and not lubricate the valve or connector.
e.
The weld jobs on the aircraft must be pre-evaluated the feasibility by

the Engineering & IT department, and be approved under the QAD
before performing it.
Page 4.1-4

4.2
A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY
4.2.1
PURPOSE
4.2 A/C ELECTROSTATIC SAFETY
To ensure all the A/C will be grounded to release static electricity and keep
A/C safe.
4.2.2
SCOPE
These requirements are applied when performing maintenance activities on
the apron and in the hangar.
4.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The maintenance personnel are responsible to set up the ground wire and
confirm the grounding is in good condition.
4.2.4
STATIC ELECTRICITY SAFETY GENERAL REQUIREMENT

1.
This requirement is to prevent from igniting the spark caused by the

electric potential difference between A/C & ground, which may damage
of A/C or injury to personnel.
2.
Before setting the ground wire, the maintenance staff should check the
condition of wire to ensure there is no broken or corrosion on the cable
and the clip is properly connected with the cable.
3.
The ground wire should be properly connected with the identified static
ground point on A/C. Connecting to any point other than identified static
ground point may cause the damage to the connecting point and lower
the efficiency of grounding.
4.
The A/C should be static electricity grounded whenever it parked in

hangar.
5.
The jack should be static electricity grounded when A/C performing the
maintenance job such as gear swing, landing gear change and etc.
6.
Before towing the A/C, the ground wire should be removed and stowed
properly.
Page 4.2-1

4.3
ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY
4.3.1
PURPOSE
4.3 ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY
To make sure the safety of the personnel and A/C when using power
equipment or hangar ground power source.
4.3.2
SCOPE
These requirements are applied when using or maintaining the power
equipment and ground power source.
4.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The operating staff is responsible for safe operating or maintaining of power
equipment or hangar ground power source.
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
DEFINITION
1.
Power equipment: Any petrol or diesel engine, electrical or pneumatic

equipment.
2.
Ground power: The power source of GPU, hangar pit.
3.
Ground air source: Compressor or hangar pit supply shop air.
POWER EQUIPMENT
1.
Before starting power equipment, making sure all the aircraft, personnel
and other facilities are clear.
2.
Use the suitable electrical power source (correct phase, frequency,

voltage), pneumatic source (correct pressure value) according to the
operation instruction. Also, check the oil quantity before using the
petrol/diesel power compressor.
3.
If any fuel/oil or pneumatic leak found, the operating staff should inform
the related department for repairing, and this equipment cannot be used
until the problem is fixed.
4.
When using external electrical or pneumatic power equipment, turn off

the power switch first before cut off the external power.
5.
Make sure the duct pressure is released before removing the connector
between the pneumatic equipment and external source.
6.
After using the equipment, the operating staff should return it back to the
certain place.
GROUND POWER UNITS

1.
CRS staff/ qualified mechanic staff is responsible for connecting the GPU
to aircraft (when VAECO maintains the aircraft).
2.
Keep the ground power unit away from fueling ports, tank ventilation
ports, drain ports and wing tip area. The GPU is forbidden to use within
7.6 meters (25 feet) away from fuel tank ventilation ports or poor
ventilation area.
3.
Ground power equipment, any possible fire electrical equipment or

connector, high temperature surface should be located at least 0.5 meter
Page 4.3-1

4.3 ELECTRICITY AND AIR POWER SAFETY
(18 inches) from ground level position when operating in hangar. It is

forbidden to fill fuel into GPU cart in hangar.
4.3.7
4.
The ground power equipment should equip with surge protector to

prevent from irregular voltage.
5.
The ground power equipment should be operated within the voltage

limitation.
6.
When the working area is polluted by fuel or other dangerous material,

the ground power equipment should be towed away or keep at its
original condition until the problem clear. Before removing ground power
unit from the dangerous area, cut off the power source first, and then
disconnect the power connector.
7.
The electric power wire should be properly preserved to prevent from

damage.
8.
Prevent the wire or terminal connector from deformation. After GPU

connecting to the aircraft, turn on the ground power first and then check
the voltage. If the voltage is correct, then the power can be supplied.
9.
Make sure the function of fire jumper is normal before power supply.
Before disconnecting the power supply connector, cut off the power
source first.
GROUND PNEUMATIC SOURCE

1.
CRS staff/ qualified mechanic staff is responsible for connecting the

Ground Pneumatic Source to aircraft (when VAECO maintains the
aircraft).
2.
Before using ground pneumatic power, turn off the upstream shut-off
valve then connect the air tubes. Make sure the pneumatic connectors
and tubes fit well before opening the valve.
3.
If any air leakage found during the operation process, stop the power
unit, inform the manager to have it fixed. Continue the operation after the
problem is cleared.
Page 4.3-2

4.4
FUEL TANK SAFETY
4.4.1
PURPOSE
4.4 FUEL TANK SAFETY
To avoid the danger while working in fuel tanks and ensure the safety of
maintenance staff as to reach the goals of personnel safety, ground safety
and flight safety
4.4.2
SCOPE
This instruction is applied when working in or near the fuel tanks.
4.4.3
4.4.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The maintenance staff is responsible for his personal safety and the work
safety in the fuel tanks. The maintenance staff shall follow the related
requirements of the manufacture to do the jobs such as refueling, fuel
draining and fuel tank maintenance jobs.
2.
The supervisor should monitor the safety of fuel tanks, maintenance

staff, and area near the fuel tanks.
3.
RTPD/BTPD on duty personnel is responsible for assisting to call

ambulance in an emergency and inform the management.
THE SAFETY OF FUEL TANKS

1.
2.
The common regulation when implementing the jobs of fuel tanks

a.
Before fuel tank open, the maintenance staff should ground the
aircraft and ensure ventilation facilities are good.
b.
The warning sign should be placed around A/C when fuel panels are
opened.
c.
The fire prevention system and emergency safe equipment should

be put at easy-to-access place.
d.
A/C should be stopped in the well-ventilated space, and the

dangerous materials should be moved to safe area.
e.
A/C, working stand and ventilation equipment should be grounded.

The maintenance staff should touch the stand with bare hand before
start working to balance static electricity.
f.
A/C power must be off and the connectors of main and APU
batteries should be disconnected from A/C.
g.
A/C aviation instrument and communication system must not be

operated such as mobile phone, walkie-talkie
h.
The high-power communication system cannot be used around the

area near A/C.
i.
The compressed air cannot be directly led into the fuel tanks.
j.
If possible, direct the tank exhaust air out of hangar.
The maintenance staff working in the fuel tanks should:

a.
Be good physical condition.
Page 4.4-1

3.
4.
b.
Be well-experienced the operation procedure.
c.
Be familiar with the method handling the healthy problems and fire
emergency.
d.
Wear the proper clothes, cotton caps and shoes while working in the
fuel tanks.
e.
Not carry the lighter, oven, watch, pager, laptop, notebook, tablet
and mobile phone into tanks.
f.
Have received the training about working in fuel tanks.
The maintenance staff must ensure that:

a.
The tank should be well-ventilated.
b.
The volatile liquid should be kept safely in the container, and the
carrying amount should be strictly limited.
c.
The light used in fuel tanks should be fire-proof, and the action of
turning on/off the light should be performed out of the fuel tanks (as
well as any instruments powered by electricity). The pneumatic tools
should be powered by compressed air.
d.
The components of A/C fuel tanks should be carefully protected. If

the tools must be taken in, they should be kept in proper container.
Supervisor should
a.
Ensure all the set-up work, cautions and warnings IAW AMM task
have been completed/ followed before the maintenance staff
entering fuel tank.
b.
Immediately inform the maintenance staff if any abnormality in the

ventilation equipment is discovered.
c.
Pay attention to the physical conditions of maintenance staff working

in fuel tanks.
d.
Pay attention to the area near fuel tanks.
e.
Pay attention to the circumstance when working area is near the

purging tanks. Following requirements should be followed as detail:
Prepare the fire extinguisher.
If the panel of the fuel tank is removed, the tank should be
covered with protector.
Remind the personnel working in the same area to take care of
their safety.
With the wind behind working area, make sure no dangerous
goods are downstream of the wind and be aware the position of
blower.
The maintenance actions that possibly fire the hazardous fumes
cannot be done at the same time within 7.6 meters (25 feet) from
the same aircraft, fuel tanks or fuel tankers.
Page 4.4-2

The radar or radio systems cannot be used or tested within the

specific distance.
5.
4.4.5
a.
Properly ground the pneumatic or electrical equipment before

operation.
b.
Not expose the bare wire.
c.
Cut off the power of related electrical ventilation equipment before

leaving. (The pneumatic equipment can be used continuously).
THE OPERATION IN CASE OF EMERGENCY OR ACCIDENT

1.
2.
4.4.6
When working near the fuel tanks which were in purge or ventilation, the
operator should:
In an emergency case:
a.
The maintenance staff escapes from the tank himself: Be aware of

his physical and mental condition while in the tank, leave the tank
right away if feel uncomfortable.
b.
The supervisor commands the maintenance staff to leave: If the

circumstance is dangerous to the maintenance staff or his condition
is unusual, the supervisor should command the maintenance staff to
leave the fuel tanks.
c.
The supervisor should call for help to save the maintenance staff in
the tank when his respond is slow.
In an accident case:
a.
Once the accident happened, the supervisor should call the medical
personnel to save the maintenance staff (call the ambulance when
necessary) and inform Manager.
b.
Verify the cause of accident and check the circumstance and air
quality before entering the tank for rescue. The rescuer should wear
the protective equipment and prevent the accident happen again.
c.
The accident reason should be noted in the related instruction and

on the checking list to prevent the accident happen again.
d.
The dangerous elements should be cleared before work re-starting.
THE NOTES ABOUT FUEL TANK MAINTENANCE:

1.
The residual fuel that cannot be drained out should be cleared after
panel open. Perform tank ventilation procedure first, choose the safest
way to clear the residual fuel and prevent to stain the surface of A/C wing
or ground. Draw out the residual fuel with hose, sponge and mop.
2.
The bleed orifice and fuel line between normal and under maintenance
tanks should be sealed with the plug and adhesive tape.
3.
The maintenance staff performing the fuel tank operation should have
received the related training such as work environment and the
hazardous characters of materials.
Page 4.4-3

4.
The supervisor should possess of sufficient information about the fuel

tanks maintenance.
5.
The equipment that may cause spark or fire cannot be used in the
hazardous area of volatile vapor.
6.
The operating staff should wear static proof clothes.
7.
During the fuel tanks operation, the operating staff should prevent from
using the electrical equipment.
8.
If the volatile vapor exists in the dangerous area, all the electric cable in
the aircraft should be de-energized.
9.
Prepare at least one portable fire extinguisher (20-B fire extinction

effectiveness, 15 LB (6.5kg) capacity) within 15,2m (50Ft) away from
working area while performing A/C fuel tank repair work.
10. If the operating staff must bring combustible liquid into the fuel tanks for
maintenance jobs, he should use the container to keep it and prevent
from the liquid spilling out.
4.4.7
THE ADDITIONAL REGULATIONS OF MAINTENANCE OF INTEGRAL

FUEL TANK
1.
The scraper used to scrape the sealant in the tanks should be metallic or
hard-wooden product. The plastic product that may cause static
electricity is not allowed to use.
2.
Only pneumatic tool is acceptable to use in fuel tanks.
3.
When applying the sealant on the surface of fuel tanks, the maintenance
staff should particularly pay attention on it to prevent from spark of fire.
Page 4.4-4

4.5
HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY
4.5.1
PURPOSE
4.5 HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY
To prevent from injury of the personnel and damage to the A/C when
performing work in the high area over 2 meters above ground.
4.5.2
SCOPE
This instruction is applied when using aerial platform, scissors lifter and highlift platform to perform the maintenance at the area that over 2 meters above
ground.
4.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The maintenance/ operating staff is responsible for performing all following
requirements.
4.5.4
HIGH AREA WORKING SAFETY REQUIREMENT

1.
Only person who has been trained and authorized can operate the lifter
IAW operation instruction.
2.
If it is necessary to use the GSE (as aerial platform or scissors lifter), the
operating staff should check to ensure that the equipment is serviceable.
3.
The operating staff should choose the proper GSE. For example, when
using the platform, the operating staff cannot increase the length of
safety belt. If the height of platform is not enough, the operating staff
should use another proper GSE to perform the maintenance.
4.
Safety accessories (safety belt, barrier) should always be used when

performing the work at high area.
5.
The maintenance staff should pay attention to the surrounding around

the A/C, especially in a strong wind condition when performing the
maintenance on the wings or platform.
6.
In case of strong wind condition, the maintenance staff can coordinate

with BTPD to perform the maintenance inside the hangar. If not, the
maintenance staff should determine if the maintenance can be continued
or not.
7.
Before the maintenance, the maintenance staff should communicate with

the supervisor of the A/C and attach DO NOT OPERATE Tag on C/B,
control lever or control switch to prevent from the dangers caused by
other personnels touching.
8.
If the vehicle should be parked near A/C for maintenance, the operating
staff should ensure the parking brake, chocks and support are properly
set to prevent injury of personnel and damage to A/C.
Page 4.5-1

4.6
OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY
4.6.1
PURPOSE
4.6 OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY
To stipulate the routine or non-routine maintenance on oxygen system/

assembly to prevent property from damage or personnel from injury.
4.6.2
SCOPE
These requirements are applied for maintaining oxygen system/ assemblies
on the A/C and in the workshop.
4.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY
Maintenance staff is responsible for follow all requirements specified below.
4.6.4
OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING REQUIREMENT

When perform maintenance task related to oxygen system, maintenance
staff should follow instruction specified in maintenance data. However, the
following requirement also be applied.
1.
The electrical equipment, high heat source, combustible materials, oil

and metal scraps must not place near the oxygen system.
2.
Wearing the gloves, clothes and tools that are contaminated with oil is
strictly prohibited. Clothes and tools shall be always kept clean and only
pure cotton gloves shall be used.
3.
The technician is prohibited to use grease to lubricate the screw.
4.
To prevent from fire or explosion, the technician should slow down

his/her action when open or close the valve of oxygen system.
5.
The valve of the oxygen system cannot be forcefully opened/closed by

the spanner, hammer or other tools. If the valve cannot be operated by
hand, it should be divided into unserviceable.
6.
Before removing or installing the oxygen bottle, the technician should

close all the shut off valve of the oxygen system and protect the tube by
the plug or cover.
7.
Follow the AMM of A/C to torque the shut off valve, and do not over
torque.
8.
The distance between oxygen tube and electrical wire is 5 centimeters (2

inches) at least.
9.
Do not connect a low pressure hose to a high pressure oxygen system.
10. Use the correct lubricant to lubricate the O-ring according to each A/C
AMM.
11. Follow the A/C AMM to do leak check with correct parts or tool. Only the
approved oxygen leak hunting liquor can be used for leaking test.
12. At least one 20-B/ 15 LB (6.8kg) portable fire extinguisher should be
provided in 15.2m (50ft) working area.
Page 4.6-1

4.6 OXYGEN SYSTEM HANDLING SAFETY
13. Before replacing chemical oxygen generator on A/C, safety pin on the
oxygen generator must be installed to prevent inadvertently fire that will
cause 260C (500F) and raise up injury to personnel.
14. If the oxygen generator were inadvertently fired, the oxygen generator
should be removed to a safe area that will not cause fire hazard.
However, if generator was fired on aircraft it should be remained on the
location and be replaced after temperature go down to operational range.
15. Oxygen must not be used to pressurize container or as blow off air or
high-pressure air on painting process.
16. Different gas is prohibited to mix in one oxygen bottle.
17. Good ventilation should be kept in working area. It is restricted to work in
the closed room during oxygen system operation.
18. The maintenance staff must avoid from touching the lubricant, flammable
goods with the tools, hands, clothes, equipment or system.
19. The oxygen bottle storage and service area must be placed under the
highest safety standard, clean and neat.
20. All the oxygen equipment must be extremely careful of processing, and
be fixed to prevent from rolling or falling. It is absolutely prohibited of
smoking and flame.
21. All the connectors surface must be absolutely clean and careful to
handle it.
22. The maintenance staff must not remove the fixed-style oxygen bottles or
perform any oxygen system related maintenance jobs unless the team
leader agreed and the attendant had well prepared for the evacuation.
Page 4.6-2

4.7 MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION
4.7
MAINTENANCE CLEANLINESS AND FOD PREVENTION
4.7.1
PURPOSE
To provide procedures for the maintenance of cleanliness of aircraft under
maintenance and FOD prevention.
4.7.2
4.7.3
SCOPE/ RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Maintenance Directors and Department Managers shall be responsible

for interpreting, disseminating and implementing FOD prevention
program in their respective department. They shall ensure all production
personnel are informed and strictly comply with FOD prevention
practices. They shall also ensure sub-contractors who have to work on/in
the vicinity of aircraft are briefed of the FOD procedures pertaining to
such work. FOD procedures shall also be reviewed regularly to ensure
compliance is possible and practical and for improvements
2.
All employees shall be responsible to comply with the company FOD

prevention practices
DEFINITION
1.
A Foreign Object is defined as a substance or article alien to the aircraft

that has been allowed to invade it. Foreign Object in the immediate area
of or in area from which migration is possible, e.g. through tooling holes,
bend relief cut-outs, drain hole, etc., and which could cause a system or
component malfunction or deterioration is classified critical.
2.
Foreign Object Damage (FOD) is any damage attributed to a foreign

object which can be expressed in physical or economic (monetary) terms
which may or may not degrade aircraft safety and or performance
characteristics.
3.
Types of FOD broadly include but not limited to the following:

a.
Safety wire
b.
Nuts, bolts and washers
c.
Rivets and cotter pins
d.
Airframe fittings and fasteners
e.
Tools
f.
Rags, paper
g.
Hats, gloves and headsets
h.
Bags
i.
Rubber plugs
j.
Ground safety streamers
k.
Rocks/gravel
l.
Water
m. Erosion and contamination products

Page 4.7-1

4.7.4
SCOPE OF FOD PREVENTION MEASURES

The areas which are addressed in this SOP include:
1.
Aircraft Operations
2.
Work Practices
3.
Housekeeping
4.
Inspection
5.
Surveillance
6.
Tools Control
7.
Investigation
8.
Training
4.7.5
AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS
4.7.5.1
Flight line aircraft
4.7.5.2
1.
All serviced aircraft shall have protective covers installed over pitot, static
tubes/ ports, engine inlets/ intakes, exhausts, bleed valve ports after
the overnight check as required by customer and applicable
maintenance data.
2.
FOD prevention inspections shall be conducted before and after every

flight and/ or engine run-up. These inspections shall include but are not
limited to:
a.
Compressor inlet area
b.
Engine intake area for security of joints or inlet hardware to confirm

that gaps or openings through which debris can enter the engine do
not exist
c.
Tools and general hardware accountability check
3.
Engine ground run personnel shall ensure engine thrust is not directed
towards nearby aircraft or buildings during engine ground run.
4.
If engine run is to be conducted after a heavy downpour, engine ground

run shall not be conducted in the vicinity of water puddles so as to avoid
ingestion or large volumes of water.
Personnel precautions near operating engines

1.
All staff involved in engine run shall not take articles/ personal objects
near the intake ducts of operating engines.
2.
Anyone who must approach within a 10m (30 ft) radius of operating
engines must first remove items such as insignia pins and security
badges, and secure them in pockets that can be fastened with Velcro
tape or in pouches/ zipper pockets.
3.
Ground maintenance personnel shall use only authorized headset cords

for intercommunication with the cockpit in order to prevent slack being
draw into the engine inlet/ intake when walking around the aircraft.
Page 4.7-2

4.7.6
WORK PRACTICES
1.
Maintenance/ manufacturing tasks shall be planned and sequenced in a

manner that precludes foreign object entrapment and product
contamination. Documents shall contain necessary processes and
procedures for controlling contamination and debris during fabrication
and assembly operations.
2.
Boxes or special trays shall be used for small items, such as hand drills,
hardware, which are to be used in aircraft. This tray shall be used to
transport tools to and from the tool crib/ shadow board and act as
temporary storage container for removed hardware. The removed
hardware shall be disposed of properly when the tray and tools are
returned to the tool crib/ shadow board.
3.
Maintenance personnel shall be extra vigilant whenever work is

performed in, around, or in front of intakes, integral fuel tanks and flight
deck areas. Extreme caution shall be used to prevent the introduction of
foreign objects.
4.
Whenever work is performed in the flight deck, all trades involved shall
co-ordinate jobs to preclude the introduction of foreign objects during the
performance of work and to effect thorough cleaning of the flight deck
when work is completed.
5.
Inlet and exhaust covers and bleed valve port covers shall be installed
during aircraft maintenance and servicing if required by manufacturer or
customer.
6.
All engines shall be fitted with intake blanks or protective coverings when
installed on engine stand.
7.
All open fuel, hydraulic and air pipelines and disconnected electrical
terminals shall be blanked using appropriate caps and plugs.
8.
After fluid and pneumatic system lines and tubing are cut and deburred,
the system fluid shall be purged and ends of lines capped.
9.
Whenever large modifications, skin repairs, spar changes, etc., involving

the production of large quantities of swarf, redundant parts and sealant
are performed, it shall be removed as much as possible as it is produced
and a systematic cleaning procedure is implemented. All corrosion
control measures shall be implemented as required.
10. After the completion of each task, the area in the work vicinity shall be
cleaned of all swarf and debris. The work area shall be cleaned at the
end of each work day.
4.7.7
FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR HANGAR

1.
During work process

a.
Fluid leaks: The maintenance staffs shall use the suitable container
to collect the fluid. In case the fluid is spilled to floor, it should be
absorbed by sand/sawdustand clean up immediately to avoid the
fluid from causing any possible damage to the aircraft or the
personnel in that area.
Page 4.7-3

b.
2.
3.
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.10
Metal chip or debris: During the maintenance activities, metal chips

or debris shall be collected using proper equipment. Suitable plate or
cover shall be provided to prevent debris or tool from dropping.
After work cleaning

a.
All maintenance staffs are requested, after the work is

accomplished, to clean the ground, the racks, and work benches and
the work area of the aircraft to remove any debris, scrapped
hardware, rags, etc.
b.
Also the maintenance staffs shall check the tools and equipment
with respect the task had been removed from the working area to
ensure there is nothing left when all work are accomplished. Should
there be any tool/equipment missing after check, the supervisor shall
be informed to perform the searching of the nearby area thoroughly
to prevent any consequential damage to the aircraft or aircraft
system.
Contract Agency Cleaning: In order to remove the oil/grease resident

and other objects that might cause the unnecessary contamination, the
respective BMC shall assign the contract agency use cleaning machine
to clean up the hangar floor when hangar area do not have aircraft
maintenance activity.
FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR VAECO APRON

1.
Other than the requirement to the maintenance staff to pick up any of the
foreign object from ground, when weather condition is allowable, the
RTPD/BTPD will inform Sanitation team to perform an FOD check to
clear FOD in the apron areas of VAECO.
2.
During the FOD check, assigned personnel of relevant center shall walk
around the apron and pick up any foreign object that might cause the
damage to the aircraft that are parking, towing or performing
maintenance in the apron area.
FOD PREVENTIVE PROGRAM FOR RAMP MAINTENANCE

1.
The FOD checks at the ramp area are performed by the maintenance
staff before the aircraft arrived. The maintenance staffs shall walk around
the parking area prior to the aircraft taxiing/pushing in and pick up all
foreign objects that might cause the damage to the aircraft/ engine.
2.
Special caution shall be taken for the path of the engines and the wheel
where risk of damage is higher than other area.
INSPECTION
1.
All extraneous material shall be inspected for and removed during

assembly operations. Upon completion of each major assembly, conduct
a foreign object inspection and remove debris.
2.
If any hardware is lost during the performance of maintenance, a

systematic and thorough search shall be conducted for the lost.
Page 4.7-4

3.
Production tooling (fixtures, handling equipment, etc.) shall be inspected

to ensure it is clean, undamaged and free of foreign material prior to
installation and build-up of components and assemblies. The same shall
apply to work stands, special test equipment, etc. which must be placed
on and around production area to accomplish specific work tasks.
4.
Inspection of Intakes/ Engines
5.
4.7.11
4.7.12
a.
The inlet area shall be inspected for security of joints of inlet

hardware to determine that gaps or openings do not exist through
which debris can enter the engine. The necessary repairs shall be
initiated and adjacent areas where debris might congregate cleaned
if any anomaly is detected.
b.
All aircraft shall be thoroughly inspected in the vicinity of the engine

inlet and in locations in which loose objects could conceivably
constitute an FOD hazard. Emphasis shall be placed on ensuring the
security of latches, twist-lock fasteners, snap rings, cotter keys
rivets, etc. The inspection shall include blow-in doors, ducting and
seals for security and evidence of deterioration.
c.
When intake maintenance is completed, the intake shall be cleaned

(vacuumed thoroughly if necessary).
d.
When physical entry is required to inspect the intake areas of

engines, maintenance staff should remove all loose objects, badges,
jewelry etc., from clothing. Wearing of pocket-less coverall (bunny
suit) or equivalent by maintenance staff is recommended.
Inspection of aircraft structures

a.
Components such as flight control surfaces, wings tail units and

boxed-in structures shall be inspected progressively for cleanness.
b.
A foreign object inspection of all closed areas as well as FOD

entrapment compartments and migratory routes shall be conducted
prior to final sealing.
SURVEILLANCE
1.
Ramps and fuelling areas shall be monitored at all times for foreign
objects. During towing or vehicle operations on these surfaces,
personnel shall continuously be on the alert for foreign objects. All
foreign objects shall be removed and placed in a receptacle.
2.
FOD hazards such as deteriorating or damaged paving in aircraft parking

areas shall be reported to the building maintenance department for
immediate repair.
INVESTIGATION
1.
All FOD incidents shall be reported to QAD immediately for investigation.

All activities being performed on the damaged part, equipment or aircraft
shall cease pending the investigation, except activities necessary to
ensure its safety, and/or safety of personnel.
2.
The investigation shall conduct to:
Page 4.7-5

4.7.13
a.
Determine cause(s), and
b.
Recommend disposition of damage(s) and measures to prevent

occurrence.
3.
Investigation findings and recommendations shall be written in Report of

Maintenance Error Investigation (VAECO Form 2055) and submitted to
QA Director. QAD shall maintain close monitoring of FOD incident and
trends.
4.
Director of BMC, RMC shall be informed of the findings and

recommendations for follow- up actions, if necessary.
5.
Case studies of FOD incidents shall be disseminated though Safety &

Quality Notes.
TRAINING
1.
All new employees and trainees shall be briefed on the FOD prevention
practices before they start work in department. This shall be done as part
of their induction program.
2.
Subcontractors shall be briefed on FOD control and safety measures by

the work requestor before they are allowed to work on or in the vicinity of
aircraft.
3.
The contents of the briefing shall at least include the following:

a.
Definition and classes of FOD;
b.
Causes of FOD arising from contractual work;
c.
Hazards of FOD to people and aircraft;
d.
General FOD prevention and control concepts;
e.
Mandatory FOD prevention and control measures.
Page 4.7-6

4.8
SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
4.8.1
PURPOSE
4.8 SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
To stipulate the safety requirements for aircraft in hangar

4.8.2
SCOPE
4.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
Hangaring of aircraft shall be supervised by an assigned supervisor and
maintenance staff. The person in-charge shall be thoroughly familiar with the
requirement below.
4.8.4
4.8.5
SAFETY REQUIREMENT FOR HANGARING THE A/C

1.
All personnel concerned with fuelling to and refueling from aircraft shall
clearly understand their responsibilities in preventing a fire risk and also
to realize that only strict co-operation between various personnel
servicing an aircraft will ensure safely from aviation fuel fires and
explosions
2.
Aircraft may be taken into hangars for inspection, modification or other

servicing operations if rectification does not affect the fuel drained from
their tanks. In the case of aircraft fuelled with AVGAS, and if the work
renders the aircraft immobile, the aircraft fuel system must first be
drained.
3.
Aircraft rendered immobile and left in hangars, whether the fuel system is
drained or not, are to be positioned as far away as practicable possible
to enable adjacent aircraft to be moved out of the hangar during
emergency.
4.
To minimize the risk of fuel vapor concentration, doors of storage

hangars are to be opened for a ventilation period of at least 15 minutes
during working days.
5.
Aircraft is to be inspected for fuel leaks before taken in to hangars. When

leaks in the fuel system are found, the fuel tanks and pipes are to be
drained before placing the aircraft in a hangar. The requirement for
draining aircraft having integral fuel tanks before being placed in hangar
is left to the discretion of the BMC Director, with risk assessment carried
out.
6.
Aircraft is not to be refueled or defueled in hangars.
SAFETY FOR FUELLED AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR

1.
Normally, fuelled aircraft will only be hangared for emergency

maintenance, items which cannot be performed outside or a protective
measure against severe weather. If possible, fuelled aircraft should be
isolated in the hangar which contains no other aircraft. A risk assessment
is to be carried out.
2.
Before moving aircraft into the hangar, the fuel tanks must be inert and
rendered safe.
Page 4.8-1

4.8.6
4.8 SAFETY FOR AIRCRAFT IN HANGAR
3.
The aircraft shall be positioned in the hangar to permit rapid evacuation,

if required.
4.
Hangar doors shall be kept open.
5.
An tow-bar shall be attached to aircraft.
6.
Signs shall be posted to inform everyone that the aircraft is fuelled.
FIRE PREVENTION
1.
Aircraft shall be earthed to an approved static ground point.
2.
Adequate fire extinguisher shall be positioned immediately next to the

aircraft.
3.
Oily wastes or replenishment bowers are not to be kept in hangars

containing aircraft.
4.
All aircraft fluids (engine oil, hydraulic oil, etc.) and commercial fluids
must be clearly labeled, segregated and stored in flameproof cabinets.
5.
Only approved types of inspection lamps in good order and efficiently

earthed are to be used in hangars containing aircraft.
6.
Smoking is not permitted in all hangars.
7.
The automatic spring loaded lighting device must not use within hangar.
Page 4.8-2

4.9 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES
4.9
HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL OF WASTES
4.9.1
PURPOSE
To define the requirements for waste handling, storage and disposal.
4.9.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies to handle all waste dumped from VAECO. Waste
includes general waste, industrial waste and toxic industrial waste.
4.9.3
4.9.4
RESPONSIBILITY:
1.
The Safety Division shall be responsible for monitoring the handling of

waste and ensuring that the contracted waste disposer is approved by
relevant authority.
2.
Safety Action Group (SAG) shall be responsible to ensure proper

implementation of the waste handling system in accordance with this
procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
All waste generated in VAECO are classified as:

a.
Toxic industrial Waste
b.
Industrial Waste
c.
General Waste
d.
Class 3 AGS spares
Toxic industrial Waste

a.
All toxic industrial wastes generated shall be disposed in accordance

with Toxic industrial Waste Regulations.
b.
Contractor to collect the toxic industrial waste must be verified to

possess a valid toxic industrial waste collectors license.
c.
The common Toxic industrial wastes generated in VAECO include:

Waste Paint Stripping sludge
Waste Solvent
Waste Oil and Lubricant from ground Support Equipment (GSE)
maintenance
Waste Sealant Empty Tins/ Carboys (solvent/paint/sealant/ resin
containers)
Empty Oil Drums (oil/lubricant containers)
Rags containing oil, solvent, paint stripper: these materials will be
collected in the designated frame-proof bins, which are placed in
designated areas in the hangars.
Removed sealant bits, paper containers, spent absorbent
material: these materials may be put in the same container as the
one containing soiled rags.
Page 4.9-1

Waste fuel and oil from aircraft

Exhausted X-ray processing chemicals
Composite materials (cured and uncured)
Filter elements exposed to toxic materials
Used lead acid and nickel cadmium batteries
Aircraft fuel tank foam
d.
Exhausted X-ray film processing chemicals; namely fixer and

developer can be stored in NDT Shop. They are to be kept in labeled
containers which must be capped and placed within containment.
e.
If the quantity of waste exceeds the prescribed quantities for

transportation as specified in the third column of the schedule to the
Toxic Industrial Waste Regulations, the licensed waste collector will
generate a consignment form.
f.
Details in consignment form to include:

Type of hazardous wastes
Quantity in drums
Date to be collected
g.
The respective department shall keep and maintain consignment

forms and records.
h.
Waste/ used oil drained from aircraft and maintenance equipment

will be collected in empty drums & stored in the hazardous waste
storage facility (commonly known as waste POL Point).
i.
Temporary POL (Petrol, Oil, Lubricant) point is permitted for each

hangar provide that:
Max 1 drum (200 liters) for each type
Fire extinguisher is available
Spillage absorbent material is available
Containers are to be labeled and closed
Send to waste POL point when full.
j.
Each work area shall have 2 metal containers. One will be labeled
as Used rags and the other as POL/ chemical cans. The Used
rags can will be used for rags stained with toxic chemicals as well
as sealant bits, seals coated with chemicals, paper cups used to
contain paint, spent absorbent material and cardboard used to hold
sealant.
k.
All toxic industrial waste must be labeled properly when they are
stored.
l.
The respective departments person-in-charge shall ensure that

there is no mixing spillage of toxic industrial waste during handling
and transportation to the hazardous waste storage facility.
Page 4.9-2

m. The respective departments person-in-charge shall ensure that all

containers used (including temporary basis) to contain toxic
industrial waste are properly closed and labeled before
transportation and storage.
n.
The labeling must include the name (contents) of substance,

department, person-in-charge and date of storage.
o.
The respective departments person-in-charge shall consistently

update the waste register to indicate the quantity brought in and the
balance which is the quantity in the store. The register is also be
updated when the vendor takes away the waste.
Type and quantity of toxic waste generated
The manner of disposal
The date and quantity supplied or sold to a toxic industrial waste
collector
The name and address of the toxic industrial waste collector
The quantity of wastes held in stock
p.
POL & chemicals are segregated as follows

Clean fuel: Clean fuel shall be stored in drums and sent to waste
POL point for storage. If it is stored in bowser, the bowser shall
be parked in the sheltered area next to the diesel tank at the
plant maintenance area.
Mixed oil: Mixed oil shall be stored in drums and kept at the
waste POL point. Mixed oil will include waste hydraulic and
engine oil, waste fuel and waste lubricating oil.
Solvent, MIBK (Methyl, Isobutyl, Kentone) & other cleaning
chemicals: Solvent, MIBK & other cleaning chemicals can be
disposed in the same drum. They will be stored at the waste POL
point. MIBK is used as a chemical intermediate, a solvent for
manufacturing paints, rubbers, pharmaceuticals, other chemicals,
and industrial cleaners)
Composite waste: There are 2 types of composite waste: Cured
and uncured. Both of them shall be stored in separate containers
at the hazardous waste storage area outside the composite shop.
They are to be collected by toxic waste vendor for disposal.
Large empty POL/chemical containers: Large empty POL/
chemical containers like drums and carboys will be closed and
stored at the waste POL shed.
Small empty POL/chemical containers:
Small empty
POL/chemical containers shall be disposed in a 200-litre drum.
The drum will be painted red and marked as POL/ chemical
cans. The drum will be closed and stored at the waste POL shed
Page 4.9-3

Contaminated rags: Contaminated rags shall be disposed in a

200-litre drum. The drum will be painted red and labeled as used
rags. The drum will be closed and stored at the waste POL shed
Filter elements: Filter elements may be toxic of the particles they
filter and collected is toxic. They shall be sealed in a plastic bag
and stored in the waste POL shed
Used lead acid and nickel cadmium batteries: The batteries shall
be labeled and stored in a containment tray in the waste POL
shed.
Note: All containers (drums, carboy, plastic bags, and tray
batteries) shall be properly labeled
q.
3.
Absorbent material shall be available at the waste POL points
Industrial Waste
a.
The common industrial waste are as follows:

Sheet metal waste
Waste timber and saw dust
Aluminum, stainless steel tubes
4.
b.
Aluminum/ stainless sheet metal & tubes will be collected by scrap

metal dealers
c.
Waste timber & clean sawdust will be collected & disposed with
general waste provided they have not been used as chemical
absorbent.
General waste
a.
General waste includes:

Office paper and shredded waste
Packaging waste: cardboard, polystyrene, timber and plywood
Domestic waste: food waste from canteen operations
5.
b.
All general waste generated shall be collected into bulk bins &
disposed by a general waste collector. Food waste will be disposed
in separate bins.
c.
No waste shall be placed within the companys boundary in such a

way that can affect the safety and health of the employees.
Class 3 AGS Spares

a.
Class 3 AGS Spares wastes include:

Used nuts, bolts and washer
Used screws, nuts and washer
Used fasteners
Used rivets and cotter pins
Page 4.9-4

Cut metal seal

Worn bearing
Safety wires, snap rings, etc.
Airframe fittings and fasteners
Worn out tools, drill bits, etc...
Any class 3 aircraft general spares that were removed from
aircraft undergoing servicing in hangar and are deemed not
suitable for reused.
6.
Each work area or bay shall have quantity one metal container (at least
100 dm3) with a receptacles cover and lock. It will be labeled as Class 3
AGS Spares- Non Reusable. The metal containers will be placed in
strategic location in the aircraft bay for collection of used bolts, used
screws, used rivets, used fasteners, other metallic debris, etc. removed
from the aircraft in the process of carrying out maintenance.
a.
The key to the metal containers or receptacle cover shall be with the
Engineer- in charge till the aircraft is ready for output.
b.
Containers shall not be overflowing.
c.
The metal container shall then be routed to scrap metal dealers for
disposal.
Page 4.9-5

PART 5. A/C MAINT. CONTROL PROC.
PART 5
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
CONTROL PROCEDURES
Page 5-1

5.1 AIRCRAFT CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION
5.1
CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION
5.1.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the customer requirements as specified in the contract between
VAECO and customer are followed.
5.1.2
SCOPE
1.
5.1.3
This procedure is applied for deploying and implementing the customer

order/ request in VAECO.
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of BDD is responsible to explain and develop the contract that

had been signed with Customers to the appropriate Department/ Center.
2.
Director of QAD is responsible to summarize the procedures of customer

and incorporate into the Quality Notice (QN) if necessary.
3.
Director of EGD, MCC, RMC, BMC. LGD, CMC and CIMC are
responsible to implement the customer requirements as specified in the
contract and QN (if any).
4.
Directors of HRD is responsible to implement the training of customers

procedures.
5.
Director of TC is responsible to nominate and control in-house

instructors.
5.1.4
PROCEDURE
5.1.4.1
Receiving and deploying the customers contract/ order

1.
BDD receives all customers work request and related documents and
send Service Order (VAECO Form 1007) to:
a.
EGD all A/C work package, requests for Engine/ landing gear
replacement, AD/ SB implementation and other complex work that
require Engineering Order (EO). The EGD determines the
requirement of T&E, part and materials (preload), prepare work
packages (if required), issue Work Order and send to MCC.
b.
MCC all A/C maintenance work that normally be performed at line

station such as simple tasks or routine tasks/ line checks
c.
LGD all component maintenance work. The LDG bases on the

location of the component and capability of related CMC, BMC or
CIMC to issue Maintenance/ Repair Request and send to
appropriate maintenance center.
2.
MCC bases on the availability of T&E, Part and materials and manpower
(for the work under its control) to assign the work to appropriate center
for implementation.
3.
Training requirements of customers are sent to HRD from BDD or QAD.

HRD shall contact related maintenance centers for the list of
maintenance staff and TC for nominated in-house instructors who will
take part in the training. Candidate for the in-house instructors should
Page 5.1-1

5.1 AIRCRAFT CONTRACT MAINTENANCE IMPLEMENTATION
already be approved as instructor of VAECO. Training process is

performed in accordance with paragraph 13.5.1.(2) to (8) of chapter 13,
VAECO Quality Manual.
4.
5.1.4.2
5.1.4.3
5.1.4.4
QAD may prepare a QN which contains operation procedures IAW the

contract and customers procedures as specified in SOP 10.15.
Performing the A/C maintenance at BMC

1.
Upon receiving the WO and WP from MCC, the BMC performs the
maintenance IAW SOP 6.3 or SOP 12.15 based on type of work.
2.
The progress status of WP performance is uploaded on Technical

Reports menu of VAECO website.
3.
The BMC shall report to BDD any arising issue that is out of the contract
or affects to the maintenance schedule.
Performing the A/C maintenance at RMC

1.
The RMC performs the maintenance IAW SOP 6.2 or SOP 6.3 or SOP
12.15 based on type of work.
2.
The RMC shall report to MCC any arising issue that are out of the
contract with the Customer. The MCC will report to BDD for contacting
Customer and follow the Customer instruction/ direction.
Performing the A/C component maintenance at CMC, BMC and CIMC

1.
Upon receiving the Maintenance/ Repair Request from LGD, the affected
maintenance center performs the requested order IAW SOP Part 7.
2.
The affected maintenance center reports to LGD and BDD any arising
issue that are out of the contract with the Customer and follow the
Customer instruction/ direction.
Page 5.1-2

5.2 AIRCRAFT WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE AND MANAGEMENT
5.2
AIRCRAFT WORK ORDER ISSUANCE AND CONTROL
5.2.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the Work Order (WO) is issued and managed in accordance with
the customers maintenance requirements.
5.2.2
5.2.3
SCOPE
1.
Applicable Department/ Center: EGD, MCC, RMC, BMC, CIMC.
2.
Applicable Object: The aircraft maintained IAW customers requirement.
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
Director of EGD is responsible to issue the WO for the following work in

compliance with customer maintenance requirements:
a.
A/C maintenance work from A check or equivalent;
b.
Engine/ landing gear replacement;
c.
AD/ SB implementation;
d.
Other complex work that requires an EO to implement;
Director of MCC is responsible for:

a.
Deploying the WO issued by EGD to appropriate Maintenance

centers;
b.
Issuing WO for line checks and OOP maintenance requirements with

the interval less than A check or equivalent; ADD rectification, defect
trouble-shooting and deploying to appropriate Maintenance
centers.
3.
Director of CIMC is responsible for issuing WO to perform rectification of

cabin interior/ IFE defects.
4.
Maintenance centers are responsible for issuing WO to perform Nonroutine work, defect rectification;
5.2.4
PROCEDURE
5.2.4.1
WORK ORDER ISSUANCE

1.
EGD receives the Service Order or contract implementation request from

BDD for the work specified in item 5.2.3.1 and issues WO to MCC for
deploying. The EGD shall confirm the availability of part/ materials and
tools/ equipment and upload the WO together with WP/ EO/ SRO to
Work Order Information menu on homepage of VAECO web.
2.
MCC receives the Service Order or contract implementation request from

BDD for all A/C maintenance work that normally be performed at line
station (such as simple tasks or routine tasks/ line checks) then issues
WO to appropriate maintenance center for performance.
3.
MCC also receives defect information of VNA A/C from BTPD/ RTPD
The EGD shall confirm the availability of part/ materials and tools/
equipment and upload the WO together with WP/ EO/ SRO to Work
Page 5.2-1

Order Information menu on homepage of VAECO website. issues WO

to appropriate center for ADD rectification, defect trouble-shooting
4.
The Service Order number or work request number of customer shall be

specified in the WO and EO (if any).
5.
MCC should assign appropriate maintenance center for implementing

the work. Normally, the appropriate maintenance center shall be decided
by MCC based on the following principles:
6.
5.2.4.2
5.2.5
a.
Capability of maintenance center,
b.
The place where aircraft will be maintained,
c.
Type of maintenance work.
CIMC based on the cabin interior/ IFE defect status, issues WO to carry
out rectification.
WORK ORDER CONTROL

1.
WO is created and controlled by using AMASIS. After a WO is

accomplished the respective BTPD/ RTPD shall enter the completion
information in AMASIS to close that work. If there is any raising problem
or the WO could not be performed the BTPD/ RTPD shall report to MCC.
2.
EGD shall control every WO that is issued by EGD and in open status
in AMASIS to ensure that all WOs are performed on schedule. If a WO is
due but not closed on AMASIS the EGD staff shall inform to MCC for
checking and solving.
3.
MCC shall control every WO that is issued by MCC and in open status
in AMASIS to ensure that all WOs are performed on schedule.
ARCHIVES
The completed WO and related maintenance record are kept at Tech record
section of EGD for at least two years.
Page 5.2-2

5.3
WORK PACK PREPARATION AND REVIEW
5.3.1
PURPOSE
To prepare required tool/ equipment, material and related maintenance data
for the maintenance work as specified in the WP.
5.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for preparation and review of the WP prior to
conducting the maintenance.
5.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of EGD is responsible to establish the WP for VNA, receive WP

from BDD for other customers and ensure that job cards, worksheets,
preload requirement and related documents are adequate and satisfied.
2.
Director of LGD is responsible to prepare all required parts, material

specified in the preload requirement.
3.
Director of CMC is responsible to prepare all required tools, equipment

specified in the preload requirement.
4.
Director of MCC is responsible to adjust the schedule of WP

performance within the deadline and assign appropriate maintenance
center for implementation of the WP..
5.3.4
PROCEDURE
5.3.4.1
Work pack preparation

1.
EGD shall establish the WP IAW current AMS and issue lists of required
parts/materials, tools/ equipment for the whole WP for VNA. For
customer other than VNA, the WP shall be provided by the customer.
2.
EGD shall check the WP right after receiving from customer to ensure
that job cards, worksheets and related documents are adequate and
satisfied. Any discrepancies in the Work Pack (including related
documents) should be reported to BDD to clarify with Customer.
3.
EGD transfer WO and the WP to MCC and preload requirements to LGD

and appropriate CMC in electronic or hard copy format at least 10 days
before Phase check, 13 days before A check or equivalence and 30
days before C check or equivalence.
4.
[deleted].
5.
The WP for VNA should include but not limited to the following:
a.
WP content (VAECO Form 1004);
b.
Job cards/OOP job cards index (including all standard maintenance

requirements of schedule maintenance and OOP requirements as
defined in the AMS);
c.
List of additional work and List of engineering requests (if any,

including all EOs, SROs and all other requirements need to be
performed);
Page 5.3-1

d.
Job cards;
e.
Preloads requirements;
f.
Other related documents.
6.
MCC may evaluate opening OPM, ADD and issue WO to put in the WP
for performance. Any work sent to maintenance center to perform
together with the work pack after the time specified in 5.3.4.1(7) below
shall be deployed as individual WO. The respective TPD will determine
to add those work to WP or let those be recorded separately in the
Technical Log page.
7.
MCC shall send WO and WP (in format of electronic or hard-copy) to

appropriate BTPD/ RTPD and the supplemental list of required
parts/materials to LGD and the supplemental list of required tools/
equipment to related CMC for preparation:
8.
5.3.4.2
a.
07 days before Phase check,
b.
10 days before A check or equivalence,
c.
21 days before C check or equivalence.
If any maintenance work (job cards, worksheets/ EO) need add to or

withdraw from the WP before the maintenance visit, the EGD should
send to MCC to evaluate, link with the WP (AMASIS declaration for VNA
A/C) and fill in Last minute items list (VAECO Form 1006) then transfer
to the assigned maintenance center as part of the WP.
Work pack review

1.
Upon receiving WP from MCC the assigned MC shall review all tasks in
the WP including added OOP tasks. If the work cannot be carried out
due to an unforeseen problem, relevant maintenance center shall
immediately inform MCC for adjusting the schedule or reporting to BDD
for further action..
2.
The BTPD/ RTPD shall assess all job cards/ worksheets to determine
any special requirement tasks such as: critical tasks, duplicate inspection
required tasks, required inspection items etc. and confirm that the job
cards/ worksheets are marked with Critical, DII, RII accordingly. If
the Customer does not mark for DII work the maintenance staff shall
follow customer policy/ procedure.
3.
Additional requirement:
a.
If the WP comes in electronic format, the data is to be first saved into

the computer for backup purpose;
b.
If the WP comes in paper format, it is scanned and save into the

computer;
c.
The production planner shall coordinate with authorized staff and

technical service staff to evaluate the job contents and work
procedures, which are stated in customers job cards and prepare all
drawings and/ or references called for the work.
Page 5.3-2

5.3.4.3
d.
The technical service staff shall verify

tool/equipment, material for special work.
the
required
skill,
e.
Production planner shall prepare the required tool/equipment,

material, man power and confirm with related shop for proper
capability if there is any job transfer required.
4.
The assigned BTPD/RTPD shall summary the WP issues required to be

discussed/ confirmed and send to related department/ center at least 2
working days before the pre-input meeting.
5.
LGD and CMC shall review the issues. One day before the pre-input
meeting, LGD and CMC shall notify to respective maintenance center
and MCC the status of the concerned issues. For A check and Phase
check below A12, if all issues are solved the pre-input meeting need not
be organized.
Pre-input meeting
1.
The assigned maintenance center shall determine the attendance and

time (conform to requirement of the customer) to perform the pre-input
meeting.
2.
The assigned maintenance center will normally organize a pre-input

Meeting for C check at least 5 days and for A check/ Phase check (if
required) at least 3 days prior to estimated input date. The meeting
attendance may include Customers representative, BDD staff, aircraft
Manager (Foreman), Supervisors, MCC Planner, Supply staffs and
Quality Control personnel.
3.
The availability/ satisfaction of the required part/ materials (that is not

available in VAECO store at the confirmation time) are only accepted if
the intended receiving date showing that there is enough time to
complete the related work as schedule.
4.
The input meeting will review the work scope, the flowchart, the tooling
and materials requirements, manpower assignment and other relevant
issues
5.
a.
Summary Tally Sheet against the Task Cards for discrepancies,
b.
Ensure the documents are of correct effectivity,
c.
Materials requirements called out in the task cards,
d.
Tool/Equipment called out in the task cards,
e.
Engineering support,
f.
Flowchart of the major activities,
g.
Determine the individual task that requires a formation of a nonrecurring task team for the review of new / critical task/RII task.
In the pre-input meeting, all maintenance works that could not be

performed due to lack of parts/ materials and/or tools/ equipment shall be
withdrawn from the WP.
Page 5.3-3

5.3.5
6.
MCC shall update on AMASIS and control the maintenance works that
are withdrawn from the WP with the due date less than next A check or
Phase check and deploy to implement at suitable time. Any
maintenance work withdrawn from WP other than those controlled by
MCC shall be transferred back to EGD for control.
7.
The Production Planner shall prepare all maintenance data for the
routine work (print-out and attach to the respective job cards, worksheet).
ARCHIVES
1.
The pre-input meeting minutes are kept at BDD at least 24 months since
the WP completion.
2.
The copy of pre-input meeting minutes are kept at respective

maintenance center at least 3 months since the WP completion.
Page 5.3-4

5.4 CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS AND DOC. DURING MAINT. PROGRESS
5.4
CONTROL OF WORK PROCESS

MAINTENANCE PROGRESS
5.4.1
PURPOSE
AND
DOCUMENT
DURING
This procedure is promulgated to ensure:
5.4.2
1.
All aircraft related work tasks shall be reviewed, approved and issued as
appropriate so that all work carried out on the aircraft are valid and
current, and
2.
Proper control of aircraft work and maintenance documents (Job cards,

Worksheets, and Non Routine Cards) for accountability and traceability.
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling of work processes and maintenance
documents during base maintenance.
5.4.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
BDD staff is responsible to cooperate with customer to handle additional

task and non-routine work arisen during maintenance process.
2.
Maintenance staff is responsible for the completion of the work he

performs.
3.
Production planner is responsible to maintain maintenance documents to

be valid and current to the work carried out on the aircraft.
5.4.4
PROCEDURE
5.4.4.1
Procedure for generation of work document

1.
After reviewing the WP and all NRC raised after preliminary inspection,
the Production Planner in charge shall establish NRC list (VAECO Form
6003).
2.
Any job card, worksheet withdrawn from WP shall be recorded in List of

acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013) with concurrence of the
customer and in compliance with customer operation procedure before
the aircraft is returned to service.
3.
Additional maintenance work required by customer during maintenance

shall be listed in Customer Form or Additional Tasks List (VAECO Form
6020) Production Planner shall issue Non-routine Work/ Workpack
Change Request (VAECO Form 6006) and send it together with
additional task list to BDD. For the work that is not included in the
contract, the BDD shall sign and submit to customer for approval. The
BDD shall notify to the related maintenance center and MCC for
performance.. If job cards/ worksheets are not provided for the additional
maintenance work, such work shall be transferred to NRC by production
planner.
4.
The Production Planner shall validate all maintenance documents (job

cards, worksheets, NRC, NRCC, JCAS) by appending stamp on the
upper right corner of the first page of those documents.
Issue: 02, Revision: 05 Date: 25 APR 2013
Page 5.4-1

5.
5.4.4.2
5.4.4.3
5.4.4.4
If any maintenance document is declared lost, The Production planner

must be informed for the issuing of a duplicate copy. Any duplicate copy
issued to replace the original job card must be approved by the
Production planner and stamped Duplicate copy. The mechanic and
authorized staff who had worked and inspected the job shall sign and
stamp on the duplicated job card or NRC after verifying that the job has
been properly performed.
Customer Work instructions and Furnished Worksheets

1.
All customer work instructions and documents released for compliance

on aircraft/parts are checked by the production planner for completeness
of the work scope and specification, and availability of referenced work
documents.
2.
All released Job cards and worksheets must be properly indexed

according to the customer furnished index sheets.
Master Job card/ Worksheet index and NRC list

1.
When the customer furnished index sheets is not provided by customer,

before the maintenance visit the production planner should prepare the
Master Job cards/Worksheets index, NRC list, other related forms and
attachment, and then send this package to the Dock control room one
day before the work start.
2.
The Master Job cards/Worksheets Index must be available at the aircraft

work document trolley/ rack and not to be removed from its designated
location.
3.
Production planner shall gather completed maintenance documents (Job

cards/worksheets and NRCs) that are duly signed and checked by
authorized staff, from the designated rack together with Master Job card/
Worksheet Index or NRC list and transfer them to QC authorized staff for
checking.
4.
QC authorized staff shall check all completed maintenance documents

for completeness and accuracy of entries and indicate this by stamping
and signing in each work documents.
5.
After certified by QC authorized staff, Production planner shall register in

computer system (AMASIS) and indicate that the work has been done by
stamping, signing and specified the performed date in column
Performed of the Master Job card/ Worksheet Index (VAECO Form
6019) or NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) for the said job card/worksheet
and NRC respectively.
Maintenance document work flow

1.
Maintenance staff is to process the entire maintenance document (Job

cards/ worksheets /NRCs, etc.) flow as follows:
a.
Maintenance staff is to pick up maintenance document with attached

related maintenance data from the Dock Control Room,
Note: Production planer is responsible for prepare all maintenance
data for the routine work (referred in the job cards, worksheet).
Page 5.4-2

Maintenance data which are used for the non-routine work (Referred
in NRC, NRCC, SRO) shall be prepared by authorized staff.
2.
3.
b.
For the work steps accomplished, maintenance document and

related maintenance data shall be signed off progressively by each
respective trade. This is to ensure that every phase of the work
process is certified and also for work continuity purposes. When
completed, maintenance document and related maintenance data
shall be put in Sign off area.
c.
If a work process is stopped midway, maintenance documents and

the related maintenance data are to be signed to the last process
step carried out and to be put in Work in progress area. This will
allow continuity and eliminate the duplication of work.
d.
If work cannot be accomplished due to unavailability of parts or

awaiting Engineering instruction, the maintenance document and
related maintenance data are to be put in Awaiting Parts /
Instructions area.
Authorized staff shall check completed maintenance documents

especially the NRCs for completeness and appropriateness of entries.
Authorized staff shall affix his/her stamp and signature upon vetting to
indicate that the completed work document was satisfactory. For
traceability and record keeping process, document vetting must consider
the following:
a.
For work that involves replacement or installation of serialized

aircraft parts/components, authorized staff and Technician must
ensure that the Part Number (P/N), Serial Number (S/N) are clearly
annotated on the appropriate portion of the maintenance document
(NRC, worksheet...). Copy of Release/ Return to Service certificate
such as FAA Form 8130-3, EASA Form 1, CAAV Form 1 or
equivalent and Serviceable tag must be attached together with the
completed work documents.
b.
For work that involves usage of consumable materials, whole or

partial (e.g. paint, adhesive, sealant, etc.), and replacement or
installation of Standard Parts (e.g. bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, etc.),
authorized staff and Technician must ensure that the Part Number
(P/N) and Batch Number (B/N) are clearly annotated on the
appropriate portion of the document (NRC, worksheet...). Copy of
Certificate of Conformance/ Compliance (C of C) and document to
prove the equivalency need to be attached to the completed work
documents in case using of substitute material.
c.
The completed maintenance documents then shall be check by QC

inspector before transfer to production planner.
Production planner shall monitor and track the checking of these

completed work documents for completion before they are routed to
Technical Record Section.
Page 5.4-3

5.5
DOCK CONTROL
5.5.1
PURPOSE
5.5 DOCK CONTROL
To define normal work procedures pertaining to the Dock Control. These

procedures may at times be modified to meet the special contractual
requirements of specific customers.
5.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for the dock control during base maintenance.
5.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Manager of the related TPD is overall responsible for the proper control
of the Dock Control Room and for ensuring that this procedure is
enforced and maintained.
2.
Production planner is directly responsible for controlling of all activities in

the Dock Control Room.
3.
All maintenance personnel under management of Foreman ensure that

all requirements in respect of the Dock control room are properly
maintained.
5.5.4
PROCEDURE
5.5.4.1
General
5.5.4.2
1.
The Dock Control Room is the information center for the aircraft being
worked on.
2.
All job cards/ worksheets shall be prominently displayed according to

zones and trades inside the Dock Control Room.
3.
All requests from maintenance staff for drawings, manuals, technical

assistance or purchases shall be processed through the Dock Controller.
4.
The maintenance documents that took out of the Dock control room for
working purpose and must be returned back to the Dock Control Room
when the work is completed or at the end of each working shift.
5.
Exceptions to this procedure may be necessary at times to meet the

requirements of certain customers. The related TPD Manager or his
delegate shall determine the exceptions in consultation with the
customer.
Production planner (Dock controller)

1.
The Production Planner shall prominently display Aircraft General

Information. The Aircraft General Information shall contain the pertinent
information as follows:
a.
Customer;
b.
Aircraft Type & model number;
c.
Manufacture Serial number (MNS);
d.
Engine type;
Page 5.5-1

e.
5.5.4.3
5.5 DOCK CONTROL
Check type.
2.
Maintain good housekeeping in the Dock Control Room.
3.
After receiving an incoming work package from MCC the Production

Planner in-charge shall:
a.
Check the work package against the Customer tally list for
completeness.
f.
Assign job and control numbers to the individual work sheets.
g.
Ensure that all drawings or references called for in the work are
available.
h.
Load maintenance documents on the work boards and issues for

maintenance as per the established maintenance timetable.
i.
If using hardcopy pre-printed NRC, issue blank serialized NRC to

Maintenance staff for defect write-up. Maintenance staff will book out
the required number of serialized NRC and initial on the NRC list
(VAECO Form 6003).
j.
Keep track of the removal of any task cards via Task card booking in
& out records.
As the project progresses, the Production Planner shall

1.
Maintain all printed maintenance data up-to-date. In case the

maintenance data is updated during work performance respective TPD
staff shall evaluate the requirement of T&E and part/ materials and
request for supply to continue the work.
2.
Check all maintenance documents for proper sign off in accordance with
the progress and status of the work being completed. When work is
completed, he/she is to ensure that all related worksheets are duly signoff with the relevant signatures and stamps, date of completion,
employee number by mechanic(s), inspection personnel, and QC
authorized staff responsible for the job .
3.
Sign and stamp on the Master job cards/worksheets index (VAECO

Form 6019) and NRC list (VAECO Form 6003) to signify the completion
of the worksheets and keep the completed sheets progressively, as all
Routine and Non-Routine cards are completed.
4.
Receive maintenance documents and related maintenance data from

maintenance staff and put in In-progress or Sign off area accordingly.
5.
Complete the required operation in computer system (AMASIS for VNA)

and keep all completed Job cards/worksheets/NRCs that checked by QC
authorized staff in COMPLETED WORKS area
Note: For projects where the customer has specified a format of their
requirement, the format desired by the customer will be used. Otherwise,
the Master Job cards/Worksheets Index and NRC list shall be used.
Issue: 02, Revision: 09, Date: 20 AUG 2014
Page 5.5-2

5.5.4.4
5.5.4.5
5.5 DOCK CONTROL
6.
Receive all TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and register in the TAR Index
(VAECO Form 6022) before conveying to the Tech service section or
EGD.
7.
Conduct a worksheet audit at the appropriate time to ensure all Routine

task cards, NRC, Engineering Orders, Technical Assistance Request
and related paperwork are accounted for accountability. Any
discrepancies are to be immediately highlighted to the Aircraft Manager
(Foreman).
8.
Gather and send all OPM Requirement Notices (VAECO form 5004) to
MCC whenever there is a new/ revised/ terminated OPM requirements
arisen during maintenance for updating to new OPM Requirement
Control Sheets (VAECO Form 1003).
9.
Ensure that the Control Room is cleared of all documents belonging to

the project just completed after the aircraft departure.
Maintenance staff
1.
The foreman and the trade engineers (Zone/Team leader) in charge shall
determine the job priorities and assign work to the crews accordingly.
2.
All paperwork to be taken out shall be brought to the attention of the

Production planner (dock controller).
3.
Any partially completed task card waiting for work continuation or other
trades shall also be returned to the dock control room daily. Worksheets
that are booked out to workshops can be returned upon completion of
jobs if it is not practical to return them daily.
4.
When the work step is completed, the performer shall sign and write
down/ stamp his (her) companys ID number (at least four last digit
numbers for mechanic) or Authorization Number (for RTS staff) onto the
MECH column..
5.
When the work is completed or is stopped due to shift change or

whatever reason, maintenance staff returns the maintenance document
with related maintenance data attached to Production planer.
6.
Component removals from aircraft are tracked by the use of a List of

Replaced Component (VAECO Form 6014) where part number & serial
number of removed/installed items are recorded.
7.
All authorized staff working on each assigned aircraft are to provide

sample signatures, and stamp approvals on the Maintenance staff
register (VAECO Form 6015). This identifies the signature & approval
stamp to the name of the engineer.
QC authorized staff
1.
QC authorized staff shall check all completed maintenance documents

and related maintenance data for completeness and accuracy of entries
and indicate this by stamping in each maintenance documents.
2.
The maintenance documents then are put in COMPLETED WORK

area.
Page 5.5-3

3.
5.5.4.6
5.5 DOCK CONTROL
Related maintenance data shall be collected and archived at QC

department for 01 year.
After completion of the check, the production planner shall:

1.
Contact with MCC to get the new OPM Requirement Control Sheet
(VAECO form 1003) (for VNA A/C).
2.
Replace all Dent and Buckle chart pages and OPM Control Sheet with
the new ones when all the maintenance work is completed. All opened
items shall be transferred to the new pages/ sheets. The removed pages
shall be placed in the WP.
3.
Scan and upload the following documents on Aircraft Event of Technical

Information menu on VAECO website:
a.
List of acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012) with all

related document such as NRC, SRO, spare requisition etc.;
b.
List of acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013);
4.
Notify date and time that the aircraft is serviceable to VAECO MCC,
Customer and BDD. The completed Work pack is handled IAW "aircraft
maintenance record" procedure 1.1.
5.
Ensure that the Dock Control Room is cleared of all documentation or

parts belonging to the project just completed.
Page 5.5-4

5.6
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENT COMPLETION
5.6.1
PURPOSE
5.5 DOCK CONTROL
To ensure that all work completed on aircraft or components are recorded

IAW applicable regulatory authority and the operator.
5.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for completing the document for the aircraft/ aircraft
component of VAECOs customer.
5.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Maintenance staff is responsible for the completion of the work he

performs and/or inspects.
2.
Production planner and Tech record staff is responsible to ensure the

completeness of all aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance records.
3.
QC inspection staff is responsible to ensure that all maintenance record

are completed I.A.W this procedure before the aircraft/ aircraft
component is returned to service.
5.6.4
PROCEDURE
5.6.4.1
Maintenance document completion

1.
The referred technical data name and specific task number (E.g. AMM
xx-xx-xx-xxx-xxx-x, MEL xx-xx-xxx...) used to perform the work/ react to
the defect shall be specified in maintenance document.
2.
The necessary information such as check/ test result shall be recorded in

appropriate block of maintenance document as specified.
3.
A completed work/ work step shall be identified by signature and the

Company ID/ Authorization number in MECH column and Authorization
number in INSP column. If a step of work is not applicable or does not
required to perform, the RTS staff shall write down N/A (Not Applicable)
on the MECH column and the RTS staff confirms by signing and
stamping his authorized number on the respective INSP column.
4.
Completion of maintenance documents must meet the following

requirements:
a.
Unless otherwise specified, left blank in a filling block of

maintenance documents are not allowed. In case there is no
information to filled in, the field (filling block) shall be annotated:
N/A means Not Applicable with reason clearly stated; N/R means
Not Required; PCW means Previously Complied With as
appropriate;
b.
Clearly entry in English capital letter and without any unfamiliar

abbreviation words;
c.
Any mistake in the maintenance document shall be corrected by

person who had performed and inspected the work. To correct, he
strikes out the wrong words or make a line from 7 oclock to 13
Page 5.6-1

5.5 DOCK CONTROL
oclock (for a block of text) and certifies by his signature and

authorized number then writes the correct words next to the incorrect
ones. Erasing or overwriting of the incorrect words is not allowed.
5.
5.6.4.2
Maintenance document completion review

1.
2.
5.6.4.3
The aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance documents shall be

completed in a specified area/ room. The documentations of each WP
shall be processed in separated area to prevent from mixing of the
records.
For A/C maintenance document, QC authorized staff shall check the
documents to ensure:
a.
Proper entries in required block;
b.
Proper signature, date and stamp;
c.
All concerned pages are sufficient;
d.
Proper cross-references for traceability;
e.
Good physical condition;
f.
Certificates/ Serviceable tags are attached where applicable.
Maintenance documents with discrepancies shall be returned to the

production planner/ maintenance staff for corrective action.
Aircraft maintenance record update in AMASIS for VNA

1.
All additional maintenance work should be put into AMASIS.
2.
Work pack should be closed on AMASIS within 3 working days for A

check and Phase check and 7 working days for C check.
3.
Specify actual man-hours in AMASIS whenever a WO for performance of

AD, SB, defect repair and other VNA service order is closed.
Page 5.6-2

5.7
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD
5.7.1
PURPOSE
5.5 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE RECORD
To ensure aircraft maintenance records are properly transferred to the

customer and achieved in VAECO after the completion of aircraft
maintenance IAW applicable regulations.
5.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for aircraft maintenance record processed in
VAECO.
5.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The BTPD/ RTPD shall ensure all aircraft maintenance records properly
transferred to Tech record section.
2.
Tech record section is responsible for keeping the maintenance record

for VNA IAW contract and copy of maintenance record for other
customer.
3.
Director of BDD is responsible to transfer maintenance record to

customer.
5.7.4
PROCEDURE
5.7.4.1
General requirements
5.7.4.2
1.
For customer other than VNA, original maintenance records of aircraft

shall be transferred to the customer just after the contract/ work request
completion or a duration required by the Customer.
2.
For the VNA, the original A/C maintenance records are kept in tech
record section IAW the contract with VNA.
3.
The maintenance records are scanned and achieved for two (02) years
before transferring to Customers.
A/C maintenance records after base maintenance

1.
After checking all aircraft maintenance records to ensure they are

satisfactory, the related TPD prepares Work pack handover (VAECO
Form 6016).
2.
The maintenance record should include but not limit to the followings:
a.
Purchase Order;
b.
Aircraft Maintenance Work Order (VAECO Form 1002);
c.
Maintenance Release (VAECO Form 2012 or Air carriers form);
d.
FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (Major Alterations only), if

applicable;
e.
FAA Form 8110-3, DER Approved Data, if applicable
f.
Master job card/ worksheet index (VAECO Form 6019);
g.
Last minute items list (VAECO Form 1006);
Page 5.7-1

h.
Additional Tasks List (VAECO Form 6020);
i.
List of acceptable deferred tasks (VAECO Form 6013)
j.
List of acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012);
k.
List of replaced component (VAECO Form 6014);
l.
Non-routine Card list (VAECO Form 6003);
m. Record of accomplished Service Bulletin and/or Airworthiness

Directive;
3.
5.7.4.3
n.
Routine and Non-Routine Job Cards;
o.
Records of tests and/or calibration performed on article;
p.
Any other documentation that may be applicable.
All maintenance record pertaining to one aircraft are filed separately from
another aircraft, indexed and filed with the following identifications:
a.
Control number; WP, WO number
b.
Aircraft Registrations Number;
c.
Worksheets category, e.g. Routine Card, NRCs, etc.
d.
Volume number, e.g. 01, 02, etc.
e.
Original or Backup copies.
4.
The related TPD shall prepare the maintenance records in order as

specifying in item 5.7.4.2.2 and transferred to Tech record section. The
Tech record section checks the work documents received against the
WP handover sheet provided by the related TPD.
5.
The maintenance records are photocopied and scanned for archiving by

Tech record section of EGD. The scaned maintenance records file must
be in order as specified above and clear for reading.
6.
For VNA, The maintenance records then are archived in Tech record
section. One copy of maintenance release certificate (VAECO Form
2012) shall be sent to VNA Technical Department within 24h of the A/C
check completion by related TPD.
7.
For other customer, the original of maintenance record shall be handed

over to customer by BDD.
8.
The maintenance records are either transferred to the operator or to

Tech record section by hand or shipping.
9.
The operator or Tech record section personnel accepts the maintenance

records by signing on the acknowledgement column of Work pack
handover (VAECO Form 6016) when the records are delivered by hand.
For maintenance record is shipped, the Airway Bill (AWB) will serve as
acknowledgement of receipt.
A/C maintenance records after ramp maintenance

1.
Maintenance records of VNA A/C.
Page 5.7-2

a.
Cabin defect log:

The 2nd copy of cabin defect log page is gathered by
maintenance staff and kept at HAN RTPD for Airbus and Fokker
A/C or HCM RTPD for Boeing and ATR A/C at least 30 days
since the entry date for normal flight otherwise it shall be kept
until official acceptance to discard.
The original of cabin defect log books are gathered by
maintenance staff after completion of cabin defect log books and
kept at least 12 months since the entry date at HAN RTPD for
Airbus and Fokker A/C or HCM RTPD for Boeing and ATR A/C.
b.
Technical log:
The 4th copy of technical log page (blue copy) are gathered by
maintenance staff at line station other than HAN, SGN and
retained at least 24 hours for normal flight otherwise it shall be
retained until official acceptance to discard.
The 3rd copy of technical log pages (pink copy) are gathered at
HAN, DAD or SGN by authorized staff and sent to the respective
RTPD to input all necessary information into AMASIS within 03
hours. These copies of technical log pages are then sent to
related Quality Control division for checking (except DAD station).
The 2nd copy of technical log pages (white copy) are gathered
and achieved at least 24 months since the entry date at HAN (for
Airbus and Fokker A/C) or at SGN (for Boeing and ATR A/C).
The 1st copy of technical log pages (white original copy) are kept
in the technical log book and will be gathered after technical log
book completion and then sent to Technical Record Section of
EGD to keep IAW the contract with VNA. When gathering the
completed technical log book maintenance staff shall leave
technical log pages (original copies) of last fifteen flights to attach
on the new technical log book.
c.
Other ramp maintenance records:

The other ramp maintenance records such as: OOP task card, EO
are collected and distributed as follow:
The maintenance records are sent to the RTPD by authorized
staff to input all necessary information into AMASIS.
Original of such maintenance record shall be sent to Technical
Record section of EGD to keep IAW the contract with the VNA.
2.
Maintenance records of the other Customer.

a.
The copies of technical log sheets are collected by authorized staff

and sent to respective RTPD for handover to tech record section of
EGD for keeping.
Page 5.7-3

b.
5.7.4.4
5.7.4.5
Maintenance records other than technical log sheet are sent to

Technical record section of EGD for scan into electronic file before
transfer the original copy to customer.
A/C maintenance records keeping

1.
Technical Record section of EGD shall scan all maintenance records

(except technical log pages) into electronic files within 5 days for a check
lower than C check and 10 days for another check since WP completion.
The electronic files of maintenance records are uploaded on VAECO
website. Maintenance records in papers and in electronic files are
archived for at least 24 months or longer as required by customer.
2.
Electronic maintenance records are stored in server and backed up daily

by the IT division of EGD.
3.
Head of Tech record section shall inform QA director, as required, when

hardcopy record/ log books need to discard. The QA director shall inform
the relevant airworthiness authority and obtain the necessary approval
for destroying if required by the authority.
Maintenance record re-creation

1.
General requirement
a.
The VAECO fulfills the forms IAW the customers procedure. In the
case of re-creation, the procedure in the item 2 below is applied
except otherwise specified by the Customer.
b.
The correction in maintenance record is allowed but all the mistakes

are retained to recognize.
c.
The maintenance records are re-created in the following cases:

The records are missing during transportation or storage.
The maintenance records is voided due to illegibility;
Missing of signature or mistake of personnel.
Using incorrect words or grammar.
Additional requirement from the Customer or the Authorities to
add more information into maintenance records.
2.
Maintenance record re-creation procedure

a.
Maintenance record missing

When the aircraft maintenance records are missed, the Technical
Record Section of EGD shall inform the relevant Maintenance
Centre about this problem.
The relevant Maintenance Center determines and contacts the
performer, check to confirm that the relevant work have been
completed.
The maintenance records are re-created with the signature of the
relevant personnel who had performed and inspected the work.
Page 5.7-4

The relevant QC Manager shall certify and signed in the first

page of re-created maintenance records.
The Customer shall be informed about the case that the
information in missed maintenance records affects the
airworthiness of the aircraft.
b.
Information lack or discrepancy in maintenance records

When the discrepancies or lack of information found in
maintenance records, the person who certified the work is
informed to correct/ complete the records.
The person who corrects the records has to confirm that all
related maintenance work had been correctly performed and
follow 5.6.4.1 when correction.
5.7.5
ARCHIVES
1.
Acknowledgement receipts of Tech record section are maintained on file

in the Tech record section for 02 years.
2.
Acknowledgement receipts of customer are maintained on file in the

BDD for 02 years.
Page 5.7-5

PART 6 RAMP & BASE MAINT. PROC.
6.1 AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK
PART 6
RAMP AND BASE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Page 6-1

6.1
AIRCRAFT TOWING/ PUSHBACK
6.1.1
PURPOSE
To ensure that aircraft towing/ pushback are performed in accordance with

current applicable regulations and customer requirements.
6.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for towing/ pushback activities for all A/C type
handled by VAECO.
6.1.3
6.1.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
RMC/ BMC are responsible for A/C towing/ push back and assigning
towing/ push back personnel.
2.
RTPD/BTPD is responsible for coordinating the operation of A/C towing/

push back and arranging airplane space within VAECO facility.
3.
Ground Support Manager of related CMC is responsible for providing

towing equipment (tractor and tow bar) and assigning tractor driver.
DEFINITIONS
1.
PUSHBACK: moving of A/C from parking position to taxi position by

use of specialized ground support equipment.
2.
TOWING: moving of A/C other than pushback operations, with/ without

load on board by use of specialized ground support equipment.
6.1.5
PROCEDURE
6.1.5.1
Informing
6.1.5.2
1.
The RTPD/ BTPD should be informed before A/C towing and after
repositioning.
2.
If A/C is towing to VAECO hangar, the BTPD should arrange place to

park and inform A/C towing personnel.
3.
If A/C is towing to/ from VAECO hangar dock, the BTPD should be
informed first.
4.
If A/C is towing to airport ramp, the RTPD should inquire for parking
place and schedule that is arranged by airport authority and inform staff
before towing A/C to ramp.
Personnel assignment and necessary equipment

1.
Staff responsibilities.
Before starting of process, the towing/ pushback team should be
established, may include:
a.
Headset man
Headset man is responsible for controlling of whole towing/
pushback operation, coordinating of towing/pushback personnel. If
towing supervisor is not available, headset man is also responsible
Page 6.1-1

for connecting the tow bar to aircraft. Headset man should be trained
and qualified for towing/ pushback as specified in SOP 10.4.2.9.
b.
Cockpit man (N/A for pushback)

Cockpit man is responsible for operating of required A/C systems for
towing. Cockpit man should be qualified A2 function as specified in SOP
10.1.4.4 or Cockpit man authorization as specified in SOP 10.4.2.9.
c.
Tractor driver
Tractor driver is responsible for towing/ pushback routing, operating
of tractor/ tow bar. Tractor driver should have the towing vehicle
operating license granted by authority.
d.
Wing walker/ tail walker:

Wing walker/ tail walker are responsible for monitoring the A/C
clearance when towing/ pushback in a congested or restricted
aircraft movement area.
e.
Towing supervisor:
Towing supervisor is responsible for connecting the tow bar to
aircraft, managing the towing operation when A/C is docking in/out,
f.
Clearance monitors:
Clearance monitors are responsible for monitoring the clearance
between A/C to ease-to-impact point of dock when A/C is docking
in/out.
2.
Minimum equipment
Towing/ push back staff should be equipped with necessary equipment
for work and communication as below:
6.1.5.3
a.
Headset man: headset and steering by-pass pin for respected A/C
type.
b.
Wing walker, tail walker, clearance monitors: air whistle/ horn; for
night operation: flash light or lighting wand is additional required.
General requirements and safety precautions

1.
Towing/ push back preparation, checks and operations should be

performed IAW relevant AMM and customer procedures. However, the
following requirements and safety precautions should be complied with if
they are not against or stricter than the relevant AMM and customer
procedures.
2.
The headset man is prohibited to seat behind/on tractor cabin / tow bar
during towing within VAECO area.
3.
Unless otherwise specified by customer, Verbal conversation between

ground and cockpit shall be used as specified in 6.2.4.6. Non-standard
hand signal is prohibited.
4.
Unless otherwise specified by customer, Hand signal communication

between ground and cockpit shall be used IAW CAAV AC-10- 003
Page 6.1-2

(which uses signals published by ICAO annex 2, section 5- Rules of the

air). These hand signals are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of this SOP.
Caution: During thunder storm, use hand signal for communication
between ground and cockpit.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
6.1.5.4
Unless otherwise specified by individual contract/agreement, Hand signal

communication between headset man and tractor driver shall be used
IAW CAAV AC-10- 003 (which uses signals equivalent to ICAO annex 2,
section 5- Rules of the air IATA and IATA AMH631). These hand signals
are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of this SOP.
Towing of A/C into/ out of VAECO hangar or nearby hangar area shall be
performed by VAECO staffs.
Before commencing of towing/ pushback process, Headset man should
ensure that staffs required for towing operation are adequate. Headset
man should brief the work and agree communication/ signal in normal
and abnormal situation to all concerned staff such as tractor driver,
cockpit man, wing walkers
Aircraft wheel chocks shall not be removed until the aircraft parking
brakes is applied with pressure available.
Aircraft wheel chocks removal sequence should be complied with
respective type of towing/push-back vehicle.
Ground gear lock pins shall be installed at all times except during
pushback.
Communication shall be maintained between cockpit and ground at all
times. Use of interphone or VHF set is first priority.
A/C surround area and engine inlet/ gas exhaust area (if engine run)
should be confirmed clean and clear of personnel/ GSE/ foreign object.
If case of A/C abnormal configuration, the approved/ accepted alternate
procedure should be applied to maintain the safety.
During towing/pushback, the headset man should always keeps in
contact with cockpit man and tractor driver, maintains the minimum
distance 3 meters away from the nose gear, towing bar while A/C is
moving. Never walk in or forward of the path of tractor or nose wheel.
During towing/pushback, the headset man should always monitors
towing speed, turning angle, tow-bar condition, ground clearance and
informs driver the abnormal conditions immediately.
During towing, A/C brake operation is prohibited except for emergency
situation or requested by headset man. The cockpit man is prohibited
from putting his feet on brake pedal during A/C towing.
Incase of abnormal situations (such as tow-bar shear pin broken)
towing staffs should have appropriate actions basing on each situation.
After towing, The A/C should be set back to normal configuration and
360 check (walk around) should be performed to confirm there is no
damage on the A/C.
Towing instruction
Please refer to Working instruction of each individual maintenance centers
Page 6.1-3

Appendix 6.1.1: Some of necessary signals for maintenance staff.
Set brakes
Raise hand just above shoulder height with
open palm. Ensuring eye contact with flight
crew, close hand into a fist. Do not move until
receipt of thumbs up acknowledgement from
flight crew.
Release brakes
Raise hand just above shoulder height with
hand closed in a fist. Ensuring eye contact
with flight crew, open palm. Do not move until
receipt of thumbs up acknowledgement from
flight crew.
Chocks inserted
With arms and wands fully extended above
head, move wands inward in a jabbing
motion
until
wands
touch.
Ensure
acknowledgement is received from flight crew.
Page 6.1-4

Chocks removed
With arms and wands fully extended above
head, move wands outward in a jabbing
motion. Do not remove chocks until
authorized by flight crew.
Start engine(s)
Raise right arm to head level with wand
pointing up and start a circular motion with
hand; at the same time, with left arm raised
above head level, point to engine to be
started.
Cut engines
Extend arm with wand forward of body at
shoulder level; move hand and wand to top of
left shoulder and draw wand to top of right
shoulder in a slicing motion across throat.
Page 6.1-5

Affirmative/all clear
Raise right arm to head level with wand
pointing up or display hand with thumbs up;
left arm remains at side by knee.
Note This signal is also used as a
technical/ servicing communication signal.
Fire
Move right-hand wand in a fanning motion
from shoulder to knee, while at the same time
pointing with left-hand wand to area of fire.
Dispatch aircraft
Perform a standard salute with right hand
and/or wand to dispatch the aircraft. Maintain
eye contact with flight crew until aircraft has
begun to taxi.
Page 6.1-6

Connect ground power

(technical/servicing communication signal)
Hold arms fully extended above head; open
left hand horizontally and move finger tips of
right hand into and touch open palm of left
hand (forming a T). At night, illuminated
wands can also be used to form the T above
head.
Disconnect power
Hold arms fully extended above head with
finger tips of right hand touching open
horizontal palm of left hand (forming a T);
then move right hand away from the left. Do
not disconnect power until authorized by flight
crew. At night, illuminated wands can also be
used to form the T above head.
Negative
Hold right arm straight out at 90 degrees from
shoulder and point wand down to ground or
display hand with thumbs down; left hand
remains at side by knee.
Page 6.1-7

Establish communication via interphone

Extend both arms at 90 degrees from body
and move hands to cup both ears.
Page 6.1-8

6.2
A/C ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE
6.2.1
PURPOSE
6.2 AIRCRAFT ARRIVAL AND DEPARTURE
To stipulate the standard, requirements for A/C arrival and departure

activities.
6.2.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for arrival and departure activities within VAECO
ramp operation.
6.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The assigned staff of related RTPD is responsible for monitoring

customer flight schedule and informing maintenance staffs.
2.
Maintenance staffs are responsible for implementing arrival and

departure activities in compliance with this procedure.
6.2.4
PROCEDURE
6.2.4.1
General
1.
The arrival/ departure operation is performed IAW customer procedures.

However, the following guidelines should be complied with if they are not
against customer procedures.
2.
Unless otherwise specified by customer, Verbal conversation between

maintenance staff and fight crew shall be used as specified in 6.2.4.6.
3.
Unless otherwise specified by customer, Hand signal communication

between maintenance staff and fight crew shall be used IAW. CAAV AC10- 003 (which uses signals published by ICAO annex 2, section 5Rules of the air). These hand signals are listed in the Appendix 6.1.1 of
the SOP 6.1.
Warning: Use Hand signal for communication with Flight crew during
thunderstorm.
6.2.4.2
Aircraft arrival
1.
Before aircraft arrival, basing on information provided by RTPD/

customer, the Inspection & RTS staff should check A/C status to prepare
for maintenance and servicing. The status checking include but not
limited to defect occurred during flight (PFR or onboard maintenance
message) and outstanding deferred defect item.
2.
Maintenance staff should ensure that all required equipment and arrival/
departure KIT are available at arrival gate/ parking place before A/C
arrival.
3.
Maintenance staff should be available at arrival gate/ parking place 30

minutes and complete the check to prevent FOD at arrival gate/ parking
place 10 minutes prior to ETA.
4.
Before A/C taxiing into the ramp, maintenance staffs should verify that no
people or vehicle activity on the path of A/C to prevent from damaging
aircraft or ground equipment.
Page 6.2-1

5.
When A/C completely stopped, maintenance staff should approach from

front to nose wheel, confirm parking brake set and place chocks fore and
aft of all nose wheels or IAW the appropriate customers procedure/
document (if any), connect headset and communicate to confirm if
external power required.
6.
Maintenance staff should connect External power/ Ground air conditioner

upon request.
7.
When engines are spooled down and beacon lights are turned off,
maintenance staff places chocks at main wheel(s) IAW the appropriate
customers procedure/ document. If the customer does not have specific
instructions/ requirements, places chocks as following:
a.
In normal condition: Fore and aft of outboard LH main landing gear

wheel set.
b.
In abnormal circumstances (sloping and slippery surface, wind or

wind gust, etc are described in relevant AMM): Fore and aft of all
LH & RH main landing gear wheel sets.
Warning: For ATR72, the staff is only allowed to set chocks to main
landing wheel after propellers stopped. Moving propeller blade can
cause dead or injury of person.
8.
Maintenance staff connects the headset to inform flight crew CHOCKS

IN PLACE, RELEASE PARKING BRAKE,
Note: Use appropriate hand signals if interphone is not available/
unserviceable.
9.
6.2.4.3
6.2.4.4
Maintenance staff should place ground safety cones IAW the appropriate
customers procedure/ document.
Maintenance and servicing

1.
Maintenance staff shall perform servicing & maintenance following the

contract between customer and VAECO. The procedures for A/C
maintenance are detailed in 6.3.
2.
In case customer request for non-routine work or loan of tools,

equipment and component, maintenance staff should inform the RTPD to
complete Work request/ confirmation sheet (VAECO Form 1016).
3.
Obtain customer representative signature on Work request/ confirmation

sheet.
Aircraft departure
1.
Preparation
a.
Authorized staff shall check to ensure that:

All doors and panels are closed and locked;
All landing gear down lock pins are removed;
Steering lever is in appropriate position.
Page 6.2-2

2.
b.
15 minutes prior to the departure, headset man should take the

headset to contact flight crew and remain contacted in entire
operation.
c.
The headset man should inform cockpit if he has to leave and report
to cockpit when he is back to position.
Departure
a.
Headset man confirms:

The MLG wheel chocks are removed;
Surrounding of A/C, engine inlet and gas exhaust areas are clean
and clear of personnel/GSE/foreign object.
3.
4.
b.
Headset man informs flight crew to prepare for engine start. When
realized that navigation and anti-collision light are on, Headset man
shall inform flight crew that A/C ready for engine start.
c.
Headset man monitors the engine start process, and immediately

warns the flight crew of abnormalities such as: oil/ fuel leak, smoke,
fire
d.
After receiving order from flight crew, Headset man disconnects

head set, closes and latches panel, removes NLG wheel chocks
then standby near the A/C nose route as requested by flight crew.
e.
In case of the steering pin is used, the headset man raises and
stretches the steering pin streamer to notify the flight crew (in case
of insufficient illumination, it should be illuminated by the torchlight).
f.
After confirm all clear, the headset man gives Thumb up sign to the
cockpit and wait for the flight crews direction.
g.
If the flight crew is ready to depart (flash/turn on the taxi-light), the

headset man should salute to the captain (means hand over the
duties of defending flight safety and servicing passengers to crews)
and wave hand to the passengers (end of waving hand till vertical
stabilizer pass for full passenger A/C).
h.
In case of emergency, call STOP! to order pilot to set brake using

abruptly extend arms to top of head, crossing arms.
In case of departure without VAECO headset man, maintenance staff

should
a.
Standby near the A/C route.
b.
Give the proper assistance, if required.
After A/C departure, maintenance staff should

a.
Monitor A/C taxi to the end of runway and take off.
b.
Return equipment and arrival/ departure KIT, handle the departure

documents and maintenance records to related RTPD.
Page 6.2-3

6.2.4.5
Operation in high wind conditions

1.
2.
6.2.4.6
The high wind warning

a.
The MCC shall receive for high winds warning from customer, air
traffic tower control and other public media...
b.
After high wind warning confirmed, The MCC will inform to related
RTPD for prepare the necessary work and assign maintenance
team.
To prevent accident, maintenance staff should:

a.
Confirm working ladders, platform and ground service equipment is

secured to prevent an unexpected movement.
b.
Confirm chocks are correctly installed at wheel(s) of all landing gears

IAW AMM.
c.
Confirm aircraft PARKING BRAKE had been set except brake

temperature shows an overheat condition.
d.
Remove the aircraft nose gear STEERING PIN.
e.
Pay attention if any abnormal condition may occur and report to

respective TPD immediately.
f.
Confirm the STEERING PIN has proper installed back before the
aircraft push back or after the high wind warning was relieved.
Conversation between maintenance staff and fight crew

1.
Before start and push back:

In case of hydraulic pressurization, flight crew or maintenance staff shall
make sure that the aircraft is clear of ground equipment
Crew:
Cockpit to ground.
Main. staff: Ground to cockpit.

Crew:
Request to pressurize hydraulic.
Main. staff: Clear to pressurize hydraulic

2.
Non push back start:

When the flight crew and maintenance staff are ready to start engines
the flight crew will advise as follows
Crew:
Cockpit to ground.

Crew:
Are you ready to start engines
Main. staff: Confirm brakes are set

Crew:
Brakes set
Main. staff: Clear to start engines

Crew:
Starting engine # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right)
Page 6.2-4

Main. staff: Clear to start # 1 (Left) or #2 (Right)

The maintenance
abnormalities.
staff
will
monitor
engine
rotation
and
any
Main. staff: N1 rotation

Crew:
Check.
Repeat above sequence for other engine
3.
Crew:
Start complete, disconnect headset, hand signals on

the left/right side.
Push-back start:
When the flight crew request pushback but ground personnel are not
ready, then the maintenance staff will answer as follows
Main. staff: Negative, standby for pushback.
When the flight crew and maintenance staff are ready for push back the
flight crew will advise as follows:
Crew:
Cockpit to ground.

Crew:
Clear for pushback facing ... (direction)
Main. staff: Pushback facing ..., release brakes.

Crew:
Brakes released
Main. staff: Commencing pushback, clear to start engines.

Upon completion of a normal pushback the tractor driver will apply the
brakes. The maintenance staff will advise the flight crew as follows:
Main. staff: Ground to cockpit, pushback complete, set brakes.
Crew:
Brakes set.
Before, during or after pushback the maintenance staff will advise the
flight crew of when and where they will start the engines.
Main. staff: Clear to start engines
Crew:

The maintenance
abnormalities.
staff
will
monitor
engine
rotation
and
any
Main. staff: N1 rotation.

Crew:
Check.
Repeat above sequence for other engine.

Crew:
Start complete, clear to disconnect, hand signals on

the Left/Right side.
Main. staff: Disconnecting, hand signals on the left/right side.

Page 6.2-5

4.
Engine Start with External Pneumatic Power:

The procedure should be carried out in accordance with the specific
aircraft FCOM.
The maintenance staff will advise the flight crew when the required
services are available and co-ordinate connection and removal of
equipment.
Crew:
Cockpit to ground.
Main. staff: The Air starter connected, standing by for engine

start.
Crew:
Ready to start engines. Supply pneumatic pressure.
Main. staff: Pneumatic pressure is available.

Crew:

The maintenance
abnormalities.
staff
will
monitor
engine
rotation
and
any
Main. staff: N1 rotation.

Crew:
Check.
Crew:
Engine #1 (Left) or #2 (Right) start complete, remove

the Air starter, GPU
Main. staff: The Air starter, GPU is removing

After the Air starter/ GPU removed, the maintenance staff will advise the
flight crew that he is ready for start or push back and they will perform
Non push back start or Push back start procedure as practicable. Then
they will apply the Cross Bleed Start procedure for starting the other
engine.
5.
Arrival Procedures:
Crew:
Cockpit to ground.
Main. staff: Chocks in place, release brakes

Crew:
6.
Brake released
For ATR72 aircraft

When maintenance staff and flight crews are ready for start engines and
push back:
Crew:
Request to start Hotel mode
Main. staff: Clear to start Hotel mode

Before or during pushing back:
Main. staff: Clear to release prop brake
Page 6.2-6

Crew:
Releasing number #2
Then start the other engine as mentioned above.
Page 6.2-7

6.3
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
6.3.1
PURPOSE
6.3 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
To implement the aircraft maintenance IAW applicable regulations and

customer requirements.
6.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for conducting maintenance activities those are
covered by VAECO approved certificate, on customers aircraft.
6.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of EGD is responsible for issuing WO, contacting with the BDD,
for contract matters and providing engineering support as required by
maintenance centers (as specified by contract).
2.
Director of MCC is responsible for assigning the relevant maintenance

center to implement the maintenance work.
3.
Director of Maintenance centers are responsible for providing resources,

planning and managing maintenance processes.
4.
Director of LGD is responsible for providing spare parts, materials as

required by maintenance activities in timely, sufficiently manner.
5.
Director of CMC is responsible for providing tools, equipment as required

by maintenance activities in timely, sufficiently manner.
6.
[Deleted].
6.3.4
PROCEDURE
6.3.4.1
Work order and work pack
6.3.4.2
6.3.4.3
1.
According to maintenance contract from customers or maintenance plan

of VNA, EGD shall issue WO for aircraft maintenance. This WO shall
specify the work to be accomplished basing upon the customer
requirements. The WO issuance is detailed in procedure 5.2.
2.
The WP shall be provided by customer or generated by EGD for VNA

aircraft. The WP issuance is detailed in procedure 5.3.
Maintenance data
1.
Maintenance data related to aircraft maintenance such as AMM, IPC,

TSM, WDM, MME, LMM shall be provided by the customer.
2.
If the maintenance data is continuously use (for VNA or Ramp

maintenance of other customer...), those documents shall be controlled
for updating status and distributed to needed department by Technical
library of EGD. The maintenance data control is detailed in procedure
8.1.
Parts/ Materials
1.
Aircraft Parts/ Materials are provided by customer or by Logistics

Department under agreement with the customer.
Issue: 02, Revision: 03, Date: 20 JUL 2012
Page 6.3-1

2.
6.3.4.4
When spare parts/ materials are required, maintenance staff shall check
the spares/ materials availability in the stores by using AMASIS:
a.
If the spares/ materials are available the requester fill all necessary
information of spares/ materials required in Stock Requisition
(VAECO Form 4024) and get them from store;
b.
If the spares/ materials are not available the requester shall input all
necessary information of spares/ materials required in the AMASIS
and create Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) to order for later
usage.
c.
The Work Order number (NRC/ ADD/ Technical Log) shall be

specified in the Stock Requisition/ Request For Supply otherwise
N/A shall be entered in WO block and defect description, Aircraft
registration number shall be entered in appropriate block of the
related form.
d.
For VNA A330 A/C: If the WO is not available the next scheduled
flight number shall be specified. Request for Supply (VAECO Form
4023) shall be issued by requesting maintenance center before or
together with Stock Requisition (for sending to EGAT). MCC shall
ensure that Request for Supply has been issued whenever issuing
WO for performing on VNA A330 A/C.
3.
Authorized staff must carry out part inspection before installing on aircraft
(physical conditions, life limit, airworthiness data in accompanied
documents).
4.
The cannibalization/swapping of components from the operating aircraft/

stock NHA may be performed in specific maintenance or operation
condition:
a.
For the customers aircrafts, component swapping/ cannibalization is

carried out in accordance with customers procedure.
b.
For the VAECO managed NHA, the cannibalization of components is

detailed in procedure 9.4.
Production control
1.
For base maintenance and Phase check maintenance, maintenance

director shall determine to assign a foreman to manage the maintenance
activities.
2.
From C check and above, a work flow chart shall be established and
daily updated by related TPD to reflect Maintenance Timetable and
actual maintenance progress.
3.
Production planner shall hand out the job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs to
authorized staff/ Supervisor according to the Maintenance Timetable for
carrying out maintenance work. Refer to The procedure 5.4 for detailed.
4.
When the job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs cannot be carried out as

scheduled, the related TPD should report to the director and coordinate
Page 6.3-2

with the foreman to readjust the maintenance plan so as the A/C ground
time is minimized.
5.
6.3.4.5
Everyday, the production planner shall send the daily report of

maintenance progress to Customer representative if required by the
contract.
Maintenance and inspection

1.
For base maintenance, upon receiving the Aircraft from customer or

RMC (for VNA aircraft) Aircraft handover sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or
customer handover sheet (if any) shall be used to record overall status of
the A/C.
2.
Before starting to work in base maintenance/ Phase check maintenance,

the maintenance staff should register by writing name and signing in
appropriate block in Maintenance staff register sheet (VAECO Form
6015).
3.
The preliminary inspection shall be performed on an aircraft IAW

procedure 10.5.7.1.
4.
When the customers instruction reflects that the subject aircraft has
been involved in an accident, a hidden damage inspection shall be
performed IAW procedure 10.6.
5.
The supervisor shall plan and co-ordinate all work activities. He shall
assign the work, brief and emphasis work requirement to his staff.
6.
Maintenance staffs follow the job card/ worksheet/ NRC to perform the
work step by step in accordance with instruction in the appropriate
maintenance data. All necessary maintenance data must be available at
working area for reference.
7.
If any technical difficulties found, the maintenance staff should fill out
TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and send to RTPD/ BTPD for assistance.
Refer to Technical support procedure 8.5 for detailed.
8.
All routine job cards in customer check package shall be performed in

accordance with customers approved procedures.
9.
Any questionable job card shall be consulted to customer for providing

instruction.
10. Any discrepancies found during base maintenance/ Phase check

maintenance shall be recorded in NRC and handled as specified in item
6.3.4.6 below.
11. Any discrepancies found during ramp maintenance (except Phase
check) shall be handled following the customers procedures.
Maintenance actions taken shall be specified in the maintenance log or
other document specified by the customer and signed by the authorized
staff.
12. Tasks are marked as critical will be performed as follows.
a.
Each critical task shall be performed by different authorized staff;
Page 6.3-3

b.
Critical tasks are performed by one authorized staff and re-inspected

by another authorized staff (duplicate inspection); or
c.
Critical tasks performed by the same authorized staff, who then

issue a NRC to re-inspect the work performed.
13. Tasks related to the aircraft critical systems such as flight control,
engine, landing gear and pitot static systems are to be subjected to an
independent or duplicate inspection as defined by the customer and
carried out IAW customer procedures.
14. Upon completion of each task, the authorized staff shall check/ inspect
the affected article to assure conformance to specification and
established workmanship standards. He shall then certify the task with
his signature, approval stamp and date.
6.3.4.6
Non Routine Card issuance

1.
Before the maintenance visit, customer (other than VNA A/C) should
issue maintenance work transfer summary to the maintenance center.
2.
Technical service staff shall evaluate all items in maintenance work

transfer summary and the Preliminary Inspection Finding List to
determine required materials, tools and documents, and issue TAR if
necessary.
3.
After understanding the contents of deferred defect corrective procedure,

Production planner shall extract all outstanding work requirements from
all relevant documents (including Tech Log) supplied by customer and
arrange/ adjust the proper A/C ground time, location, facilities and
manpower, then issue a NRC.
4.
For discrepancies found during maintenance, authorized staff shall

prepare the Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) with detailed work
request and forward to the Production planner for scheduling the
rectification/repair. The respective TPD shall review estimated manhours and other requirements specified in the NRC. If the man-hours to
accomplish the work is belonged to Over and Above work (O&A work),
TPD staff shall prepare Non-routine Work/ Workpack Change Request
(VAECO Form 6006) and send it to BDD. The BDD staff shall sign and
submit to customer for approval and then notify to the related
maintenance center and MCC for performance.
5.
To prevent error entry on the customers Non Routine Card due to

unfamiliar of the format. VAECO Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001)
may be used by maintenance staff to hand script the finding before entry
to the customers serialized Non Routine Card.
6.
All NRC must be property indexed and recorded in NRC list (VAECO
Form 6003) before they are released to production for compliance.
7.
The Production planner is to make available blank NRCs and issue NRC
list (VAECO Form 6003) at the designated location. The list must be
filled for each NRC raised and not to be removed from the designated
area.
Page 6.3-4

8.
If a NRC is inadequate for documenting sub-task relating to the main

task, (e.g. Removal for access, follow-on checks etc.), a supplementary
log sheet termed Non Routine Card Continuation Form (VAECO Form
6017) shall be used instead of another NRC. This continuation form is to
be attached to the related NRC. More than one NRC Continuation form
may be used if necessary.
9.
The person raising the NRC Continuation form shall annotate in the main
job NRC, the statement NRCC Form raised.
10. If any NRC is declared lost, production planner must be informed to

release the original copy. The Production planner, based on information
extracted from the original, is to issue a duplicate copy. This copy shall
be stamped Duplicate copy by the Production planner as evidence of
his/her concurrence.
11. After all O&A work completion, the related TPD is responsible for
consolidating all O&A work requirements, preparing Additional Man-hour
of Non-standard Work (VAECO Form 1135) and submit to Customer for
approval before sending to BDD.
12. Production planner shall place NRC (contractual and O&A) under NRC
column of the Document rack according to trade.
6.3.4.7
Job Card/ Non Routine Card Continuation Form

1.
The Job Card/ Non Routine Card Continuation Form (VAECO Form
6017) is used to record the detailed work or a series of work processes
or sub-tasks that are required to be carried out to perform a complex task
or rectify a defect raised in the NRC. The cross reference shall be
specified between Job Card or NRC and related JC/ NRCC Form.
Production planer uses JC/ NRCC List (VAECO Form 6023) to control
the issuance of JC/ NRCC Form.
2.
A separate NRC shall be raised if another defect, which is not related to

the original defect, is detected. Another JC/ NRCC form shall be raised
accordingly to record the related work.
3.
When a defect is raised, it shall be handed over to the authorized staff

for vetting and evaluating the defect to specify the basic work
requirements or process in the JC/ NRCC form.
4.
The authorized staff shall also indicate on the NRC Block Action taken
that JC/ NRCC form raised and staple the JC/ NRCC form to the JC/
NRC for the trade in charge to initiate work process.
5.
During the course of defect rectification, the maintenance staff shall

record all additional work process related to the defect (if any) in the JC/
NRCC form.
6.
The JC/ NRCC form shall be handed over to authorized staff for vetting,
the authorized staff shall indicate that he has vetted the entries made by
stamping his stamp, including name and date.
7.
When more than one trade is involved in closing the entries of the JC/
NRCC form, the authorized staff of the trade closing the last entry shall
Page 6.3-5

ensure that all the work required are competed and certified by
appropriate authorized staff.
8.
6.3.4.8
6.3.4.9
Perform maintenance at a location other than the aircraft

1.
In order to provide the better access or working environment, parts may

be temporarily removed from the aircraft and performed maintenance on
such parts in other location provided the parts shall be reinstalled back to
the original location.
2.
Additionally, such maintenance activities must be under the existing

airframe maintenance capability of VAECO and all requirements of the
special maintenance data, equipment, or facilities are fulfilled.
3.
The removal and installation of the parts and necessary test,

examination called out in the relevant maintenance data must be
performed prior to or during the removal/installation and must also be
recorded. Also, the identification and the protection of the removed parts
shall be IAW paragraph 6.3.4.10 below.
4.
The maintenance activities mentioned in this item does not include those
parts that need specific test process or test equipment, personnel
training or certificate, unique facility, and those parts deem impracticable
to be performed outside the workshop.
Other maintenance requirements

1.
6.3.4.10
The Production planner closing the NRC list shall ensure that all JC/
NRCC forms are stapled to the related NRC or related JC and tally with
the numbers of NRCC form raised for that particular JC/NRC.
For the work requiring to use measuring and testing tool/ equipment,
authorized staff must record into relevant maintenance document the
following contents:
a.
Reference maintenance data.
b.
Measuring value.
c.
Tool/equipments P/N and S/N.
2.
Using Defect identification tag (VAECO Form 0013) for better identifying
location of defects discovered during base maintenance work. The
Yellow tag is for Mechanic and Pink tag is for Authorized inspection
personnel.
3.
For the work required to carry out in several locations, the Supervisor
who is responsible to that work must give sufficiently, clearly instructions
to maintenance staff at each location. The Supervisor is responsible to
sign in job card, and assure that each work at each location has been
carried out as required.
Parts handling
1.
All the parts when removed from the aircraft must be attached with
Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) to identify the customer and A/C
registration number, location and removal reason, except when parts are
Page 6.3-6

short time removed for ramp maintenance and shall be reinstalled

immediately.
6.3.4.11
2.
In all cases, the protective blanking plates, plug or covers shall be

installed to preclude contamination and all parts shall be segregated to
prevent damaged.
3.
The Panel Removed tag (VAECO Form 0010) is issued for identifying
the removal location of the panel during base maintenance.
4.
All component/ parts and panels are removed from the aircraft shall be
cleaned and inspected to ensure their serviceability before re-installation.
The appropriate authorized staff who performs the inspection shall stamp
his authorized number on the back of the Identification Tag (VAECO
Form 0003) or Panel Removed tag (VAECO Form 0010) for confirmation
of serviceable status.
5.
Individual parts determined unserviceable after inspection and /or test

should be tagged with the applicable completed unserviceable tag in
accordance with customers manual or the Unserviceable Tag (VAECO
Form 0005).
6.
All materials determined to be damaged and/or obviously beyond

economical repair are defined as condemned. When concurred by the
customer, the condemned procedure 9.8 shall be followed.
On-wing maintenance IAW CMM

When the defect rectification/ repair is to be carried out IAW CMM, related
maintenance center need to perform the self evaluation as described in MOE
Part 2, Chapter 6, item 6.4 to ensure that all conditions are met and send to
QA department for approval before performance.
6.3.4.12
6.3.4.13
Job transfer to workshop

1.
If some jobs need transfer, the authorized staff issues Job card attaching
sheet (VAECO Form 6007), which states clearly the job requirement.
2.
Before transferring the job to a workshop, Production planner must check

the capability of related shop for work performed. If there is any doubt,
production planner must confirm with QAD using TAR (VAECO Form
3015).
3.
The components with Identification tag (VAECO Form 0003) and Job
card attaching sheet shall be sent to related workshop.
4.
After the transferred job has been performed, component authorized staff
must sign in Job card attaching sheet and send it with component back
to requesting department.
Technical support
1.
Difficulties that cannot be resolved, authorized staff may consult to

Technical service section for assistance.
2.
For the defects that not covered in the approved maintenance data
(SRM, AMM), TAR (VAECO Form 3015) shall be sent to EGD.
Page 6.3-7

3.
6.3.4.14
6.3.4.15
6.3.4.16
6.3.4.17
Details of Technical support can be found in procedure 8.5
Buy back inspection procedure

1.
During the course of an inspection, discrepancies noted by the

authorized staff shall require re-inspection of these items prior to final
inspection acceptance of the completed task.
2.
When there is a disagreement concerning any inspection, the override

policy in Item 10.5.6 shall be applied.
Deferral of defect rectification

1.
Deferral of defects rectification shall follow customer procedures.
2.
For base maintenance, all deferral defects shall be listed on List of

acceptable deferred defects (VAECO Form 6012) with concurrence of
the customer before the aircraft is returned to service.
3.
For ramp operation, the deferred items shall be clearly deferred IAW
maintenance deferral document said by the customer and customers
maintenance data such as MEL, CDL, AMM prior to release the
aircraft to service.
Final inspection and return to service

1.
The inspection authorized staff shall perform aircraft final inspection. The
final inspection shall be performed in accordance with customers
procedure and the procedure as described in item 10.5.7.3 of this SOP.
2.
The return to service activities shall be performed in accordance with

customers procedure and the procedure as described in SOP 10.8.
Authorized staff returns the A/C to service under his/ her privilege
granted by QAD.
3.
For VNA aircraft, when the appropriate work pack is completed, the
production planner together with VNA representative shall sign on the
Check Completion Minutes (as required by the contract).
Handover the A/C after work pack completion

1.
In case the A/C is performed by base maintenance center it is then

handed over to representative of customer or RMC (for VNA aircraft) the
Aircraft Handover Sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or customer handover
sheet (if any) shall be used to record overall status of the A/C.
2.
Upon receiving the A/C, RMC staff should check the practical status of
the A/C and confirm the information written in the Handover Sheet are
adequate and correct.
3.
The production planner shall send to MCC List of acceptable deferred

defects, List of acceptable deferred tasks, OPM maintenance
requirement notices, new/ revised SRO and related documents by
uploading on Aircraft Event of Technical Information menu on VAECO
website (for VNA A/C).
Page 6.3-8

6.3.5
ARCHIVES
The Aircraft Handover Sheet (VAECO Form 6011) or customer handover
sheet (if any) shall be archived at the respective TPD at least 1 month since
completion date.
Page 6.3-9

6.4 CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/ TASK HAND-OVER)
6.4
CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/TASK HAND-OVER)
6.4.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure for shift /task handover process to ensure the
continuity in maintenance activities.
6.4.2
RESPONSIBILITY
Director of Maintenance centers are responsible for ensuring that the
shift/task handover within the maintenance center is complied with this
procedure.
6.4.3
PROCEDURE
6.4.3.1
Transfer of Work Policy
6.4.3.2
6.4.3.3
1.
At shift change, or if maintenance staff must leave a partially completed

job or inspection, the following steps shall be taken to provide the relief
maintenance staff with information about the remaining work.
2.
This may be accomplished by signing off the items that had been
accomplished or through the use of a Shift/ task handover sheet.
3.
It is forbidden for the maintenance staff to sign-off the task prior to its
accomplishment to avoid possible lost or duplication of the task
performed.
Shift handover procedures

1.
The Shift handover report is used to ensure a continuity of information

regarding the maintenance process of aircraft, aircraft component and
planning activities. It is the responsibility of the shift leader to complete
this report prior leaving a job.
2.
If any maintenance work cannot be completed during the shift, the

maintenance staff shall fill out Shift/ task handover sheet (VAECO Form
6004 for base maintenance; VAECO Form 5002 for ramp maintenance;
VAECO Form 7040 for component maintenance), denoting the relevant
information that might have a bearing on aircraft airworthiness, schedule
or personnel safety that need to notify the incoming staff.
3.
The supervisor who handovers or takeovers the task shall review the
handover sheet and the applicable job cards/ worksheets/ NRCs to
ensure that the remaining phases of the work are thoroughly understood.
4.
It is the responsibility of the supervisor to instruct the maintenance staff

involved in the continuation of the job so they understand all pertinent
details and problems.
Partially completed work handover procedure

1.
A maintenance task normally includes several work steps/subtasks of

which an individual takes or group of maintenance staff may share the
responsibility for accomplishment. Unless an individual staff take the
whole responsibility to complete the entire task within one shift where he
shall only issue one signature for this task, each step/subtask shall be
signed off on the related working copy of maintenance data (AMM,
Page 6.4-1

6.4 CONTINUITY OF MAINTENANCE (SHIFT/ TASK HAND-OVER)
Worksheet etc.) by the authorized maintenance staff who get direct

involved to the accomplishment of such step/subtask.
2.
Sign off for each maintenance work step/ subtask as soon as it is

completed is highly recommended. Sign off the entire task shall be done
immediately after the accomplishment of this task.
Note: It is not necessary to sign off on sub-tasks that call out from the
main-task if such sub-tasks call for a routine and repetitive work during
base maintenance, such as:
Energize/ de-energize the aircraft, open the passenger doors,
cargo doors, LDG doors.
Open/ close access panel, engine cowling,
Operate hydraulic power, Air conditioning system, Air bleed
system, Fuel pump, Lighting
Access CFDS,
Simple BITE.
6.4.3.4
3.
Any time, maintenance staff leaves while the work is only partially
completed, he shall return the maintenance document and related
maintenance data to the maintenance supervisor for reassignment.
4.
At shift change, the supervisor completes Shift handover procedures as

contained above.
5.
The incoming maintenance staff shall review the work previously

completed before starting the job.
6.
All required functional, operational or leak checks must be completed

and noted as such.
Shift/ task handover sheet control

1.
The Shift handover report and Shift/ task handover sheet should be kept
in binder for traceability and to prevent from missing. The handover
binder must be made readily available to both shift out-going and
incoming maintenance staff and located as follows:
a.
Each dock control room for base maintenance.
b.
RTPD office for ramp maintenance.
c.
Shop office for component maintenance.
2.
Every Shift/ task handover sheet for particular zone/trade and also for a
particular work should be separated from another.
3.
The Shift/ task handover sheet shall be archived for one year since the
article returned to service.
Page 6.4-2

6.5 LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
6.5
LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
6.5.1
PURPOSE
To provide procedures for conduct of functional tests of landing gear and
flight controls. The information given here is general in nature. For a
particular aircraft landing gear and flight control system, the appropriate
aircraft Maintenance Manual is to be referred
6.5.2
6.5.3
SCOPE/RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The aircraft landing gear and flight control functional test shall be
supervised by assigned supervisor.
2.
There shall be no concurrent operation of both landing gears and flight

control operation check.
LANDING GEAR FUNCTIONAL TEST ON GROUND

1.
Jack up the aircraft in accordance with procedures lay out in the

respective aircraft maintenance manual/ Handbook.
2.
Check up the aircraft documents to ensure all unsatisfactory conditions

related to landing gear system are corrected and it is safe to carry out
landing gear functional check
3.
Service the aircraft hydraulic system
4.
Landing gear area should be roped off or guarded to ensure no one

approaches the landing gear during functional check
5.
Position a qualified person in the cockpit to operate the control and

another to operate the hydraulic mill
6.
All staff should be instructed to keep off the aircraft except those involved
in the operations concerning the functional check
7.
Connect a manufacturers recommended or suitable hydraulic test rig to

aircraft hydraulic system
8.
Restore electrical power necessary for the landing gear functional check
9.
Communicate between the man in the cockpit and the person giving
instruction on the ground
10. For rigging, remove only one landing gear down lock pin or lock at a
time, leaving the other two gears locked with their respective gear
pins/locks
11. For full landing gear functional check, remove all landing gear down lock
pins.
12. Carry out functional test on the selected landing gear(s) in accordance
with respective aircraft maintenance manual. It is recommended to
perform the initial swing at low pressure unless otherwise stated in the
AMM
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the individual landing gear functional test
14. Hydraulic pressure shall be off during leak check in the wheel well
Page 6.5-1

6.5 LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
15. On completion of the functional test, ensure the down lock pins/locks are
installed.
16. Lower the aircraft, with all the necessary precautions
6.5.4
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST

1.
Check the aircraft documents to ensure all unsatisfactory conditions

related to flight control system are corrected and they are safe to be
operated
2.
Remove the flight control locks, if installed
3.
Service the hydraulic system and connects a suitable test rig if the
systems are power operated
4.
Ensure all working stands are removed and if required, a suitable stand
is placed cleared off the control surface range of movement to facilitate
checking on the range of movement.
5.
Place a qualified maintenance staff in the cockpit to operate the controls.
6.
Restore the electrical power to the aircraft
7.
Communication between the maintenance staff in the cockpit and the

maintenance staff on the ground giving instruction
8.
Carry out functional check in accordance with respective AMM
9.
Install control surface lock previously removed on completion of the

functional check
Page 6.5-2

6.6 RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART MATERIALS TO STORE
6.6
RETURN OF AIRCRAFT PART/ MATERIALS TO STORE
6.6.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the aircraft parts/ materials returned to VAECO store in
compliance with applicable regulation.
6.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for returning of aircraft part/ materials from
maintenance centers to VAECO store.
6.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY
Maintenance center is responsible for returning component with attached
required documents to VAECO store.
6.6.4
PROCEDURE
6.6.4.1
Return of expendable part and materials
6.6.4.2
6.6.4.3
1.
Expendable part/ materials that has not been used should be returned if
the packing/ container is not unwrapped/ opened, the status is good,
expiry date is not due. The Stock Requisition of the returned part/
materials must be stated the reason for return such as Preload
redundancy, incorrect P/N then signed and stamp by the RTS staff
who performed the respective task.
2.
The returned parts/ materials should be attached with their Stock

Requisitions and the Serviceable tags/ Consumable release tags and
send to the VAECO store right after the task completion.
3.
Expendable part that cannot reused and expired materials must be

discard. The maintenance center shall discard such part/ materials as
specified in 4.9.
Return of serviceable part

1.
Repairable parts that has not been used should be returned if the
packing/ container is not unwrapped/ opened, the status is good. The
Stock Requisition of the returned part/ materials must be stated the
reason for return such as Preload redundancy, incorrect P/N then
signed and stamp by the RTS staff who performed the respective task.
2.
The returned parts should be attached with their Stock Requisitions and
the Serviceable tags and send to the VAECO store right after the task
completion.
3.
Whenever a part has been used on an aircraft or next high assembly,

such parts can only be returned to stores with a Re-certified certificate.
Procedure for issue the Re-certified certificate can be found in 10.10.
Return of unserviceable
maintenance centers
1.
repairable part from
ramp and base
All aircraft part removed from aircraft must be attached immediately with
VAECO unserviceable tag that is filled appropriate information by
authorized staff. If information such as: part number, serial number, etc.
Page 6.6-1

on the removed component are not eligible, the authorized staff must
contact RTPD/BTPD for getting correct information from AMASIS. In the
case the replaced part is destroyed/ badly damaged or missing, the
related RTS staff shall enter those information in the Unserviceable tag
and return to LGD (for reporting to customer).
6.6.4.4
6.6.4.5
2.
Unserviceable part must be thoroughly cleaned. End of duct and

connector must be caped hermetically.
3.
Depending on aircraft type, aircraft information reporting system, part

type, troubleshooting procedure for the part, authorized staff enters the
detailed information on the defect as much as possible in the
Unserviceable tag. The technical documents shall be attached with the
part for a purpose of providing as sufficient as possible information for
repair.
4.
The unserviceable part then is returned either directly or via RTPD to

VAECO store with following documents:
a.
Unserviceable Tag;
b.
Copy of Tech. log pages for ramp maintenance; Copy of NRC for
Base maintenance;
c.
Troubleshooting data, if any;
d.
Post flight reports or onboard maintenance messages, if available on

aircraft;
e.
Bite test report, if available on aircraft.
f.
If any document mentioned in item c, d, or e above is not attached to

unserviceable part, that should be explained clearly reason in block
Reason For Removal in Unserviceable tag.
Returning defective component from CMC/ CIMC

1.
During performing component maintenance in workshop, if failure of a

component is out of workshop capability the shop staff must re-assemble
the component, bring it to storage condition and return the component to
VAECO store with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand
side), Finding/ Repair Report and test result (if any).
2.
For the defected part/ sub-assembly removed from a component, if it is

in repairable type with P/N and S/N, the shop staff shall return it to
VAECO store with Serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0005), Finding/ Repair
Report and test result (if any).
Other requirements
1.
Serviceable part/ materials must be returned to VAECO store right after

maintenance centers determine that no need for such part/ materials.
2.
During base maintenance, unserviceable part removed from aircraft must

be returned to VAECO store during the day of removal.
Page 6.6-2

3.
For ramp maintenance in HAN, DAD and HCM, unserviceable

component must be returned to VAECO store as soon as possible, but
not later than 03 hours.
4.
For outstation, maintenance staff sends unserviceable component to

RTPD (HAN or HCM) in the earliest applicable flight. RTPD shall return
to VAECO store as soon as possible, but not later than 03 hours.
5.
Part sent to ATEC shop for maintenance should be return to VAECO

store within 24 hours from received time;
6.
Part sent to other shops but not repairable due to out of shops capability
should be returned to VAECO store within 02 hours.
7.
If unserviceable part is not returned to store within specific time base on

principle of delivery, Logistics Department should make part list to send
to maintenance center for return.
8.
Status of the unserviceable part in the AMASIS should be updated by

RTPD staff of respective maintenance center to reflect the practical
status (removed from A/C and unserviceable) immediately and within 24
hours since the component is returned to store.
Page 6.6-3

PART 7 COMPONENT MAINT. PROC.
PART 7
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
Page 7-1

7.1
WORKSHOP MAINTENANCE REQUEST
7.1.1
PURPOSE
7.1 WORKSHOP MAINTENANCE REQUEST
To give instruction to deploy maintenance requests IAW applicable

requirements.
7.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to deploy maintenance request performed in the
workshops.
7.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Logistics Director has responsibility for dealing with VAECO component

maintenance need, the customers request, repair invoice, maintenance/
modification contract;
2.
CMC Director has responsibility for performing component maintenance

as requested by LGD, BMC, RMC and CIMC for work performed in the
CMC workshops.
3.
BMC Director has responsibility for performing component maintenance

as requested by LGD, RMC, Cabin Interior maintenance Center (CIMC)
and other BMC for work performed in the BMC workshops.
4.
CIMC Director has responsibility for performing component maintenance

as requested by LGD, BMC, RMC for work performed in the CIMC
workshops.
7.1.4
PROCEDURE
7.1.4.1
RECEIVING THE MAINTENANCE REQUEST

1.
Logistic Department receives unserviceable repairable components from

the customer, bases on the customers request/ contract and the VAECO
approved maintenance capability specified in capability list manuals to
issue the Maintenance/ Repair Request (VAECO Form 4002) to pertinent
CMC/ BMC/ CIMC for performance.
2.
The maintenance request may be transferred to the CTPD from BTPD or

RTPD in the JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) if the work arises during aircraft
maintenance or from CITPD in the work transit sheet (VAECO Form
7031) if the work arises during component maintenance.
3.
The maintenance request may be transferred to the Base TPD from

other BTPD or RTPD in the JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) if the work arises
during aircraft maintenance.
4.
The maintenance request may be transferred to the Cabin interior TPD

from BTPD/ RTPD in the JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) if the work arises
during aircraft maintenance or from CTPD in the Work transit sheet
(VAECO Form 7031) if the work arises during component maintenance.
5.
Upon receiving the maintenance request, the respective TPD shall

confirm that the work is within his approved work scope otherwise the
request shall be returned.
Page 7.1-1

7.1.4.2
WORK REQUEST ISSUANCE

1.
The qualified planner of the respective TPD shall issue work request
(VAECO Form 7014) upon receiving Maintenance/ Repair Request
(VAECO Form 4002) from LGD. Work request is based on requirements
of Maintenance/ Repair Request. For maintenance requests transferred
to the workshops using JCAS or Work transit sheet, the workshop RTS
staff may self-evaluate and deploy the job without WR. If one workshop
WR applied to more than one component, a Serial Number List (VAECO
Form 7050) will be raised if necessary.
2.
The shop work request is created in VAECO Form 7014 including, but
not limited to, the following information:
3.
7.1.4.3
7.1.5
7.1 WORKSHOP MAINTENANCE REQUEST
a.
The unique number of the WR specified and controlled by relevant

maintenance center;
b.
Work request reference number;
c.
The Follow-up sheet number should be specified if the part is

monitored in the AMASIS;
d.
Worksheet reference number;
e.
The regulation should be followed and form used to release the

component to service (CAAV Form 1, FAA Form 8130-3, CAAV
Form 523);
f.
The work details and the dead line.
The WR should be approved by the manager or delegated person before

sending to the workshop for performance.
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORK REQUEST CONTROL

1.
When the WR is completed and returned, the staff of respective TPD

shall review the completion of the related documentation to ensure the
WR is completed as required.
2.
The staff of TPD should monitor the issued WR. If the WR is not
performed in time due to any reason, it should be reported to the TPD
Manager for further action.
ARCHIVES
The WR shall be archived at the issuing TPD at least 2 years since
completion date.
Page 7.1-2

7.2 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE
7.2
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE
7.2.1
PURPOSE
To ensure worksheets are issued IAW applicable requirements.
7.2.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to issue and manage worksheet performed in the
workshops.
7.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Technical-Planning Division (TPD) of respective maintenance center
(BMC, CMC) has responsibility for issuing worksheet IAW manufacturer
component maintenance manual and applicable maintenance data.
7.2.4
PROCEDURE
7.2.4.1
Worksheet creation
1.
Workshop engineering staff of respective TPD uses VAECO Form 7032

to compose a new component maintenance worksheet.
2.
The major work shall be defined in order to satisfy the requirements of

repair request or production request. The work is defined basing on work
requirement, maintenance history of component (if any), CMM, SB, AD,
and other approved document such as manufacturer instruction.
3.
The component maintenance Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032) should be

prepared IAW requirements specified in para. 8.2.4(2). The following
information, but not limited to those, should be specified in the
worksheet:
4.
7.2.4.2
a.
Work request reference number (if any);
b.
Worksheet control number;
c.
Worksheet number;
d.
Component information (Nomenclature, P/N and S/N);
e.
CMMs reference (Number, Revision No/ Date);
f.
Tool/ equipment and materials/ spare needed to perform the work.
g.
Work step.
For the repetitive jobs the pertinent worksheet could be reused. These
worksheets are controlled by worksheet control number and called
standard worksheets.
Worksheet approval and issuance

1.
TPD shall create a list of all standard worksheets (VAECO Form 7053)
specifying, but not limited to, name of shop, worksheet control number,
worksheet revision number and date, applied Part Number.
2.
Standard worksheets and list of worksheet shall be reviewed and

approved by TPD Manager before sending to the pertinent workshops/
uploading on VAECO website for use by the maintenance staff.
Page 7.2-1

7.2.4.3
7.2.5
7.2 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET ISSUANCE
3.
TPD Manager approves the standard worksheet by his signature on

concerned Approved Worksheet List (VAECO Form 7053).
4.
The maintenance staff shall be only used the current and approved
worksheets (hardcopy or electronic file).
Worksheet control
1.
All standard worksheets and Approved Worksheet List are controlled by

the respective TPD.
2.
Upon receiving the updated maintenance data, workshop engineering

staff shall review the concerned worksheet. If there is a change in the
derived maintenance data (CMM, AMM, AD, SB...) the standard
worksheet should be updated and specified by new revision number and
date.
3.
All out-of-date worksheets shall be removed from the VAECO website

and the Approved Worksheet List shall be revised. The standard
worksheet shall be also revised for more convenience or correcting the
ambiguity information.
4.
Any discrepancies in the worksheets (such as out-of-date status) found

by maintenance staff or any person shall be reported to the respective
TPD for correction.
5.
The newly modified worksheets shall be approved and updated to

concerned workshop and on VAECO website IAW 7.2.4.2.
ARCHIVES
Worksheets and Approved Worksheet List are retained at the respective TPD
for at least 2 years since the approval date.
Page 7.2-2

7.3 COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
7.3
COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
7.3.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the preliminary inspection is pertinently performed IAW applicable
requirements.
7.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for receiving and preliminary inspection of all
articles taking a shop visit.
7.3.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Workshop manager is responsible for ensuring preliminary inspection
has been conducted by component return-to-service staff (RTS staff) prior to
beginning any maintenance task.
7.3.4
PROCEDURES
7.3.4.1
Component receiving
7.3.4.2
1.
The maintenance staff receives the component at the receiving area of

the shop.
2.
The component RTS staff shall ensure P/N, S/N and the visual status of
the component are in conformity with the information in the
Unserviceable tag/ Identification tag and accompanied documents.
3.
If the preliminary inspection is not immediately performed the component

shall be placed at a assigned area.
1.
Preliminary inspection is performed by component RTS staff prior to

beginning the maintenance task at the shop dedicated area.
2.
Preliminary inspection is conducted to assess the current status and

condition of the component which are undergoing maintenance,
preventive maintenance, or alteration by the workshop, and also to
determine the requested work within the workshops approved work
scope.
3.
Any suspected unapproved parts found during preliminary inspection

shall be reported to the Quality Assurance Department in accordance
with the procedure 10.13.
4.
Preliminary inspection of aircraft component may include but is not

limited to the followings:
a.
Review of all accompanying documentation and Unserviceable Tag

(VAECO Form 0005) or Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) to
verify the part number, serial number, reason for removal, date of
removal, time in service and any other pertinent information of the
article.
b.
External visual inspection for physical condition to determine any

damage which may have been caused by transportation, packaging
or improper storage condition.
Page 7.3-1

7.3 COMPONENT RECEIVING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
c.
Partial or complete disassembly of the component may be required

to accomplish this inspection.
d.
Perform any inspection specified in the component maintenance

manual (CMM).
5.
The Hidden damage inspection is performed IAW procedure 10.6 of this

SOP if the component has been involved an incident/ accident.
6.
Discrepancies found during preliminary inspections shall be recorded in

Component maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). Any
discrepancies shall be also recorded in Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO
Form 7033). If the required corrective actions are out of the work
specified on the given Work request, The component RTS staff shall
send the Finding/ Repair Report to the respective TPD and follow the
TPD's direction. The Workshop manager will be also informed.
7.
Respective TPD shall evaluate the findings and inform to the repair
requester. When the requested work changing is accepted by repair
requester, the TPD shall update the current WR or issue new WR and
WS and send to the workshop to perform. If the requested work
changing is not accepted the WR shall be recalled and the component
attached with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005) and Finding/
Repair Report will be returned to repair requester.
8.
All additional work shall be recorded on the Aircraft Component

Maintenance Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032).
9.
If the defect of the component is out of workshops approved work scope

but may be repairable, the article is returned to the repair requester with
Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand side) and Finding/
Repair Report.
10. If the defect of the component is un-repairable or beyond of economic

repair, the article is returned to the repair requester with Unserviceable
Tag (VAECO Form 0005) and Finding/ Repair Report.
11. The information of a component visiting the workshop such as P/N, S/N,
received date are recorded in Shop component receive/ release record
(VAECO Form 7054).
12. The Shop Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0020) should be raised and
attached with the component. If the component is waited to perform the
next step it should be placed on racks labeled Waiting for maintenance.
13. Before maintaining the component, the Unserviceable Tag (VAECO
Form 0005) or Identification Tag (VAECO Form 0003) and/ or other
documentations are removed and kept in area/ cabinet specified by the
shop.
Page 7.3-1

7.4
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE
7.4.1
PURPOSE
7.4 COMPONENT MAINTENANCE
To ensure the maintenance is pertinently performed IAW applicable

requirements.
7.4.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for maintaining a component in a work shop.
7.4.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring the maintenance has
been conducted IAW approved maintenance data and in-process inspection
is conducted by component RTS staff.
7.4.4
PROCEDURES
1.
The maintenance staff must follow main steps in the worksheet and
details in applicable CMM and other applicable maintenance data.
2.
The maintenance staff must follow the tool/ equipment instruction manual
when using tool and equipment to maintain the component.
3.
All parts removed from the component/ NHA must be tagged with an
Identification Tag. For the small details such as nuts, bolts It is allowed
to group several items and put them into a nylon bag or put on a tray/
basket and using one Identification Tag for those belonging one
component/ NHA.
4.
All necessary information must be fulfilled in Identification tag (VAECO

Form 0020) including following information ("N/A" entry if not applied):
a.
Shop-in date, Customer name;
b.
Description, part number, serial number of the Next Higher

Assembly (ASSY);
c.
Description, part number, serial number, position of the component/

parts;
d.
Remark must be given for any delay reasons or caution. Status of

concerned work such as cleaned/ inspected or repaired should be
specified by mark on appropriate box. Other necessary information
of the work status or warnings may be written in the backside of the
Tag.
5.
All the parts removed from the component should be protected from dust
and/or damage and placed in area or on racks labeled Processing
when they are not maintained immediately.
6.
The cleaning work must be performed in accordance with the CMM. Wet
cleaning must be performed in defined area. The Identification Tag could
be removed for soaked cleaning as long as it can be identified after
cleaning and the Tag must be attached again just after cleaning work
completed.
Page 7.4-1

7.
The maintenance staff must confirm that the specification/ type of

chemical for cleaning/ lubricating meet the requirements of those
specified in the maintenance data or accepted by the component
manufacturer.
8.
The check, test, repair must be performed in accordance with the CMM
and/or other document accepted by the manufacturer.
9.
The test result must be recorded in the worksheet or print out/ written in
a separated form and attached to the worksheet with mutual crossreferences.
10. During maintenance:

a.
All defects shall be recorded in Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO

Form 7033) and the Worksheet (VAECO Form 7032). All the
defected parts must be repaired or replaced by serviceable parts
IAW the CMM or other document accepted by the manufacturer.
b.
If the required corrective actions are out of the work specified on the
given WR, the component RTS staff shall send the Finding/ Repair
Report to the TPD and follow the TPD's direction. The Workshop
manager will be also informed. The TPD staff shall contact the repair
requester for acceptance or giving instruction.
c.
If the defect of the component is un-repairable or considered as

beyond of economic repair or out of workshops approved work
scope but may be repairable, the article is returned to the repair
requester with Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0005/ right hand
side), Finding/ Repair Report and concerned documentation (JCAS,
Work Transit sheet, WR, test result (if any)).
11. If the need of the technical support raised the shop supervisor/ RTS staff
records the problem in Technical Assistance Request (VAECO Form
3015) and send to respective TPD for technical support.
12. All the additional work must be recorded in the Worksheet (VAECO Form
7032).
13. If spare part is required but it is not available in the main store,
component maintenance staff may rob parts from spare NHA and related
information must be recorded to component maintenance worksheet for
reference IAW SOP 9.4.
14. If the work is stopped/ delayed due to any reason the date, time and
situation should be specified in the Identification tag.
15. Job transfer
a.
When the work needed to perform at other shop (of its maintenance
center or other maintenance center), the RTS staff shall issue a
Work transit sheet (VAECO Form 7031). The Work transit sheet
shall clearly specify:
P/N, S/N of the transferring component and NHA
The work to be accomplished
Page 7.4-2

The supporting shop to perform the work

The number of original request (WR)
Date of issuance
The issuer name and signature, stamp
b.
Before job transfer, the component RTS staff shall confirm the
capability of related shop to perform the work. If there is any problem
in determining the capability, the component RTS staff shall fill in
VAECO Form 3015 and send to QAD for clarification.
c.
VAECO Form 0020 is used to record the first step of transfer work.
After transit task accomplished, the reference number of transit form
shall also be recorded on the work sheet for traceability.
d.
If the transfer job is NDT requirement, the NDT shop may use the
NDT report (VAECO Form 7042) to record the NDT result. The NDT
report shall be attached with and referred from the Work Transit
Sheet/ JCAS.
e.
If the transfer job is borescope inspection requirement, the

Engine/APU borescope report (VAECO Form 7043) shall be used to
record the borescope result. This report shall be attached with and
referred from the Work Transit Sheet/ JCAS.
16. For the hardware/ materials/ defected details removed from a

component, if they are not in repairable type or they are consumable
materials, the shop staff shall handle as waste IAW SOP 4.9. Other
waste arises during maintenance must be handled IAW SOP 4.9.
17. Before reassembly of the component, the in-process inspection shall be
performed if specified in the worksheet. The reassembly of the
component is performed IAW the CMM.
18. The Inspection Tag (VAECO Form 0014) shall be raised and tagged on
the safety equipment for the performed work that affect the maintenance
limitation of the equipment (E.g.: Restoration of the life vest, weighing of
the fire extinguisher). The expiry date is determined IAW CMM. If the
component is property of VNA, the component RTS staff must refer to
List of Aircraft Component Required Maintenance (VAECO Form 1001)
for the required maintenance intervals IAW AMS and chose the stricter
limitations to specify in the Inspection Tags.
19. Each performed task/ step must be signed just after completion by the
performer and component RTS staff.
20. If a MTE is used, its P/N and S/N should be recorded in the work sheet.
21. Before leaving the shift, the leader of the shift should enter all necessary
information in handover sheet IAW procedure 6.4.
22. All repair or replacement to rectify all defects must be recorded in
Finding/ Repair Report.
Page 7.4-3

23. The completion of the component

requirements specified in 5.6.4.1.
documentation
shall
meet
24. The final inspection and return the component to service is performed
IAW procedure 7.5.
Page 7.4-4

7.5 COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE
7.5
COMPONENT FINAL INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE
7.5.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the component are inspected and returned to service IAW
applicable requirements.
7.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for final inspecting a component after shop visit and
returning it to service.
7.5.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring the final inspection
and return to service are conducted by RTS staff.
2.
The component RTS staff is responsible to inspect and approve the

component return to service IAW approved maintenance data.
7.5.4
PROCEDURES
7.5.4.1
Final inspection
1.
The component RTS staff shall do final inspection of the entire

component for airworthiness with respect to the maintenance, preventive
maintenance, or alterations performed.
2.
Final inspection will include the review of the WR, Worksheet, Finding/
Repair Report, all other related documentation and ensure that:
a.
The CMM and other applicable maintenance data approved by

authorities are used for maintenance.
b.
All required maintenance and inspections, including Required

Inspection Items (RII) if required by the Customer have been
performed completely and comply with the CMM and other
applicable maintenance data.
c.
The standards, techniques, methods, tools and equipment used for

performing the maintenance and the inspections are in compliance
with the CMM and other applicable maintenance data.
d.
The results of inspections meet the requirements specified in the

CMM and other applicable maintenance data.
e.
Parts and materials used for maintenance are eligible for used on
the component and in compliance with the CMM and other
applicable maintenance data.
f.
All maintenance records are properly completed: All test result are
recorded or printed, all repair work/ replacement and other additional
work are recorded in pertinent forms, all required signature blocks
are signed.
g.
Corrective actions required for the discrepancies found in preliminary

inspection and during maintenance are properly taken.
h.
The hard time and life limit of replacing components must be in

allowable limits (if applicable).
Page 7.5-1

3.
7.5.4.2
7.5.4.3
If the part is monitored in the AMASIS, the RTS staff shall close the
Follow-up sheet and update the necessary information such as the
completion date, Man-hours, spare parts/ materials used in AMASIS.
Issuing certificate for returning to service after maintenance and major

repairs
1.
For the component sent to the shop from RMC, BMC the RTS staff will
signed, stamped on JCAS (VAECO Form 6007) to certify that the work
are completed as required.
2.
For the component sent to the shop from other shop the RTS/ inspection/
sign-off staff will signed, stamped on Work transit sheet (VAECO Form
7031) to certify that the work are completed as required.
3.
For the component sent to the shop from LGD the RTS staff will use the
form specified in the Work request to certify components for return to
service after maintenance and major repairs.
4.
FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 may be used to record major repairs if
requested by customer. The issuing certificate for returning to service
after major repairs using FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 the same as
the case of major alteration as specified in 7.5.4.3.
5.
The information in the Airworthiness Approval Tag (FAA Form 8130-3 or

CAAV Form 1) must be specified, including:
a.
Approving National Aviation Authority/Country;
b.
Organization Name and Address;
c.
Form Tracking Number; Customer WO or WO number;
d.
Description, P/N, Eligibility, Quantity, Serial/ Batch Number, Status/

Work;
e.
A brief description of the work performed with reference to FAA

approved data, shelf life/ inspection/ overhaul/ life limit information;
f.
The compliance with Airworthiness Directives and/or Service

Bulletins, if required.
6.
For a batch with more than two components, the Serial Number List
(VAECO Form 7050) may be used to record all serial numbers in the
batch with mutual reference to the Airworthiness Approval Tag.
7.
The RTS staff shall determine the statement, write his name, stamp/
write his authorized number and sign on the appropriate blocks of the
FAA Form 8130-3 or CAAV Form 1.
Issuing certificate for returning to service after major alterations

1.
For returning a component to service after major alterations will require

the use of FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523 Major Repair and
Alteration in duplicate.
2.
The information in the Major Repair and Alteration must be specified,

including:
Page 7.5-2

a.
Type of work;
b.
Unit identification;
c.
Conformity Statement;
d.
Approval for Return to Service;
e.
Description of work accomplished.
f.
Aircraft Nationality and Registration Mark/ Make; A/C Serial No.,

Model/ Series; Owner Name and Address will be left blank.
3.
The original and duplicate copy of the form will accompany with the
component and return to the repair requester.
4.
The RTS staff shall determine the statement, write his name, stamp/
write his authorized number and sign on the appropriate blocks of the
FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523.
Note: The person who installs the part on aircraft will enter Aircraft Nationality
and Registration Mark/ Make; A/C Serial No., Model/ Series; Owner Name
and Address information in blocks 1 and 2, give the original of the form to the
aircraft owner/ operator, and forward the duplicate copy to the local FAA
district office (FAA Form 337) or CAAV (CAAV Form 523) within 48 hours
after the work is inspected;
7.5.4.4
7.5.5
Transfer the component to the repair requester

1.
Before transferring the component to the repair requester, it may be

placed at "Waiting for delivery" area/ rack with suitable tags and
documentations.
2.
For the component sent to the shop from LGD, the serviceable
component is packed using the cover/ box coming with the component
and sent to the main store with the Airworthiness Approval Tag and
accompanied documentation.
3.
For the component sent to the shop from BMC or RMC, it is packed as
receiving status, the component is sent to the repair requester with the
JCAS and FAA Form 337 or CAAV Form 523 (if any) and other related
documentation (such as test result report, repair report).
4.
For the component sent to the shop from other shop, it is packed as
receiving status, the component is sent to the requester with the Work
transit sheet and other related documentation (such as test result report,
repair report).
ARCHIVES
The documentation of component maintenance, major repairs or alterations
will be handled and archived as procedure 7.6.
Page 7.5-3

7.6 COMPONENT DOCUMENTATION HANDLING
7.6
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE RECORD HANDLING
7.6.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the component maintenance records are handled and archived
IAW applicable requirements.
7.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for handling maintenance records of component
undergone shop visit.
7.6.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The shop supervisor/ RTS staff are responsible for gathering and
transferring all component maintenance record to Technical - Planning
division (TPD).
2.
TPD staff is responsible for reviewing, arranging and archiving all

component maintenance record.
7.6.4
PROCEDURE
7.6.4.1
Component maintenance record sending

1.
2.
3.
7.6.4.2
The component transferred to the shop from another shop with Work
Transit sheet will be returned with:
a.
Original Work Transit sheet (VAECO Form 7031);
b.
Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033);
c.
Test result sheets (if any);
The component transferred to the shop from BMC or RMC with VAECO
Form 6007 will be returned with:
a.
Original Job card Attaching Sheet (VAECO Form 6007);
b.
Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) with referred

test result sheets (if any);
c.
Original FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (if any);
The component transferred to the shop from main store will be returned
with:
a.
Original applicable Airworthiness Approval Tag (CAAV Form 1, FAA

Form 8130-3)
b.
Original Finding/ Repair Report (VAECO Form 7033) with referred

test result sheets (if any);
c.
Original FAA Form 337/ CAAV Form 523 (if any).
Maintenance record review and acceptance at respective TPD

1.
The following component maintenance record shall be sent to the

respective TPD just after job completion and within one (1) working day
since the date of job completion:
a.
Maintenance/ Repair Request (VAECO Form 4002);
Page 7.6-1

2.
7.6.4.3
7.6.4.4
b.
Original Work request;
c.
Original Maintenance Worksheet;
d.
Original Work Transit sheet (if any);
e.
Copy of Job card Attaching Sheet (if any);
f.
Copy of Finding/ Repair Report;
g.
Original Serviceable Tag of part installed or materials used in

maintenance, repair (if any); The copy of Serviceable Tag is
accepted in case the original Serviceable Tag keeping in the shop
for remaining items.
h.
Copy of applicable Airworthiness Approval Tag of the maintained

component;
i.
Test result sheets or related maintenance record (if any);
Respective TPD staff shall check the maintenance record to ensure that
all necessary information of performed work is entered in AMASIS. For
the H/T or LLP the TPD staff shall adjust the respective performing date
to be entered AMASIS in order to ensure that the next due date is the
same as actual due date specified in the Airworthiness Certificate or due
date based on AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner.
Scanning and archiving at respective TPD

1.
Respective TPD staff shall scan all component maintenance records

within 5 working days since receiving date of maintenance record. All
maintenance records relating to one work request are stored as an
electronic file (completed work pack) at least 2 years since the
completion date or until next equivalent work performed whichever is
longer..
2.
The hard copies of the component maintenance records are also

arranged and archived in folders for at least 2 years from the completion
date or until next equivalent work performed whichever is longer.
3.
The access to archived component maintenance records is only

permitted to authorized personnel.
4.
The archiving room shall be protected from weather element and insect.
Component maintenance record re-creation

The re-creation of component maintenance record is performed IAW para.
5.7.4.5.
7.6.4.5
Component logbook update and archiving

1.
Log books of VNA battery installed in Airbus and Fokker A/C are kept at
HAN Battery shop. Log books of battery installed in Boeing and ATR A/C
are kept at HCM Battery shop.
2.
Respective RTS staff shall update maintenance/ repair information into

battery log book. In the case of missing battery log book, the RTS staff
reports to TPD manager to buy or create a new one.
Page 7.6-2

3.
For the battery of Airbus and Fokker A/C that is maintained at HCM
CMC, the RTS staff of the HCM Battery shop shall send the Battery log
sheet (in hard copy or electronic file) to HAN CMC within five (5) working
days to update the log book.
4.
For the battery of Boeing and ATR A/C that is maintained at HAN CMC,
the staff of the HCM Battery shop shall send the necessary Battery log
sheet (in hard copy or electronic file) to HCM Battery shop within five (5)
working days to update the log book.
Page 7.6-3

7.7 WORKSHOP SPARE PART AND MATERIAL CONTROL
7.7
WORKSHOP SPARE PART & MATERIALS CONTROL
7.7.1
PURPOSE
To ensure all workshop spare parts/ materials is preserved IAW the
manufacturer requirement.
7.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling all spare parts/ materials stored at
the workshops.
7.7.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
Workshop manager are responsible for ensuring that spare parts/ materials is
preserved IAW the manufacturer requirement.
7.7.4
PROCEDURE
1.
The workshop spare parts and materials shall be stored in a specified

area. The shop supervisor shall regularly check the condition of the store
area to ensure the storage condition is IAW the manufacturer's
requirement.
2.
During maintaining, all spares/ materials needed, the RTS staff of

concerned workshop will create a Requisition Form (RF) on AMASIS and
print out as Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024). The Stock
Requisition should be signed by the Director or delegated person and
send to the LGD:
a.
Based on the availability of spares/ materials in stock, staff of LGD

will only issue the Purchase Order (PO) for the not/ nil stock items.
b.
When all spares/ materials (suitable types and quantities) are

available as required, the LGD staff make an Issue Slip (IS) to
perform the respective WO.
c.
The RTS staff monitor the RF. If the IS is available for the RF the
maintenance staff will get spares/ materials from the store to perform
related WO.
3.
Spare parts and materials in the workshop shall be always accompanied

with Serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Consumable release tag
(VAECO Form 0008) and placed on suitable racks/ cabinet with
appropriate label. Chemical materials shall be separated from other
parts/ materials.
4.
The shop manager or assigned person must monitor the storage

condition and shelf life of the spares/ materials remained in the shop
such as adhesive, sealant or other chemical materials. The spares/
materials with expired shelf life shall be discarded as specified in 4.9 or
returned to LGD as requested by LGD.
5.
The shop manager or assigned staff must update List of spares/

materials being stored at the shop (VAECO Form 7018) whenever the
information is changed and re-issue the list every quarter (at least).
Page 7.7-1

7.8 SEAT COVER AND CURTAIN WASHING CONTROL
7.8
SEAT COVER AND CURTAIN WASHING CONTROL
7.8.1
PURPOSE
To ensure washing of all seat covers and curtains are controlled in according
to manufacturers requirement and other applicable procedures.
7.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to seat covers and curtains installed on VNA
aircrafts
7.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of Cabin Interior maintenance center (CIMC) is responsible for:

a. Inspection of seat covers and curtains before and after washing.
b. Sending/ receiving seat covers and curtains to/ from washing agency.
c. Issuing Certificate of conformity for satisfied seat covers and curtains
after washing.
2.
Director of Logistic Department (LGD) is responsible for

a. Receiving seat covers and curtains from maintenance centers.
b. Sending seat covers and curtains to CIMC for performing inspection
and sending to washing agency.
c. Receiving and performing incoming inspection of seat covers and
curtains after washing from CIMC.
7.8.4
PROCEDURE
7.8.4.1
Removing seat covers and curtains from aircraft

Qualified staffs/ Certifying staffs remove and return unserviceable seat
covers and curtains to store in according to procedures SOP 6.6.4.3/ SOP
6.6.4.4.
7.8.4.2
7.8.4.3
Sending seat covers and curtains to washing agency

1.
LGD collects unserviceable seat covers and curtains and hands over to
respective CIMC for performing inspection before sending to washing
agency.
2.
Seat cover is considered as satisfied if it has not been torn, frayed,

raveled out, and faded out partly or totally.
3.
Respective CIMC collects satisfied seat covers and curtains, issue

handover sheet and send to washing agency.
Inspection of seat covers and curtains after washing and incoming

inspection
1.
Respective CIMC has responsibility for receiving seat covers and

curtains after washing from washing agency, issues handover sheet, and
evaluate serviceable status of seat covers based on standards
mentioned at paragraph 7.8.4.2(2).
Page 7.8-1

7.8.5
7.8 SEAT COVER AND CURTAIN WASHING CONTROL
2.
Appropriate qualified staffs or RTS staffs shall issue Certificate of

Conformity (COC VAECO Form 7036) for serviceable seat covers and
curtains.
3.
Respective CIMC hands over serviceable seat covers and curtains

together with COC to LGD for incoming inspection, issuing GRN,
serviceable tag and storing in according to applicable procedure.
ARCHIVES
COC shall be archived at LGD for at least 02 year since termination of using
all seat covers specified in the COC.
Page 7.8-2

PART 8 MAINT. SUPPORT PROC.
PART 8
MAINTENANCE SUPPORT
PROCEDURES
Page 8-1

8.1
MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL
8.1.1
PURPOSE
8.1 MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL
To ensure all maintenance data are currently and sufficiently controlled to

perform maintenance, including modifications and repairs.
8.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling the maintenance data.
8.1.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The manager of Technical Library (TL) is responsible for ensuring all

document and maintenance data are current and available and
distributing to maintenance centers/ departments and uploading on the
VAECO network.
2.
The Manager of TPD of maintenance centers are responsible for keeping

and updating all maintenance data sent from the TL and making this data
available to the maintenance staff.
3.
The Information Technology (IT) Team Leader is responsible for

ensuring all electronics maintenance data controlled on the Local Area
Network (LAN)/ VAECO Website are secured.
8.1.4
PROCEDURES
8.1.4.1
Document control in the VAECO Technical Library

1.
2.
Maintenance data are documents which contain instructions for

performing maintenance for aircraft, engine and component.
Maintenance data shall be any of the following:
a.
Any applicable requirement, procedure, operational directive or

information issued by the authority responsible for the oversight of
the aircraft or component;
b.
Any applicable airworthiness directive issued by the authority

responsible for the oversight of the aircraft or component.
c.
Instructions for continuing airworthiness, issued by type certificate

holders, supplementary type certificate holders, any other
organization required to publish such data by Part-21 and in the
case of aircraft or components from third countries the airworthiness
data mandated by the authority responsible for the oversight of the
aircraft or component.
d.
Any applicable standard, such as but not limited to, maintenance

standard practices recognized by the applicable as a good standard
for maintenance.
e.
Maintenance data that is modified IAW procedure 8.3.
The library staff shall enter the following information in Document

Management Software within 02 working days from the receiving date:
a.
Name of document; Effectivity, Issuer, Format, ATA;
b.
Issue/ revision number, revision date;
Page 8.1-1

3.
4.
8.1.4.2
c.
P/N of the equipment (if any);
d.
Location of document in library;
e.
Customer name (if any).
Documents shall be arranged and placed on identified and easy-toaccess cabinets basing on:
a.
Form of document (Paper, CD/ DVD, Microfilm);
b.
Issuer (Manufacturer, Operator, Authority, etc...);
c.
Type of aircraft, equipment;
Library rooms should be designed to prevent from insect, fire and

weather effect such as humidity, rain...
Document request, distribution and update

1.
Department/ Center Directors base on necessity of work send a request

to Engineering Director for supplying document. It is necessary to specify
the name, quantity, supplier or issuer and the reason in the request.
2.
When the document request is approved by the Engineering Director,

Technical Library shall look for required document in the document
management software. If the required document is not available at the
library, the library staff shall contact the issuer to make order.
3.
Technical Librarian shall make the copies of the document based on the
request and stamp CONTROLLED on the cover page before delivering.
4.
The required documents are distributed to users as follows:

a.
For users within Hanoi and Hochiminh city facilities, documents are
distributed to users directly from Hanoi library and Hochiminh city
branch library respectively.
b.
DAD Ramp maintenance center receive documents from Hanoi

library then distribute to users.
c.
The RTPD of the maintenance center that manages the outstation

shall distribute all necessary documents to the outstations.
d.
Documents distributed to Hochiminh city branch library and DAD

Ramp maintenance center shall be sent through post office. Library
staff is responsible to contact users for acknowledge of receipt/
update.
5.
For the technical data keeping onboard the VNA A/C, RTPD receives the
documents from Technical Library and updates them to the A/C. The
Onboard Technical Data List (VAECO Form 3026) should be kept in the
A/C Technical Log Book to reflect the current status of the documents.
6.
Updating newly revised document

a.
Updating new revision shall be carried out within 07 days from

receiving date.
b.
Document may be updated by mean of:
Page 8.1-2

Replacing old pages by new revision pages upon the list of

effective pages or equivalent instruction pages;
Replacing CD/ DVD by new revision;
Installing new revision of the document in LAN/ website server.
7.
Updating temporary revisions (TR)

a.
Upon receiving TRs, Library staff uses Document Control Software

to find out the quantity of TR copies to be prepared.
b.
All TRs must be updated no later than 07 days from the receiving
date.
c.
Updating TR
Electronic TR is printed on yellow paper. Paper TRs is copied on
yellow paper or scanned to file.
For paper document, updating is performed by inserting TR to the
document as instructed by the TR itself.
For document installed on LAN/ website server, updating is
performed by copying TR file to document folder.
For documents on CD/ DVD, a TR CD is sent to user to place
together with the related documents.
d.
8.1.4.3
After updating, all out-of-date TR files are removed from its folder on
the servers.
8.
Out-of-date CDs and document pages removed after updating must be

stamped OBSOLETE and stored at isolating location in the library for at
least two (2) years.
9.
Library staff shall establish/ update the Document Master List (VAECO
Form 3014) for each Department/ Maintenance Center.
Electronics Library
1.
Maintenance data in the electronics format are stored on the Web Server
of VAECO which is located in the head office at Noi Bai (Electronics
Library).
2.
Only authorized users who have accounts issued and controlled by IT

Team can be able to access the Electronics Library stored on the Web
Server. All Website accounts are secured by passwords. Passwords can
be changed by users themselves with at least 6 digits or characters.
3.
Only authorized users who are technical library staff can be able to
upload update electronics maintenance data to the server.
4.
Authorized user list must be controlled by IT Team.
5.
The library staff updates and controls the document on the server by the
same rules as 8.1.4.2. The old versions of documents installed on LAN/
website server must be removed completely before updating.
6.
All Website accounts are secured by passwords. Passwords can be

changed by users themselves with at least 6 digits or characters.
Page 8.1-3

8.2 TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA
7.
Authorized user list must be controlled by IT Team.
8.
IT Team must have Server Log Book to follow up all maintenance

performances of Server.
9.
Department/Center Directors on necessity of work send a request to

Engineering Director for issuing user account. It is necessary to specify
the full name, division, and working group in the request.
10. When the request is approved by the Engineering Director, IT Team shall
create user account within 24 hours since the time of receipt.
11. The Electronics Library on Web Server is automatically backed up daily
from VAECO Main Server at Noi Bai to backup Server at Hochiminh city.
8.1.4.4
8.1.4.5
8.1.5
Controlling the document validity

1.
User must use current data on VAECO Web Server or as instructed by

the librarian and verify amendment status of documents before using it
by checking the updated status IAW the Document Master List. If a
discrepancy found the user must report to the Library. The librarian must
co-ordinate with user to fix the problem as soon as possible.
2.
Quarterly, Technical Library shall check the current status of all

documents using in VAECO.
Controlling documents at the divisions/ workshops

1.
The Maintenance Centers may issue/ print-out documents to use in its

divisions/ workshops such as AMM tasks, modified maintenance data,
instruction to use/ operate and maintain tools/ equipment...
2.
The printed maintenance data shall be controlled by the TPD of

respective Maintenance Centers and they shall be stamped on the cover
page to identify as control copy for repetitive usage.
3.
The TPD of Maintenance Centers shall create a Current Document and

Technical Data List (VAECO Form 7055) to record current status of all
documents issued by the TPD. The document and Current Document
and Technical Data List shall be updated whenever any document in the
list is revised.
4.
The user shall inform to the related TPD when the documents are
missed, damaged or not corrected as information in the Current
Document and Technical Data List.
5.
The maintenance data and other controlled documents shall be kept in

identified racks/ cabinets.
ARCHIVES
1.
For the document issued by the TPD, the out-of-date pages/ documents
are kept at the TPD of respective Maintenance Centers at least 02 years
since the removed date.
2.
Hand over minutes, Document Master Lists must be stored at the

Technical Library for at least 02 years.
Page 8.1-4

8.2
TRANSCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE DATA
8.2.1
PURPOSE
To ensure establish procedure for transcribe approved/ accepted
maintenance data into VAECO maintenance documents to make guidance
on performing, recording and certifying the completion of maintenance tasks.
8.2.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for issuance of VAECO maintenance documents.
8.2.3
8.2.4
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The Director of EGD is responsible for issuing EO, TI IAW this

procedure.
2.
Director of BMC is responsible for issuing SRO IAW this procedure.
3.
TPD of maintenance centers are responsible for issuing Worksheet IAW

this procedure.
PROCEDURES
1.
VAECO may transcribe approved maintenance data into maintenance

documents to make guidance on performing, recording and certifying the
completion of maintenance tasks.
2.
While copying/ transcribing maintenance data, composer must ensure

the following:
3.
a.
Maintenance document is written in English.
b.
Name, revision of maintenance data is recorded in the maintenance

document.
c.
Maintenance document has precise reference to particular

maintenance task or is transcribed accurately from approved
maintenance data.
d.
It is recommended to break down complicated procedures into small

stages in order to ensure that the completion of maintenance task
will be clearly recorded.
e.
Maintenance document has enough space for recording

measurement results, inspection finding and P/N and S/N of tools or
equipment used for implementing maintenance/ inspection work.
f.
Maintenance document has enough space for signature and stamps

certifying for task completion.
g.
Maintenance document is controlled by reference number and

revision.
Before issuing, the following maintenance documents must be approved

by an authorized person:
a.
EO (VAECO Form 3003);
b.
TI (VAECO Form 3017);
Page 8.2-1

c.
SRO (VAECO Form 6009);
d.
Component maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032).
4.
During effective period of maintenance documents (From issuance date

to completion of maintenance task), the maintenance documents should
be updated when original data has been changed or revised.
5.
Procedure for EO issuance can be found in Item 8.6.
6.
Procedure for TI issuance can be found in Item 8.7.
7.
Procedure for SRO issuance can be found in Item 12.16.
8.
Procedure for Component worksheet issuance can be found in Item 7.2.
Page 8.2-2

8.3
MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING
8.3.1
PURPOSE
8.3 MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING
To ensure all maintenance data are modified IAW applicable requirements.

8.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for modifying maintenance data when necessary.
8.3.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Director of EGD is responsible for ensuring all modified maintenance
data are pertinent to use.
8.3.4
PROCEDURES
8.3.4.1
General
8.3.4.2
1.
Maintenance data is only modified by VAECO when maintenance quality,

results from such modification, will be equal or higher than the origin, and
ensuring its basic content is unchanged. The maintenance data
mentioned in this paragraph are the instructions for specific maintenance
task. It does not include repair designs, modifications and ADs.
2.
Maintenance data may be modified:

a.
For easier and more effective in maintenance;
b.
When the original intent of maintenance data is hard for worker to

follow.
Prepare of modified maintenance data

1.
After receiving Request to modify maintenance data (VAECO Form

3005) from maintenance centers, EGD assigns an appropriate qualified
engineer to compile Modified maintenance data.
2.
Assigned engineer shall:

a.
Compile Modified Maintenance Data (VAECO Form 3006).

Reference number of modified maintenance data will be numbered
as follows:
Original maintenance data reference number/ VAECO,
Example: Reference number of maintenance data needed to be
modified for Task 72-00-00-200-001 will be: 72-00-00-200001/VAECO
b.
Inform manufacturers or TC or STC holder;
c.
Adjust the modification in accordance with feed-back from

manufacturer if necessary;
d.
Based on manufacturers recommendations, revise the Modified

maintenance data and launch a demonstration test (if necessary).
Members for evaluating this test are: EGD, QAD and Requested
Maintenance center.
Page 8.3-1

e.
8.3.4.3
8.3.4.4
8.3.5
8.3 MAINTENANCE DATA MODIFYING
Test results are recorded in the Sample modification record (VAECO

Form 3022) with signatures from the above members.
Approval for modified maintenance data

1.
The Modified maintenance data with attached of related documents shall

be submitted to QAD for approval.
2.
The attached document includes but not limited to:

a.
Maintenance data needed to be modified;
b.
Recommendations of manufacturer.
c.
Sample modification record (if available).
Application and control of modified maintenance data:

1.
After being approved, modified maintenance data will be controlled by

VAECO Library in according with procedure 8.1;
2.
EGD shall monitor the Modified Maintenance Data to:

a.
Update Modified maintenance data when the original data has been
changed;
b.
Cancel Modified maintenance data if it is no longer valid.
ARCHIVES
1.
2.
The original documents of Modified maintenance data storage at EGD

include:
a.
Request of Modifying Maintenance Data form;
b.
Modified Maintenance Data form;
c.
Sample Modification Record;
d.
Recommendations of the manufacturer or STC holder.
These documents are archived in EGD for a minimum of 01 year since

the Modified maintenance data is cancelled.
Page 8.3-2

8.4 NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE DATA INACCURACIES AND

AMBIGUITIES TO THE AUTHOR
8.4
NOTIFICATION OF MAINTENANCE
8.4.1
PURPOSE
DATA
INACCURACIES
AND
To ensure the maintenance data inaccuracies and ambiguities are reported

to the author of the maintenance data.
8.4.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for reporting the maintenance data inaccuracies
and ambiguities to the author of the maintenance data.
8.4.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
EGD is responsible for ensuring all inaccuracies and ambiguities found in
maintenance data are reported to the relevant author.
8.4.4
PROCEDURES
1.
When receipt of Maintenance data ambiguities and inaccuracies report

(VAECO Form 3007) from VAECO staffs, EGD shall assign a qualified
engineer to assess the reported content;
2.
In case the reported content can be comprehend has been found no

ambiguities and inaccuracies, assigned engineer shall provide
explanations and suitable instructions to the report maker.
3.
When ensuring that the content of document is ambiguous and/or

inaccurate, assigned engineer shall:
4.
5.
a.
Immediately notify TC/STC holder to request the correction/

clarification;
b.
Notify the departments using maintenance data about

ambiguities and inaccuracies confirmed in maintenance data.
the
As soon as receiving feedback from TC/STC holder, corrective action is

performed as follows:
a.
Issue MAINTENANCE DATA TEMPORARY REVISION NOTICE

(VAECO Form 3008) to all departments which use the related
maintenance data to support accuracy information before receiving
official update from the TC/STC holder. The corrections in
Maintenance Data Temporary Revision Notice should refer
accurately to the instruction documents from TC/STC holder;
b.
Inform AD/SB Control Team to follow the maintenance data

correction.
AD/SB Control Team is responsible to monitor the correction until it is

revised in related maintenance data. If the correction is not incorporated
on time, AD/SB Control Team will give notice to ST holder to request
accomplishment.
Page 8.4-1

8.4.5

ARCHIVES
Maintenance data ambiguities and inaccuracies report, Maintenance Data
temporary revision notice and the related documents are archived in EGD for
at least 2 years since the maintenance data is revised.
Page 8.4-2

8.5
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
8.5.1
PURPOSE

To give technical support to maintenance staff in maintenance activities.

8.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for supporting the maintenance staff in
maintenance activities when requested.
8.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
The Technical service section of maintenance centers are responsible

for the following main functions:
a.
Assist the maintenance staff in clarifying and interpretation of the

technical issues such as specifications, standards, work process and
other maintenance data.
b.
Review and prepare the job card and accompanied maintenance

document from the current maintenance manual.
c.
Contact EGD for assistance on complicated technical matter.
d.
Assist the maintenance staff in trouble shooting and fault isolation.
e.
Evaluating and developing the shop capability.
Director of EGD is responsible for:

a.
Assist other departments on engineering issues that out of capability

of such departments.
b.
Contact manufacturer and the customer for the applicable working

standards, general practices and maintenance process and obtain
necessary approval thereof.
c.
Gathering and analysis relevant data for the customer as required.
d.
Obtain necessary technical information and issue the technical

instruction for maintenance upon request from maintenance center.
e.
Evaluate and coordinate customers requirement for airframe, power

plant and component maintenance.
8.5.4
PROCEDURE
8.5.4.1
Engineering Order, Technical Instruction and Engineering request

Engineering Order (EO), Technical Instruction (TI) and Engineering Request
(ER) are documents issued by EGD to assist other departments on technical
issues. Those documents are used on a case by case basic as follows:
1.
Engineering Order
Engineering Order (VAECO Form 3003) is a maintenance document,
transcribed from approved/ accepted maintenance data IAW Item 8.2,
and issued to give instructions on performing, recording and certifying
the completion of maintenance tasks.
Page 8.5-1

2.

Technical Instruction
a.
Technical Instruction (VAECO Form 3017) is a maintenance

document compiled based on maintenance data, Manufacturer
recommendations and issued as a work instruction.
b.
Technical Instruction is issued in the following cases:

To carry out a local modification;
To rectify a defect which is not specifically mentioned in AMM;
To carry out inspection/ test of parts/ systems as necessary.
3.
8.5.4.2
c.
Technical Instruction should be prepared based on approved/

accepted data and approved by EGD.
d.
Technical Instruction, after approved, should be controlled by

Technical Library IAW procedure 8.1.
Engineering request
a.
Engineering request (VAECO Form 3004) is issued to order other

department conducting necessary work in order to improve
maintenance quality of VAECO based on requirements of
maintenance data, Manufacturer recommendations and/ or EGDs
investigation/research results.
b.
Engineering request is also issued to request for supporting from

related department on occurrence investigation or defect
rectification
c.
The work requested in the ER can be performed by standard

practice or is referred to Technical Data.
d.
ER is normally to be performed in short term and one times, it also

may request to record the result after performing the work to
feedback to EGD.
e.
To deploy, Engineering Division of EGD send ER to MCC, MCC

shall creates the WO on AMASIS for the A/C affected then make
plan and assign to RMCs, BMCs to perform the work.
Technical Memorandum
a.
Technical Memorandum (TM - VAECO Form 3025) is issued by

Engineering Division of EGD to give a memorandum of a
requirement called by an AD or other technical issue that is not
mentioned or not clearly mentioned in Technical Data.
b.
When a TM is issued the EGD shall upload TM on the Technical

Memorandum menu of the VAECO Website home page, make
announcement in the home page and inform to related department/
center and QAD.
c.
Quality Assurance Department shall evaluate TM and issue Quality

Notice for the TM (if necessary).
Page 8.5-2

8.5.4.3
8.5.4.4

Technical Assistance Request

1.
Technical Assistance Request (TAR - VAECO Form 3015) is raised by

maintenance staff to request the support when a difficulty occurs during
maintenance.
2.
TAR may be issued in the following cases:

a.
Request for maintenance data or maintenance instruction;
b.
Clarify the interchangeability and mixability of components, materials

and expendables;
c.
Provide the configuration of A/Cs, engines, components;
Technical support
1.
If a defect or technical problem cannot be resolved by the maintenance

squad, the supervisor creates a TAR (VAECO Form 3015) and sends to
the Technical service section for assistance.
2.
The engineer of Technical service section should evaluate and base on

approved/ accepted data to provide assistance by filling on the TAR.
3.
If the issue is out of maintenance center capability, Technical service

staff sends the TAR with related document to EGD for assistance. For
tracking purpose, the TAR should be numbered IAW the following rules:
xxx/yy/zzz. Where:
+ xxx is the code of maintenance center as follows:
Maintenance center
HAN Base Maintenance Center
HAN Ramp Maintenance Center
HAN Component Maintenance Center
HCM Base Maintenance Center
HCM Ramp Maintenance Center
HCM Component Maintenance Center
DAN Ramp Maintenance Center
Code
HBM
HLM
HCM
SBM
SLM
SCM
DLM
+ yy is the last two digits of the year

+ zzz is the ordinal number of the TAR
4.
Upon received the TAR, engineering staff of EGD is assigned to evaluate

and provide the assistance information.
5.
If the issue is out of EGD capability, assigned engineering staff may

contact manufacturer, customer for support.
6.
When the requested information is available, assigned engineering staff

completes the TAR with the feedback information and returns to
maintenance center for action. If necessary, assigned engineering staff
of EGD can issue EO, ER or TI for instruction. In this case, the reference
of EO, ER or TI should be mentioned in the TAR.
Page 8.5-3

8.6
ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE
8.6.1
PURPOSE
8.6 ENGINEERING ORDER ISSUANCE
To ensure the EO are issued IAW applicable requirements.

8.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for EO issuance for performing the maintenance,
repair of aircraft as required by the Authorities and/or Customers.
8.6.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Director of EGD is responsible for ensuring that the EO is issued IAW
approved maintenance data and by qualified staff.
8.6.4
PROCEDURES
8.6.4.1
General
1.
8.6.4.2
ENGINEERING ORDER (EO) is the maintenance document issued to

instruct performing the following work:
a.
Technical requirements of the Operator;
b.
Airworthiness Directives for aircraft, aircraft components;
c.
Service Bulletins, Vendor Service Bulletins approved by the

Operator to perform on aircraft, aircraft components;
d.
Structure damage repairs which are out of SRM limits;
e.
Airworthiness Requests from Authorities;
f.
Requests to inspect and repair damage in order to maintain safety

aircraft operation, defined by EGD.
2.
ONLY qualified engineers can prepare EO. Other staffs who have not
been qualified can prepare EO under supervision of the qualified
engineers.
3.
When issuing EO, engineers must strictly comply with requirements in

procedure .
4.
The required spares/ materials and tools to perform each EO should be

input in the AMASIS after approval.
5.
EO (VAECO Form 3003) includes two main parts:

a.
PROCESS Approval;
b.
Worksheet.
Process approval
PROCESS APPROVAL is used to describe general information of EO and is
used for approval/ issuance purposes. The information in PROCESS
APPROVAL includes:
1.
EO number, Revision No., Issued date, OTHER REF: other documents

which EO refers to such as AD/ SB Number, AMM/ EM task number
together with issue/ revision number of those.
Page 8.6-1

2.
3.
TITLE. Title must clearly define:

a.
General content or subject of EO;
b.
Concerned AD, SB or VSB number;
EFFECTIVITY: aircraft(s), aircraft equipment(s) on which maintenance

actions in EO will be performed. This section must clearly state that:
a.
For aircraft: MSN or A/C registration;
b.
For A/C equipment: Serial number.
4.
CATEGORY: Mandatory/ Alert/ Recommended;
5.
TASK TYPE: Modification/ Inspection/ Repair
6.
SCHEDULING PRIORITY: Deadline and Intervals of EO;
7.
MANUAL AFFECTED: Maintenance Manual, IPC:
8.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE: Changes in Center of Gravity and Weight of

aircraft after carrying out EO;
9.
COMMENTS: Other necessary information and purposes of EO:

Customers Service Order;
10. EGD APPROVAL: Name and Signature of persons who prepare the EO
and Engineering Director or delegated personnel who accept the EO;
11. COST/ INVESTMENT: Time and necessary investments (spares, tools,
equipment, materials) for performing tasks;
12. MANAGEMENT APPROVAL: Customer approval in case the EO is
required to approve.
8.6.4.3
Worksheet
1.
2.
3.
WORKSHEET can be used for different aircrafts, aircraft component.

WORKSHEET includes the following sections:
a.
PLANNING: To write WO/ WP number each time the EO is

performed for one specific aircraft (MSN)/ aircraft equipment (S/N).
The WO/ WP is numbered by AMASIS.
b.
TOOLING AND MATERIALS: List of materials, equipment and tools

needed to perform the EO. All spares/ materials required to perform
the EO shall be input in AMASIS.
c.
WORK REQUIREMENT: List the procedure of the maintenance

tasks
WORKSHEET is also used for recording the accomplishment of

maintenance work. As a result, engineers should maintain:
a.
Clear and easy to understand arrangement and separation of the

tasks
b.
Enough space for recording the inspection results.
TECHNICAL RECORD REQUIREMENT: Instruction for the Tech Record

Team to record the accomplishment of specific tasks into aircraft, aircraft
Page 8.6-2

component log books and update the maintenance information into

AMASIS.
a.
Maintenance tasks required to record into aircraft, engine logbook

are:
Record the accomplishment of the AOT/ AD/ SB No It R ...
into AIRCRAFT LOG BOOK if the EO is issued to perform
aircrafts AOT/ AD/ Mandatory SB, or
Record the embodiment of MOD Mandatory No into
MANDATORY MODIFICATION RECORD OF MODIFICATION
RECORD BOOK if the EO is issued to perform SB with MOD
number or work related to major structure repair, or
Record the embodiment of MOD/REPAIR REF No. into
MODIFICATION AND REPAIR RECORD OF MODIFICATION
RECORD BOOK, or
Record the accomplishment of the AOT/ AD/ SB No It R ...
into ENGINE LOG BOOK/ APU LOG BOOK if the EO is issued
to perform engine/ APUs AOT/ AD/ Mandatory SB.
b.
Information required to update in AMASIS are:

Removal/ Installation of aircrafts components/ assembly;
Changes in Part numbers of components.
4.
REMARK/ FINDING:
REMARK/ FINDING
accomplishment.
8.6.5
records
additional
information
during
EO
ARCHIVES
All EOs are archived in EGD for minimum 3 years since the date of EO
closed.
Page 8.6-3

8.7 TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION
8.7
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTION FOR PART FABRICATION
8.7.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure for Self-Development of design data and issue of
work instruction for CAT 3 part fabrication.
8.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for fabrication of repair part when design data and/
or work instruction cannot obtain from OEM or customer.
8.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of EGD is responsible for self-development of design data and

issuance of the Technical Instruction for part fabrication.
2.
Customer is responsible for acceptance and getting approval from

competence authority (if applicable) for the design data.
8.7.4
PROCEDURE
8.7.4.1
Self-Development of design data

1.
2.
8.7.4.2
When acceptable design data or drawing is not available and upon

request of customer, EGD shall develop the design data for a new part
fabrication as follows:
a.
Define necessary specifications for the part based on acceptable

data such as FAA part 25, Service Bulletins, AC 43.13-2A, AMM,
CMM, etc.
b.
Establish drawing that contains necessary information such as:

dimensions, tolerance, materials
c.
Implement the stress report and/ or dynamic test to prove that the
design is comfort to the defined specifications, if applicable.
The design data contain all information above and reference document
shall be sent to customer for acceptance, and getting approval from
competence authority if applicable.
Technical Instruction Issuance

1.
2.
When the part fabrication arises, the Aircraft Engineering Division - EGD
shall thoroughly review the design data or specification provided by the
customer, and determines if part fabrication is feasible. The following
conditions will be basis for evaluation:
a.
Special tooling requirements
b.
Special manufacturing processes
c.
Complexity of the part
If VAECO has capability to produce the part, Aircraft Engineering

Division of EGD shall prepare the Technical Instruction for part
fabrication (VAECO Form 3020). The following information shall be
contained when preparing the form:
Page 8.7-1

a.
The original manufacturers Part number/Name List the part(s) to be

fabricated with the VAECO part number and nomenclature, and also
specify the quantity required for the part(s).
b.
Acceptable design drawings with reference to the approved data

used to show the configuration of the fabricated part(s), including all
required dimensions.
c.
Material specification that specifies the material type(s) and

specifications to define the physical and chemical properties of the
fabricated part(s) (if necessary).
d.
Special manufacturing processes that shall be followed during part

fabrication to show the conformity to the acceptable data and part
quality.
e.
The in-process and final inspections required during part fabrication

operation mainly to ensure that materials and fabricated parts
conform to the applicable design data without any deviations.
f.
Testing specified in the acceptable design data, state the test

procedures in accordance with the methods given in the acceptable
data to verify the fabricated parts be conforming to the acceptable
design data.
g.
Substantiating data including test reports, analysis, computations,

etc. are required to show the fabricated parts for repair and/or
alteration meet the applicable airworthiness standards. Attach these
data to the TI where applicable.
h.
Part number of the fabricated part shall be identified when the

fabricated part is accepted by conformity inspection. For
distinguishing the VAECO fabricated part from the originally
manufactured part and for traceability, the part number is defined as
follows:
Originally manufactured P/N: AAA
VAECO fabricated P/N: AAA-VAE
Note: If the size of the part makes it impractical to mark, the marking
information will be included in the part records or by the used of an
affixed tag.
8.7.4.3
Approval of Technical Instruction for part fabrication:

1.
After completion, the Technical Instruction for part fabrication is

submitted to EG director for review. The TI then is sent to QAD.
2.
If all requirements are fulfilled QAD shall approve the TI and send to
customer for concurrence. Customer may need to get approval from
competence authority for the TI for part fabrication.
3.
For soft furnishing parts installed in the VNA A/C, QAD shall accept the
part fabrication by signature in the List of fabricated soft furnishings
(VAECO Form 7023).
Page 8.7-2

8.7.4.4
8.7.5
Technical Instruction control

1.
The current TI shall be sent to Technical Library for control IAW

procedure 8.1.
2.
The current TI shall be sent to related maintenance center and updated

by EGD and for future fabrication of the part.
ARCHIVES
The TI and design data is archived in Technical Library.
Page 8.7-3

8.8 ACCEPTANCE OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT
8.8
ACCEPTANCE OF TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
8.8.1
PURPOSE
To ensure tools and equipment (T&E) are checked/ inspected and accepted
before releasing to use in maintenance activities IAW appropriate regulatory
requirements.
8.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to the inspection and receiving process of all T&E
that will be utilized by VAECO staff for aircraft maintenance from approved
suppliers or calibration agency.
8.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of LGD is responsible for:

a. Primary inspection and acceptance of T&E.
b. Purchasing, leasing, borrowing, exchanging T&E.
2.
8.8.4
Director of respective CMC/ DAD RMC is responsible for final inspection

and acceptance, keeping and storing of the T&E that delivered from
LGD.
GENERAL
1.
All T&E, before using at VAECO, must go through an inspection/

acceptance process.
2.
The T&E purchased, borrowed or returned after calibration/ maintenance

shall have the sufficiency technical document (operation/ maintenance/
user manual), certificate and/or report as following:
a.
For the purchased T&E:

The certificate of compliance/ conformance or other equivalent
documents (for specific T&E);
Technical document;
Calibration certificate (if any);
Other related document.
b.
For the T&E returned after maintenance: Maintenance/ repair report/

certificate.
c.
For the T&E returned after calibration: Calibration certificate and/or

calibration report.
d.
For the T&E borrowed/ leased/ exchanged from supplier:

The certificate of compliance/ conformance or other equivalent
documents (for specific T&E);
Technical document;
The serviceable tag/ label issued by the supplier with the
calibration information or calibration certificate/ record (for
calibration required T&E).
Page 8.8-1

Note: The certificate/ technical document could be in copy as long as the

serviceable tag/ label issued by the supplier is original.
3.
The T&E calibration certificate/ report shall be issued by a calibration

agency accepted by the VAECO QAD (listed in the VAECO Form 2062 Recognized Calibration Service Supplier List).
8.8.5
ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE OF VAECO TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
8.8.5.1
Receiving of T&E at LGD

1.
Tool/ equipment is newly purchased or borrowed or returned after repair/

calibration from extrinsic agencies will be segregated at receiving area to
perform incoming inspection.
2.
In the incoming inspection, the Store Inspector shall:

a. Check information in T&E accompanied certificate/ document and the
order to ensure it is appropriate.
b. Check for physical condition, ensuring that the T&E is free from visual
defects and damage;
c. Check the accompanied certificates and technical document
mentioned in item 2 of 8.8.4 to ensure they are sufficiency and
validity;
d. Fill information in the Receiving/ Delivering minute of Tool/ Equipment
(VAECO Form 7011).
3.
The Store Inspector shall issue Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004)
to report any discrepancies to LGD Director. Tool/ equipment with any
discrepancy shall be held in quarantine area. The LGD staff contacts the
supplier for instruction/ solution.
4.
All T&E and accompanied original certificates, technical document shall

be handed over to respective CMC.
5.
For outside purchased tool/ equipment that do not have P/N and S/N, the
LGD staff contacts related CMC to determine P/N and S/N for that tool/
equipment before declaring it in AMASIS (except hand tools that are
controlled IAW 8.9.5.5 of this manual) as follows:
6.
8.8.5.2
a.
P/N: OPIxxxx, in which, xxxx is sequent number = 0001, 0002;

(OPI means Outside Purchased Item). Use the next available
number.
b.
S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the next
available number.
All the necessary information of the delivered tool/ equipment will be

recorded into a Receiving/ Delivering minute of Tool/ Equipment
(VAECO Form 7011) with the signatures of both deliverer and receiver.
Acceptance of tools and equipment at respective CMC/ DAD RMC

1.
The Tool controller shall carry out the followings:
Page 8.8-2

a. Check the information in calibration/ maintenance certificates/ records

and technical document to ensure they are acceptable;
b. Perform detail inspection of physical condition, specification and
technical status, included specific manufacturer's requirements such
as storage condition, maintenance requirement ;
c. Carry out operation test of tool/ equipment if necessary.
2.
Tool controller shall refuse to accept the T&E if there is any discrepancy
and issue T&E Refusal Report (VAECO Form 7013) to report to LGD
Director and respective CMC Director/ DAD RMC Director. The
unaccepted T&E shall be placed in quarantine area for further action.
3.
For the measuring and test tool/ equipment:

a. Tool controller will classify and determine the calibration requirements
(interval and parameters) based on:
Manufacturers certificates and/ or technical document for the new
tool/ equipment;
Calibration certificate/ report and/ or repair report for the tool/
equipment after calibration/ maintenance.
b. Tool controller will determine the calibration interval/ due date. If there
is no information of calibration due date or interval in the certificate,
maximum interval shall not be more than 1 year. The calibration
interval is determined based on:
Manufacturer's recommendation/ requirement;
Other referenced National regulation and standards;
The level of accuracy and the technical requirements;
The using and keeping condition.
c. Tool controller shall evaluate, analyze the calibration result and
record into Calibration result evaluation report (VAECO Form 7022).
d. The Calibration Control Label (VAECO Form 0004) shall be issued
and affixed to each tool/ equipment that has not been calibrated at
VAECOs calibration laboratories. This label must include the Serial
number of the tool/ equipment and the calibration due date.
e. For the measuring and test tool/ equipment, if its calibration is not
required (by the manufacturer) the Calibration Not Required label
(VAECO Form 0018) shall be affixed on that tool/ equipment.
f.
If the calibration required tool/ equipment is determined to be out-oftolerance it shall be attached with the Tool/ Equipment
Unserviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002) and kept in separate area.
Tool controller shall report to Manager of Calibration workshop. In
this case, Manager of Calibration workshop shall implement one of
the following solutions:
Send it to manufacturers service center for repair/ calibration.
Page 8.8-3

Re-define usable range of the measuring and test tool/

equipment IAW Para. 9 of 8.10.5.1.
Report to respective CMC Director for tool/ equipment disposition
if it is un-repairable or beyond economical repair.
8.8.5.3
Outstation inspection/ acceptance of T&E

In case of performing unscheduled maintenance at outstation, some of T&E
could be purchased (or borrowed, shared...) directly from suppliers/ other
sources (Airlines, AMOs). The receiving and acceptance process of T&E
could be done with the instruction from store inspector and tool controller (if
necessary). In this case, all the key requirements must be maintained. The
information of Tool/ equipment (Description, P/N, S/N, calibration and expiry
date (if applicable)) should be sent to LGD for entering in the AMASIS.
8.8.6
ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE OF CUSTOMER PROVIDED TOOLS AND

EQUIPMENT
1.
Incoming inspection personnel of LGD or tool controller of DAD RMC will

perform the incoming inspection of the T&E to ensure:
a.
T&E has no visual defects and/or damages.
b.
Calibration required T&E has a tag/ label/ certificate showing the

valid calibration. The calibration agency shall be listed in the VAECO
Form 2062 - Recognized Calibration Service Supplier List or
accepted by the relevant Authority.
2.
If a discrepancy is found the incoming inspection personnel/ tool

controller shall place the T&E in quarantine area, make Discrepancy
Report (VAECO Form 4004) and send to Customer for further action.
3.
In the case, the Customer (Operator/ Air Carrier) has no contract with
VAECO to control/ perform calibration and/or maintenance, The
Customer has responsibility to control the calibration and/or maintenance
schedule and perform calibration/ maintenance accordingly.
4.
In the case, the Customer has a contract with VAECO to control/ perform
calibration and/or maintenance, the copy of related certificate and
technical document should be provided to VAECO:
a.
The LGD shall send the related certificate and technical document of
T&E to related CMC and EGD to create the calibration and
maintenance program.
b.
The regional CMC creates the calibration/ maintenance schedule

and specifies all maintenance/ calibration that could be performed
itself and send to LGD for monitoring.
c.
For the maintenance required T&E used at DAD RMC, the technical
document of the T&E shall be sent to EGD for updating maintenance
program. The DAD RMC shall establish the maintenance and/or
calibration schedule and monitor/ perform the schedule.
Page 8.8-4

8.8.7
8.8.8
8.8.9
5.
The LGD/ DAD RMC will keep the T&E at the storage area that meet the
preservation condition required by the customer. All Customers T&E will
be listed and managed by the LGD/ DAD RMC.
6.
LGD/ DAD RMC staff shall create an Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016)
to attach to the T&E to show that it is only used for the respective
customer.
Register Tool/ Equipment in the management software and handling of

related documents.
1.
For a new tool/ equipment which has a serial number, Tool controller will
classify it in suitable material class (e.g. TOS for specific tool/ equipment)
and enter any necessary information into AMASIS system;
2.
Copies/ Scans of Calibration Certificates and/ or Certificate of Conformity

will be kept at respective Tool store or unit who manages the tool/
equipment.
3.
The original technical document will be sent to Tool and equipment

control section of EGD for creation of maintenance program (if required).
The original technical document is then transferred to Technical Library.
The respective CMC/ DAD RMC will make a copy of technical document
to attach with T&E for use (if necessary).
4.
For a used tool/ equipment that have been received after calibration,
Tool controller will enter calibration date, calibration agency and other
necessary information into AMASIS system.
5.
For a used tool/ equipment that have been maintained, Tool controller
will also enter maintenance date, maintenance agency and other
necessary information into management software developed by EGD.
6.
Basing on technical document of new tool/ equipment, The Tool &

Equipment control division of EGD shall update Maintenance Program.
Transferring tool/ equipment

1.
After acceptance by Tool controller, T&E shall be transferred to Tool

store of respective CMC with appropriate tag/ label and documents for
keeping and using.
2.
In case T&E is transferred to other tool store/ department then the

attached tags/ technical documents (copy) shall be accompanied with
tool/ equipment.
3.
If the tool/ equipment is transferred in unserviceable/ overdue calibration

status or the calibration is due within one month the receiver and
calibration workshop manager of the receiver shall be informed.
Training of personnel in the use of T&E:

1.
In case of T&E with complicated operation procedure, the EGD makes

proposal of a training course to the users/ maintenance personnel.
2.
For the T&E training course organized by Manufacturer/ Supplier, the

EGD shall preside at the course and make a list of trained staffs
(together with certificates or pass list, if any) and send to HRD.
Page 8.8-5

8.8.10
3.
For the T&E training course that could be organized by Training Center,
the training process shall perform as specified in Part 11 of this SOP.
4.
Only the person who is passed the training course (if any) is allowed to
operate/ maintain the respective T&E.
ARCHIVES
1.
All the original certificates will be kept at respective CMC/ DAD RMC.
2.
All the original technical documents of tool/ equipment are kept at the
Technical Library.
3.
All the purchase/ repair orders and copy of certificates are kept in LGD.
4.
All the certificates and related documents must be kept at least 02 years
since the tool/ equipment is removed from service.
Page 8.8-6

8.9 MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT
8.9
MANAGEMENT OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT
8.9.1
PURPOSE
To ensure all tools and equipment used to maintain aircraft/ aircraft
component are managed in accordance with applicable requirements.
8.9.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to all tools and equipment (T&E) used by VAECO
staff for performing aircraft, aircraft engine and component maintenance.
8.9.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
Engineering Director is responsible for:

a.
Defining the need of T&E for aircraft and aircraft component

maintenance in VAECO;
b.
Establishing stock level of T&E in VAECO;
c.
Establishing the Maintenance Program for all T&E that required

maintenance;
d.
Initiating the training of T&E if necessary;
e.
Designing complicated/ specific T&E required from Technical Data.

For the complicated and valuable T&E, the EGD submits the project
to CEO for approval then deploys the project;
f.
Cooperating with CMC and QAD in evaluation of equivalent T&E.
The respective CMC Directors are responsible for:

a.
Checking and accepting the T&E handed over from LGD;
b.
Keeping T&E and ensuring the availability and serviceability of all

T&E necessary for maintenance activities;
c.
Annually, basing on approved Maintenance Programs, creating the

Maintenance Schedule for all T&E used in the assigned region.
d.
Controlling the Maintenance Schedule. Maintaining the assigned

T&E and T&E of other centers if the work is within its capability;
Updating the operation and maintenance information of the assigned
T&E on VAECO website.
e.
Establishing the Calibration Program for all T&E that required

calibration in the assigned areas;
f.
Initiating the usage of equivalent T&E;
g.
Designing simple and non-specific T&E;
h.
Initiating manufacturing process of T&E and fabricating T&E

according to approved design;
i.
Making request for supplement of T&E for common usage;
j.
Confirming the capability to maintain/ repair the T&E as request from

users.
Page 8.9-1

3.
4.
5.
8.9.4
DAD Ramp Maintenance Director is responsible for:

a.
Checking and accepting the T&E handed over from LGD;
b.
Keeping T&E and ensuring the availability and serviceability of all

T&E necessary for maintenance activities;
c.
Annually, basing on approved Maintenance Programs, creating the

Maintenance Schedule for all assigned T&E.
d.
Establishing the Calibration Program for all assigned T&E that

required calibration;
e.
Controlling the Maintenance and Calibration Schedule. Maintaining

the assigned T&E; Updating the operation and maintenance
information of the assigned T&E on VAECO website;
f.
Making request for supplement of T&E.
HAN and HCM Ramp and Base Maintenance Directors are responsible
for:
a.
Controlling, properly using and keeping all the assigned T&E;
b.
Making request for supplement of T&E;
c.
Controlling and maintaining the Maintenance Schedule. Coordinating

with the CMC to determine the capability to perform scheduled
maintenance work (for assigned T&E);
d.
Sending T&E maintenance request to respective CMC as the

schedule; Giving the solution/ work scope to sending T&E to
manufacturer or other approved maintenance agency for the work
out of respective CMCs capability;
e.
Updating the operation and maintenance information of the assigned

T&E on VAECO website;
f.
Assuring that the maintenance personnel use the appropriate T&E.
Technical staff who use the T&E is responsible for:

a.
Properly using the T&E IAW manufacturer instructions;
b.
Keeping and performing minor maintenance IAW manufacturer

requirements;
c.
Reporting to his manager and respective CMC (for the T&E

borrowed from the tool store) when finding a tool/ equipment is lost
or damaged or Calibration Stamp/ Calibration Control label is
damaged/ peeled off.
GENERAL
1.
Only T&E that specified in Technical Data or equivalent one can be used
for maintenance.
2.
VAECO maintenance staff can only use provided or borrowed T&E from
Tool store. Usage of self-equipped T&E or T&E from unapproved
sources is strictly forbidden.
Page 8.9-2

3.
VAECO maintenance staff can only use the test and measuring tool/
equipment that is controlled IAW procedure 8.10.
4.
The Usage Notice (VAECO Form 0016) shall be raised by the person
who manages the tool/ equipment to specify all liquid used/ contained in
that tool/ equipment. The maintenance staff can only use the liquid
specified in the Usage Notice to refill/ maintain that tool/ equipment.
5.
T&E shall be kept IAW requirements of the manufacturer.
8.9.5
MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE OF VAECO T&E
8.9.5.1
Storage and keeping of tool/ equipment in Tool stores
8.9.5.2
8.9.5.3
1.
Specific and non-specific T&E to be shared are kept in the Tool store of
respective CMC. T&E shall be preserved IAW manufacturers
requirements/ recommendation.
2.
T&E that have serial number will be entered in AMASIS and placed
properly on the racks/ location as specified in the AMASIS.
3.
All un-serviceable specific T&E shall be tagged with a Tool/ Equipment

Un-serviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002) and be segregated at the
separated area.
4.
The temperature and humidity of the tool store shall be controlled and
recorded at least twice every day.
T&E handed over to Ramp, Base maintenance Center/ Workshop.

1.
According to maintenance requirements, some T&E are permanently

handed over to maintenance center or workshop. In that case, that
maintenance center or workshop have responsibility to preserve T&E
IAW manufacturers requirements.
2.
Maintenance Center/ Workshop shall establish and maintain master list

of all assigned T&E. All maintenance required T&E shall be registered on
VAECO website by the assigned unit.
3.
For equipment which have accessories but come in kit, they shall be
identified with the main item. The accessories shall be controlled by a
contents list to be kept in the kit. The format of the contents list shall
include Part No. (if applicable), description of tool and quantity.
4.
Hand tools shall be maintained and controlled IAW 8.9.5.5.
Establish and control the T&E Maintenance Program

1.
Tool and Equipment control Division of EGD shall establish maintenance

program (VAECO form 3027) for each T&E basing on the OEM tooling
instruction manual or VAECO experiences and ensure that they are
properly maintained in accordance with the original equipment
manufacturers recommendations. All aircraft support equipment shall be
at least cleaned and checked/ inspected periodically to ensure they are
serviceable and safety for use. After approval by the EGD the
maintenance program shall be entered in the management software.
Page 8.9-3

2.
3.
8.9.5.4
Maintenance Required T&E handed over to maintenance centers are

controlled and maintained as follows:
a.
The respective TPD of maintenance center shall prepare worksheet

(VAECO form 7051) for T&E maintenance basing on Maintenance
Program of each tool/ equipment.
b.
Maintenance center who manages the T&E will perform all

maintenance work within its capability. For the work out of the
Maintenance centers capability but within the capability of the CMC,
it will be cleaned, packed and sent to applicable CMC for
maintenance.
c.
The Maintenance of T&E shall be implemented IAW manufactures

document. The information of work performed shall be recorded in
book sheet (minor maintenance/ servicing) or worksheet (VAECO
form 7051). The T&E operation (weekly) and maintenance
information shall be updated (just after completion of maintenance
work) on VAECO website by the Maintenance center who manages
the T&E.
In case the maintenance/ repair of T&E are beyond VAECO capability,

Department/ Center who manage the T&E shall work out the solution/
work scope for sending that T&E to manufacturer or other maintenance
agency for maintenance/ repairing.
Control of borrowed/ returned T&E

1.
Borrowed T&E from Tool store must be returned to Tool store before
completion of each working shift. T&E borrowed from Tool store for long
time usage (more than one working shift) must be registered with Tool
store keeper.
2.
While providing/ receiving of T&E, Tool store keeper shall check status
and accompanied document of tool/ equipment then record all necessary
information in the Tool Inventory and Control (VAECO Form 7046) for
the tool without serial number or hand tool, or Tool/ Equipment
Monitoring Record (VAECO Form 7045) for the serialized tool/
equipment. The information of borrowing/ returning of serialized tool/
equipment shall be updated in AMASIS whenever the tool/ equipment is
borrowed/ returned.
3.
While borrowing of T&E, borrower is responsible for checking of physical

condition, calibration/ maintenance due date and accompanied technical
document before signing into the Tool/ Equipment Monitoring Record or
the Tool Inventory and Control Record.
4.
Users will ensure status and available of accompanied document of T&E

before returning to the Tool store.
5.
While receiving returned T&E, Tool store keeper shall check physical
condition and related document. T&E shall be accepted if the T&E is in
good condition. If returned T&E has discrepancies Tool store keeper
shall:
Page 8.9-4

6.
8.9.5.5
a.
Request the borrower to complete Lost/ Damaged Tool/ Equipment

Report (VAECO Form 7010) with the signature of manager.
b.
Raise the Tool/ Equipment Un-serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002)

and tag on the damaged tool.
c.
Keep Un-serviceable T&E in separate area in Tool store.
In case T&E have not returned on time, Tool store keeper will report to
the Maintenance Support Workshop Manager of respective CMC.
Control of hand tools in tool box

1.
Person-in-charge shall establish a list of all hand tools in the tool box
(VAECO form 2063). This list shall be checked and confirmed by
respective manager and director and kept at the office of the center/
department for at least one year. One copy of the list is placed in the
box. This list will be rechecked and confirmed by the manager and
director every year.
2.
All tools housed within the tool box/ tool crib must have the relevant
approved marking engraved (etched) on the tool and a corresponding
shadow on the board.
3.
The marking on each tool (identification code) in a tool box is linked with
tool box code. The tool box code is identified as follows:
a.
The HAN Ramp maintenance center is RHxxxxx;
b.
The HAN Base maintenance center is BHxxxxx;
c.
The HAN Component maintenance center is CHxxxxx;
d.
The HCM Ramp maintenance center is RSxxxxx;
e.
The HCM Base maintenance center is BSxxxxx;
f.
The HCM Component maintenance center is CSxxxxx;
g.
The DAD Ramp maintenance center is RDxxxxx;
h.
The Cabin Interior maintenance center is CIxxxxx;
i.
The HAN QC division of QAD is QHxxxxx;
j.
The HCM QC division of QAD is QSxxxxx. In which xxxxx is number

defined by respective center/ department.
4.
Tools which are non-etchable may be color coded by the respective

center/ department and a listing of the used colors is registered with
QAD. This applies to tools which are non-etchable but feasible to be
color coded.
5.
The respective center/ department may choose a second color band to

identify the various sections within the department. Under such situation,
he has to reconfigure the secondary color scheme. A list of the color
scheme chosen for each section shall be registered with the QAD. To
allow flexible use of the primary colors as secondary colors, the primary
color band width shall be double that of the secondary color band.
Page 8.9-5

6.
Alternatively, tools that cannot be etched and not feasible to be color

coded such as alien keys and drill bits may be kept in a separate box
with identification number on the box. Vernier caliper or micrometer and
feeler gauge can be kitted as a set. The tool list is to reflect these tools
as a set.
7.
Only the main item/ assembly of the tool shall be etched; this applies to
tools where accessories are attached together like the soldering iron
complete with electrical plug.
8.
In the event of a tool being transferred to another tool box/ crib, the old
identification number shall be engraved with a line across. All transferred
tools must have new tool box/ crib number engraved and the respective
inventory lists updated to include these transferred tools.
9.
Uncontrolled tools are not to be used for work on aircraft, systems or

components. The manager shall randomly conduct spot checks to purge
uncontrolled tools.
10. The Manager shall ensure a copy of the Tool List is kept in each tool
box/ tool crib. The tool inventory checklist should include tool description,
part number/ type and quantity. Interim hand-written amendments of the
Tool List are allowed providing that a Lost/ damage tool/ equipment
report (VAECO Form 7010) is raised and endorsed by the related
manager. Copy of the Lost/ damage tool/ equipment report should be
attached with the Tool List.
11. User or person-in-charge must check the quantity and status of all tools
at the beginning of the working shift (before using) and at the end of the
working shift (after using). The performance of each check must be
recorded in Tool inventory log (VAECO form 2064) by date and
signature. The log sheets of last sixty (60) days must be kept in the tool
box or at the tool storage room (if tool boxes are concentratively
controlled).
12. A tool shall be considered lost if it cant be located after one hour from
time of discovery of its loss. A tool shall also be considered lost if it is
discovered lost at end-of-day tool inventory check. Lost/ Damaged Tool/
Equipment Report (VAECO form 7010) shall be immediately raised by
the person responsible for/ discovering the loss. The report must be
submitted to the respective manager/ foreman for tool lost investigation.
13. In the case of damaged or unserviceable tools, Lost/ Damaged Tool/
Equipment Report (VAECO form 7010) shall be raised within 24 hours of
discovery. The report must be submitted to the respective manager/
foreman. The respective manager shall be responsible for verification.
The closure of the report from QC staff is not required.
14. Random surveillance will be conducted by QA personnel to check for
compliance of this procedure. After the surveillance check he shall
annotate in the Tool inventory log sheet (VAECO form 2064) accordingly
with state Checked by (name) in the remark column.
Page 8.9-6

15. User/ Person-in-charge of tool box who fail to report missing or obviously
damaged tools during his daily inventory check shall be disciplined.
16. Users who promptly report any missing or damaged tool in accordance
with this SOP shall not be penalized. However, this may not apply to
recurring offenders or incidents of gross negligence.
17. Modification to any tools is only allowed with prior approval from the
respective director. The tool will then be de-registered and re-registered
under a different name.
18. Lost tool is searched and solved as follows:
a.
When an item (tool/ hardware) is lost during performance of

maintenance, the technician responsible for the loss shall inform his
team leader and manager/ foreman immediately. All activities in the
affected area of the aircraft will be stopped and a search party
assembled. The manager will enlist the assistance of at least three
technicians depending on the size of the affected area. This search
will continue until the item is found or adequate assurances are
made that the item is not contained in the structure/ engine of related
aircraft. The search action shall only be called off by the respective
director.
b.
Searching for such items (tool/ hardware) must be undertaken in a

systematic and thorough manner. The employment of detailed nondestructive inspection techniques including borescope and x-ray
shall be implemented as required.
c.
The respective manager shall be responsible for investigation and

record result in Lost/ Damaged Tool/ Equipment Report (VAECO
form 7010) and send to his director and QC division within 24 hours
and before release the A/C to service. QC division shall review the
investigation report for closure or performing further action. QC staff
shall send a copy of closed report to respective TPD for keeping and
giving a copy to respective staff for placing in the tool box.
d.
If aircraft is affected by a lost item, the Return-to-service staff in

charge shall decide to clear the aircraft for flight.
19. The respective TPD of maintenance center is responsible for ordering

replacement tool. Unless otherwise decided by the respective director, a
lost tool shall only be replaced at least two weeks after loss discovery
and search. All outstanding damaged/ lost tools shall be reviewed/
evaluated on an annual basis and the report shall be closed accordingly.
8.9.5.6
Control of commonly - used tool/ equipment

1.
The commonly - used tool/ equipment are tool/ equipment kept in the tool
store that can be loaned/ borrowed by user or tool/ equipment handed
over to a squad/ workshop that can be commonly used by any technical
staff.
2.
Control of hand tool/ equipment is performed as para. 8.9.5.5 above. If

the lost or damaged tool is borrowed from tool store, the borrower shall
Page 8.9-7

send to tool store keeper a copy of the damaged tool report with
verification of respective manager or the lost tool report with confirmation
of QC staff.
3.
The damaged tool/ equipment must be tagged with Tools/ equipment

unserviceable tag (VAECO Form 0002) and sent back to tool store for
keeping at quarantine area. The damaged T&E may be kept at
department/ center if the T&E is impossible to be moved.
4.
The Tool controller shall examine, evaluate and report to the Workshop
Manager to implement one of solutions below:
5.
8.9.5.7
a.
Sending un-serviceable T&E for maintenance/ repair.
b.
Keep unserviceable tool/equipment and report to his director for

destroying if repair is uneconomical.
All permanently lost and unrecovered damage tool/ equipment shall be

enumerated by tool controller and reported to respective CMC director
for substitution.
Fabrication of T&E
1.
VAECO may fabricate T&E for use as need during maintenance

activities. The request to fabricate T&E may initiate by maintenance
centers/ departments and send to Engineering & IT department and
related component maintenance center.
2.
For complicated and/or specific T&E, The Engineering & IT department

will design and give fabrication instruction. For simple and non-specific
T&E, The respective CMC will design and give fabrication instruction.
3.
Except hand tools that are controlled IAW 8.9.5.5 of this manual, the P/N
and S/N of VAECO fabricated tool/ equipment are defined as follows:
a.
For tool/ equipment to be fabricated that does not have P/N referred
from OEM:
P/N: VMIxxxx, in which, xxxx is sequent number = 0001, 0002;
(VMI means VAECO Manufactured Item). Use the next available
number in AMASIS.
S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the
next available number in AMASIS.
b.
For tool/ equipment to be fabricated that has P/N referred from OEM:
P/N: OEM P/N-VAE. For example: The P/N of OEM tool/
equipment is 12345 then the P/N of VAECO fabricated tool/
equipment is 12345-VAE.
S/N: xxx, in which, xxx is sequent number = 001, 002 Use the
next available number in AMASIS.
4.
The document to fabricate includes:

a.
Technical drawings and manufacturers data or those developed by

VAECO;
Page 8.9-8

8.9.5.8
b.
Methods and technical parameters to be tested.
c.
Materials and instruction for fabrication.
5.
The fabrication document will be submitted to EGD for approval (if

necessary) before sending to applicable workshop for fabrication.
6.
The CMC staff (together with staff from EGD and QCD if necessary) will
check/ test all technical parameters as required in order to verify all
requirements are satisfied. A Product Acceptance Report (VAECO Form
3030) shall be created and signed for completion and acceptance of the
fabricated tool/ equipment.
7.
The CMC or EGD who issued fabrication document must issue the tool/
equipment operation and maintenance document including, but not
limited to, the following information:
a.
Name, part number, serial number (if applicable);
b.
Description of functions and technical specifications (such as

operating and limitation parameters, accuracy)
c.
Operation and maintenance instruction.
8.
For the fabricated equipment to be operated/ used at the apron, the

required document and fabrication records must be sent to QAD for
submitting to CAAV for approval.
9.
The assigned staff of respective CMC who fabricated the tool/ equipment
shall register the fabricated tool/ equipment in the AMASIS after
acceptance.
Equivalency evaluation of T&E

1.
VAECO will purchase and use T&E recommend by manufacturer as

specified in Technical Data. However, equivalent T&E will be accepted.
Reason for review, evaluation and use equivalent T&E could be as
follows:
a.
Recommended T&E maker out of business, or
b.
Recommended T&E model being replaced or substituted by its

maker, or
c.
Manufacturer newly recommended T&E maker and/or model, or
d.
Commercial T&E with same function, or
e.
Self-fabricated T&E with same function etc.
2.
For the NDT related tool/ equipment the evaluation of equivalency will be
performed IAW NDT manual.
3.
For the non-specific tool/ equipment the user will check the specification/
functions of the tool/ equipment and confirm that all requirements
specified in Technical Data are satisfied before usage. The Evaluation of
equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001) is not required.
4.
For specific tool/ equipment that is accepted by manufacturer of the

aircraft/ aircraft component then it can be used. The Evaluation of
Page 8.9-9

equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001) is not required. The acceptance

letter/ document from the manufacturer shall be put in the tool/
equipment records and sent a copy to EGD for updating the master list of
equivalent tool/ equipment.
5.
For specific tool/ equipment that is not confirmed by the aircraft/ aircraft
component manufacturer for equivalency then the equivalent evaluation
is performed as follows:
a.
The affected Maintenance Center will submit a request to use

equivalent T&E to the respective CMC (HAN or HCM).
The respective CMC will review the request and prepare
technical documents which may include data, drawings, or other
related information.
The respective CMC will then submit the request and documents
to the EGD for evaluation.
8.9.6
b.
EGD in cooperated with QAD and respective CMC conduct

evaluation to confirm the equivalent of T&E.
c.
The evaluation information of equivalent T&E are recorded in

Evaluation of equivalent T&E (VAECO Form 3001).
d.
The EGD will verify the equivalency by requesting the CMC to

perform a test to assure that the T&E meet the manufacturers
standards and specifications in all respects regarding tolerances,
repeatability and accuracy.
e.
When the equivalency must be confirmed by the OEM the EGD will
contact the T&E OEM. If the equivalency is verified by the OEM, the
T&E may be used. The EGD will notify the Quality Assurance
Department with their results.
f.
Experiments, testing methods and the results shall be recorded and

kept for equivalency evidence. Degree of accuracy of equivalent
T&E is not less than degree of accuracy recommended by
manufacturer.
g.
After evaluation for equivalency, the results will be submitted to the

Quality Assurance Department for approval.
h.
After approval, the equivalency approval document will be sent back

to EGD. The assigned staff of EGD shall define equivalency of the
tool/ equipment in the AMASIS and/ or other management system.
i.
General hand tool may be used but not necessary considered as

alternate tools/ equipment.
MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE OF CUSTOMER PROVIDED T&E

1.
In the case, the Customer (Operator/ Air Carrier) has no contract with
VAECO to perform calibration and/or maintenance of the T&E, The LGD/
DAD RMC will inform to the customer the maintenance/ calibration expiry
status and place the T&E in quarantine area waiting for customers
instruction/ decision.
Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date:24 SEP 2014
Page 8.9-10

2.
8.9.7
In the case, the Customer has a contract with VAECO to perform

calibration and/or maintenance of the T&E:
a.
In case the work could be performed by VAECO the LGD shall send
T&E to the suitable CMC for the maintenance/ calibration;
b.
In case the T&E managed by DAD RMC and the work is within its
capability the DAD RMC will perform the maintenance.
c.
For the maintenance/ calibration that could not be performed by

VAECO, the LGD/ DAD RMC will send T&E to the extrinsic agency
for calibration/ maintenance with consultancy of the customer.
d.
The LGD/ DAD RMC shall summarize the expenditure (materials/

man-hours) and report to BDD to claim for payment.
3.
The LGD/ DAD RMC manages the T&E store, issues T&E for use and
receive T&E after use as requested from maintenance staff.
4.
Maintenance staff are allowed to use the customer provided T&E for that
customer only.
ARCHIVES
1.
Certificates and calibration history of tool and/or equipment will be

archived at the appropriate Component Maintenance Center for at least
2 years after removing the item from service.
2.
The technical documents of Tools and Equipment such as operation/

maintenance manuals will be kept at the Technical Library.
3.
Equivalent assessment records and test data are retained in the EGD for
at least 2 years after removing the item from service.
4.
Maintenance/repair records will be archived at the Maintenance Center

who manages the T&E for at least 2 years since maintenance date.
5.
The report of lost tool will be archived at the appropriate Quality Control
Division for at least 1 years since closing date. A copy of the closed
report are kept by the respective TPD and respective staff (placed in his/
her tool box) until the tool list is re-issued.
Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date:24 SEP 2014
Page 8.9-11

8.10 CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
8.10
CALIBRATION REQUIRED TOOL AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT
8.10.1
PURPOSE
To establish policy and procedure for controlling tools and equipment that
requires calibration (CRTE) IAW applicable requirements.
8.10.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for management, control and calibration of
VAECOs CRTE.
8.10.3
8.10.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
HAN Calibration Workshop is responsible for controlling CRTE that is

owned by HAN Maintenance Centers; and Outstations under HAN Ramp
Maintenance Center.
2.
HCM Calibration Workshop is responsible for controlling CRTE that is

owned by HCM Maintenance Centers and Outstations under HCM Ramp
Maintenance Center.
3.
DAD Ramp Maintenance Center is responsible for controlling of CRTE

that is owned by DAD Ramp Maintenance Center and Outstations under
DAD Ramp Maintenance Center.
4.
Director of LGD is responsible for sending the CRTE to outside approved

calibration agencies and receiving tools/ equipment after calibration.
5.
Maintenance Centers are responsible for managing the usage and status
of CRTE under their management to ensure that only CRTE with valid
calibration can be used.
6.
Technician or authorized staff who use CRTE are responsible for:

a.
Verifying the status and calibration due date of CRTE prior to use;
b.
Reporting to respective Calibration workshop and his/ her manager

in case of failure, calibration overdue, missing/ damage of
Calibration Stamp (VAECO Form 0021) or Calibration Control label
(VAECO Form 0004) of CRTE.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
Measuring and test tool/ equipment that are required calibration by

manufacturer are herein referred to as Calibration Required Tool and
Equipment (CRTE).
2.
The CRTE used to make airworthiness determinations (the accuracy of

the value measured by them shall effect on the decision of return to
service of the aircraft, aircraft engine or aircraft component) shall be
calibrated and traceable to a standard that is derived from NIST or ILAC
members or provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3.
For the CRTE other than CRTE mentioned in para. 2. above, industrial
standard, standard of the country of manufacturer or national standard of
Vietnam may be used.
Page 8.10-1

4.
All of the VAECO CRTE can only be calibrated at the calibration

agencies listed on Recognized Calibration Services Supplier List
(VAECO Form 2062)
5.
A serviceable CRTE shall be attached with Calibration Control label

(VAECO Form 0004) or Calibration Stamp (VAECO Form 0021).
6.
The Measuring and test tool/ equipment that are not required calibration
by manufacturer shall be attached with Calibration Not Required label
(VAECO Form 0018).
7.
The CRTE has a function limited and/ or accuracy downgraded shall be

attached with a Caution label (VAECO Form 0019) and Usage Notice
(VAECO Form 0016).
8.
Each unserviceable item of CRTE will be attached with Tools/ Equipment

Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002).
9.
All CRTE at Tool store or at tool keeping area of related workshop/

centers shall be kept in storage conditions IAW the manufacturers
requirements.
8.10.5
PROCEDURE
8.10.5.1
CRTE Control system

1.
The calibration information of all CRTE including nomenclature, P/N,

S/N, calibration date, calibration due date, interval, status, user,
manufacturers, calibration agencies should be recorded in AMASIS and
other computerized program (if necessary).
2.
A list of all CRTE (VAECO Form 7016) using in VAECO maintenance

activities with all information mentioned above may be exported from
AMASIS at all time.
3.
After the CRTE has been calibrated and is within the tolerance required
by the manufacturer, the Calibration Workshop shall update the
calibration date of such equipment on the CRTE Management System.
4.
Non Schedule Calibration

a.
Any CRTE which is found defective, out of calibration, inoperative,

label missed/ damaged, due date unclear or unable to meet
specification of the manufacturer must be considered as
unserviceable.
b.
A Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) must be

raised by the user and attached on unserviceable CRTE. No one is
allowed to use this equipment/ tool to perform maintenance.
c.
The unserviceable CRTE shall then be routed to the Calibration

Workshop for repair, re-calibrate. For CRTE that the label is dim/
missed and no damage is found and calibration record is available
the Tool Controller may issue a new Calibration Control Label
Page 8.10-2

(VAECO Form 0004). In other case that T/ E shall be sent to

calibration agency for calibration.
5.
6.
7.
Control of calibration due date:

a.
Respective calibration workshop shall control calibration due dates

of all VAECOs CRTE;
b.
Every month, on the 20th day (or the next working day if that day is
holiday), Calibration workshop shall issue List of tool and equipment
to be calibrated (VAECO Form 7003) to list all T&E that will be
expired up to the end of the next month and upload on Calibration
Required T&E menu of the VAECO website.
c.
The assigned staffs of related department/ center shall:

Monthly access the appropriate folder on VAECO website to
check the List of tool and equipment to be calibrated;
Clean, pack and send the CRTE that mentioned in the list to
respective calibration workshop.
Provide information related to CRTE such as measuring range,
next usage date to tool controller.
d.
Tool controller shall check and define the calibration requirements

for each CRTE and send to:
Respective VAECO Calibration Workshop if calibration
requirement is within its approved calibration scope.
Outside approved calibration agencies if calibration requirement
is out of respective VAECO Calibration Workshop via LGD.
Define the calibration requirements: Tool controller shall check and

define the calibration requirements for each CRTE as below:
a.
Complete a Calibration/ repair/ maintenance request for T&E

(VAECO Form 7001).
b.
Request of calibration is defined base on:

Manufacturers document;
Usage condition, frequency of use;
The technical status of the CRTE;
Result of previous calibration (if any).
Inspect and evaluate the calibration result

a.
Receiving inspection and acceptance of CRTE after being calibrated

at outside calibration agencies shall be carry out IAW 8.8.5.2.
b.
Tool controller shall evaluate, analyze the calibration result specified

in calibration certificate and/or finding report of CRTE. All necessary
information shall be record into Calibration Result Evaluation Report
(VAECO Form 7022).
c.
Tool controller shall attach Calibration Control Label (VAECO Form

0004) to the CRTE that calibrated from calibration agency other than
VAECO if the CRTE meets the manufacturer requirements.
Page 8.10-3

8.
d.
If the CRTE is determined to be out of tolerance, Tool controller shall

attach Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0002) and
report to respective Calibration workshop manager. The
unserviceable CRTE shall be kept in separated area and to be
handled as one of the following solutions:
Send it to manufacturer for repair/ calibration.
Redefine the CR Tool/ Equipment's range/ functions.
Condemning the item if not economically repairable.
e.
If the CRTE was determined to have been out of allowable tolerance

by more than twice the value, the tools and equipment control
personnel of respective Calibration Workshop will initiate the
Significant Out of Tolerance Report (VAECO Form 7009) and send
to the EGD and QAD to determine if there could be any adverse
effect on any maintenance tasks that used this CRTE. If any adverse
condition could exist, the EGD will issue an Engineering Order to: reexamine or to re-perform the maintenance tasks. If the article has
already left the VAECO, the customer shall be notified of any
potential problems.
Define the limited functions of CRTE or change their purpose of use

a.
For a multi-functioned measure/ test equipment, when one or more

independence functions do not meet the manufacturer's specification
then remain functions of the measure/ test equipment may be
accepted to be used.
b.
When measuring and test equipment is out of manufacturer's

tolerance, it can be used for other purpose.
c.
The procedure of defining the limited functions or changing the

usage purpose of measuring and test equipment as follows:
The Tool controller records all information related to limited
functions or the change of usage purpose of the measuring and
test equipment in a Function/ Usage Purpose Change Request
(VAECO Form 7008) and submits it to Calibration Workshop
manager.
Calibration Workshop manager sends the Function / usage
purpose change request with all related documents to EG
Director.
EG Director shall examine, evaluate and approve to use the
measuring and test equipment with limited functions or the
change of usage purpose.
Based on the approval of EGD, the Tool controller shall clearly
specify the limited functions or the change of usage purpose of
this measure/ test equipment into a Usage Notice (VAECO Form
0016) attached to the tool/ equipment. A Caution Label (VAECO
Form 0019) is also affixed to the tool/ equipment for attention.
9.
Expiry and Lost
Page 8.10-4

a.
Respective Calibration Workshop will send Overdue Calibration

Notice (VAECO Form 7005) to the related department/ center to
announce of any CRTE that overdue calibration date but have not
been sent for calibration and request to be received as soon as
possible such CRTE. The overdue calibration date CRTE shall be
attached with Tool/ Equipment Un-serviceable Tag (VAECO Form
0002) and kept in separated area.
b.
If the CRTE has been reported lost, the CRTE shall be removed
from the CRTE list (by update the status of that tool in AMASIS)
within 15 days. The file of that CRTE shall be kept 2 years since the
lost date. If it is later found, the tool controller shall check the CRTE
documents and status to confirm the serviceability and traceability
before acceptance.
10. Control of Leased/ Borrowed CRTE

a.
All the leased/borrowed CRTE shall be inspected and accepted in

accordance with 8.8.5.
b.
Tool controller will check the date of the last calibration and the date
of the next calibration to ensure that calibration interval does not
exceed
the
applicable
manufacturer's
and/or
VAECO's
requirements.
c.
The leased/ borrowed CRTE will be labeled, tagged and controlled in

the same manner as those items VAECO owns.
11. Calibration of CRTE in VAECO Calibration Laboratory: Calibration of

CRTE in VAECO shall be carried out IAW procedure 8.11.
12. Calibration in the site other than VAECO Calibration Laboratory
8.10.5.2
8.10.5.3
a.
For the CRTE that is not able to move to the Calibration Laboratory
due to the size or the characteristic of the CRTE, the calibration staff
may perform the calibration at the equipment location.
b.
Such calibration shall be done only when there is no influence of the

environment to CRTE.
Calibration interval verification of CRTE provided by customer.

1.
When receiving customers provided CRTE, Tool controller shall accept

the CRTE in according with procedure 8.8. Tool controller shall also
ensure that CRTE has valid customers certified stamp/ label and
calibration is traceable to NIST/ ILAC.
2.
The customer provided CRTE can only be utilized on the maintenance

activities of their own aircraft provided it has been verified according to
the above procedure and has affixed on the CRTE both customers
certification label/ stamp and VAECO Calibration Control label (VAECO
Form 0004).
Handling, packing, preservation and storage of CRTE

1.
CRTE are handled, packed, preserved and stored in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements. The following precautions are to be
Page 8.10-5

observed by all personnel concerned with the handling, movement,

preservation and storage of CRTE.
8.10.6
a.
To ensure that appropriate containers are to be used during

movement of equipment.
b.
Anti-vibration mountings are to be clamped, or sufficiently "damped"

to eliminate excessive movement within the transit case.
c.
The transit case is to be secured during transportation and is to be

hand held if it is small in size.
2.
Protection against deterioration or damage to CRTE in transit or storage

is to be provided..
3.
The following factors are to be considered when deciding on the method

of packaging:
a.
Physical Properties - Size, shapes, weight, etc.
b.
Hazard - Impact during handling, chemical properties, radiation

properties, etc.
c.
Climatic protection-Rain, heat, etc.
4.
Packaged CRTE is to be provided with identification and detailed

nomenclature in the form of labels and stickers. Precautionary labels
such as "Fragile" and "Keep Upright" are to be used when required. For
packaging of fragile and delicate equipment, the minimum requirement is
to have 4" protecting space filled with sponge all round.
5.
Storage of electronic CRTE is followed the recommendation specified in

the manufacturer manuals. However, where there is no specific storage
requirements mentioned, a basic air-conditioned room would suffice.
ARCHIVES
The Calibration workshop shall maintain records of calibrated equipment for
a period of two (2) years from date of last calibration.
Page 8.10-6

8.11 CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY
8.11
CALIBRATION AT VAECO CALIBRATION LABORATORY
8.11.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure for calibrating tools and equipment that required
calibration (CRTE) IAW applicable regulations.
8.11.2
SCOPE
This procedure applied for calibration activities in VAECO approved
calibration laboratory.
8.11.3
8.11.4
DEFINITION
1.
Measuring Standard Device: The device used to calibrate CRTE or other

lower measurement standard and provide traceability.
2.
Reference Standard: This is the highest metrological standard available

from which all applicable calibrations are conducted. These standards
shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) of U.S.A. or national standards acceptable to the FAA.
3.
Working Standards: Those standards are usually calibrated against a

Reference Standard and routinely utilized to calibrate CRTE.
4.
Traceability: The traceability of the CRTE means the property of a result

of a measurement whereby it can be traceable to, generally national or
international standards, through an unbroken chain of comparisons. All
VAECO CRTE must maintain traceability to National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST) of U.S.A. or national standards
acceptable to the FAA.
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
8.11.5
Respective Manager of calibration workshop is responsible to:

a.
Determine the periodicity for calibration. It shall be in accordance

with manufacturers recommendation.
b.
Determine the due date for calibration.
c.
Determine the calibration standard and tolerance, where applicable.

It shall be in accordance with OEMs specification/ manual or
specifications/ standard such as ISO 6789-2003, Fed Spec GGG-W686C, MIL-STD-45662A, BS959-1950 or national standards. Any
exceptions shall be indicated accordingly.
d.
Performing calibration for the CRTE at VAECOs calibration

laboratory within the approved scope of work.
Quality audit manager is responsible for verifying that calibration agency

is authorized by Airworthiness Authorities. Calibration agencies approved
by ILAC members or NIST according to ISO 17025 or OEM authorized
source are accepted.
PROCEDURE
1.
The calibration personnel shall ensure that environmental condition for

the intended calibration meets all applicable regulations. The
Page 8.11-1

environmental control follows the procedure specified in Calibration

Laboratory operation manual.
2.
The accuracy of CRTE shall be in accordance with the manufacturer or

industrial standard.
3.
If there is no manufacturer calibration procedure available, the respective

Calibration Laboratory shall use the following methods:
4.
5.
a.
American national industrial standard specifications.
b.
The industrial standards based on manufacturers specifications and

approved by the Authority.
c.
The standards developed by VAECO based on manufacturers

specifications and approved by the Authority.
d.
Coordinate with the manufacturer to develop the necessary

procedure and receive a written acceptance from the manufacturer
regarding the test and/or calibration procedure specification.
The calibration shall be performed by the calibration staff according to

the procedures in Calibration Laboratory Operation Manual. The
calibration procedures include the following:
a.
Specific item or group of CRTE to which the procedure is applicable.
b.
Identification of calibration points and environmental requirements.
c.
Description of the scope, principle, and theory of the calibration

method.
d.
A list of standards and other Correlation Test Equipment (CTE)

required to perform the calibration, nomenclature, manufacturer,
model number, serial number, and accuracy of such CTE must be
recorded for future references.
e.
Detailed step-by-step instructions for performing the calibration.
f.
Specific instructions and data sheet for obtaining and recording the
test data.
After calibration, the CRTE meets the defined calibration requirement the
calibration staff shall issue Calibration Certificate and Calibration Stamp
(VAECO Form 0021).
a.
VAECO Calibration Stamp shall indicate the serial number and

calibration expiry date.
b.
The Calibration Certificate shall include following information:

Name, Model, P/N, S/N v.v.;
Certificate Number;
Calibration Date;
Calibration Environmental Conditions;
Calibration Standards and procedure;
Calibration due date (for the VAECO CRTE);
Page 8.11-2

Name and signature of the authorized person.
8.11.6
6.
The Calibration Stamp shall be affixed on the obviously visual place of

the equipment. When affixing the Calibration Stamp is impractical due to
the size, shape, or other characteristics of the CRTE the Calibration
Stamp may be affixed on the container or the box of the CRTE for
recognition.
7.
If the CRTE does not meet the defined calibration requirements the
calibration staff shall issue Tool/ Equipment Unserviceable Tag (VAECO
Form 0002), Calibration Report and return this CRTE to the user.
8.
All the discrepancies, modification and calibration result shall be

recorded in Calibration Report.
9.
The T&E control staff shall check the CRTE status and all concerned
document before sending to the user with the original Calibration
Certificate.
ARCHIVES
Copy of Calibration Certificate; Calibration Report and concerned data are
archived at least 2 years since the calibration date.
Page 8.11-3

8.12
MATERIALS PRODUCTION
8.12.1
PURPOSE
8.12 MATERIAL PRODUCTION
To establish procedure to produce materials used for aircraft/ aircraft

component maintenance.
8.12.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for producing of nitrogen and distilled water with
standard/ specification specified in maintenance data.
8.12.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of LGD is responsible for requesting CMC for production.
2.
Director of CMC is responsible for producing and controlling the

conformity of the product to standard/ specification requesting by LGD.
8.12.4
PROCEDURE
8.12.4.1
Production request
Upon receiving request for materials form maintenance centers, LGD shall
issue request and send to CMC for production.
8.12.4.2
Work request and Working instruction

The WR (VAECO Form 7014) is issued by CTPD and send to related shop.
8.12.4.3
8.12.4.4
Production
1.
CTPD shall issue Working instruction base on instruction manual of

equipment used for production in order to clearly specify work step.
2.
The shop staff shall follow Working instruction to produce the requested
materials.
3.
The shop staff shall monitor the producing process to verify a proper
quality of the materials.
Quality management and COC issuance

1.
Samples of consumable materials are taken every six months and sent
to Accredited Testing Laboratory for analyzing. The result is reviewed
and evaluated by CM Department in order to ensure products technical
requirements are satisfied.
2.
If the analyzing result is shown unsatisfied, the production of related

materials is stopped for corrective action. The production equipment is
checked and repaired as required.
3.
Sample of consumable materials are taken after corrective action and

sent to an approved organization for analyzing. The result is reviewed
and evaluated again by CM Department prior to issue the Certificate of
Conformity.
Page 8.12-1

8.12.4.5
8.12 MATERIAL PRODUCTION
Products handover
The products are put in delivering area of the shops and attached with
Certificate of Conformity.
8.12.5
ARCHIVES
1.
The result of sample analyzing is archived for five years.
2.
The original WR and the Certificate of Conformity are kept at least five
years in the CMC.
Page 8.12-2

8.13 TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE
8.13
TRANSFER OF TOOL AND EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE
8.13.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the necessary tools and equipments (T&E) are available for
maintenance activities.
8.13.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to transfer tools and equipments for aircraft/ aircraft
component maintenance.
8.13.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Directors of Maintenance Centers are responsible for request the T&E

transfer to carry out the maintenance activities; transferring his own T&E
to support the maintenance activities of other maintenance centers.
2.
Director of MCC is responsible for requesting T&E transfer to carry out

WO issued by MCC.
3.
Director of CMCs are responsible for transferring the T&E to support the
4.
Director of LGD is responsible for transport the T&E and performing

airport security check procedure.
5.
[Deleted]
6.
Team leader of maintenance team at outstation is responsible for

receiving the T&E and returning it after use.
8.13.4
PROCEDURE
8.13.4.1
Shipping request
1.
Whenever scheduling the WO, MCC planner should check for

requirements of tool and equipment.
2.
To rectify the defect, RTS staff should define the necessary tool and
equipment.
3.
When a required tool/ equipment is available in store but not in the same
station where the maintenance activity is to be carried out. MCC/
Maintenance centers shall create a Requisition Form on AMASIS and
notify to local CMC. The receipt of the tool/ equipment transfer request
shall be immediately confirmed in the urgent cases (by telephone, for
example).
4.
The request for T&E transfer should include the following information:
5.
a.
P/N, description, quantity of the tool / equipment to be transferred.
b.
Original place and the destination of the tool.
c.
Time, date when the maintenance activity take place.
Base on the Requisition Form, the HAN/ HCM CMC and DAD RMC shall
corporate to finalize the source of the T&E, request the owner of T&E for
transferring and inform the CMC (at the source place) for co-operation in
case the required T&E is owned by other maintenance center.
Page 8.13-1

6.
8.13.4.2
[Deleted].
Shipping process
1.
In case the T&E is sent from SGN or HAN,

a.
If the required T&E owned by CMC, the CMC staff shall issue a
Delivery Note (DN) of T&E transfer (in AMASIS) and attach to T&E.
b.
If the required T&E owned by a maintenance center other than CMC:

The CMC staff shall receive (in AMASIS) the T&E back to the
local tool store (TS5/ TS6) and create a DN (in AMASIS) for
transferring T&E to the destination store (TS6/ TS5).
Respective maintenance center staff shall get the DN from the
tool store staff or print the DN from AMASIS then attach to T&E.
In the case the T&E to be transferred are oversize/ bulky or
contains oil/ fluid (such as hydraulic jack) and the staff of T&E
owner is unable to disassembly or drain oil for transport, the T&E
owner may request CMC for help before transferring to LGD.
c.
8.13.4.3
The assigned staff of maintenance center who owns the T&E is

responsible to transfer T&E/ T&E box with DN to LGD for shipping.
2.
The DAD RMC shall issue a Delivery Note (DN) in AMASIS for
transferring his own T&E.
3.
Upon receiving T&E from the LGD shall check the overall status of T&E
box or T&E (if unpacked), package them as safety/ manufacturers
requirement and acknowledge in the DN. A copy of DN and attached
packing list (if any) will be attached with transferred T&E.
4.
While T&E are shipping, the LGD staff shall update the information of
transportation means (Flight No., date, time) in the AMASIS.
5.
In the case of need to transfer T&E from DAD station, the tool store
keeper shall pack the requested T&E, print out the DN and sign. A copy
of the DN and attached packing list (if any) shall be attached with
transferred T&E.
Receiving the T&E at destination

1.
When the tool/ equipment arrives at destination, the staff in charge of

T&E receiving shall check the status of T&E or package to confirm they
are the same as sending status (based on information in the DN/ packing
list)
2.
At HAN, SGN station, the LGD shall inform to local CMC. Tool controller
of the respective CMC shall receive the T&E, make a receive acceptance
on AMASIS and acknowledge in the DN. The local CMC shall inform the
maintenance center for T&E borrowing.
3.
At DAD station, the tool controller shall receive T&E, make a receive
acceptance on AMASIS, acknowledge in the DN and inform the
appropriate maintenance team leader for T&E borrowing
Page 8.13-2

4.
8.13.4.4
8.13.5
At out-station (other than HAN, SGN or DAD) the person in charge (team
leader) shall receive the T&E and inform MCC for receipt confirmation.
Returning the T&E to original store/ maintenance center

1.
At HAN, SGN station, when the maintenance activity is completed,

Maintenance Centre staff shall return the tool/ equipment to the local
CMC (HAN/ SGN) for transferring back to original place.
2.
At DAD station, after the maintenance staff returns T&E, the tool
controller shall transfer back to original place.
3.
At out-station:
a.
The person in charge (team leader) shall send the T&E on the
appropriate A/C for returning to HAN/ SGN/ DAD station and
immediately inform MCC about the flight. The copy of DN and
attached packing list (if any) must be attached with returned T&E. In
the case of deviation from initial status, the person in charge shall
make a record and sign on the DN to inform the change to the
receiver.
b.
Base on received information, MCC notify LGD/ DAD RMC for

receiving T&E. At HAN, SGN station the LGD staff shall check
overall status of T&E package or T&E (if unpacked) then inform the
local CMC.
4.
If receiving station is not the original place, the local CMC/ DAD RMC
shall transfer T&E back to original place as soon as possible.
5.
At HAN, SGN station, if the T&E is owned by the maintenance center

other than CMC, the CMC staff shall PID (in AMASIS) the T&E to the
original maintenance center.
ARCHIVES
The DN of tool/ equipment transfer shall be kept at the delivers office for at
least 6 months since delivery date.
Page 8.13-3

8.14
AIRCRAFT SECURITY LOCK
8.14.1
PURPOSE
8.14 AIRCRAFT SECURITY LOCK
To ensure that all unattended aircraft capable of flight are secured by lock of
nose wheel chocks for preventing unauthorized operation as required by 49
CFR 1554.101(b)(2).
8.14.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applicable for large aircraft with a maximum take-off weight
of more than 5,7 tons (12,500 pounds) which being parked within VAECO
territory.
8.14.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
The Directors of HAN, HCM aircraft maintenance centers, Administrative
Department, HCM Branch are responsible for applying of this procedure.
8.14.4
PROCEDURES
8.14.4.1
General
1.
8.14.4.2
Unattended aircraft is an aircraft that is neither controlled by security

means (parking in uncontrolled zone due to lack of camera and/or
guard) nor under supervision/ controlling of maintenance staff during
maintenance shift. It may be, but not limited, in the following situation:
a.
A/C parked overnight (night stop).
b.
A/C parked for long period of time.
c.
A/C parked in hangar for check but capable of flight (it is not being
on jack or blocked by hangar door, dock).
2.
Administrative Department, HCM Branch should inform to related

maintenance centers about uncontrolled zone and period in VAECO
territory.
3.
Only verified key controllers who listed verified staff list issued by
Quality Assurance department are allowed to lock/ unlock nose wheel
and access to keys.
Lock/ unlock the nose wheel chocks

1.
Locking of nose wheel

a.
The maintenance staff should inform the in-charged key controller to

verify the need of nose wheel locking before leaving aircraft.
b.
If nose wheel need to be locked, the maintenance staff/ key

controller should set steel chocks in font of and behind nose wheel
IAW corresponding AMM. Two steel chocks then connected by a
steel frame.
c.
In-charged key controller should lock steel frame by a padlock. The

picture below shows the example of B777 nose wheel lock.
Page 8.14-1

8.14 AIRCRAFT SECURITY LOCK
Note: steel frame should be seated on the chock support pins

d.
2.
8.14.4.3
8.14.4.4
The maintenance staff should only leave aircraft when nose wheel
chocks was locked.
Un-locking of nose wheel

a.
The key controller will unlock the padlock when there is a

requirement from maintenance.
b.
Steel chocks and frames should be kept in assigned area at

corresponding maintenance center when not be used.
Key control and handover

1.
Keys and lock may be marked with identification number to avoid the
miss used.
2.
Keys and lock should be kept in secured area at the corresponding

maintenance center.
3.
The used key number and aircraft registration number should be

recorded to the log.
4.
At the end of shift, all keys should be handed over to in-coming verified
key controller. The handover of the key should be documented.
Archives
1.
Log and handling records should be retained at least 07 days at

corresponding maintenance center.
Page 8.14-2

PART 9 LOGISTICS PROCEDURES
PART 9
LOGISTICS PROCEDURES
Page 9-1

9.1 PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING
9.1
PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING
9.1.1
PURPOSE
To ensure aircraft part/ materials are inspected and accepted IAW applicable
requirements.
9.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for incoming inspection of aircraft part/ materials
used for maintenance performed by the VAECO.
9.1.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The Logistics Directors is responsible for ensuring the incoming

inspection process carried out properly by Store Inspector or authorized
personnel.
2.
Any discrepancy found during incoming inspection of part/ materials shall

be directly reported to the Logistics Director and the Quality Assurance
Director by the person performing the incoming inspection.
3.
Ramp Maintenance Centers is responsible for receiving part/ materials

for VNA at outstation upon request with the support of LGD.
9.1.4
GENERAL DOCUMENT REQUIREMENT
9.1.4.1
Certificate(s) and document accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/

materials which used in maintenance for VNA aircrafts.
9.1.4.2
1.
Certificate and document specified in VNA MME.
2.
Re-certified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001).
Certificate/s and document accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/

materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of
CAAV (other than VNA aircrafts).
9.1.4.2.1 All new and used aircraft parts shall require one of document as follows:
1.
CAAV Form 1
2.
EASA Form 1
3.
FAA Form 8130-3.
4.
TCCA Form ONE
5.
Re-certified Certificate (VAECO Form 5001).
9.1.4.2.2 New aircraft materials, standard parts shall require:

1.
2.
Approval Certificates:
a.
Compliance Certificate (C of C) or
b.
Equivalent Certificates issued by Manufacturers which approved by

CAAV.
Copies of Certificates of Compliance if approved by the Head of QA of

Supplier or a Suppliers authorized person.
Page 9.1-1

3.
4.
All the requirements of materials, standard parts, include storage

conditions, self-life, fire proof, stated in:
a.
Certificate of Compliance, or
b.
Related documents (Laboratory Test Report, Analyst Certificate

etc.); or
c.
Printed in the cover of the materials
Specific requirements of materials, standard parts must be stated in

Certificates/ Documents in following cases:
a.
The fire-proof ability of materials used in cabin such as: sewing

threads, cloths to cover seats, curtains, carpet. etc.
b.
Storage condition, shelf life of chemical substances, rubber rings,

etc.
Note 1. Other form of an serviceable document, such as a Serviceable Tag

issued by a CAAV Operator will be accepted by VAECO for aircraft part/
materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of CAAV.
Note 2. All certificates are original or certified as true copy. In a number of
cases, certificates issued with an electronic signature or printed without a
signature will be accepted upon getting an approval of QAD.
9.1.4.3
Certificates and document accepted by VAECO (for aircraft part/

materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of
FAA).
9.1.4.3.1 All new parts or materials received shall require one of document as follows:
1.
A completed FAA Form 8130-3, Airworthiness Approval Tag; or
2.
A completed EASA Form 1, Authorized Release Certificate; or
3.
Certificate of Conformity (for expendable/ consumable parts or

materials).
9.1.4.3.2 All repaired/ overhauled parts received may have documents that includes
but is not limited to one of the followings:
1.
A properly executed FAA Form 337, Major Repair or Alteration Form; or
2.
A completed FAA Form 8130-3, Airworthiness Approval Tag; or
3.
FAA Certificated Repair Stations Approval for Return to Service Tag.
4.
If the parts have been maintained by a nonFAA certificated facility, the

WP must include the record of in-process inspection as required by the
procedure found in Part 3, Chapter 5 of RSM/QCM.
Note 1. Other form of an serviceable document, such as a serviceable tag

issued by a U.S. Air Carrier in accordance with their Continuous
Airworthiness Maintenance Program will be accepted by VAECO for aircraft
part/ materials which used in maintenance for aircraft under approval of FAA.
Note 2. All certificates are original or certified as true copy. In a number of
cases, certificates issued with an electronic signature or printed without a
signature will be accepted upon getting an approval of QAD.
Page 9.1-2

9.1.4.4
Certificates and document for aircraft part/ materials which used in

maintenance for aircraft under approval of authority other than CAAV
and FAA shall be accepted by VAECO IAW approval/ acceptance of the
authority.
9.1.5
PROCEDURES
9.1.5.1
Initial classification and assigning receiving area
9.1.5.2
9.1.5.3
1.
All incoming part/ materials shall be received at Incoming inspection

area.
2.
For parts of large size, such as engine, engine modules, APU, cowling of
all kinds, shall be directly delivered to related shop or storage area where
the Store Inspector shall perform the inspection onsite.
3.
In addition, for large size package part/ materials or large quantity

materials such as metal sheets, turbine oil can be inspected and/or
unpacked outside of Incoming inspection area.
4.
The Store inspector shall be notified and receiving inspection shall be

carried out immediately at the assigned location.
Initial receiving check

1.
Part/ materials shall be checked against the Delivery Order/ Note or

Packing List. The Delivery Order/ Note shall quote the Purchase Order or
Subcontract Order number against which the supplier is making a
delivery.
2.
In the event of part/ materials being delivered without a reference to a

Purchase/Subcontract Order and is not a customer furnished item the
Supply Division Manager is to be consulted for disposition.
3.
All part/ materials shall be unpacked and checked that the Part Numbers,
Description and Specification on the Delivery Order/ Note or Packing List
and the physical items agree with that shown on the Purchase/
Subcontract Order hard copy. Except for description, all other details
shall be the same.
4.
Store Inspector will verify that the quantities shown in the Delivery Order/
Packing List agree with that stated in the Purchase / Subcontract Order
and with part/ materials which has been delivered.
5.
For shelf-life items, the date of manufacture must be clearly printed.

Shelf-life expired item shall be rejected. Items with less than 2/3
remaining shelf-life shall be reported to Logistics Director for acceptance.
Receiving Inspection
Receiving inspection of part and materials will be performed as follows
except the cases specified in SOP 9.1.5.5; 9.1.5.6; 9.1.5.8 and 9.1.5.9.
1.
Only authorized Store Inspectors shall perform incoming inspections.
2.
Incoming material inspections shall include, but not limit to, the
followings:
Page 9.1-3

a.
Verify part/ materials are supplied from approved sources.
b.
Check physical condition of part/ materials to ensure that there is no

visual damages or distortions.
c.
Check packaging and containers meet ATA-300 standards or

equivalence.
d.
Check information of part/ materials such as: model, part number,

serial numbers and quantity conform to the shipping documents,
orders.
e.
Verify accompanying documentation and certificates are valid and

conform to the requirements of customers and Authorities as
specified in 9.1.4.
f.
Part number and serial number of the aircraft part against a List of
AD potentially applicable to engine, component (VAECO Form 3012)
to determine the AD compliance status of checking part.
3.
Incoming part/ materials must be accompanied by certificates and

documents. These documents shall be utilized for determining the
materials is airworthy and originates from approved sources. If this is
missing, the part/ materials is to be held in Quarantine area until the
approved certificate/ release documents have been received.
4.
Incoming part/ materials that need to be shipped in low temperature such

as pre-preg materials shall be checked as follows. If the incoming part/
materials fails to meet the following standards they will be rejected.
a.
Check the label for specification, data and time.
b.
Parts package shall be sealed in a clean and defect free bag to

prevent contamination by foreign substance.
c.
Refrigeration condition (temperature limitation during shipping and

storage) when refrigeration is required.
d.
Sign of any residual cooling materials (e.g. dry ice).

NOTE: If there is any sign of over temperature condition after
transportation, the inspection procedures must be followed strictly. If
the transport storage condition is not following manufacturer
standard, the transported time must be subtracted from the
allowable time storage.
5.
Life limited or used aircraft part/ components must be accompanied by

historical documents that show the components serviceability limits.
6.
Assemblies such as landing gear, engines and APUs, etc. must be

accompanied by:
a.
A list of LRUs that include: part numbers, serial numbers, life limits
and release certificates if receiving the new articles.
b.
Other document required by customers if receiving used articles.
c.
List of missing parts upon shop visit. For VNA engine, landing gear
and APUs, if the list of missing parts (reported by the repair/
Page 9.1-4

overhaul organization upon receiving) is differed from that created by

VAECO when sending, the EGD shall inform LGD the discrepancies.
7.
For parts have been maintained by a noncertificated facility, Store

Inspector shall inform QC Division for inspection and acceptance.
8.
Part/ materials control
9.
9.1.5.4
9.1.5.5
a.
Receiving control numbers (GRN) will be automatically generated by

AMASIS at the time of computer input of components and materials
information.
b.
Original certificates, documents of part/ materials are stored and

controlled by receiving control number (GRN). The number is also
put on the Serviceable Tag of the part/ materials in order to identify
its receiving folder as required.
c.
After accepted by the Store Inspector a Serviceable/Un-Serviceable

Tag (VAECO Form 0005) or Serviceable Tag (VAECO Form 0007)
shall be used corresponding to rotable part or consumable part/
materials.
d.
All associated information including of GRN, part number, quantity,

information of storage limit/ life limit, etc. must be entered into
AMASIS. For the HT/ LLP, the store inspector shall calculate and
adjust the manufacture/ maintenance date to be entered in AMASIS
in order to ensure that the next due date is the same as actual due
date specified in the Airworthiness Certificate or due date based on
AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner.
e.
For emergency equipment to be installed on VNA aircrafts, Store

Inspector shall refer to procedure 12.13 for more requirements.
f.
After inspection, part/ materials shall be appropriately tagged.
If a discrepancy found during part/ materials incoming inspection, a

Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) will be raised to notify the
appropriate party for corrective actions. All items with any discrepancy
shall be held in Quarantine area waiting for further action IAW para
9.1.5.10.
Suspected Unapproved Parts

1.
Any suspected part/ materials shall be quarantined in separated area for

investigation. The Store Inspector shall describe the noncompliance
using SUP Report (VAECO Form 4007).
2.
A detailed procedure for handling Suspect Unapproved Parts is

contained in procedure 10.13.
Receiving customers part/ materials other than VNA

1.
Customer supplied part/ materials shall be received and inspected in

accordance with the procedures similar to incoming inspection procedure
for VAECO part/ materials.
Page 9.1-5

9.1.5.6
2.
Aircraft part/ materials not meeting the requirements of Section 9.1.5.3

shall be quarantined. Nonconformities shall be recorded in Discrepancy
Report (VAECO Form 4004) and notified to customer.
3.
Customer part/ materials control

a.
After receiving customer part/ materials, Store Inspector shall input

the data into specific control software and print out a record of the
data.
b.
The Store Inspector accepts part/ materials by signing and stamping

on Aircraft parts acceptance sheet (VAECO Form 4006). A copy
shall be made and attached to the part/ materials to show its
completion of receiving inspection.
Receiving of VAECO and VNAs part/ materials at Outstation.

1.
2.
In case of part/ materials replacement at Outstations, part/ materials

receiving procedure from partners/ supplier shall be complied.
Authorized staff of RMC carries out the following steps:
a.
Verifies the correction of provided part/ materials in comparison with

the part/ materials requisition;
b.
In case of discrepancy in P/N and/or specification of part/ materials

with the part/ materials requisition, the authorized staff reviews the
related A/C manufacturers documents to confirm the
interchangeability;
c.
Checks Physical condition of part/ materials;
d.
Collects and sends all the related documents/ certificates of part/

materials to LGD. via FAX and annotation information attached
(original or the copy of release documents/ certificates);
e.
If part/ materials is accepted by LGD, performing the part/ materials

installation in accordance with regulation and recording into
Technical log for performed work, co-operating with the related
RTPD, sending a PHOTOCOPY of Technical log, attached the
original copy (or true copy) of certificates and documents related to
part/ materials to LGD promptly.
After receiving of part/ materials certificates/ documents with annotation

information from authorized staff, LGD carries out:
a.
Evaluating of part/ materials certificates/ documents adequacy and

validation in comparison with requirements;
b.
In case the part/ materials meets requirements, LGD sends

temporary GRN of part/ materials to authorized staff by FAX;
c.
In case the related part/ materials certificates/ documents is

insufficient for acceptance, to avoid AOG situation of aircraft, LGD
may temporarily accept the part/ materials then provide temporary
GRN to the authorized staff, if following conditions are satisfied:
part/ materials accompanied with serviceable documents, which
declare the part/ materials is serviceable;
Page 9.1-6

Organization, which issues the serviceable document for part/

materials, is not included in the List of Banned or Restricted Air
Carrier/ Airlines announced by FAA and/or EASA;
Part/ materials serviceable label (or documents) quotes reference
number of original release certificate, and sufficient information to
confirm Shelf life/ Life limit etc. (if any).
d.
The Store inspector carries out the following:

Re-inspect to confirm the validation of the original release
certificate and other related documents of part/ materials.
Complete part/ materials acceptance procedure and entry
information into AMASIS;
Keep original release certificate and relevant documents in file
with GRN generated by AMASIS;
Keep FAXED release certificate and relevant documents in file
with temporary GRN which have been issued;
Record temporary and official GRN into both original and FAX
release certificate;
3.
9.1.5.7
In case part/ materials was accepted based on the serviceable label (or
documents):
a.
Authorized staff clearly records into Technical Log that part/

materials are temporary used.
b.
LGD contacts contractor/ supplier to collect relevant certificates/

documents within 30 flight hours or right after aircraft come back to
main base. If those certificates/ documents are insufficiently
provided or unsatisfied, LGD informs MCC to request the related
RMC to remove part/ materials from the aircraft.
c.
In case, certificates/ documents are sufficiently provided and

satisfied, LGD updates information into AMASIS and keeps records.
LGD also informs MCC to request related RMC for confirming in
Technical Log the official usage of part/ materials before the
deadline of the temporary usage.
Incoming inspection for returned serviceable part/ materials.

1.
The RTS staff should confirm the their serviceable status by signed and
stamped on Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) before returning
unused expendable part and materials to store. The incoming inspection
shall be carried out by Store Inspector as follows:
a.
Make sure that the returned consumable materials must be in good,

clean status and still in original package.
b.
Base on attached documents such as Serviceable Tag/ Issued Slips,

inspect the returned part/ materials. If expendable part/ materials
status cannot be verified the part/ materials must be isolated as Unserviceable.
Page 9.1-7

c.
2.
9.1.5.8
In case missing Serviceable Tag, Store Inspector shall issue a new

one based on GRN and original certificates.
For rotable part:

a.
If part is still in storage and good condition then the part shall be
accepted with Serviceable Tag.
b.
if part has been used on an aircraft or next high assembly then the
part shall be accepted with a Recertified Certificate (VAECO Form
5001).
Incoming inspection of Pool or Loan aircraft part.

The incoming inspection shall be carried out following the process as
specified in para. 9.1.5.3 and Store Inspector shall issue a Loan Part Tag
(VAECO Form 0015) or VNA POOL TAG and attach to the part.
9.1.5.9
Incoming inspection of lease/ loan component/ part removed from an

aircraft of an operator other than VNA.
1.
Applying only for the component/ part removed from customers aircraft
after lease/ loan if VAECO retains control of the airworthiness status of
the components and the airworthy condition can be controlled.
2.
Incoming inspector should confirm the requirement specified in SOP

9.1.5.3(2.b, 2.c & 2.d) and 9.1.5.9(3) are met.
3.
The following information must be documented by the customer:
4.
a.
Information of required maintenance and defects arisen during

operating is performed IAW approved maintenance data, and
b.
Information of service time accumulation (FH, FC, calendar day)

and/ or preservation time (applied for shelf-life, HT and/or LLP), and
c.
Information of applicable AD/ SB performance during lease/ loan

time.
The component/ part shall accompany with the Serviceable tag or

equivalent document of customer.
Note: The component/ part returned to VAECO after loan will not
accepted for installation on US registered A/C.
9.1.5.10
Discrepancy Reporting and Part/ materials rejecting

1.
Discrepancies found during incoming inspection include, but not limited

to:
a.
No technical certificate, No purchase orders;
b.
Incorrect quantity, Incorrect description, Incorrect part number;

Incorrect serial number;
c.
Fails, broken, distorted;
d.
Incorrect packing IAW ATA-300.
e.
Differences in the list of missing parts reported by repair/ overhaul

agency with the list reported by VAECO.
Page 9.1-8

2.
In the incoming inspection process, if an discrepancy is found, Store

Inspector makes Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) and send to
Supply Division Manager/ HCM Logistics Division Manager/ Logistics
Director for handling.
3.
The Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division checks the information in

the Discrepancy report against the original orders and contact the
supplier to resolve. Based on receiving information from supplier, Supply
Division / HCM Logistics Division are going to fill entry in Directed by the
Logistics Director in Discrepancy Report and sent to Logistics Director
for approval.
4.
In the case damage found on container/ packing, Store Inspector need to

follow these steps:
a.
All container/ packing must be checked carefully before opening

for any damage dispostion.
b.
If there is any damage Store Inspector must take at least two sets of
photos.
c.
If the part/ materials is not affected then the process continues to

work normally and 02 sets of photos can be destroyed or kept as
evidence of bad transportation services.
d.
If the part/ materials is damaged, Store Inspector must take photos.

Then add photos to outside of damaged part/ materials and another
photos to discrepancy report. Those documents are sent to Supply
Division/ HCM Logistics Division Manager after registering to
document tracking discrepancy and take a control number.
e.
The second photos are attached with a copy of discrepancy report

with controlled number and kept in Store Control Section.
f.
Part/ materials with copy discrepancy report will kept in separate

area for handling.
5.
The open Discrepancy Reports must be checked by Store Inspector

everyday. If after 04 weeks has not received instructions, Store Inspector
contacts Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division to remind them. After
08 weeks, Store Inspector must report directly to Logistics Director for
the guidance.
6.
Supply Division/HCM Logistics Division will return to Store Inspectors

discrepancy report after completing the Instruction of Director of
Logistics Department and approval necessary. Instructions will permit
Store Inspector accept part/ materials or reject by returning to Supplier
with writing approval for implementation.
7.
Monthly, Supply Division/ HCM Logistics Division makes synthesis report

of discrepancy of incoming inspection and send to Logistics Director and
Quality Assurance Director.
8.
Discrepancy reports and synthesis discrepancy report are kept in Supply

Division/ HCM Logistics Division for at least 1 years from the closed date
of discrepancy .
Page 9.1-9

9.1.6
ARICHIVES
The original certificates and documents shall be stored separately. Original
certificates and documents shall be stored in receiving files in sequence of
GRN and retained by the Logistics Department for at least 2 years after the
aircraft/ component is removed from operation.
Page 9.1-10

9.2 PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING
9.2
PART/ MATERIALS TAGGING, ARRANGEMENT, PRESERVING
9.2.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to tag, arrange and preserve part/ materials IAW
applicable requirement from manufacturers.
9.2.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for all aircraft parts and materials used for
9.2.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
Director of LGD is responsible for ensuring that the tagging, arrangement and
preservation of spare parts/ materials is performed IAW this procedure.
9.2.4
PROCEDURE
9.2.4.1
Tagging
1.
9.2.4.2
All part/ materials have passed the incoming inspection must be properly
identified by tagging. Identification may include:
a.
Serviceable Tag for Rotable Parts (VAECO Form 0005/Left hand

section): used to identify the serviceable status of rotable parts and
serialized/ repaired expendable parts.
b.
Serviceable Tag for Expendable/Consumable Item (VAECO Form

0007): used to identify the serviceable status of consumable or
expendable parts/ materials.
c.
Consumable Release Tag (VAECO Form 0008): used for individual

items from a batch. The information from the larger batch will be
transcribed from the batch Serviceable Tag.
2.
The Serviceable tag is attached to part/ materials. Copy of accompanied

certificate is also tagged to rotable parts, serialized/ repaired expendable
parts.
3.
Consumable Parts shall have GRN on each cover bag/ can/ box to
prevent improper preservation and distribution.
4.
[deleted].
5.
For Electro Static Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) component, ESDS

stickers are attached on the outside of container where it is easy to see
for awareness.
6.
After inspection and acceptance, part/ materials are directly transferred

to the suitable store or put on the rack marked Awaiting location.
7.
Part/ materials of customers other than VNA, after being inspected, will
be kept with their original tags in dedicated location.
Locating
1.
Position of aircraft part/ materials are arranged depending to type, owner

IAW manufacturers instruction and store facilities.
Page 9.2-1

9.2.4.3
2.
Aircraft part/ materials store of maintenance center located at suitably

position and are monitored by LGD to avoid affecting of environment
factor. Storage position of aircraft part/ materials must be assured for
keeping in good condition to avoid physical damage
3.
Part/ materials arrangement is according to location specified in control

system of Logistics Department.
4.
Location is showed on computer and written on Serviceable tags

(VAECO Form 0005 or VAECO Form 0007) and on the outside of the
containers if possible.
5.
When putting either barrel or box or baggage into certain place, it has to
make sure that all tags are easy to be found, each container will be
placed in order, from the bottom to the top.
6.
Only a light part/ materials can be put on top of other boxes, containers,
carton boxes. If there is a space, it is not recommended to do so.
7.
If there is a symbol such as an arrow or umbrella on the outside of a box

or a bag, it is restricting to follow the instruction.
8.
Part/ materials of the customers shall be stored in specific area.
Preservation (Storage)
1.
Part/ materials were preserved in box/ container IAW ATA-300 standard.

Identification tag attached to each box/ container on rack must be
identified from corridor/ path. Box/ container of part/ materials must be
arranged IAW manufacturers requirements.
2.
Aircraft part/ materials in box/ container at working area must be

attached related control document. Controller at working area need
regularly check to assure that aircraft part/ materials were preserved IAW
manufacturers requirements.
3.
Bonded store was segregated completely from working area and keep
preservation
environment
IAW
manufacturers
requirements.
Temperature and humidity in preservation stores are maintained IAW
manufacturers requirements and recorded at least twice every day. In
the case the manufacturer does not specify perseveration temperature
and humidity, the temperature and humidity of the store will be
maintained reasonably.
4.
Part/ materials which have numerous or big size are arranged on

suitable rack to avoid damage or distortion.
5.
Control sheet metal, composite after cutting to use a part

a.
If rest part is considered continuing use, store inspector will issue

new VAECO Form 0007 base on last VAECO Form 0007 attached
to rest part.
b.
If the rest part is considered not continuing use, store inspector will
issue new VAECO Form 0009 attached to rest part
Page 9.2-2

6.
Part/ materials store of maintenance center located at suitably position

and are monitored by LGD to avoid affecting of environment factor.
Storage position of part/ materials must be assured for keeping in good
condition to avoid physical damage
7.
It is recommended by using access ladder for reaching the high rack for
safety, not climbing on it and probably dropping parts and materials
8.
Moreover, for some special part/ materials, the preservation procedure

has to follow as below:
a.
Carpets preservation: Carpets and rolls of fabric are not kept straight
up. If possible, they should be kept separately and rotated 90 every
06 months to prevent being crushed and wrinkle.
b.
Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) parts preservation: All

ESDS parts have to be stored in containers completely insulated
from metal objects. They should be preserved in containers ATA300, and
All parts marked ESDS are handled with care during load/unload,
transport, inspection
Wrist bracelet connected to the ESDS test bench is always worn.
The condition of bracelet has to be inspected and recorded as
instruction on the ESDS test bench.
c.
Air cylinder preservation:

Make sure that all indicators and valves of passengers/crews
oxygen cylinders are protected with the cover/ cap, grease free
as well
All air cylinders are stored inside dark rooms to avoid fire and
explosion. Those rooms have to be equipped air-conditioners and
humidifiers.
d.
Wheels and tires preservation

Tires are kept away from the direct sunshine.
Wheels are preserved on the racks.
The pressure of wheel during preservation is not excess of 20%
operational pressure.
e.
Tubes, mattress, and other materials preservation.

All tubes are attached on flat wood pad for keeping their original
shape.
Similarly, all big mattresses are either appended on flat plywood
pads, or carton pads, or hung on with their racks, like tires, they
have to be rotated to prevent crush.
All the naked ends of electric cables have to be waxed or taped
to avoid oxidizing.
Page 9.2-3

It should have hooks for hanging different hoses and long

particular items, and rubbery items which have to be kept away
from direct sunshine because of being damaged or reducing
quality of parts and materials.
For any parts and materials which contain liquid inside have to be
spin and turned over frequently in order to make liquid running
everywhere inside.
It is not allowed using mercurial temperature indicators in stores.
All excessive long, big cables, rubber hoses, and wires are not
allowed rolling tighten to avoid twisting, and folding.
It should have specific racks for storing metal plates. They have
to be arranged separately along the longest edge to avoid
scratch and damage. It has to be written down Goods Receipt
Number on the surface so that the number wont be disappeared
when the metal plate is cut as distributing.
f.
Battery preservation
Battery has to be preserved in store that is vented and kept away
from aircraft parts/ materials.
Moreover, battery store shall be equipped with safety devices in
case of overflowing of battery liquid accidentally. Full charged
batteries are kept in separated area in the store.
g.
Engines preservation
Engines shall be preserved IAW manufacturers requirements.
h.
Flammable materials store

Paint, oil, chemicals, grease are preserved in bricked stores
away from the main and have weakened roofs in case of
explosion, the air and smoke will run through the weakened point
on the roofs, it causes less dangerous for people and equipment
if the smoke and air break the roofs and escape.
The flammable materials stores are equipped with air conditioner
to control temperature. The store are clean and dirt free. All metal
boxes, vases, bottles are clean before preserving.
All paint boxes have to be turned over every month showed in a
diagram located all boxes position such as upside down. It
avoids forming films impact on paint, and cause residue on the
bottom.
Preservation procedure has to be followed the manufactures and
suppliers requirements. Refrigerator and air conditioner are used
for preserving materials required down to minus 20 Celsius.
All information related to other part/ materials preservation maybe
referenced to Commercial Materials Listing-CML.
Page 9.2-4

9.3 SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIAL CONTROL
9.3
SHELF LIFE PART/ MATERIALS CONTROL IN STORE
9.3.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to control shelf life of aircraft part/ materials IAW
applicable requirement from manufacturers.
9.3.2
SCOPE
This procedures is applied for all aircraft parts/ materials used for
9.3.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
Logistics Director is responsible to carry out this procedure.
9.3.4
PROCEDURE
9.3.4.1
Control of shelf life aircraft parts/ materials
9.3.4.2
1.
Storage time for Shelf life aircraft parts/ materials is specified in its
certificate/ label of manufacturer.
2.
Due date of shelf life aircraft parts/ materials are monitored through
AMASIS.
3.
Monthly, Store Control section make a List of aircraft part/ materials to be

expired (VAECO Form 4014) for controlling and processing.
4.
At the expired date, Store Control section does the necessary changing
on the system and move the expired aircraft part/ materials to an isolated
store waiting for disposition.
Control aircraft parts that are required maintenance during storage

1.
When doing incoming inspection of aircraft parts, Store inspector must

refer to List of aircraft component require maintenance (VAECO Form
1001) issued by EGD and enter the related information such as
manufacture date, overhaul/ inspection date, TSN, CSN, TSO, CSO,
TSI, CSI (as required) in AMASIS in order to ensure that the next due
date is the same as actual due date specified in the Airworthiness
Certificate or due date based on AMS/ CMS whichever is sooner.
2.
Store Control section shall monitor all the maintenance required aircraft
parts/ materials, pay attention to the aircraft parts/ materials that will be
expired on next month to take appropriate actions.
3.
At the expired date, Store Control section does the necessary changing
on the system and move the expired aircraft part to store of
unserviceable part waiting for sending to be maintained as required.
Page 9.3-1

9.4 ROBBERY (CANIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY
9.4
ROBBERY (CANNIBALIZATION) FROM STOCKED ASSEMBLY
9.4.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to control robbery of aircraft component/ part from
stocked assembly IAW applicable requirements.
9.4.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for robbing/ cannibalizing a component from an
assembly stocked in VAECO store and a sub-component from a component
in workshop.
9.4.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
Logistics Director is responsible to control robbery process of stocked

assembly.
2.
Line and Base Maintenance Directors are responsible to carry out

robbery of aircraft component/ part.
3.
Component maintenance Director and Cabin interior maintenance

Director are responsible for carry out robbery of an item from a
component.
9.4.4
PROCEDURE
9.4.4.1
General
9.4.4.2
1.
When aircraft has a defect, which cannot be rectified due to no

replacement part available, a serviceable part can be robbed from other
stocked Next Higher Assembly or APU or engine (here after called
ASSEMBLY). This assembly can be either serviceable or unserviceable.
2.
A single aircraft component/ part (here after called ITEM) which can be
robbed from stocked assembly may be rotable LRU with following
characteristics.
a.
Disassembly/re-assembly of the item is simple work and having no

impact on storage condition of the robbed assembly.
b.
No requirement to test the assembly in maintenance shop to be

carried out after the item is re-installed.
3.
A sub-part/ sub-component (here after called ITEM) which can be robbed

from serviceable/ unserviceable component provided that the removal of
the item is simple work and having no damage to other item of the
component.
4.
Robbery can be carried out upon customer request. In another case, A

robbery of an item from ENGINE should be permitted from the Customer
(Technical Department and Supply Department for VNA ).
Robbery of an item from serviceable assembly

1.
When robbing an item from serviceable assembly, staff with appropriate

authorization of the RMC or BMC must carry out following actions:
a.
Removing requested item from the assembly.
Page 9.4-1

Inspecting the robbing item and then issue Re-certified Certificate

(VAECO Form 5001) for the robbing item.
c.
Making/ updating Missing Part List (VAECO Form 4008) and attach
with Serviceable tag of robbed assembly;
d.
Raising an Non-Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) giving details of

the actions taken and attach with assembly.
e.
Raising a Request for Supply to LGD for a replacement of robbing

item.
f.
Copying the NRC and Missing Part List and send to Dock Control/
Technical Record team of related TPD.
The staff of related TPD shall remove the robbing item from NHA
(disassembly) or make a TAR and send to EGD for support to
disassembly on AMASIS.
3.
Logistics Department carries out following actions:

a.
Issue a Serviceable Tag for robbing item with the GRN on the tag.
b.
Enter all details of the item into ROBBERY REGISTER.
c.
Make an order for the item as specified in Request for Supply.
d.
Keep the robbed

manufacturer.
assembly
in
condition
as
requested
by
The installation of the item on the A/C shall be updated in AMASIS within
24 hours since actual action performance.
Robbery of an item from unserviceable assembly

1.
9.4.4.4
b.
2.
4.
9.4.4.3
To certify an item robbed from stored unserviceable assembly as

serviceable, staff with appropriate authorization of the Maintenance
Centers (RMC or BMC) must carry out following actions:
a.
Checking all information in related documents of unserviceable

assembly to ensure that the failure of the assembly has no impact on
the component;
b.
Inspect the robbing item to ensure that it is serviceable.
2.
All actions such as: removal, inspection, issuing Re-certified certificate

and Missing Part List are the same as above. However, the status of
robbing item should be changed to serviceable basing on Re-certified
certificate. All information concerning with Robbery must be entered
into ROBBERY REGISTER.
3.
Logistics Department will decide either to re-install the robbing item

before sending the assembly to maintain/ repair or to install the robbing
item during maintenance/repair process of the assembly.
Robbery of an item from a component in workshop

1.
When robbing an item from a serviceable or unserviceable component in

workshop, appropriate authorized staff of the CMC/ CIMC shall:
Page 9.4-2

9.4.4.5
a.
Perform a visual inspection/ test of the whole component and/or item

to be robbed to ensure that item is serviceable.
b.
Removing required item from the component IAW CMM.
c.
Inspecting the removed items and issuing Acceptance Part List

(Form 7056) for serviceable items. The Acceptance Part List shall
specify the necessary information including item description, item
P/N, item S/N (if any), quantity, component P/N and S/N (if any) from
which the item is robbed.
2.
The authorized staff of the CMC/ CIMC shall issue Re-certified

Certificate (VAECO Form 5001) and Acceptance Part List (if any) and
attach to the serviceable items.
3.
The serviceable items with related certificate and document will be sent
to store for preservation or kept at CMC/ CIMC workshop for further
usage.
Recertify serviceable assembly after robbery

1.
2.
On receipt request form Logistic Department for re-certifying assembly

as serviceable after a robbery, authorized staff of the RMC or BMC must
carry out following actions:
a.
Re-installing component on robbed assembly as soon as possible.
b.
Checking assembly, issuing Re-certified certificate for the assembly.
c.
Clearly note: To carry out related inspections when install the

assembly on aircraft in block 9 of the Re-certified certificate.
d.
Entering information of the re-installation into Non-Routine Card.
Store Inspector performs acceptance inspection for assembly in

accordance with Incoming Inspection procedure.
Page 9.4-3

9.5
PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE
9.5.1
PURPOSE
9.5 PART/ MATERIALS ISSUANCE
To establish a procedure to deliver part/ materials for maintenance IAW

9.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for part/ materials delivery to maintenance centers
or department within VAECO.
9.5.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
Logistics Department is responsible to deliver right part/ materials upon

request from VAECO maintenance centers or department.
2.
Maintenance Centers are responsible to receive part/ materials and

transportation from store to maintenance workplace.
9.5.4
PROCEDURE
9.5.4.1
Receiving A/C parts/ materials request.

1.
9.5.4.2
In general, A/C parts/ materials request originate from

a.
BMC and RMC for aircraft maintenance and rectification of defects.
b.
EGD to implement AMS/ CMS task, AD, SB, MOD, other technical
work and service orders from BDD.
c.
MCC to implement service orders from BDD.
d.
CMC/ CIMC to implement aircraft component maintenance/ repair/

overhaul; aviation product fabrication; or tool and equipment
calibration/ maintenance/ repair.
2.
All information of required spares/ materials shall be input in AMASIS by

the requester and request Logistics Department by using Request for
Supply (VAECO Form 4023) or Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024).
3.
In emergency case, the requester can fill all required information of the
spares/ materials in the Stock Requisition (VAECO Form 4024) and
submit to the Logistics Department to get the spares/ materials. In this
case the staff of Logistics Department shall input the information of
requested spares/ materials in the AMASIS.
Issue of part/ materials

1.
Location and actual stock of spares/ materials in store will be check on

AMASIS to ensure they are available. The spares/ materials shall be
issued following FIFO (First In First Out) policy.
2.
FIFO policy must strictly obey, except:

a.
Delivering A/C part/ materials to outstations far away from main

base. In this case, A/C part/ materials which have the longest
expired date shall be delivered.
Page 9.5-1

b.
In HAN and HCM, when delivering A/C part/ materials with an

expired date, ensuring that the A/C part/ materials which has the
shortest time to the expired date shall be delivered.
3.
The delivering of A/C part/ materials shall be performed by using Stock

Requisition (VAECO Form 4024). 01 copy of requisition is sent to Store
Control section, 01 copy is kept in the Store and 01 copy is attached with
the delivered spares/ materials.
4.
Upon part/ materials issuing, all the responsibility of part/ materials

status, transportation and handling belongs to the Receiver.
5.
The delivered consumable part/ materials shall be attached with a

Consumable Release Tag (VAECO Form 0008). All information of
consumable parts/ materials are transferred from a batch of part/
materials. The Serviceable Tag for Expendable/Consumable Item
(VAECO Form 0007) shall be kept with the batch of part/ materials until
they are completely run out.
6.
For MOD kit: Cannot deliver MOD kit components separately. To avoid
AOG situation, delivering a part of MOD kit shall be approved by
Manager of Stock Control Division or HCM General Materials Division.
To take a part/ component out of a MOD Kit, the Robbery procedure
shall be followed as specified in 9.4.
7.
For a WP such as Base Checks, Engine Replacement, LDG

Replacement, based on spare parts/ materials requested from EGD:
a.
Stock Control Division must prepare the preload and send to HAN
Store/HMC Logistics Division in 07 days before the WP started.
Each task card, EO, SRO, WO should have a separate Stock
Requisition.
b.
Store Division must issue spares/ materials with EP and CO type 03

days before the work is started. All these spares/ materials are
preserved at a separate area and shall be delivered when there is a
request from Maintenance Centers. The spares/ materials type AR
are prepared but not issued. Whenever an AR spare/ material is
required, the maintenance staff goes to the store to get it.
Note: CO type is material (including Oil, Fuel, Hydraulic fluid, lock
wire, cloth); EP type is non-chemical material/ spare (including
seal/ filters...). The CO and EP materials/ spares must be used to
carry out the task. AR type is spare that need if a defect is found
when performing related tasks/ EO).
8.
For a WO to perform an OOP task, EO, SRO at ramp maintenance,

the respective RTPD creates a separate Stock Requisition (VAECO form
4024) for each WO. Based on spare parts/ materials requested from
RMC, the Store Division issue all spares/ materials required to perform
the WO.
9.
In case of part/ materials are insufficient Nil Stock or Not Stocked, Stock
Control Division has to:
Page 9.5-2

a.
Check the actual store status, adjust the supply capability and
interchange between stores.
b.
Determine if there are options for parts interchange by sending Part

Technical Relation Confirmation (VAECO Form 4011) to EGD and
assess the reply information.
c.
If there is option for parts interchange then update the store data
base in AMASIS and send the request to Store keeper for delivering.
d.
If there are not interchange parts, Stock Control Division shall make
a supply request base on AMASIS Requisition form, the Request for
Supply (VAECO Form 4023) and priority order of the part
(ROUTINE, CRITICAL, AOG).
For rotable parts which are repairable (type 4, 5 on AMASIS):
Make a supply request to VNA Supply Department.
For consumable part/ materials (Type 1,2,3,6 on AMASIS) make
a supply request to Supply Division and update on AMASIS
related information.
For parts can be fabricated by VAECO, Stock Control
Division/HMC Supply Division make an fabrication order with a
request by customer and send to the appropriate maintenance
center.
9.5.4.3
Update information and follow up

Upon the supply request is sent, Stock Control Division must do the
following:
9.5.4.4
1.
Check and update information for requested parts such as: ordering
number, order date. on the control software system.
2.
On a weekly basis, make a list of requested parts which has not

information feedback and sent to Supply Division.
3.
On a weekly basis, make a list of ordered parts which must supply on

time for rectification of B, C defects to related Divisions for supervising
and speeding up the receiving process of ordered parts.
4.
If the parts cannot received on time, providing necessary document to

requesting Department and upgrade the priority of part/ materials order if
necessary.
Sending part/ materials to the third party/ contractor

1.
Sending parts/ materials to the third party/ contractor based on request

from the customer or authorized person.
2.
When there is an approved request of sending parts/ materials to the

third party/contractor, Repair control division/HCM Logistics Division
carry out sending procedure.
3.
Shipping procedure: After finishing parts/ materials shipping procedure,

Repair control division/HCM Logistics Division has to inform shipping
details such as: AWB, quantity of sending, flight number and ETD... to
Page 9.5-3

the third party/ contractor. Update information of parts/ materials on

AMASIS and management software. Shipment will be monitored until the
third party/ contractor has received parts/ materials.
9.5.4.5
9.5.5
Sending part/ materials within VAECO stores

1.
Sending parts/ materials between stores in VAECO based on request of

Stock Control division or maintenance centers via requisition form on
AMASIS
2.
When there is a request of sending parts/ materials, Repair control

division or HCM Logistics Division will receive parts/materials from store,
pack items IAW ATA300, accomplish documents for shipping.
3.
Updating issue note information in AMASIS and link to related requisition

form;
4.
Notifying to the store who will receive parts/ materials; Monitoring until
parts/ materials are received.
ARCHIVES
All the A/C part/ materials request and related documents must be archived
in Logistics Department for 1 year.
Page 9.5-4

9.6 RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS
9.6
RECEIVING AND SENDING UNSERVICEABLE PARTS
9.6.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to receive and send unserviceable parts to
approved maintenance organizations for maintenance.
9.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for all unserviceable repairable aircraft parts.
9.6.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
Logistics Director is responsible to carry out this procedure.
9.6.4
PROCEDURE
9.6.4.1
Classification of receiving unserviceable part

The unserviceable parts are received from the following sources:
9.6.4.2
1.
Unserviceable part is removed from aircraft in Ramp or Base

maintenance.
2.
Unserviceable part is returned from CMC/ CIMC.
3.
Unserviceable part is received from customer who have maintenance

contract with VAECO.
4.
Unserviceable part is considered as Un-repairable Part or Beyond

Economical Repair Part which is returned by a maintenance organization
or manufacturer.
Receiving and handling Unserviceable Part.

1.
Personnel in duty of LGD (Store keeper or Store Inspector) shall carry

out receiving of unserviceable part in specific area.
2.
The unserviceable part removed from aircraft shall be accepted if the

part is preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with the
document stated in 6.6.
3.
The unserviceable part returned from CMC/ CIMC shall be accepted if is

preserved in ATA-300 container and accompanied with related
documentation specified in 6.6.4.4. The unserviceable part will be
handled as follows:
4.
a.
if the unserviceable part can be repaired at other maintenance

organization It will be moved to Unserviceable store. The
unserviceable part will be sent to approve maintenance organization
for maintenance.
b.
if the unserviceable part cannot be repaired or is beyond economical

repair It shall be moved to Condemn store and handle IAW
procedure 9.8 Disposition of condemn parts.
The unserviceable part received from customer who have contract with
VAECO shall be accepted if it is preserved in ATA-300 container and
accompanied with the following document Repair request or Repair order
and other related document supporting the maintenance. The
Page 9.6-1

unserviceable part will be sent to appropriate maintenance center for

maintenance.
5.
9.6.4.3
Determine the content of Repair Order for Unserviceable Part.

1.
9.6.4.4
The unserviceable part returned from outside maintenance organization

or manufacturer as Un-repairable Part or Beyond Economical Repair
Part shall be accepted if it is preserved in ATA-300 container and
accompanied with the shop findings/ defect report and other related
document. This unserviceable part shall be moved to Condemn store
and handle IAW procedure 9.8 Disposition of condemn parts.
For unserviceable part owned by VAECO or VNA, Repair control division
will issue Repair order based on the followings:
a.
Unserviceable Tags (VAECO Form 0005);
b.
Repair Requirements from RTPD or BTPD;
c.
Scheduled maintenance requirement;
d.
Part maintenance history from monitoring system;
e.
Applicable AD, SB, VSB sent from EGD or CMC/ CIMC.
2.
For other customers U/S part, Repair control division will issue repair
order based on customer requirements.
3.
Detailed repair order will be issued, controlled, updated in AMASIS.

Information of order includes:
a.
Name and address of approved Maintenance organization/ Repair

station
b.
Number of repair order.
c.
P/N and S/N
d.
Defect description
e.
The additional work has to be done.
f.
All requested documents and certificate.
g.
Terms of Delivery and Redelivery.
Sending unserviceable parts inside VAECO

1.
Repair control division issues Maintenance/ repair Request (In House

Repair) (VAECO Form 4002) for all work such as repair, inspection,
modification, guarantee if this work is within the capability of VAECO.
2.
Unserviceable part shall be packed in container meet requirement of

ATA-300 and sent to relevant maintenance center of VAECO. This
unserviceable part is accompanied with Maintenance/ repair Request
and applicable document.
3.
Repair control division contacts, cooperates with appropriate

maintenance centers for monitoring the processing and repaired
condition of parts.
Page 9.6-2

9.6.4.5
9.6.5
Sending unserviceable parts outside VAECO

1.
For VAECO unserviceable part, Repair control division issues

Maintenance/ repair Request (Outside Repair) (VAECO Form 4003) for
all the work is not within the capability of VAECO and sends directly to
maintenance organization in the VAECO List of approved maintenance
contractor.
2.
For VNA unserviceable part that the maintenance is out of the capability
of VAECO, Repair control division issues Maintenance/ repair Request
(Outside Repair) (VAECO Form 4003) and sends to VNA Supply
Department.
3.
Based on detailed repair request, Repair control division will ship

unserviceable parts for repairing. The following work shall be carried out:
a.
Select transportation method and transportation agency.
b.
Prepare document for outside repair including customs paper,

trading invoice, repair order, repair contract, etc.
c.
Transfer unserviceable part from Unserviceable Store to shipping

area. Unserviceable parts are prepared and packed following ATA300 requirements. Necessary information shall be written on
accompanied documents and on the container.
d.
Co-operate and monitor condition, tracking of shipment by

information of destination, time of arrival... to complete the
procedures of sending, receiving outside repaired parts.
ARCHIVES
All repair request and related document are kept in Repair Control Division at
least 1 year since the requested date.
Page 9.6-3

9.7 STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL
9.7
STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL
9.7.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure to control the stock levels and inventory of the part/
materials IAW applicable requirement.
9.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling the stock levels of part/ materials
owned by VAECO or customer who have contract with VAECO.
9.7.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
Stock Control Division and HCM Logistics Division have responsibility to
carry out this procedure.
9.7.4
PROCEDURE:
9.7.4.1
Control of Stock level filling up

1.
In the time of operating, the amount of aircraft part/ materials preserved

in store gradually decrease. Therefore Stock Control Division/ HCM
Logistics Division must continuously check the stock level to have the
appropriate action.
2.
The Stock Control Division/ HCM Logistics Division make a list of aircraft
part/ materials preserved in store which has the stock level less than the
approved ordering point.
3.
The Stock Control Division analyzes and processes the list of aircraft
part/ materials need to be filled up in the store as follows:
4.
9.7.4.2
a.
Consider the interchangeable of aircraft part/ materials need to fill up

the store to the aircraft part/ materials available in the store. Clear
from the list all part/ materials which are interchangeable and part/
materials have the stock level higher than the ordering point.
b.
Check the order status of the rest in the list. Clear from the list all
part/ materials which had the supply request and all part/ materials
had the order to purchase.
c.
Make a supply request for the remaining in the list.
Base on the analysis of real consumption of aircraft part/ materials, if the

current stock level is not enough to meet the requirement of maintenance
or the lead time needed to supply is too long, Stock Control Division
makes a Request to change the approved stock level and sends to
Logistics Director. After getting the approval of new stock level, Stock
Control Division shall updates on the management software and makes
a request to fill up the stock level compliance with the new stock level.
The request shall be sent to Supply Division.
Store Inventory Control

1.
To closely supervise the stock level as well as the changing of aircraft

part/ materials must continuously conduct the store inventory. There are
Page 9.7-1

9.7 STOCK LEVEL AND STORE INVENTORY CONTROL
some methods to make an inventory: Continuously inventory, suddenly

inventory and Period inventory.
2.
9.7.5
a.
Continuously inventory is the method of inventory after the positions

of part/ materials in the store, from the very first shelf to the last
shelf. The Stock Control Division conduct continuously inventory
everyday by management software. If an error is detected, conduct
an on-site check and correct the data after there is an approval from
the Logistics Director.
b.
Suddenly Inventory is an inventory at a random position in the store

or a random aircraft part/ materials.
c.
Regularly Inventory is a total inventory as requirement.
Steps to conduct an inventory:

a.
The Stock Control Division makes a List of A/C part/ materials

needed to be inventoried (VAECO Form 4015).
b.
The Stock Control Division checks the real amount, status and
position of aircraft part/ materials.
c.
Report the result to the Logistics Director.
d.
Whenever an error is detected must conduct an investigation and

submit a solution.
e.
The changing of the store can only conduct when getting a decision
from Logistics Director.
ARCHIVES
All the lists of aircraft part/ materials need to be filled up; inventory reports
must be kept at the Stock Control Division in the duration of 5 years.
Page 9.7-2

9.8
DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS
9.8.1
PURPOSE
9.8 DISPOSITION OF CONDEMNED PARTS
To ensure condemned aircraft parts/ materials are controlled and destroyed

or mutilated in order to prevent these from being distributed and used as
serviceable products.
9.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for condemned aircraft part/ materials owned by
VAECO or by Customer who have contract with VAECO regarding subject of
disposition of condemned parts/ materials.
9.8.3
9.8.4
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
The Logistics Directors is responsible for ensuring disposition process of

condemned parts/ materials carried out properly by authorization
personnel.
2.
The Quality Assurance Director is responsible for controlling disposition

process of condemned parts/ materials.
DEFINITION
1.
Condemned parts/ materials in this procedure are the followings but not
limited to:
a.
Certified life-limited parts that have reached or exceeded their

certified life limits;
b.
Scrap part;
c.
Parts with known non-repairable defects, whether visible or not to

naked eye;
d.
Parts that are not within the specifications set forth by the approved
design, and that cannot be brought into conformance with applicable
specifications;
e.
Part for which further processing or rework cannot make them

eligible for certification under a recognized certificate holders
system;
f.
Part subjected to unacceptable modification or rework that is

irreversible;
g.
Life-limited part that have reached or exceeded their life limits, or

have missing or incomplete records;
h.
Part that cannot be returned to an airworthy condition due to

exposure to extreme forces or heat or adverse environment;
i.
Principal structural elements removed from a high-cycle aircraft for

which conformity cannot be accomplished by complying with the
applicable aging aircraft airworthiness directives;
j.
Components with no traceability to the Production Approval Holder

(PAH);
Page 9.8-1

k.
Parts imported without proper approval documentation; and
l.
Used parts with no maintenance history.
m. Certified shelf-life material that have reached or exceeded their

certified shelf-life limits;
9.8.5
2.
Life-limited part means any part for which a mandatory replacement limit
is specified in the type design, the Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness, or the maintenance manual.
3.
Scrap part is the part that VAECO or the owner has decided to dispose
of because he/she considers them to be of relatively little value and
unusable for any other reason.
4.
Shelf-life (Life-limited) material means any material for which a

mandatory storage limit is specified in manufacturer manual.
PROCEDURES
1.
2.
Receiving and verifying status of condemned parts.

a.
Repair Control Division of LGD checks all received un-serviceable

aircraft parts and verify the status of those un-serviceable parts.
b.
If un-serviceable aircraft part is fall into any category specified in

9.8.4.1 above then the part is tagged with Condemned Part Tag
(VAECO Form 0009) by Stored Inspector and transferred to
Condemn Store.
c.
All condemned parts/ materials are quarantined in Condemn Store to

prevent of misuse and waiting for disposition/ mutilation process.
d.
Condemn Store are locked, secured and separated from area or

stores keeping serviceable part/ materials. Only authorized
personnel of LGD and QAD can access to Condemn Store.
Process of disposition/ mutilation condemned parts/ materials

a.
Every 6 months, Logistics Department shall make a List of

condemned parts/ materials that were property of VAECO and
submitted to VAECO CEO for approval.
b.
For the condemned parts belonged to VNA, Logistics Department

shall make a List of condemned parts and submitted to VNA as
required for further action.
c.
A Disposition/ mutilation Team shall be set up for doing disposition/

mutilation condemned part with member of Logistics department,
QAD and other related department.
d.
Mutilation should be accomplished in such a manner that the part

becomes unusable for their original intended use. Mutilated parts
should not be able to be reworked or camouflaged to provide the
appearance of being serviceable such as, re-plating, shortening and
re-threading long bolts, welding, straightening, machining, cleaning,
polishing, or repainting.
Page 9.8-2

e.
Mutilation may be accomplished by one or a combination of the

following procedures, but is not limited to:
Grinding.
Burning.
Removal of a major integral feature.
Permanent distortion of Components.
Cutting a significant size hole with a cutting torch or saw.
Melting.
Sawing into many small pieces.
Removing manufacturers identification, part, lot, batch, and serial
numbers.
3.
4.
f.
Manufacturers Data plates of mutilated part shall be returned to

Manufacture upon requested. Otherwise the Data plate shall be
destroyed by VAECO.
g.
All information of condemned part being mutilated shall be recorded

in the Condemned Part Log (VAECO Form 4021) for tracking
purpose.
h.
Almost condemned part after being mutilated shall be handled as

industrial wastes. Some mutilated part shall be kept in Condemn
store for audit purposes.
Process of disposition of shelf-life material

a.
At the end of each month, Store division of Logistics Department

shall make a list of Shelf-life material with the expiry date on next
month.
b.
All the shelf-life material in the list shall be moved from store to
separated area. Those materials shall be disposed as industrial
wastes.
Using condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses.

a.
In some case, VAECO may choose to release those condemned

parts for legitimate non-flight uses, such as for training and
education, research and development, or for non-aviation
applications. In such instances, mutilation may not be appropriate.
b.
The following methods should be used to prevent misrepresentation:

PERMANENTLY and CLEARLY by carving, sculpturing or
chiseling the part, subparts as NOT FOR AVIATION USE and
NOT SERVICEABLE. (Ink stamping is not an acceptable
method).
Removing part number identification.
Removing identification plate and marking.
Page 9.8-3

Maintaining a tracking of condemned part for legitimate non-flight

uses by recording information in the List of condemned part for
legitimate non-flight uses. This list will be sent to QAD for
monitoring.
Securing a signed certification statement from the purchaser
indicating that the purchaser will not use or convey this part for
use in aviation products.
9.8.6
ARCHIVES
1.
Condemned Part Log (VAECO Form 4021) shall be kept in Repair

Control Division 1 year after the condemned part being destroyed.
2.
List of condemned part for legitimate non-flight uses shall be kept in QAD
for 1 year after the condemned part not being used for other purpose.
Page 9.8-4

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROC.
PART 10
QUALITY SYSTEM
PROCEDURES
Page 10-1

10.1 INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL
10.1
INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL
10.1.1
CATEGORIES
PERSONNEL
1.
2.
OF
INSPECTION
AND
RETURN
TO
SERVICE
Aircraft inspection and return to service staff

a.
Category A staff.
b.
Category B1 staff.
c.
Category B2 staff.
d.
Category C staff.
Aviation Repair Specialist (ARS)

a.
Component inspection and return to service staff are categorized as

following:
A/C Computer staff.
In Flight Entertainment (IFE) component staff
Wheel/ Brake staff
Battery staff,
Cabin component staff,
Safety/ Emergency equipment staff
Electrical component staff
b.
Borescope inspection staff.
c.
Structure repair staff.
d.
Painting staff.
e.
Cabin repair staff.
f.
In Flight Entertainment (IFE) repair staff.
g.
A/C repair staff:

Mechanical (ME) repair staff:
- ME 128 repair staff
- ME 567 repair staff.
- ME 34 repair staff
Electric & Avionic (E&A) repair staff
3.
Non Destructive Test (NDT) staff.
4.
Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff (Store Inspector)
10.1.2
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTION AND RETURN TO

SERVICE PERSONNEL
10.1.2.1
General requirements
Page 10.1-1

All inspection and return to service personnel shall meet the below
requirements:
10.1.2.2
10.1.2.3
1.
Being thoroughly familiar with the applicable regulations of competent

authorities.
2.
Being trained in the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/

approved by competent authorities and customer procedures.
3.
Being able to read, write, and understand the English language.
4.
Being trained in human factors.
5.
Being trained in Safety Management System.
6.
Being trained, examined and authorized by customer, if required.
Category A staff
1.
Having successfully completed the approved type training at level II ATA

104 for all systems.
2.
Holding a valid Maintenance license category A with type rating, or

equivalent, issued or recognized by the customer or the appropriate
authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any license (air
authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier
in accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness
Maintenance Program or equivalent.
3.
Having minimum of 12 months practical maintenance experience with at

least 04 months recent experience on relevant aircraft.
4.
Completed the task training for category A or equivalent.
Category B1/B2 staff

1.
Having successfully completed the approved type training:

a.
For Category B1 staff: The type training course should cover

airframe system, power plant, electrical systems at level III and
avionics systems at level II ATA104.
b.
For Category B2 staff: The type training course should cover ATA25,
ATA26, ATA35, ATA38, electrical systems and avionics systems at
level III; other remaining systems at level II ATA 104.
2.
Holding a valid Maintenance license category B1/B2 with type rating, or

equivalent, issued or recognized by appropriate authority. Inspection and
RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if
accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that
operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or
equivalent.
3.
Having minimum of 24 months practical maintenance experience with at

least 04 months recent experience on relevant aircraft.
4.
Completed the task training for category B1/B2 or equivalent
Page 10.1-2

10.1.2.4
10.1.2.5
Additional prerequisite requirements for Engine run-up low/ high power

function authorization:
1.
Having completed an engine run-up training course on aircraft

make/model.
2.
Holding B1/B2 authorization in minimum of 03 months.
3.
Holding B1 authorization on Power plant systems, applicable for Engine

run-up at high power.
4.
Completed the task training for Engine run-up (low/ high power).
Category C staff
1.
For applicant holding category B1 or B2 authorization, He/ She must

have minimum of 36 months experience of exercising category B1 or B2
privileges including 12 months supporting category C authorized staff in
base maintenance, or
2.
For applicant holding an academic degree in a technical discipline, from

a university or other higher educational institution, He/ She must
a.
Successfully complete the approved type training:

At the category B1 or B2 level on A/C type seeking for
authorization, or
At level I ATA 104 on A/C type seeking for authorization, and at
B1 or B2 level of first relevant A/C type.
b.
10.1.2.6
Have 36 months of experience working in a civil aircraft maintenance

environment on a representative selection of tasks directly
associated with aircraft maintenance including 06 months of
observation of base maintenance task.
3.
Holding a valid Maintenance license category C with type rating, or

equivalent, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority. Inspection
and RTS persons need not hold any license (air authority certification) if
accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that
operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or
equivalent.
4.
Completed the task training for category C or equivalent.
Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff

1.
Being trained in methods, techniques, practices for the incoming

inspection for parts and material.
2.
Being trained in AMASIS, in related module(s).
3.
Being trained in ATA 300.
4.
Having 36 months experience working in the area of aviation parts and

materials and at least 12 months assisting in parts and materials
incoming inspections.
5.
Completed the task training for Part and Material Incoming Inspection or
equivalent.
Page 10.1-3

10.1.2.7
Component inspection and return to service staff

1.
Being trained in relative component maintenance and having minimum of

12 months experience at correlative level (if applicable) in respective or
equivalent component maintenance, or
2.
Having minimum 18 months experience at correlative level (if applicable)

in respective or equivalent component maintenance.
Holding a valid ARS license or equivalent issued or recognized by the
appropriate authority. Inspection and RTS persons need not hold any
license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized by the
customer.
3.
10.1.2.8
10.1.2.9
Completed the task training at correlative level (if applicable) for

respective component maintenance or equivalent.
NDT staff
1.
The appropriate NDT method training and Practical experience

requirement is as specified in VAECO NDT manual paragraph 3.6.
2.
Holding valid examination certificate for respective NDT method.
3.
Holding a valid Eye test certificate for near vision and color perception.
4.
Holding a valid approval from responsible level 3 for respective NDT

method.
Borescope inspection staff

1.
2.
3.
For applicant holding category B1 AMT license with type rating of

respective A/C type, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the the
appropriate authority:
a.
Being trained in borescope inspection.
b.
Completed the task training for respective Engine borescope

inspection.
For applicant holding ARS license or equivalent with Borescope

Inspection function, issued or recognized by the appropriate authority:
a.
Being trained in borescope inspection and construction at level 3

ATA 104 of respective engine/APU.
b.
Having 12 months practical experience of engine/ APU borescope

inspection under supervision of instructor/authorized staff.
c.
Completed the task training for respective aircraft part/component

borescope inspection.
Borescope inspection staff need not hold any license (air authority
certification) if accepted or authorized by the operator/air carrier in
accordance with that operator/air carriers Continuous Airworthiness
10.1.2.10 Structure repair staff

1.
Being trained in structure repair and having minimum of 12 months

experience on A/C structure or
Page 10.1-4

2.
Having minimum 18 months experience on A/C structure repair.
3.
Holding a valid ARS license, or equivalent, issued or recognized by the

appropriate authority. Structure repair staff need not hold any license (air
4.
Completed the task training at correlative level for respective A/C

structure repair or equivalent.
10.1.2.11 Cabin repair staff

1.
Being trained in cabin maintenance and having minimum 12 months

experience on cabin maintenance, or
2.
Having minimum 18 months experience on cabin maintenance.
3.

appropriate authority. Cabin repair staff need not hold any license (air
4.
Completed the task training at correlative level for cabin repair or

equivalent.
10.1.2.12 IFE repair staff

1.
Being trained on IFE system make and model and having minimum 12
months experience on IFE systems repair, or
2.
Having minimum 18 months experience on IFE systems repair.
3.

appropriate authority. IFE repair staff need not hold any license (air
4.
Completed the task training for respective IFE system at correlative level
or equivalent.
10.1.2.13 Painting staff

1.
Being trained in A/C painting and having minimum of 12 months

experience on A/C painting work, or
2.
Having minimum 18 months experience on A/C painting works.
3.

appropriate authority. Painting staff need not hold any license (air
4.
Completed the task training for A/C painting or equivalent.
Page 10.1-5

10.1.2.14 A/C Repair staff

1.
Having successfully completed the approved type training

a.
For ME repair staff: the type training course should cover airframe
system, power plant, electrical systems at level III and avionics
systems at level II ATA104.
b.
For E&A repair staff: the type training course should cover electrical
systems and avionic system at level III and other systems at level II
ATA104.
2.
Holding a valid Aircraft repair licence (with type rating) or equivalent,

issued or recognized by appropriate authority. Aircraft repair staff need
not hold any license (air authority certification) if accepted or authorized
by the operator/air carrier in accordance with that operator/air carriers
Continuous Airworthiness Maintenance Program or equivalent.
3.
Having minimum of 12 months practical maintenance experience on

relevant aircraft.
4.
Completed the task training for related category such as ME 128/ 567/
34 repair or E&A repair or equivalent
10.1.3
QUALIFYING PROCESS
10.1.3.1
Responsibilities
10.1.3.2
1.
The relevant department/ center director are responsible for initially

evaluating ability of potential candidate, proposing candidate list and
application documents of each individual to Human Resource
Department (HRD).
2.
HRD is responsible for initially evaluating application documents and

sending to QAD.
3.
The Quality Assurance Director is responsible for establishing

competence assessment board, evaluating candidate ability and granting
authorization.
Application process
1.
HRD shall collect and initially evaluate application documents and

forward to Quality audit division 10 days before scheduled competence
assessment date.
2.
Application documents:
a.
Application form (VAECO Form 2045) with Director validation.
b.
Copy of basic training certificate/ diploma if initial authorization is

sought.
c.
Copy of valid maintenance license issued or recognized by the

CAAV, applied to candidate seeking for initial/ upgrade authorization.
d.
Copy of type/ specialty training certificate, applied to candidate

seeking for initial/ upgrade authorization, or there is related change
in the training records.
Page 10.1-6

3.
10.1.3.3
e.
Original Tasks Training Syllabus which shall be performed within last

24 months, applied to candidate seeking for initial/ upgrade/
supplement authorization.
f.
Training evidence on subjects: the current applicable VAECO

procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities, human
factors, SMS, customer procedures (if required).
Applicable to NDT staff, the following records should be submitted:

a.
Application form (VAECO form 2045) with Director validation.
b.
Copy of diploma, if any, applied to candidate seeking for initial

authorization.
c.
Valid NDT method training certificate.
d.
Practical experience records (VAECO form 2053 or equivalent).
e.
Vision examination result (VAECO form 2043). The near vision test
in vision examination will be valid for maximum of 01 year. The color
perception test in vision examination will be valid for maximum of 05
years.
f.
Training evidence on subjects: the current applicable VAECO

procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities, human
factors, SMS.
Assessment process for Inspection and Return to service personnel

1.
The Quality Audit division shall evaluate received application documents

to verify correction and provision of relevant data. If accepted, the
multiple choices test and/ or interview shall be arranged to assure the
candidates competency. The Authorization assessment schedule
(VAECO Form 2039) shall be informed to candidates and relevant
departments via VAECO website.
2.
Multiple choices test and/ or interview shall include relevant technical

knowledge, inspection skill, applicable regulations of the competent
authorities and the current VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by
competent authorities.
3.
Multiple choices test questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) shall be

selected from, but not limited to, VAECO questionnaire bank by Quality
Audit division.
4.
Candidates shall use Multiple choices answer sheet (VAECO Form

2041) to record the answer.
5.
The interview shall be conducted by the competence assessment board

nominated by QAD Director. The result shall be recorded to
Authorization Assessment Sheet (VAECO Form 2046).
6.
For NDT staff:

a.
Quality Audit division shall submit the necessary documents

(including NDT training certificates, Practical experience records,
Vision examination result) to responsible NDT level 3 of cognizant
Page 10.1-7

NDT organization to assess and issue Qualification letter or

equivalent.
b.
10.1.3.4
After getting the Qualification letter of responsible NDT level 3, QAD

shall arrange a multiple choices test and interview on subject of the
current VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent
authorities and/or customer procedures.
Granting and validity of the authorization

1.
Basing on evaluation of competence assessment board member, Quality

Assurance Director shall grant Authorization Certificate (VAECO Form
2051) to successful candidate.
2.
Authorization details shall be registered in the Personnel Authorization &

Licensing Management System.
3.
The roster of the inspection and return to service personnel shall be

available for inspection by authority at any time, and be updated within
05 days when there is any change.
4.
Validity of the authorization is decided by Quality Assurance Director and

does not exceed 60 months.
5.
To maintain the validity of authorization, following conditions shall be

satisfied:
a.
VAECOs approval is valid, and
b.
Staff remain employed by VAECO, and
c.
All required certificate/license/qualification are still valid, and
d.
The holder shall exercise his authorization privilege in at least 06

months in any consecutive 24 months period. Practical experience
logbook (VAECO Form 2031) shall be submitted to QAD. QAD may
request to provide copies of Technical log pages, NRC or Routine
Job Card (if necessary).
Note:
1. Functions required for Category A: A.1 thru A.10 or A.1 thru A.18.
2. System group required for Category B1: Airframe and/ or Power Plant.
3. System group required for Category B2: Electric and/ or Avionic.
10.1.4
PRIVILEGES AND LIMITATIONS OF INSPECTION AND RETURN TO

SERVICE PERSONNEL
10.1.4.1
Borescope inspection staff

1.
For Borescope inspection staff holding category B1 authorization:

The authorized borescope inspection staff may perform and sign-off for
borescope inspection tasks on respective A/C IAW applicable
maintenance data.
2.
For Borescope inspection staff holding ARS license:
Page 10.1-8

Within the endorsed scope of authorization, the authorized borescope

inspection staff may perform and sign-off for borescope inspection tasks
IAW applicable maintenance data (except removal/ installation of panel/
access ports; performance of safety precautions; deactivation/ activation
of Thrust Reverser).
Note: Borescope inspection staff shall be authorised for at least 02
engine types.
10.1.4.2
NDT staff
The NDT staff is permitted to perform, sign-off, issue authorized release
certificate for Non-destruction Tests according to the procedures and the
requirements specified in VAECO NDT procedures manual.
Note: NDT staff shall be authorised for at least 02 NDT methods.
10.1.4.3
Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff

Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff is permitted to perform incoming
inspection on parts and/or materials to be used by the VAECO, including:
10.1.4.4
1.
Performing the incoming inspection, acceptance and tagging of aircraft

components and material.
2.
Performing the incoming inspection and tagging for aircraft components

removed from A/C or from their NHA.
3.
Registering components and material data into AMASIS or other

management software provided by the customer.
4.
Controlling the storage and release of aircraft components and material

to aircraft maintenance.
5.
Performing the preliminary inspection of tools and equipment.
Category A staff
Category A staff is permitted to inspect, personally performed, and return
aircraft to service after scheduled ramp maintenance check (pre-flight, transit,
daily/ terminal, up to weekly/line checks), simple defects rectification within
the limits of tasks specifically endorsed on the authorization (including ADD
type B clearance) and standard practice works such as lock wire/ nut/ screw
re-tightening, high speed tape re-application The detail privileges are as
follows:
A.1
APU start and shutdown.
A.2
Towing & parking.
A.3
Fuelling operation: Refuel; defuel; transfer; MMI/ measuring stick/

magnetic fuel level indicator readout.
A.4
Routine lubrication; LDG/door lubrication; fluids and gases

replenishment of: Engine & APU oil, starter oil, IDG/BUG oil, Hydraulic
system fluid, Tire & accumulators; water & waste servicing/ drain.
A.5
Pre-flight/Transit check.
A.6
Replacement of internal & external lights, filaments and flash tubes.
Page 10.1-9

A.7
Limited Passenger cabin maintenance including replacement and

cosmetic repair of: sun-visor, carpets, curtains, seat covers, seat belts
& harnesses, ovens, boilers, beverage makers, internal compartment
doors excluding door forming part of pressure structure, parts fitted on
passenger seats and galleys, cabin normal lighting system including
ballast, toilet components excluding gate valves, passenger seat
recline mechanism adjustment.
A.8
Replacement of: loose cabin emergency equipment, passenger seats,

and stretcher.
A.9
Raising and clearing type C ADD of ATA 11& 25.
A.10 Replacement of wheel assemblies.

A.11 Replacement of brake units.
A.12 Terminal check/ daily check.
A.13 Weekly/ line check.
A.14 Replacement of main, APU and emergency batteries.
A.15 Replacement of static wicks.
A.16 Replacement of windscreen wiper blades, propeller blade erosion film.
A.17 Repetitive pre-flight visual inspections and tests required by MEL items
as listed in Appendix 1 of Authorization Certificate (Form VAECO
2051). If customers do not agree with this appendix, they may provide
their appendix otherwise this function shall be performed by Category
B1/B2 staff.
A.18 Applying MEL items as listed in Appendix 1 of Authorization
Certificate (Form VAECO 2051). If customers do not agree with this
appendix they may provide their appendix, otherwise this function shall
be performed by Category B1/B2 staff.
10.1.4.5
Category B1/ B2 staff

1.
Category B1 staff is permitted to issue certificates of return to service for

maintenance works on airframe and power plant system.
2.
Category B2 staff is permitted to issue certificates of return to service for

maintenance works on avionic and electrical systems, replacement of
electrical and avionic LRUs and/ or applying Electrical Standard
Practices on airframe and power plant systems (except that
subsequently required functional or specific tests).
3.
Maintenance function limitation (B1/B2 function index)

(1) Maintenance check and inspection.
(2) Component replacement.
(3) Fault confirmation and defect deferment (structure damage
evaluation and deferment are applied for all aircraft structures and
applicable for Category B1 only).
(4) Fault isolation and defect rectification; Re-certification for serviceable
Page 10.1-10

components removed from aircraft or the NHA.

(5) Extension:
(a) Category B1 staff and B2 staff with one system group are
permitted to defer defects and perform related maintenance
procedures of MEL items listed in the Appendix 2 of
Authorization Certificate and perform maintenance work on
Ground handling (ATA09, 10), Placards & Markings (ATA11),
Servicing (ATA12), Equipment & Furnishing (ATA25), Fire
protection (ATA26), Oxygen (ATA35), and Water & Waste
(ATA38).
(b) Category B1 staff and B2 staff with one system group are
permitted to issue certificates of return to service for
maintenance works on Electrical and Avionic systems provided
the complexity of such work does not exceed the following:
General visual inspection of systems and subsequent simple
correction/ restoration.
System reset, on board self-test of systems, system BITE
and simple operational tests.
Replacement of line replaceable computers, card files that do
not required test other than those mentioned above;
(c) Category B2
permitted to
maintenance
provided the
following:
staff and B1 staff with one system group are

issue certificates of return to service for
works on Airframe and Power plant systems
complexity of such work does not exceed the
General visual inspection of systems and subsequent simple

correction/ restoration.
System reset, on board self-test of systems, system BITE
and simple operational tests;
4.
10.1.4.6
Engine run-up function

(1)
Engine run-up at low power.
(2)
Engine run-up at high power.
Category C staff
Category C staff is permitted to issue certificate of maintenance release/
return to service for aircraft after base maintenance.
10.1.4.7
Component inspection and return to service staff

Component inspection and return to service staff, within the endorsed Scope
of authorization, is permitted to perform, inspect and return to service for
component maintenances IAW applicable maintenance data. For the
categories which are classified as level 1 and level 2, detail privileges of level
1 and level 2 are specified as following:
Page 10.1-11

1.
2.
10.1.4.8
A/C Computer staff

a.
Level 1: Perform Go/ No go test/ minor repair of LRUs as listed in

Capability List.
b.
Level 2: Fault isolation and defect rectification of No go LRUs as

listed in Capability List.
IFE component staff:

a.
Level 1: Perform Go/ No go test of LRUs as listed in Capability List.
b.
Level 2: Fault isolation and defect rectification of No go LRUs as

listed in Capability List.
3.
Wheel/ Brake staff is permitted to return to service for maintenance of

Wheels/ Brakes as listed in Capability List and are classified as below:
a. Tire change.
b. Overhaul of wheel.
c. Heat pack change.
d. Overhaul of brake.
4.
Battery staff is permitted to return to service for maintenance of Batteries

as listed in Capability List.
5.
Cabin component staff.

a.
Level 1: is permitted to return to service for maintenance of cabin

items (excluding electrical, control system of Cockpit seat and
Business class seat) as listed in VAECO Capability List.
b.
Level 2: is permitted to return to service for maintenance of cabin

items as listed in Capability List.
6.
Safety/ Emergency equipment staff is permitted to return to service for

maintenance of safety/emergency equipments as listed in Capability List.
7.
Electrical component staff is permitted to return to service for

maintenance of Electrical equipments as listed in Capability List.
Structure repair staff

Structure repair staff are classified as 03 levels below:
1.
2.
Level 1:
a.
Perform and sign-off for all A/C structure repair works (Metallic and/
or Composite) IAW the already existing repair solution extracted
from maintenance data.
b.
Perform and return to service for structure repair works (Metallic

and/ or Composite) on components as listed in Capability List IAW
the already existing repair solution extracted from maintenance data.
Level 2:
a.
Perform, inspect, issue SDR and sign-off for structure works

(Metallic and/ or Composite) IAW maintenance data, issue repair
solution for minor repair IAW standard practice procedure.
Page 10.1-12

b.
3.
Perform, inspect, issue SDR and return to service for structure repair
works (Metallic and/ or Composite) on components as listed in
Capability List IAW maintenance data. Issue repair solution for minor
repair IAW standard practice procedure.
Level 3:
a.
Perform, inspect, issue SDR and sign-off for structure works

(Metallic and/ or Composite) and issue repair solution for structure
repair IAW maintenance data.
b.
Perform, inspect, issue SDR and return to service for structure repair
works (Metallic and/ or Composite) on components as listed in
Capability List IAW maintenance data. Issue repair solution for
structure repair IAW maintenance data.
Note: Level 2 and Level 3 shall be authorised on at least 02 A/C types

10.1.4.9
Cabin repair staff

Cabin repair staff is classified as 02 levels and is permitted to perform and
sign-off for maintenance works of cabin items as listed in Appendix 3 of
Authorization Certificate (Form VAECO 2051) IAW applicable maintenance
data.
10.1.4.10 IFE repair staff

IFE repair staff is permitted to perform and sign-off for maintenance works
(including defect deferment) of all IFE systems IAW applicable maintenance
data. IFE repair staff are classified as 02 levels below:
1.
Level 1: Inspection, replacement of IFE components, update new content

for all IFE systems; Fault confirmation, isolation, rectification of IFE
components fitted on PAX seats and Overhead.
2.
Level 2: Inspection, replacement of IFE components, update new content

for all IFE systems; Fault confirmation, isolation and rectification of IFE
components fitted on PAX seats, Overhead, HEADEND Controller;
update, re-installation of software on server computer.
10.1.4.11 Painting staff

Painting staff is permitted to:
1.
Perform and sign-off for all A/C painting works IAW the already existing
painting solution extracted from maintenance data.
2.
Perform and return to service for painting works on components as listed

in Capability List IAW the already existing painting solution extracted
from maintenance data.
10.1.4.12 A/C Repair staff

1.
Zone/ system group definition

a.
ME 128 repair category: Zone 100, 200, 800;
b.
ME 567 repair category: Zone 500, 600, 700;
c.
ME 34 repair category: Zone 300, 400;
Page 10.1-13

d.
2.
10.1.5
E&A repair category: A/C Electric and Avionic systems.
Function limitation (A/C repair function index):

a.
Maintenance check and inspection.
b.
Component replacement.
c.
Fault confirmation, defect deferment and perform related

maintenance procedures of MEL items listed in the Appendix 4 of
Authorization Certificate for each defined A/C repair category.
d.
Defect rectification.
3.
For ME repair staffs, within the limitation of maintenance works on

defined zone group, and functions limitation specified in item 2 above,
are permitted to perform and sign-off for maintenance works on airframe,
and/ or power plant systems.
4.
For E&A repair staff, within the limitation of maintenance works on

defined system group, and functions limitation specified in item 2 above,
are permitted to perform and sign-off for maintenance works on avionic
and electrical systems
AUTHORIZATION
REDUCTION
SUSPENSION/
REVOCATION/
DURATION
1.
Authorization shall be temporarily suspended or revoked due to the

seriousness of maintenance error/ violation that the authorized staff
committed during exercising his/ her authorization.
2.
The followings are examples of maintenance error/ violation:

Not comply with safety warning/ precautions;
Not comply with maintenance instruction;
Improperly apply maintenance procedure;
Issue CRS or sign-off without verifying the performed work;
Not perform authorized staff responsibilities;
Performing maintenance work beyond the authorization;
Not complete maintenance record;
Not complete the READ AND SIGN for Quality Notice on time;
Intentionally falsify
documents, or
maintenance
records
or
application
Intentionally omit maintenance task, or

Being adversely effected by alcohol or drug during work, or
3.
The maintenance error/ violation will be divided in to different levels. The

applied level of penalty is determined after assessment/ investigation
IAW SOP 10.22 and classified in Investigation Report (VAECO Form
2055). The applied level of penalty will be specified in Letter of
authorization suspension/ revocation:
Page 10.1-14

10.1.7
a.
Level 1: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 1 week.
b.
Level 2: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 2

weeks.
c.
Level 3: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for 3

weeks.
d.
Level 4: The authorization certificate shall be suspended for at least

4 weeks or revoked.
4.
In the case of violation related to legislation/ administration that

Company disciplinary council has issued a sanction, authorisation of
violated authorised staff shall be suspended/ revoked with duration
referred from the sanction.
5.
In the case of maintenance error/ violation causing serious consequence

or safety affected, QC manager may give a decision to suspend the
authorization right after the maintenance error/ violation committed. The
authorization suspension duration will be counted since the time
suspended by QC manager.
6.
The duration of suspension/ revocation and restoration condition are

specified in Letter of authorization suspension/ revocation. The
restoration condition may includes, but not limited to the following:
7.
10.1.6
a.
Completing a remedial training on subjects related to committed

error/ violation.
b.
Taking re-assessment/ re-examination.
Letter of authorization suspension/ revocation shall clarify any change of

the authorization validity and associated required recovering conditions
and send to involved staff, related Department Directors and, if
necessary, to the Training Director to request for remedial training
course.
AUTHORIZATION FOR CONTRACTED STAFF FROM OTHER REPAIR

STATION/ MAINTENANCE ORGANIZATION
1.
Contracted staff requirements and qualification shall be the same as

VAECO staff. However, the technical assessment may be waived if there
is an evidence of his qualification and experience working for other FAA
approved Repair station or VAR part 5 approved maintenance
organization, or other equivalent approved organization.
2.
Competence assessment may be required if theres a doubt about

competence of the applicant.
MAINTAINING PROFICIENCY/ CONTINUATION TRAINING

1.
In the period of 24 months, Inspection and return to service personnel

shall be required to complete recurrent training on areas as follows:
a.
Technical knowledge
authorization.
and
skills
appropriate
to
individual
Page 10.1-15

2.
10.1.8
b.
Any change in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by

competent authorities and/or customer procedures.
c.
Human factors.
d.
Safety Management Systems.
Prior granting of authorization renewal, QAD shall arrange the multiple

choices test and/ or interview to assure the candidates proficiency.
CONTROL OF AUTHORIZATION STAFF SIGNATURE, CERTIFICATE,

STAMP AND LICENSE
1.
Authorized staff shall be issued stamps with his/ her unique authorization
number.
2.
Signature and stamp are used to confirm the completion of tasks or

inspections I.A.W their authorizations.
3.
Upon receiving authorization, authorized staff shall enter his/ her

signature and stamp into Authorized Staff Stamp and Signature
registration sheet to register signature and stamp.
4.
The staff shall return the stamp to Quality Assurance department when
he/she is no longer authorized, such as: retirement, authorization
revoked.
5.
The authorization and stamp number must be unique for each individual
authorized staff. Once the authorization for staff is terminated, the
number will not be re-issued to other staff.
6.
In case of authorization certificate, stamp or license is lost, the staff shall

report immediately to QAD. The staff record shall be checked before reissue authorization certificate, stamp, or request the competent authority
for the license re-issuance.
7.
Stamp of authorization is in format VAECO XXXX YYY, with details as

follows:
+
XXXX: sequent number = 001 to 9999;
YYY: authorized staff code, defined as follow:

AC
: A/C inspection and return to service staff
WS : Component inspection and return to service staff

CAB : Cabin repair staff
IFE
: IFE repair staff
SR
: Structure repair staff
BSI : Borescope inspection staff

NDT : Non Destructive Test (NDT) staff
AUD : Quality auditor
SI
: Part and Material Incoming Inspection staff
Page 10.1-16

10.2 SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING
10.2
SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING
10.2.1
SUPERVISORY DUTIES
10.2.2
1.
Direct and oversee the work performed by any individuals who are
unfamiliar with the methods, techniques, practices, aids, equipment, and
tools used to perform the maintenance, preventive maintenance, or
alterations.
2.
Verify the assigned maintenance works under his scope and comply with
all requirements in appropriate maintenance data.
3.
Sign off for those maintenance works as accomplishment in sufficient

maintenance record.
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS
1.
For supervisory personnel for aircraft maintenance:

a. Being trained in aircraft type training at level B for respective aircraft.
b. Holding Maintenance License category B with type rating, or
equivalent, issued or recognized by customer or appropriate authority.
c. Being practically trained in related work or having a minimum of 24
months maintenance experience, including 18 months practical
experience in the work being performed.
2.
For others supervisory personnel (including structure repair supervisor)

a. Having a minimum 18 months practical experience in the work being
performed.
b. Holding Maintenance with type rating or ARS license, or equivalent,
issued or recognized by the customer or the appropriate authority.
10.2.3
3.

authorities.
4.
Being trained on the current applicable VAECO procedures accepted/

approved by competent authorities and customer procedures.
5.
6.
7.
Being trained on Safety Management Systems.
QUALIFYING PROCESS
1.
The supervisors are qualified by their own maintenance center/

departments.
2.
Director of corresponding maintenance center/ department shall ensure

supervisor candidate fulfilled above mentioned requirements by
recommended steps, but not limited to, as follows:
a.
Review candidate records.
b.
Perform the multiple choices test and/ or interview.
Page 10.2-1

3.
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2 SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL QUALIFYING
The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be forwarded

to the QAD for acceptance, monitoring and registering in the Personnel
roster.
MAINTAINING VALIDITY OF THE AUTHORIZATION

1.
Validity of the authorization is decided by the Director of respective

maintenance center/ department and does not exceed 60 months.
2.
In the period of 2 years, supervisor shall be required to complete

continuation training on subjects as follows:
a.
Technical knowledge
authorization;
and
skills
appropriate
to
individual
b.

competent authorities and/or customer procedures;
c.
Human factors.
d.
3.
Prior granting of authorization renewal, re-assessments shall be

required.
4.
The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be updated

whenever there is a change within 5 working days and forwarded to QAD
for acceptance and monitoring.
ARCHIVES
Supervisor qualification records shall be kept at their own maintenance
center/ department.
Page 10.2-2

10.3
QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING
10.3.1
GENERAL
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.3 QUALITY AUDITOR QUALIFYING
1.
Quality Auditors perform independent audits of the management, control

and performance of maintenance activates to ensure compliance with
approved standards and procedures.
2.
In order to maintain independence, Auditors shall have no relations to

subjects being audited and shall report directly to Quality Assurance
Director.
AUDITOR DUTIES
1.
Scheduling and implementing quality audits on maintenance activities

and products of VAECO in order to detect non-conformities and request
remedial actions
2.
Monitoring and control remedial actions against non-conformities found

in internal audits and external audits carried out by Authorities and
Customers
3.
Performing investigations or surveys as required by VAECOs CEO or

Quality Assurance Director.
4.
To accompany Authorities and Customers while auditing VAECO.
AUDITOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
Implementing assigned audits.
2.
Reporting non-conformities and irregularities in objective, impartial and

accurate reports in a timely manner.
3.
Ensuring proprietary information of audited organizations is not disclosed

to unauthorized persons.
AUDITOR AUTHORITIES
1.
Auditors shall have access to all activities, products, records and

persons related to an audited process.
2.
Auditors shall not be hindered from presenting audit results to the

VAECO CEO, Quality Assurance Director and/or the auditee managers
when appropriate.
3.
Auditors shall issue Corrective Action Requests for non-conformities.
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS FOR AUDITOR

1.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/university, or being

graduated from technical college/university and basic aeronautical
technical course.
2.
Being trained in aircraft type rating.
3.

authorities.
4.
Being trained in VAECO procedures accepted/ approved by competent

authorities.
Page 10.3-1

5.
Being thoroughly familiar with customer procedures.
6.
7.
Being trained on the following subjects:

a.
Quality management system.
b.
Audit training.
c.
8.
Being trained in Human Factors.
9.
Having at least 36 months of experience in aircraft/ aircraft component

maintenance environment including at least 24 months of experience in
Quality assurance.
10. Completed an audit practical training.

10.3.6
QUALIFYING PROCESS
1.
2.
Auditor assessment and approval process

a.
Auditor candidates are selected by the Quality Assurance Director

who sets up and executes a training program in both theoretical and
practical in order to ensure compliance with standards.
b.
The Quality Audit Division Manager shall collect records from the
candidate and schedule an interview.
c.
The Quality Assurance Director or delegate shall interview the

candidate to evaluate his or her knowledge and ability.
d.
The Quality Assurance Director shall grant VAECO Auditor approval

to candidates who meet the standards and successfully pass the
interview.
Auditor approval validity

a.
An Auditor authorization shall be valid for a maximum of 05 years.
b.
In period of 02 years, the Auditor shall complete recurrent training on

the following subjects:
VAECO procedures
authorities.
accepted/
approved
by
competent
Human Factors.
c.
An Auditor Certificate shall be revoked if the holder is involved in any

of the following circumstances
Violating seriously the audit procedure.
Failing to accomplish the functions, duties and responsibilities of
an auditor.
Having failed to perform authorized auditor activities for more
than 24 consecutive months.
Page 10.3-2

10.3.7
ARCHIVES
1.
The List of authorized auditors and auditor records shall be maintained

by the QAD.
2.
Auditor qualification records shall be kept on file for two years after
termination of an Auditor Authorization.
Page 10.3-3

10.4 JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES
10.4
JOB QUALIFICATION OF THE OTHER QUALIFIED EMPLOYEES
10.4.1
GENERAL
Competence of the following personnel shall be assessed by on the job
evaluations and/or by competence assessment relevant to their particular job
role before unsupervised work is permitted, including:
1.
Maintenance planner.
2.
Production planner.
3.
MCC controller.
4.
Technical service staff.
5.
Engineering engineer.
6.
Technical librarian.
7.
Technical record staff.
8.
Tool controller.
9.
Qualified Mechanic.
10. Workshop planner.

11. Workshop engineering staff
12. Part fabricating staff.
13. HAZMAT staff.
14. Foreman.
15. First Aid Kit/ Medical Kit Inspection Staff.
10.4.2
DUTIES AND REQUIREMENTS
10.4.2.1
Maintenance planner
1.
2.
Essential tasks/ duties

a.
Issuing a Work order for aircraft maintenance based upon the

purchase order or other contractual document.
b.
Scheduling for aircraft maintenance.
Prerequisite requirements
a.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college, or

being graduated from technical university/ college and being trained
in basic aeronautical technical course.
b.
Being successfully trained in aircraft type training.
c.
Being thoroughly familiar with in-used maintenance management

software(s), such as AMASIS, in related module(s).
d.
Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the VAECO procedures

accepted/ approved by competent authorities.
e.
Page 10.4-1

10.4.2.2
f.
g.
h.
Having 24 months experience on maintenance planning.
i.
Being thoroughly familiar with maintenance planning work.
Production planner
1.
2.
10.4.2.3

a.
Scheduling for work in each individual base maintenance check.
b.
Controlling maintenance check progress.
c.
Controlling of maintenance documents and records.
a.

b.
c.
Being trained or thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO

procedures accepted/ approved by competent authorities.
d.

e.
f.
g.
h.
Having 12 months experience on aircraft maintenance.
i.
Being thoroughly familiar with maintenance control work.
MCC controller
1.
2.

a.
Controlling of ramp & base maintenance activities.
b.
Controlling of ramp & base maintenance documents and records.
a.

in basic aeronautical technical course or holding Cat A Inspection &
RTS staff.
b.
c.

d.
e.
Page 10.4-2

10.4.2.4
f.
g.
Being thoroughly familiar with ramp & base maintenance control

work
h.
Having 24 months working in aircraft maintenance environment with

at least 3 months working experience in ramp maintenance control.
Technical service staff

1.
2.

a.
Supporting inspection and return to service staff in maintenance and

defect trouble shooting/ deferment/ rectification.
b.
Controlling and performing defect trouble shooting/ deferment/

rectification.
c.
Monitoring contracted customers aircraft status and proposing

preventive actions, if required by contract.
a.
Holding Cat B Inspection & RTS authorization in minimum of 12

months with at least 3 months working experience in technical
supporting, or
b.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical university/ college or

technical university/ college and being trained in basic aeronautical
technical course, and
Holding Cat A Inspection & RTS authorization, and
Having 24 months working in aircraft maintenance environment
with at least on 3 months working experience in technical
supporting.
10.4.2.5
Engineering engineer
1.
2.

a.
Evaluating AD, SB for contracted customer.
b.
Implementing Aircraft, Engine health monitoring program for

contracted customer.
c.
Issuing EO, ER, EI...
d.
Supporting maintenance activities when requested.
e.
Taking part in investigation of failure, malfunction or defect of an

article.
a.

b.
Page 10.4-3

10.4.2.6
c.

d.
e.
f.
g.
Being thoroughly familiar with the work being performed.
h.

at least 12 months in EGD.
Technical librarian
1.
2.
10.4.2.7

a.
Ordering and receiving of maintenance data,
b.
Managing of maintenance data
c.
Distributing and updating maintenance data to users.
a.
Being successfully trained in aircraft general familiarization.
b.
Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO

c.
d.
e.
f.
Technical record staff

1.
2.

a.
Updating maintenance activities/ records

management system, such as: AMASIS
b.
Keeping of maintenance records.
to
maintenance
a.
Being successfully trained in aircraft general familiarization.
b.

c.

d.
e.
f.
g.
Page 10.4-4

h.
10.4.2.8

at least 03 months in Technical record field.
Tool controller
1.
2.
10.4.2.9

a.
Performing the receiving inspection, acceptance and tagging of tools

and equipment,
b.
Inspecting and evaluating tools and equipment prior to being sent

out for calibration and when returned, review calibration results for
acceptance.
c.
Inspecting and evaluating tools prior and equipment to being sent

out for repair and when returned, review repair documents for
acceptance.
d.
Performing investigations into the loss or damage of tools/

equipment.
e.
Assisting in the evaluations of the use of alternative tools and

equipment.
a.

b.

c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

at least 24 months working in tool and equipment control field.
Qualified Mechanic
1.
2.

a.
Performing maintenance under supervision and signing as mechanic

staff in maintenance records after completion of work.
b.
Personally perform the maintenance works that are not required to

be released under AMO approval, such as:
Position and/or remove wheel chocks,
Ramp to Flight Deck Communication,
Replenishing of oils and fluids,
Perform the function of cockpit/ headset man during towing/
pushback operation.
Page 10.4-5

a.
Being trained in basic aeronautical technical course, and having 03

months of maintenance experience on the respective aircraft or
component, or
b.
Having 12 months of maintenance experience on the respective

aircraft or component.
c.
Being trained or thoroughly familiar with the applicable working

procedures.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
In addition to above requirement, the cockpit man is required to hold

a valid Maintenance license with type rating of respective aircraft.
10.4.2.10 Workshop planner

1.
2.

a.
Issuing work request for component maintenance.
b.
Making plan for component maintenance.
a.

b.

c.
d.
Being trained in Human factors.
e.
f.
g.
Having minimum of 12 months experience in workshop maintenance

environment and 06 months working in Component Technical Planning Division.
10.4.2.11 Workshop engineering staff

1.
2.

a.
Issuing component maintenance worksheet.
b.
Supporting maintenance staff in workshop maintenance.
c.
Composing technical instruction and equipment operating instruction

basing on manufacturer technical data.
d.
Evaluating defect and defect rectification arising in workshop

maintenance.
Page 10.4-6

a.
Being graduated from technical university/ college.
b.

c.

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Having minimum of 12 months experience in workshop maintenance

environment and 06 months working in Component Technical Planning Division.
10.4.2.12 Part fabricating staff

1.
2.

a.
Performing inspections required by part fabricating process.
b.
Issuing Certificate of Conformity (C of C) for respective part

fabricated by VAECO.
a.
Having minimum of 18 months experience in related workshop

maintenance, or having basic training in specialty related to parts to
be fabricated.
b.

c.
d.
e.
10.4.2.13 HAZMAT staff

1.

a.
2.
Performing packaging and shipping Hazardous Materials (dangerous

goods) by air.
a.
Being trained in IATA Dangerous goods Regulations (which

equivalent to Hazardous Materials requirements to meet the
standards of 49 CFR Part 172 Subpart H).
b.

c.
d.
Page 10.4-7

e.
f.
Having minimum of 03 months experience working on Hazardous

Materials packing and/or shipping.
10.4.2.14 Foreman
1.
2.

a.
Managing all maintenance activities for specific work pack such as

maintenance check, engine change, LDG change etc.
b.
Coordinating related sections in respective maintenance center.
a.
Being of CAT B authorized staff with 03 months managing of work

pack, or
b.
Being trained in A/C type training at level B1/B2, and

Being able to understand, read and write English.
Having minimum of 24 months maintenance experience with at
least 03 months managing of specific work pack.
10.4.2.15 First Aid Kit/ Medical Kit inspection staff

1.

a.
2.
10.4.3
Inspect, supplement and/or replace items in First Aid Kit/ Medical Kit.
a.
Being thoroughly familiar with the applicable VAECO and VNA

procedures.
b.
c.
d.
Having minimum of 12 months working experience in inspection and

supplementation of medicines and medical items in First Aid Kit and
Medical Kit.
QUALIFYING PROCESS
1.
The above mentioned staffs

department/maintenance center.
2.
Corresponding maintenance centers/departments director shall ensure

candidate fulfilled above mentioned requirements by recommended
steps, but not limited to, as follow:
are
qualified
by
their
own
Page 10.4-8

3.
10.4.4
a.
Review records and evaluate the ability of candidate.
b.
Perform the multiple choices test and/ or interview.
The List of qualified personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be forwarded

to QAD for acceptance and monitoring.
PERIODIC COMPETENCE ASSESSMENT

1.
Validity of the authorization is decided by the Director of respective

maintenance center/ department and does not exceed 60 months.
2.
In the period of 2 years, qualified personnel shall complete the recurrent

training for Human factor.
3.
Prior granting of authorization renewal, re-assessment shall be required.

The re-assessment shall include the knowledge of the following:
4.
10.4.5
a.
Technical knowledge and skills appropriate

authorization (not applicable to qualified mechanic);
to
individual
b.

competent authorities and/or customer procedures (not applicable to
qualified mechanic);
The List of Qualified Personnel (VAECO Form 2065) shall be updated

whenever there is a change within 5 working days and forwarded to QAD
for acceptance and monitoring.
ARCHIVES
Records of staffs shall be kept at their own department/maintenance center
in at least 2 years after ceasing of their authorization.
Page 10.4-9

10.5
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
10.5.1
PURPOSE
10.5 A/C MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
The purpose of this instruction is to specify the inspection standard and

operation for performing the efficiency and guaranteeing the airworthy safety
by complying with the related maintenance data and applicable regulations.
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.5.4
SCOPE
1.
This procedure is applied to authorized inspection staff.
2.
Applicable Object: The maintenance and inspection according to

approved airframe rating.
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Authorized inspection staff responsible to perform the inspection on

aircraft maintained in VAECO IAW this procedure.
2.
The applicable Supervisors are responsible for ensuring the inspection

personnel under supervision are properly qualified and authorized to
conduct the assigned inspections.
1.
The authorized inspection staff should contact the production planner to

realize about the RII and operation steps for guaranteeing the quality
during inspection.
2.
The authorized inspection staff should inspect to ensure the safety prior
to perform maintenance, such as the safe lock of the landing gear is set
well, the ground cable is set well and the stand is fixed, etc.
3.
The authorized inspection staff should heed if the operation tools are
proper and eligible to perform maintenance and the measurement and
test equipment are maintained and calibrated as required.
4.
The authorized inspection staff should verify if the production planner

prepares the accompanied maintenance instruction and collects all the
discrepancies recorded in maintenance record of aircraft prior to the A/C
entering hangar, and check if the accompanied maintenance instruction
is created based upon updated maintenance manual.
5.
[deleted].
6.
Aircraft maintenance inspection is a continuous work. The Inspection

staff in charge should use Inspector handover sheet (VAECO Form
2015) when the job is not finished and/or need to transfer to another staff
IAW continuity of inspection procedure 10.9.
7.
Any serious faults found during performing Preliminary inspection which

may affect the airworthiness, Inspection staff should follow SOP 10.12
(MOR/ Malfunction and Defect Reporting procedure).
8.
Any maintenance action deferral must be directed by applicable

maintenance data and must have customer concurrence prior to
returning the aircraft to service.
Page 10.5-1

10.5.5
TYPES OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE INSPECTION

1.
2.
10.5.6
Aircraft maintenance inspection is classified according to type of the

maintenance, such as:
a.
Major repair and Major alteration.
b.
Required inspection items (RII) is provided by customer.
c.
The inspection of Hidden damage after accident should be complied

with SOP 10.6 (Hidden damage inspection procedure). If the
stipulation of inspection items should be assisted by other
departments, the related departments should support the required
assistance and inspection.
Aircraft maintenance inspection is also classified according to phases of

inspections:
a.
Preliminary inspection is carrying out prior to performing

maintenance to determine the status and condition of aircrafts,
aircraft components.
b.
In-progress inspection is those which must be performed during the

whole maintenance process to determine whether the maintenance
was performed satisfactorily. In-progress inspection may be
described in the maintenance manuals or other inspection for
continuous airworthiness.
c.
Final inspection is carried out to ensure all required maintenance on

an article have been accomplished or deferred in compliance with
applicable regulations before release the article to service.
OVERRIDE POLICY
When a conflict occurs during course of inspection, the following principle
shall be applied:
1.
Under no circumstances shall maintenance staff override decision of an

authorized inspection staff.
2.
QC manager can override decision of an authorized inspection staff in

case of:
3.
a.
Specification Misinterpretation,
b.
Specification Unavailability, or
c.
Specification Deficiency or Inadequacy
For any conflict that cannot be solved, QA director will give final decision.
10.5.7
PROCEDURE
10.5.7.1
1.
Preliminary Inspection shall be performed on the aircraft prior to

performing maintenance and may include General visual inspection,
Operational inspection, Functional inspections as well as Non
Destructive Test.
2.
Preliminary Inspection shall also include aircraft input documents review.
Page 10.5-2

3.
For line maintenance activities such as Transit, Preflight, Daily/Terminal

and Weekly check, the inspection will be performed by appropriate
Inspection personnel according to customers procedures. For Phase
check, it shall be performed by a appropriate B1 RTS staff. Preliminary
inspection in ramp maintenance should include but are not limited to the
followings:
a.
Inspections using customer CHECKLIST;
b.
General visual inspections of the aircraft exterior and interior;
c.
Review of Technical and Cabin Defect Logs to determine nonroutine tasks;
d.
Review of Notices of Flight Crews;
e.
Review of Post Flight reports;
f.
Check of the Status of ADDs and associated requirements;
g.
Review of the OPM List (Form 1003 for VNA A/C);
4.
Findings during ramp maintenance inspection shall be documented

according to customer procedure for corrective actions.
5.
Findings during Phase check in line maintenance shall be directly

recorded in NRCs for corrective actions.
6.
For base maintenance the preliminary inspection shall include (a check

sheet or other related documents may provide by the customer):
a.
Aircraft documents review:

Upon input of aircraft, the production planner shall review the
followings:
Aircraft technical log/ records for input flight defects, deferred
defects and calendar inspection items that do not have WO to
perform but they are due or will become due while the aircraft is
in the custody of the company.
HT/LLP components status (if provided by customer) to find out
whether any of such components on the aircraft will become due
during the maintenance.
AD Validation/ Verification of AD and SB shall be carried out.
b.
Inspection on the aircraft:

Inspection on the aircraft shall be performed by QC authorized
inspection staff or B1 RTS in charged (for Phase check) with support
from maintenance staff:
Including 360 check of A/C appearance and internal loose
equipment check.
After A/C is in Hangar, Mechanic should open the cover indicated
in the accompanied maintenance instruction. The authorized
inspection staff should complete the inspection in detailed when
inspecting. If the inspection needs to dismantle the parts, the
Page 10.5-3

authorized inspection staff should cooperate with production

planner for necessary actions.
10.5.7.2
10.5.7.3
c.
All finding found shall be documented on Preliminary Inspection

Finding List (VAECO Form 6002).
d.
After review the Preliminary Inspection Finding List, QC authorized

inspection staff will forward to production planner for raising NRC
according to customer acceptance by contract or by the customer
representative.
In-process Inspection
1.
The mechanic should notify the authorized inspection staff to perform the
inspection before installation and maintenance. If finding some
discrepancies during the inspection, the authorized inspection staff
should issue NRC or entry in Flight/Maintenance Log.
2.
When realize that maintenance personnel didnt perform the operation

according to standard procedures, the authorized inspection staff should
reject it during the operation inspection.
3.
If finding discrepancy belongs to RII, the authorized inspection staff

should identify in Flight/Maintenance Log or Maintenance action of NRC.
Then, the inspection staff authorized by the customer should perform the
inspection.
4.
Authorized inspection staff should check and stamp to certify for a step
of work to be done after the maintenance staff fill the detailed
descriptions in block of action taken and sign for the step performed.
Final inspection
1.
After completing the work, the authorized inspection staff in charge of

that zone shall perform this inspection. If the work specified in the
accompanied maintenance instruction required operation or function test,
then the results should be recorded and attached to maintenance
document.
2.
The final inspection of the aircraft maintenance shall be conducted

throughout the efforts of the authorized inspection staff that involving in
the maintenance tasks to be returned to service. Authorized inspection
staff shall ensure:
a.
All requirements of Require Inspection Item (RII) are properly

conducted.
b.
All work has been inspected as required and record the result
accordingly to show compliance to specific standards.
c.
Proper inspection method/techniques and standards have been

utilized when conducted the aforementioned inspections.
d.
Necessary inspection buy-back has been made.
e.
The issuance of FAA Form 337 when Major alteration has been
conducted.
Page 10.5-4

f.
Proper installation of appliances, accessories and individual parts or

components on the aircraft during aircraft maintenance or alteration,
and maintenance records are completed accordingly.
g.
All process documentation has been properly completed and

generated discrepancies recorded and corrected or deferred.
Page 10.5-5

10.6
HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION
10.6.1
PURPOSE
10.6 HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION
To establish procedure for performing the hidden damage inspection.

10.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for the aircraft, engine or component is instructed
by customer have been involved an accident, prior to commencement of any
work.
10.6.3
10.6.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Manager of Quality Control of the QAD is responsible for the

performance of a hidden damage inspection to determine there is any
possible defect on the items involved
2.
The Inspection personnel are responsible for performing appropriate

inspections to the article reported involving accident to assure all defects,
despite obviously or obscure, are properly identified and corrected.
3.
The customer is responsible to provide detail, documented accident

information of which the repair article had involved to VAECO on the visit
of subject article.
GENERAL
When the aircraft, engine or component is instructed by customer have been
involved an incident/ accident, prior to commencement of any work, shall be
given a thorough inspection for hidden damage, including the areas adjacent
to obviously damaged area and/or be disassembled as necessary.
10.6.5
PROCEDURE
1.
Whenever a report is received from the customer stating that the article
to be maintained by the Company, the QC manager shall be informed.
2.
Inspection personnel shall be assigned by the QC manager for

conducting detail inspection prior to the maintenance actions start.
3.
The authorized inspection personnel shall request EGD for support as he

needs inspection standard references which are necessary for the
inspection. Do research on associated documents, records for
occurrence, accident to determine the methods, inspection standards
would be followed and scope of work for inspection
4.
The Hidden Damage Inspection Procedure shall encompass the

following:
a.
Authorized inspection personnel shall perform a thorough and

comprehensive inspection and responsible for listing all
discrepancies. The inspection shall include the area where the
accident is occurred, adjacent area and the related system that
directly or indirectly link to the area that might be consequentially
damaged.
Page 10.6-1

10.6 HIDDEN DAMAGE INSPECTION
b.
If such inspection cannot be completed due to lack of suitable

criteria notwithstanding standard or prior acceptance criteria,
engineer of maintenance center or the EGD shall be requested to
assist in the evaluation to assess damages and establish additional
inspection requirements.
c.
Any defect which cannot be cleared within the limits of

manufacturer's and/or approved maintenance data shall be
coordinated with the manufacturer through engineer of EGD. The
resultant manufacturer's recommendations and FAA approved
evidence shall be made a part of the Maintenance Record.
5.
All findings shall be recorded on the customer's flight/maintenance log or

Non Routine Card (VAECO Form 6001) for aircraft, The A/C component
maintenance worksheet (VAECO Form 7032) for component. The
information shall be used for monitor and corrective actions
6.
If an authorized inspection personnel suspects an article may have been

involved in an occurrence or accident, he shall report to the Manager of
Quality Control who shall request any pertinent information from the
customer. After receipt of customer information, the authorized
inspection personnel may, if warranted, follow the procedure in this
Section for further investigation.
Page 10.6-2

10.7 INSPECTION OF REQUIRE INSPECTION ITEM
10.7
INSPECTION OF REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEM (RII)
10.7.1
PURPOSE
This section provides guidance and describes procedures for conducting RII
inspections in accordance with customer procedures.
10.7.2
SCOPE
Applicable to whom it prescribes the responsibilities.
10.7.3
10.7.4
10.7.5
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
Customer is responsible to define requirement of Required Inspection

Items and to approve inspection personnel who are allowed to perform
inspection of RII (RII inspector).
2.
The RII inspection personnel are responsible for conducting RII

inspections under their RII responsibilities, authorities, and limitations
and in accordance with customers/air carrier procedures.
3.
The Director of QAD is responsible for ensuring that all RII inspection
personnel are appropriately certificated, properly trained, qualified and
authorized to perform RII inspection by customer/air carrier, and the work
of inspection being performed does not exceed the authorization.
4.
The Maintenance Centers is responsible for ensuring that the RII is

performed by proper authorized inspection staff.
REQUIRED INSPECTION ITEMS (RII) DEFINITIONS

1.
The air carrier will designate certain tasks as required inspection items
(RII). These required inspections cover maintenance tasks which, if not
properly performed or if done with improper parts or materials, could
result in a failure, malfunction, or defect which would endanger the
continued safe flight and landing of the aircraft.
2.
A primary concept of the RII function is that the person performing the
item of work must not perform the required inspection on that item of
work.
PROCEDURE
1.
Identify required inspection items

a.
Customer shall specify all RII tasks in the provided work-pack or

AMS/ AMP.
b.
Based on the RII definition/ requirements of customer:

The issuer of EO, SRO shall determine any items as RII in that
EO/ SRO.
For non-routine work (NRC, NRCC) raising during base
maintenance, the respective RTS staff will determine any items
as RII.
For non-routine work (defect rectification) raising during line
maintenance, the respective RTS staff will determine any items
as RII.
Page 10.7-1

10.7 INSPECTION OF REQUIRE INSPECTION ITEM
For WO issued by MCC, the MCC will determine any items as

RII.
c.
The required inspection item shall be identified by marking/ stamping

with RII below its content. The task card and non-routine work
sheet (NRC, EO, SRO), WO with RII shall be marked/ stamped
with RII at the right upper corner on the first page by respective
TPD. If no item in the card/ worksheet with RII marked/ stamped at
the right upper corner means all items are considered as required
inspection items.
2.
The accomplishment of RII functions must be separated from other

maintenance (inspection, overhaul, repair, preservation, and other
replacement of parts), preventive maintenance, and alteration functions.
3.
The performance and inspection of RII work during line maintenance that
is recorded in Technical log/ Flight log page is performed in accordance
with Customers line maintenance procedures.
4.
For RII work that is not recorded in the Technical log/ Flight log page
(such as NRC, EO, SRO performance) the required inspection items
shall be certified as follows:
a.
The authorized staff who performs the maintenance work shall

certify for those items in MEC signature block (performers signature
block) and,
b.
The RII inspector who independently inspects the maintenance work

shall certify for those items in INSP signature block (inspectors
signature block).
5.
The RII inspection staff shall review to make sure that required
inspections are under their authorizations before conducting the required
inspection.
6.
When the required inspection is completed and no finding is found, the

RII inspector will certify for the performed maintenance work.
7.
Buy-back: If there is any finding during inspection of RII, the RII

inspection staff will require the person who accomplished the item(s) to
rework then the inspection for that item of work will be conducted until
satisfied.
Page 10.7-2

10.8 CRS/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE (FOR AIRCRAFT)
10.8
CERTIFICATE OF RETURN TO SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE

ISSUANCE (FOR AIRCRAFT)
10.8.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the issuance of Maintenance release or Return to service
certificate IAW applicable regulations.
10.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to issue certificate for return aircraft to service by
VAECO staff after maintenance and major repair/ modification (alteration).
10.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Director of Quality Assurance Department is responsible to assign

appropriate authorized staff for returning the aircraft to service after base
maintenance and major modification (alteration).
2.
The Director of respective maintenance center is responsible to assign

appropriate authorized staff for returning the aircraft to service in the
cases other than base maintenance
10.8.4
PROCEDURE
10.8.4.1
General
10.8.4.2
10.8.4.3
1.
When all the maintenance actions of the A/C are completed, authorized
staff shall perform the final inspection as specified in Item 10.5.7.3 to
ensure the maintenance tasks comply with the required standard.
2.
The return to service activities are classified into 4 cases:

a.
Return to service after line maintenance.
b.
Return to service after maintenance event.
c.
Return to service after base maintenance (letter check).
d.
Return to service after major repair or modification (alteration).
Return to service after line maintenance

1.
The return to service after line maintenance is performed by appropriate

RTS staff IAW customers procedure.
2.
For VNA A/C, the return to service after Phase check (except Phase
check A12) is performed by the appropriate B1 RTS staff.
3.
The RTS staff shall enter name, signature, stamp and date performance
in relevant block of the technical log/ flight log to certify for returning the
A/C to service.
Return to service after maintenance event

1.
The return to service after maintenance event is performed by

appropriate RTS staff of assigned maintenance center.
2.
The RTS staff shall enter the performance of WP of maintenance event

in the technical log and certify by name, signature, stamp and date
Page 10.8-1

performance in relevant block of the technical log/ flight log for returning
the A/C to service.
10.8.4.4
Return to service after base maintenance

1.
The Production planner shall prepare the Maintenance Release

Certificate by using Customer form or VAECO Form 2012 (if Customer
form is not available) in duplicate.
QC authorized staff who has appropriate CAT C authorized certificate
shall enter name, signature, stamp and date performance in relevant
block of the Maintenance Release Certificates to certify that the WP is
successfully completed and basing on that work the A/C is returned to
service.
10.8.4.5
Return to service after major repair or modification (alteration)
10.8.4.5.1 For VN registered A/C

1.
After major modification completion, Major Repair or Modification

Reporting Form (CAAV Form 523) is used to certify the aircraft returned
to service. For the major repair, the use of Major Repair or Modification
Reporting is according to Customer request.
2.
QC authorized staff with appropriate level B shall issue Major Repair or

Modification Reporting Form (CAAV Form 523) in duplicate. The QC
authorized staff shall enter name, signature, stamp and date
performance in relevant block of the Major Repair or Modification
Reporting Forms to certify that the repair/ modification is completed and
the aircraft is approved for return to service.
3.
QC staff shall send one completed Report to CAAV. The other signed
copy is attached with the related repair/ modification records and sent to
Technical Record Section for scanning then keeping at Technical Record
Section of EGD (VNA) or sending to Operator (other than VNA)
10.8.4.5.2 For US registered A/C

1.
Major Repairs/Alterations will only be performed in accordance with FAA

approved maintenance data. Customer will be responsible for
determination of Major Repairs/Alterations and providing appropriate
FAA approved maintenance data.
2.
When finished the work, the RTS staff will collect all the maintenance
document and data; check for the proper completeness of those as
required and submit to QC manager for issuance of FAA Form 337.
3.
For Major Repairs, FAA Form 337 will not be used to record the work
unless requested by customer. Use the customer's WO upon which the
repair is recorded.
4.
For Major Alterations, FAA Form 337 will be used to record the work.
This form may be provided in duplicate by customer if it includes FAA
approval of related maintenance data. Then it will be executed in
duplicate by the authorized inspection personnel in appropriate blocks. A
signed copy will be attached to WP and sent to customer. QC will
Page 10.8-2

forward the second copy to the FAA within 48 hours after the aircraft is
approved for return to service.
5.
Technical Flight will be proposed according to customer request and

procedures which based on the regulatory requirements of the FAA. The
responsibility of determining if a technical flight is necessary belongs to
customer.
10.8.4.5.3 For Aircraft registered in other country

Return to service procedure for A/C registered in the country other than USA
or Vietnam is performed IAW the requirement as set in the contract with the
customer.
Page 10.8-3

10.9
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
10.9.1
PURPOSE
10.9 CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
To maintain the continuity of inspections and ensure that interruptions of

inspections caused by shift/task handover does not adversely affect any
inspection responsibility.
10.9.2
10.9.3
10.9.4
10.9.5
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Inspection personnel are responsible for full compliance with all
procedures outlined in this manual and as appropriate to any item being
inspected, repaired, overhauled or altered by the company.
2.
The airworthiness of those items, a compliance with record requirements

of the operator of those items and of the Company, depends on
conformity to the procedures of this system.
CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
1.
Continuity of inspection of all items or components as they progress

through the various stages of work in VAECO shall include Incoming
Materials, Preliminary and Hidden Damage Inspection where applicable.
2.
In addition, as work progresses on a specific item, inspections shall be

made as necessary so that final inspection to determine airworthiness
shall not necessitate disassembly.
3.
Inspections, tests, and calibrations shall be accomplished in accordance

with
the
applicable
manufacturer's
recommendations
and
accepted/approved methods and procedures. Each inspection shall be
recorded by the individual accomplished the inspection.
HANDOVER SHEET
1.
Inspector handover sheet (VAECO Form 2015) shall be left by each of

the inspectors leaving the job before completion of a project for
information to the succeeding inspector. Its purpose is to assure a
continuing inspection responsibility for in-progress work inspections
2.
The Inspector handover sheet binders are located throughout VAECO

and made readily available to both shift out-going and incoming
inspectors to ensure the continuity for inspection completion. The
Inspector handover sheet binders shall be located as follows:
a.
Dock Control Room for base maintenance; RTPD for ramp

maintenance.
b.
Shop office for component maintenance.
PARTIAL INSPECTION
1.
A partial inspection may consist of, but not be limited to, an inspection
and verification of partial work completed.
2.
In the event that it becomes necessary to discontinue work on a certain

task or process due to the shifting, availability of material, etc., the
inspector shall perform the inspection to its latest situation.
Page 10.9-1

3.
10.9 CONTINUITY OF INSPECTION
Once the inspection is acceptable by the inspection personnel, he/she

shall make a remark on the blank area of the document stating the tasks
that have been performed and inspected. He/she shall sign and stamp
his/her authorization adjacent to the remark to be the evidence of the
acceptance.
Page 10.9-2

10.10 RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/PART REMOVED FROM A/C
10.10
RE-CERTIFYING A COMPONENT/ PART REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT
10.10.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the used component/ part removed from aircraft is re-certified as
serviceable IAW applicable requirements.
10.10.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to the components removed from aircraft including,
but not limited to, the following circumstances:
1. For trouble-shooting or cannibalization (robbery).
2. Required by Engineering Order (EO), Engineering Request (ER) or Work
Order.
3. After on-wing repair.
10.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The authorized staff has responsibility for confirming that the component/ part
meet all applicable requirements before being re-certified.
10.10.4
PROCEDURE
10.10.4.1 Re-certifying a component/ part removed from VNA aircraft

1.
The RTS staff must confirm the following requirements are met before
the component/ part is considered as serviceable:
a. During the last flight, the components and related systems operated
normally and there is no evidence of defect; or
b. If any defect occurred in the related system during the last flight but
trouble shooting confirms that component is not the cause of the
defect; or
c. If the component has defect it has been repaired IAW approved/
accepted data.
d. The removal was performed in accordance the AMM by a qualified
person;
e. A physical condition is good (no damage, corrosion, leak etc.);
f. Other inspections/tests required by the relevant manufacturer
maintenance instructions have been carried out;
g. The removed component has been preserved in compliance with
Manufacturer requirements.
2.
To issue Re-certified Certificate, authorized staff shall fill all necessary

information in the appropriate blocks of VAECO Form 5001 including:
a. Certificate reference number;
b. Description, Part number, Serial Number;
c. Work performed to confirm component as serviceable;
d. Other necessary information (if applicable), for example: Flight
hours; Technical log, PFR, Maintenance Message;
e. Stamp or signature and authorization number of the authorized staff
who issues the certificate.
Page 10.10-1

10.10.4.2 Re-certifying a component/ part removed (by VAECO staff) from an

aircraft of an operator other than VNA.
1.
Authorized person (CRS holder) who is assigned to check the

component/ part removed from customers aircraft after lease or loan
may only re-certify a component/ part if VAECO retains control of the
airworthiness status of the components and the airworthy condition can
be controlled.
2.
The assigned RTS staff must confirm all the requirements specified in
the item 10.10.4.1(1) and 9.1.5.9(3) are satisfied.
3.
The assigned RTS staff shall issue Re-certified Certificate by filling all
necessary information in the appropriate blocks of VAECO Form 5001
IAW the item 10.10.4.1(2).
10.10.4.3 Re-certifying a A/C component/ part using CAAV/ FAA Authorized

Release Certificate
1.
Appropriate CAT B RTS staff may issue CAAV form 1/FAA form 8130-3
for component/ part removed from A/C upon request (for returning
component/part after lease).
2.
The assigned RTS staff shall confirm all the requirements specified in the
item 10.10.4.1(1) are satisfied.
3.
The assigned RTS staff shall enter all necessary information in the
appropriate blocks of FAA form 8130-3/ CAAV Form 1. The following
information shall be specified in block Remark in details:
4.
a.
All maintenance work with reference to maintenance data performed

on the component/part as required by EO/ WO;
b.
Information of service time accumulation (FH, FC, calendar day)

and/ or preservation time (applied for shelf-life, HT and/or LLP);
c.
All applicable ADs performed or not (If no AD is performed it is

clearly stated as such).
The RTS staff may using TAR to request EGD for assisting information if
necessary.
Page 10.10-2

10.11
FABRICATION QUALITY CONTROL
10.11.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure for fabricating the aircraft parts during the period of
performing maintenance or alteration in compliance with applicable
regulations and customer requirements.
10.11.2
10.11.3
10.11.4
SCOPE
1.
The fabrication of CAT 3 Parts for maintenance or alterations will be

limited to parts, the failure of which would have no effect on the
continued safe flight and landing of the aircraft, such as: bushings,
shims, hard tubes, flexible tubes, secondary panels and structures,
fairing panels and airworthiness unaffected parts in CABIN etc.
Fabrication of CAT 3 parts requires the use of data accepted by
competent Authority and no Instructions for Continuing Airworthiness
(ICA) is required.
2.
The fabrication of a part that follows procedure specified in SRM is

belonged to Airframe rating so that work is not applied by this procedure.
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Customer is responsible to provide requisition for fabrication replacement

parts on paper format and contain or refer data accepted by competent
Authority.
2.
Director of BDD is responsible for receiving customer requisition of

fabricating parts and order related department/ maintenance center for
the fabrication.
3.
Director of LGD is responsible to issue fabrication order and provide

necessary material for the fabrication.
4.
Director of EGD is responsible for preparing acceptable design data and

technical instruction for part fabrication.
5.
Directors of Maintenance Centers are responsible for part fabrication as

order from BDD or LGD.
6.
Director of QAD is responsible for establishing Fabrication Quality

Control System (FSQS) to ensure all parts are fabricated conforms to its
design data and is in a safe condition for operation.
PROCEDURE
10.11.4.1 Customer requisition

1.
When a replacement part cannot be provided by the customer or VAECO

and cannot be purchased within the certain period of maintenance
activity, the customer shall be informed for part provision. The customer
may request VAECO via BDD for the part fabrication. The customer
requisition must be in documented, contain or refer to data accepted by
competent Authority..
Page 10.11-1

2.
In case the part is listed in VAECO Fabrication part list (VAECO Form
2061), BDD shall issue Service Order to related Maintenance center for
fabrication.
3.
When the part is not listed in VAECO Fabrication part list, BDD shall
send Technical Assistance Request - TAR (VAECO Form 3015) to EGD
for evaluation of fabrication capability and Technical Instruction.
10.11.4.2 Fabrication capability evaluation and Technical Instruction issuance.

1.
Upon receipt of a TAR from BDD, EGD shall review the requirements
and contact to customer or manufacturer for getting necessary
acceptable design data or drawing for the fabrication. The followings
data are considered acceptable:
a.
Design data or drawing from OEM.
b.
Design data or drawing is self-developed by the customer IAW FAA

approved/ accepted procedures.
c.
Design data or drawing is self-developed by VAECO IAW procedure

in 8.7.4.1.
2.
EGD also does the evaluation of VAECO fabrication capability.
3.
When realized that acceptable design data or drawing cannot be

achieved and/or VAECO is incapability for fabrication, EGD shall denote
on the TAR and sent back to the BDD. The customer shall then be
informed for other provisions of the part.
4.
When realized that requirements specified in Item 1 & 2 above are

fulfilled, EGD shall
a.
Check if customer is able to provide the detail work instruction and

procedure for the fabrication. Otherwise, EGD shall prepare a
Technical Instruction (TI) for Part Fabrication (TIPF). Procedure for
prepare the TIPF is found in procedure 8.7 Technical instruction for
part fabrication.
b.
Reply BDD of fabrication capability and reference to the TIPF or

customers work instruction and procedure on the TAR for the
issuance of the Service Order.
10.11.4.3 Fabrication Worksheet issuance

1.
When received the Service Order/ fabrication order from BDD or LGD,
TPD of responsible maintenance center shall review to ensure that the
TIPF and all necessary documents for the fabrication are available and
current.
2.
If work instruction and procedure for the fabrication provided by

customer, then customers work instruction and procedure will be
followed.
3.
In case customers work sheet is not available, TPD of responsible

maintenance center shall issue the Fabrication Worksheet (VAECO
Form 7035) base on the work instruction of the customer or the TIPF.
Page 10.11-2

4.
The Fabrication Worksheet and Service order then are sent to related
shop to perform.
10.11.4.4 Materials
1.
The materials including the raw materials used to fabricate the parts are
received from the stores.
2.
The shop staff shall check the spares/ materials availability in the stores
by using AMASIS:
a.
If the spares/ materials are available the requester fill all necessary
information of spares/ materials required in Stock Requisition
(VAECO Form 4024) and go to the store and get them;
b.
If the spares/ materials are not available the requester shall input all
necessary information of spares/ materials required in the AMASIS
and create Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) to order for
fabricating later.
10.11.4.5 Fabrication and inspection

1.
The fabricating inspection staff shall ensure that suitable, calibrated

equipment required as per the TIPF shall be utilized for the performance
of the task.
2.
The shop staff may perform the task he/she had been qualified according
to the direction in the Fabrication Worksheet. He/she shall make proper
record of the work in progress in the Fabrication Worksheet including the
data related to the process that change the physical or mechanical
characteristics of the materials such as treatment time, temperature, and
dimensions, etc.
3.
If any of the fabrication process or test cannot be done by VAECO, the

process may be contracted to the approved contractor as described in
SOP 10.18.
4.
The shop staff shall check the material prior usage. If any damage and
deterioration is found, the material must be discarded in the place
separated from the serviceable materials.
5.
The Fabricating inspection staff shall perform inspection using suitable

methods or techniques as specified in the TIPF to verify the proper
fabrication process is followed and the dimension, test result of the part
are conformity to the specification specified in design data and ensure
the quality of the parts fit to the requirements of subject parts.
6.
If the task is acceptable to the specification, the Fabricating inspection

staff shall sign-off and stamp properly for each item on the Fabrication
Worksheet as evidence of acceptance and issue Certificate of
Conformity (VAECO Form 7036).
7.
Part number shall be affixed to the fabricated part when the fabricated
part is accepted by conformity inspection as specified in the TIPF, which
ensure that the VAECO fabricated parts are distinguished from the
originally manufactured part and for traceability, the part number is
defined as follows:
Page 10.11-3

Originally manufactured P/N: AAA
VAECO fabricated P/N: AAA-VAE
Note: If the size of the part makes it impractical to mark, the marking
information will be included in the part records or by the used of an
affixed tag
8.
Rejection Parts: The fabricated parts that are rejected during the
inspection because of fail to compliance to the required specifications
shall be attached with Condemned Part Tag (VAECO Form 0009), and
destroyed or discard into the locked cabinet to prevent from misusage.
10.11.4.6 Parts Delivery

Fabricated parts shall be delivered to a Maintenance center or LGD as
assigned by customer, and accompany with:
1.
Copy of Fabrication Worksheet,
2.
Original of Certificate of Conformity,
3.
Original of Service order/ requisition document from the customer.
10.11.4.7 Record Keeping

1.
The Fabrication Worksheet, Certificate of Conformity, and requisition

document for the fabricated parts, if directly installed on the aircraft, shall
be attached with the task card/ NRC that call out the needs of subject
part and shall be kept together with aircraft maintenance record in
Technical record section.
2.
For the fabricated parts that are made as surplus and are going to store
in the customers warehouse for future utilization, the copy of Fabrication
Worksheet, Original of Certificate of Conformity and Service order/
requisition document shall be attached on the parts and send to the
customer for receiving reference.
3.
Original of Fabrication Worksheet, Copy of Certificate of Conformity and

Service order/ requisition document shall be archived in the respective
maintenance center who fabricated the parts for two years.
Page 10.11-4

10.12 MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING
10.12
MOR/ MALFUNCTION AND DEFECT REPORTING
10.12.1
PURPOSE
To ensure all mandatory occurrence; malfunction and defect found during
maintenance activities are investigated and timely reported to competent
authority, manufacturer and customer IAW applicable requirements.
10.12.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to report all mandatory occurrence; malfunction
and defect of articles/ aircraft/ aircraft component that are maintained by
VAECO.
10.12.3
10.12.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Maintenance staff is responsible to report incidents/ accidents,

malfunctions and serious defects found during maintenance.
2.
The related TPD Manager is responsible to initially report all mandatory

occurrence, malfunction and defect by updating all the information
related to the occurrence, malfunction or defect on the Technical
Information module on VAECO website..
3.
The MCC Director is responsible to report mandatory occurrence,

malfunction and defect to Air Carrier/ Operator (as required by the
contract), EGD and Safety Division of QAD.
4.
Safety division manager is responsible for investigating to find out the

root cause of all mandatory occurrence, malfunction and defect;
summarizing and reporting to Authorities, the Manufacturer and the Air
carrier/ Operator as applicable.
OCCURRENCES, DEFECTS OR MALFUNCTIONS TO BE REPORTED
10.12.4.1 List of occurrence to be reported applicable to any aircraft maintained

by VAECO
The following are examples of reportable occurrences and are given for
guidance of Authorized Staff. The list does not include all possible examples
and Authorized Staff should use their judgment whenever they discover a
defect, as to whether it comes within the scope of reportable occurrences.
10.12.4.1.1 Aircraft maintenance and repair
1.
Incorrect installation of parts or components on aircraft that is detected

during an inspection or test procedure not intended for that specific
purpose;
2.
Leakage of hot air which resulted in aircraft structure damage;
3.
Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before completion

of its full life
4.
Any damage or deterioration (i.e. fractures, cracks, corrosion,

delaminating, deformation, de-bonding etc.) due to any reason (i.e.
vibration, loss of material hardness) of:
Page 10.12-1

a. Primary structure or a principal structural element (as defined in the

manufacturers Repair Manual) where such damage or deterioration
exceeds allowable limits specified in the Repair Manual and requires
a repair or complete or partial replacement of the element;
b. Secondary structure which consequently has or may have
endangered the aircraft;
c. Engine, propeller structure.
5.
Any failure, malfunction or defect of any system or equipment, or

damage or deterioration found as a result of compliance with an
Airworthiness Directive or other mandatory instruction issued by a
Regulatory Authority, when:
a. It is detected for the first time by the reporting organization
implementing compliance;
b. On any subsequent compliance where it exceeds the permissible
limits quoted in the instruction and/ or published repair/ rectification
procedures are not available.
6.
Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including all exit doors

and lighting, to perform satisfactorily, including when being used for
maintenance or test purposes.
7.
Noncompliance or significant errors in compliance with required

maintenance procedures;
8.
Products, parts, appliances and materials of unknown or suspect origin;
9.
Misleading, incorrect or insufficient maintenance data or procedures that

could lead to maintenance errors;
10. Failure, malfunction or defect of ground equipment used for test or

checking of aircraft systems and equipment when the required routine
inspection and test procedures did not clearly identify the problem when
this results in a hazardous situation.
10.12.4.1.2 Aircraft technical
1.
Aircraft Structure
a. Damage to a Principal Structural Element that has not been qualified
as damage tolerant (life limited element). Principal Structural
Elements are those which contribute significantly to carrying flight,
ground, and pressurization loads, and whose failure could result in a
catastrophic failure of the aircraft; .
b. Defect or damage exceeding admissible damages to a Principal
Structural Element that has been qualified as damage tolerant;
c. Damage to or defect exceeding allowed tolerances of a structural
element which failure could reduce the structural stiffness to such an
extent that the required flutter, divergence or control reversal
margins are no longer achieved;
Page 10.12-2

d. Damage to or defect of a structural element, which could result in the

liberation of items of mass that may injure occupants of the aircraft.
e. Damage to or defect of a structural element, which could jeopardize
proper operation of systems.
f. Loss of any part of the aircraft structure in flight.
2.
Aircraft Systems
The following generic criteria applicable to all systems are proposed
a. Loss, significant malfunction or defect of any system, subsystem or
set of equipment when Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), drills
etc. could not be satisfactorily accomplished. (Report to VNA only)
b. Inability of the crew to control the system, e.g. (Report to VNA only)
Uncommanded actions;
incorrect and or incomplete response, including limitation of
movement or stiffness;
runaway;
mechanical disconnection or failure .
c. Failure or malfunction of the exclusive function(s) of the system (one
system could integrate several functions. (Report to VNA only)
d. Interference within or between systems. (Report to VNA only)
e. Failure or malfunction of the protection device or emergency system
associated with the system. (Report to VNA only)
f. Loss of redundancy of the system. (Report to VNA only)
g. Any occurrence resulting from unforeseen behavior of a system.
(Report to VNA only)
h. For aircraft types with single main systems, subsystems or sets of
equipment: Loss, significant malfunction or defect in any main
system, subsystem or set of equipment. (Report to VNA only)
i.
For aircraft types with multiple independent main systems,

subsystems or sets of equipment: The loss, significant malfunction
or defect of more than one main system, subsystem or set of
equipment. (Report to VNA only)
j.
Operation of any primary warning system associated with aircraft

systems or equipment unless the crew conclusively established that
the indication was false provided that the false warning did not result
in difficulty or hazard arising from the crew response to the warning.
k. Leakage of hydraulic fluids, fuel, oil or other fluids which resulted in a

fire hazard or possible hazardous contamination of aircraft structure,
systems or equipment, or risk to occupants
Page 10.12-3

l.
Malfunction or defect of any indication system when this results in

the possibility of misleading indications to the crew. (Report to VNA
only)
m. Any failure, malfunction or defect if it occurs at a critical phase of

flight and relevant to the operation of that system. (Report to VNA
only)
n. Occurrences of significant shortfall of the actual performances
compared to the approved performance which resulted in a
hazardous situation (taking into account the accuracy of the
performance calculation method) including braking action, fuel
consumption etc. (Report to VNA only)
o. Asymmetry of flight controls; e.g. flaps, slats, spoilers etc. (Report to
VNA only)
Examples of reportable occurrences resulting from the application of
these generic criteria to specific systems:
b. Air conditioning/ ventilation:
Complete loss of avionics cooling;
Depressurization. (Report to VNA only)
p. Auto flight system:
Failure of the auto flight system to achieve the intended operation
while engaged;
Significant reported crew difficulty to control the aircraft linked to
auto flight system functioning;
Failure of any auto flight system disconnect device;
Uncommanded auto flight mode change. (Report to VNA only)
q. Communications:
Failure or defect of passenger address system resulting in loss or
inaudible passenger address;
Total loss of communication in flight. (Report to VNA only)
r. Electrical system:
Loss of one electrical system distribution system (AC or DC);
Total loss or loss or more than one electrical generation system;
Failure of the backup (emergency) electrical generating system.
s. Cockpit/ Cabin/ Cargo:
Pilot seat control loss during flight;
Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including
emergency evacuation signaling system, all exit doors ,
emergency lighting, etc.
Page 10.12-4

Loss of retention capability of the cargo loading system. (Report

to VNA only)
t. Fire protection system:
Fire warnings, except those immediately confirmed as false;
Undetected failure or defect of fire/smoke detection/protection
system, which could lead to loss or reduced fire
detection/protection;
Absence of warning in case of actual fire or smoke; (Report to
VNA only)
u. Flight controls system:
Asymmetry of flaps, slats, spoilers etc.;
Limitation of movement, stiffness or poor or delayed response in
the operation of primary flight control systems or their associated
tab and lock systems;
Flight control surface run away;
Flight control surface vibration felt by the crew;
Mechanical flight control disconnection or failure.
Significant interference with normal control of the aircraft or
degradation of flying qualities. (Report to VNA only)
v. Fuel system:
Fuel quantity indicating system malfunction resulting in total loss
or erroneous indicated fuel quantity on board;
Leakage of fuel which resulted in major loss, fire hazard ,
significant contamination.
Malfunction or defects of the fuel jettisoning system which
resulted in inadvertent loss of significant quantity, fire hazard,
hazardous contamination of aircraft equipment or inability to
jettison fuel.
Fuel system malfunctions or defects which had a significant effect
on fuel supply and/ or distribution;
Inability to transfer or use total quantity of usable fuel. (Report to
VNA only)
w. Hydraulics system:
Failure of the isolation system to operate;
Loss of more than one hydraulic circuits;
Failure of the backup hydraulic system;
Inadvertent Ram Air Turbine extension. (Report to VNA only)
x. Ice detection/ protection system:
Page 10.12-5

Undetected loss or reduced performance of the anti-ice/de-ice

system;
Loss of more than one of the probe heating systems.
Inability to obtain symmetrical wing deicing;
Abnormal ice accumulation leading to significant effects on
performance or handling qualities (Report to VNA only)
y. Indicating/ warning/ recording systems:
Malfunction or defect of any indicating system when the
possibility of significant misleading indications to the crew could
result in an inappropriate crew action on an essential system;
Loss of a red warning function on a system;
For glass cockpits: loss or malfunction of more than one display
unit or computer involved in the display/ warning function. (Report
to VNA only)
z. Landing gear system/ brakes/ tires:
Brake fire;
Significant loss of braking action;
Unsymmetrical braking leading to significant path deviation;
Failure of the L/G free fall extension system (including during
scheduled tests);
Unwanted gear or gear doors extension/ retraction.
Multiple tire burst. (Report to VNA only)
aa. Navigation systems (including precision approaches system) and air
data systems:
Total loss or multiple navigation equipment failures;
Total failure or multiple air data system equipment failures;
Significant misleading indication;
Significant navigation errors attributed to incorrect data or a
database coding error.
Problems with ground navigational facilities leading to significant
navigation errors not associated with transitions from inertial
navigation mode to radio navigation mode. (Report to VNA only)
bb. Oxygen system:
Loss of oxygen supply in the cockpit;
Loss of oxygen supply to more than 10% of passengers. (Report
to VNA only)
cc. Bleed air system:
Hot bleed air leak resulting in fire warning or structural damage;
Page 10.12-6

Loss of all bleed air systems;

Failure of bleed air leak detection system. (Report to VNA only)
3.
Propulsion (including Engines, Propellers) and APUs

a. Flameout, shutdown or malfunction of any engine; (Report to VNA
only)
b. Over-speed or inability to control the speed of any high speed
rotating component (For example: Auxiliary power unit, air starter, air
cycle machine, air turbine motor); (Report to VNA only)
c. Failure or malfunction of any part of an engine or Power plant
resulting in any one or more of the following:
Non containment of components/ debris;
Uncontrolled internal or external fire, or hot gas breakout;
Thrust reversing
inadvertently;
system failing
to
operate
or
operating
Inability to control power, thrust or rpm;

Partial or complete loss of a major part of the power plant;
Inability, by use of normal procedures, to shut down an engine;
inability to restart a serviceable engine (Report to VNA only).
d. An un-commanded thrust/power loss, change or oscillation which is
classified as a loss of thrust or power control (LOTC):
for a single engine aircraft; or
where it is considered excessive for the application, or
where this could affect more than one engine in a multi-engine
aircraft, particularly in the case of a twin engine aircraft; or
for a multi-engine aircraft where the same, or similar, engine type
is used in an application where the event would be considered
hazardous or critical. (Report to VNA only)
e. Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before
completion of its full life
f. Defects which could cause an inflight shut down rate high; (Report to
VNA only)
g. An engine limiter or control device failing to operate when required
or operating inadvertently;
h. Exceedance of engine parameters;
i.
4.
FOD resulting in damage.
Propellers and transmission

a. Failure or malfunction of any part of a propeller or power plant
resulting in any one or more of the following:
Page 10.12-7

an over-speed of the propeller;

the development of excessive drag;
a thrust in the opposite direction to that commanded by the pilot;
a release of the propeller or any major portion of the propeller;
a failure that results in excessive unbalance;
the unintended movement of the propeller blades below the
established minimum in-flight low-pitch position;
an inability to feather the propeller;
an inability to command a change in propeller pitch;
an un-commanded change in pitch;
an uncontrollable torque or speed fluctuation;
The release of low energy parts. (CAAV, VNA)
b. Damage or defect of main rotor gearbox / attachment which could
lead to in flight separation of the rotor assembly, and /or
malfunctions of the rotor control. (CAAV, VNA)
c. Damage to tail rotor, transmission and equivalent systems. (CAAV,
VNA)
5.
APUs
a. Shut down or failure when the APU is required to be available by
operational requirements, e.g. ETOPS, MEL. (Report to VNA only)
b. Inability to shut down the APU.
c. Over-speed. (CAAV, VNA)
d. Inability to start the APU when needed for operational reasons.
6.
Human Factors
a. Any incident where any feature or inadequacy of the aircraft design
could have led to an error of use that could contribute to a
hazardous or catastrophic effect. (Report to VNA only)
7.
Other Occurrences
a. Any incident where any feature or inadequacy of the aircraft design
could have led to an error of use that could contribute to a
hazardous or catastrophic effect. (Report to VNA only)
b. An occurrence not normally considered as reportable (for example,
furnishing and cabin equipment, water systems), where the
circumstances resulted in endangering of the aircraft or its
occupants. (Report to VNA only)
c. A fire, explosion, smoke or toxic or noxious fumes. (Report to VNA
only)
Page 10.12-8

d. Any other event which could hazard the aircraft, or affect the safety
of the occupants of the aircraft, or people or property in the vicinity of
the aircraft or on the ground. (Report to VNA only)
e. Failure or defect of passenger address system resulting in loss or
inaudible passenger address system( Report to VNA only)
f. Loss of pilots seat control during flight. (Report to VNA only)
10.12.4.1.3 Operation of the Aircraft
1.
Heavy landing - a landing deemed to require a 'heavy landing check.
2.
A lightning strike which resulted in damage to the aircraft or loss or

malfunction of any essential service.
10.12.4.2 List of occurrence to be reported applicable for US registered aircraft

10.12.4.2.1 The following Authorised Staff shall report the occurrence or detection of
each failure, malfunction, or defect concerning.
1.
Fires during flight and whether the related fire-warning system functioned
properly;
2.
Fires during flight not protected by a related fire-warning system;
3.
False fire warning during flight;
4.
An engine exhaust system that causes damage during flight to the

engine, adjacent structure, equipment, or components;
5.
An aircraft component that causes accumulation or circulation of smoke,

vapor, or toxic or noxious fumes in the crew compartment or passenger
cabin during flight;
6.
Engine shutdown during flight because of flameout;
7.
Engine shutdown during flight when external damage to the engine or

airplane structure occurs;
8.
Engine shutdown during flight due to foreign object ingestion or icing;
9.
Engine shutdown during flight of more than one engine;
10. A propeller feathering system or ability of the system to control overspeed during flight;
11. A fuel or fuel-dumping system that affects fuel flow or causes hazardous
leakage during flight;
12. An unwanted landing gear extension or retraction, or an unwanted
opening or closing of landing gear doors during flight;
13. Brake system components that result in loss of brake actuating force
when the airplane is in motion on the ground;
14. Aircraft structure that requires major repair;
15. Cracks, permanent deformation, or corrosion of aircraft structures, if
more than the maximum acceptable to the manufacturer or the FAA;
Page 10.12-9

16. Aircraft components or systems that result in taking emergency actions

during flight (except action to shut down an engine); and
17. Emergency evacuation systems or components including all exit doors,
passenger emergency evacuation lighting systems, or evacuation
equipment that are found defective, or that fail to perform the intended
functions during an actual emergency or during training, testing,
maintenance, demonstrations, or inadvertent deployments.
18. In an incorrect installation of parts or components on aircraft that is
detected during an inspection or test procedure not intended for that
specific purpose;
19. Leakage of hot air which resulted in aircraft structure damage;
20. Any defect in a life controlled part causing retirement before completion
of its full life;
21. Any damage or deterioration (i.e. fractures, cracks, corrosion,
delaminating, deformation, de-bonding etc.) due to any reason (i.e.
vibration, loss of material hardness) of:
a. Primary structure or a principal structural element (as defined in the
manufacturers Repair Manual) where such damage or deterioration
exceeds allowable limits specified in the Repair Manual and requires
a repair or complete or partial replacement of the element;
b. Secondary structure which consequently has or may have
endangered the aircraft;
c. Engine, propeller structure.
22. Any failure, malfunction or defect of any system or equipment, or
damage or deterioration found as a result of compliance with an
Airworthiness Directive or other mandatory instruction issued by a
Regulatory Authority, when:
a. It is detected for the first time by the reporting organization
implementing compliance;
b. On any subsequent compliance where it exceeds the permissible
limits quoted in the instruction and/ or published repair/ rectification
procedures are not available.
23. Failure of any emergency system or equipment, including all exit doors
and lighting, to perform satisfactorily, including when being used for
maintenance or test purposes.
24. Noncompliance or significant errors in compliance with required
maintenance procedures;
25. Products, parts, appliances and materials of unknown or suspect origin;
26. Misleading, incorrect or insufficient maintenance data or procedures that
could lead to maintenance errors;
27. Failure, malfunction or defect of ground equipment used for test or
checking of aircraft systems and equipment when the required routine
Page 10.12-10

inspection and test procedures did not clearly identify the problem when
this results in a hazardous situation.
10.12.4.2.2 In addition to the reports required by above-mentioned paragraph, each
Authorised staff shall report any other failure, malfunction, or defect in an
aircraft that occurs or is detected at any time if, in his/ her opinion, that
failure, malfunction, or defect has endangered or may endanger the safe
operation of an aircraft.
10.12.5
PROCEDURE
10.12.5.1 Report sources of occurrences, defects or malfunctions

1.
Any occurrences, defects or malfunctions (specified in 10.12.4)

discovered on aircraft, engine, component or part maintained by VAECO
and any occurrences, defects or malfunctions reported by flight crew (for
VNA aircraft) shall be immediately reported by the Authorized Staff to his
team leader and related TPD.
2.
The respective TPD gathers necessary information and prepares the

Mandatory Occurrence Report (form specified by customer otherwise
VAECO Form 2035 will be used) and sends immediately to the related
Quality Control Division and VAECO MCC. All the information must also
be updated on the Technical Information menu on VAECO website by
the TPD.
3.
The MCC shall report immediately to CEO, Vice President in charge of

ramp maintenance, Quality Assurance Director, the Operator/ Air carrier
as required by the contract if the occurrences, defects or malfunctions
affect the aircraft safety or flight schedule.
4.
The MCC shall report to EGD, Safety division of QAD within 12 hours. If
the occurrences, defects or malfunctions are related to aircraft structural
damage, the report must be accompanied by a Structural Damage
Report (VAECO Form 3016).
5.
The Safety Division of QAD presides at (co-operates with respective QC

Division) performing an independent investigation to determine the root
cause of the occurrence, defect or malfunction.
10.12.5.2 Occurrences, defects or malfunctions reported by QAD

10.12.5.2.1 For any aircraft maintained by VAECO
1.
The reportable MOR items specified in 10.12.4.1 (except items marked

with Reported to VNA only) shall be reported to CAAV.
2.
Safety division of QAD shall review reports, gather all information of

occurrences from related division and prepare the statistical MOR (CAAV
Form 14) and forward to QA Director or delegated person to review and
accept.
3.
The accepted MOR is sent to CAAV within 72 hours since the event
occurring.
Page 10.12-11

4.
The accepted MOR that applicable for VNA (all items specified in
10.12.4.1) is sent to VNA within 72 hours since the event occurring as
required by the contract with VNA.
10.12.5.2.2 For US registered aircraft

1.
The reportable defect, failure or malfunction specified in 10.12.4.2 shall

be reported to FAA.
2.
Safety Division of QAD shall review reports, gather all necessary

information of defect or malfunction and prepare the FAA Service
Difficulty Report and forward to QA Director or delegated person to
review and accept.
3.
The report shall include the following information but not limited to:
a.
Aircraft registration number;
b.
Type, make, and model of the article;
c.
Date of the discovery of the defect, malfunction;
d.
Nature of the defect, malfunction;
e.
Time since last overhaul, if applicable;
f.
Apparent cause of the defect, malfunction; and
g.
Other pertinent information that is necessary for more complete

identification, determination of seriousness, or corrective action.
4.
After acceptance of the QA Director the Malfunction or Defect Report is

submitted electronically on the FAA Service Difficulty Reporting website
within 96 hours since the failure, malfunction or defect discovered.
5.
The Malfunction or Defect Report is also forwarded to the air carrier as

required by the contract.
10.12.5.2.3 For civil aircraft registered in other countries.
10.12.6
1.
Safety division of QAD shall review reports, gather all necessary

information of occurrence, defect or malfunction and prepare the report
in a form acceptable to the respective authority and forward to QA
Director or delegated person to review and accept.
2.
After acceptance of the QA Director the Malfunction or Defect Report is

submitted, within the time-frame specified, to the respective
airworthiness authority and/ or to the air carrier, and/or to the
manufacturer of the aircraft/ component.
ARCHIVES
1.
Records of all reports submitted to the authorities shall be maintained by

QAD for at least 5 years since occurrence date.
Page 10.12-12

10.13 SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING
10.13
SUSPECTED UNAPPROVED PARTS REPORTING
10.13.1
PURPOSE
To ensure compliance with the regulations and to maintain the highest level
of aviation safety, the following guidance is to be followed for the detection of
unapproved parts and the actions to be taken upon discovery.
10.13.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to report all unapproved suspected parts found by
VAECO.
10.13.3
10.13.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Although, these procedures are primarily implemented as a receiving

inspection function, it is the responsibility of every VAECO employee that
shall become aware of suspected unapproved parts to notify the Quality
Assurance Department (QAD) for further actions.
2.
Quality Assurance Director is responsible for reporting the Suspected

Unapproved Parts (SUP) to the FAA SFO/IFO, CAAV or other competent
Authority and the customer.
3.
The receiving inspector is responsible for performing inspection on all

received article and report to the QAD for any SUP discovered during
receiving process.
4.
All employees of VAECO are responsible to report to the QAD for any
SUP discovered during maintenance process.
INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING

1.
In examining parts in inventory and/or receiving inspection the receiving

inspectors shall review the item(s) receiving documentation for evidence
of production approval to validate the part in accordance with Incoming
Material Inspection and Receiving Procedure.
2.
If the Staffs of Logistics Department of VAECO has found a part in

inventory for which evidence of production approval is not apparent, the
Director of the Logistics Department shall request the certificate holder to
demonstrate that the part is acceptable for installation on a product
maintained by VAECO.
3.
In the event that any part is warranted unacceptable based upon

receiving inspection procedures, the Receiving Inspectors shall initiate
and attach a Discrepancy Report (VAECO Form 4004) to the item(s) and
place the item(s) in the quarantine area.
4.
All documentation that accompanied the item(s) shall be forwarded to the

Quality Assurance Department for future evaluation. The subject item(s)
shall be held until QA Director together with EGD Director and the
maintenance department concerned and the FAA/ CAAV or other
competent Authority has conducted an evaluation to validate the item(s)
as an approved part and returned to inventories or for installation.
Page 10.13-1

10.13.5
5.
Parts for which approval cannot be established shall be properly

disposed of to prevent their installation of reentry into inventories
6.
Quality Assurance Department shall investigate the origin and condition

of the part. When parts are considered unapproved after VAECO
evaluation, it is important that the Quality Assurance Department
promptly report them by using the Suspected Unapproved Parts
Notification Form (FAA Form 8120-11) to the Federal Aviation
Administration SUP Program Office, AVR-20, 13873 Park Center Road
Suite 165, Herndon, VA 20171, Tel: (703) 668-3720, Fax: (703) 4813002 and a copy is to be forwarded to FAA SFO-IFO and/or FSI Form 32
to CAAV.
7.
Parts suspected as being unapproved that are installed on customer

aircraft and listed in the customers approved Minimum Equipment List
(MEL) authorization or Configuration Deviation List (CDL) approved
procedures must be considered inoperable and deferred with the
established MEL procedures. The time limitations specified for removal
and replacement of the part in question must be complied with.
8.
If recall or rework are required for such SUP, the procedures in item 6
shall be followed
9.
The following procedures are established to support the Suspected Parts

Program to assist in the identity and screening of unapproved parts
suppliers. The Logistics Department shall make sure if all vendors, prior
to purchase their products for use by VAECO, meet the following
standards:
a.
The quoted price of products shall not be significantly lower than the
price quoted by other suppliers of the same part.
b.
The delivery schedule shall not be significantly shorter than that of

other suppliers of the same product when existing stocks are
exhausted.
c.
The supplier must be able to provide drawings, specifications,

overhaul manuals, or substantiating data demonstrating the
conformity of the part or parts repair/overhaul.
d.
The supplier or repair station (in case of a repair or overhaul) must

be able to provide evidence of FAA/ CAAV approval for the part and
VAECO.
e.
Sales quotes or discussions shall not create the perception that

unlimited supplies of parts, components, or materials are available to
the end user.
PRODUCT RECALLED AND REWORK PROCEDURES

1.
Once VAECO found the deficiencies that can result the un-airworthiness
of the products or violate to the current regulations, a recall and rework
process must be done to prevent any possible unsafe situation.
2.
If the product had been returned to service and installed on the aircraft,
the recall process below shall be followed:
Page 10.13-2

a.
No Immediately risky Items

For the parts that had been installed on the aircraft, the
manufacturers and the FAA/ CAAV must be consulted
immediately by the Manager of Quality Assurance Audit section,
Manager of Quality control section or the maintenance
department involved for disposition.
If the manufacturer or the authority determined that there is no
immediately risk of using such product, the Manager of the
Quality control section together with the Director of the
maintenance Center involved shall propose a replacement
schedule to the FAA/ CAAV and the operator.
VAECO shall then recall the parts according to the proposed
schedule. After replacement accomplished, the summary report
shall be submitted to the FAA/ CAAV and the customer.
b.
Immediately risky items

If the products involved are considered risky after consult with the
manufacturer and the FAA/ CAAV and must be removed
immediately, the customer must be informed right away.
The Director of the QAD shall, together with the Director of the
maintenance centers and the Director of the Logistics
Department, call out the AOG (Aircraft on Ground) meeting to
negotiate the parts procurement, manpower, equipment, etc.
required for such replacement.
VAECO shall then replace the products immediately and after
replacement accomplished, the summary report shall be
submitted to the FAA/CAAV and the customer.
3.
If the products had been returned to service, but not yet installed on the
aircraft, the products are regarded as unserviceable and shall follow the
procedures below
a.
The Director of the QAD shall give a documented notice to the

Logistics Department for recall the product or the NHA equipped with
the questionable products.
b.
The Director of the Logistics Department shall be responsible for

attaching the products with the unserviceable tag and removing
them from the inventory immediately.
c.
The unserviceable parts shall then send to the related maintenance

department for re-work according to the corrected method with no
deficiency.
4.
For the products that are not yet returned to service, the potion that
involved with the deficiencies shall be subjected to rework follow the
procedures below
5.
A paper notice shall be issued to the maintenance department and the

inspection sections involved by the Director of the QAD requiring rework.
Page 10.13-3

10.13.6
a.
When received the rework requirement, the inspectors of the

inspection shall work with the related shop to perform the rework. It
is the intension of the rework to correct any portion of the work
involving the deficiencies.
b.
The rework shall be clearly denoted on the maintenance record but

shall not override the original record. That is, both records of the
original work and the rework shall be kept for future references
QUALITY CONTROL RECORDS

For reference and records purposes, Quality Assurance Department shall
maintain files of all Malfunction and Defect Reports and Suspected
Unapproved Parts Reports submitted by VAECO for a period for at least two
(2) years.
Page 10.13-4

10.14 MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION
10.14
MAINTENANCE EVENT/ OCCURRENCE INVESTIGATION
10.14.1
PURPOSE
To establish procedure for investigation of maintenance event/ occurrence
with the aims of:
10.14.2
1.
Defining root cause of maintenance event/ occurrence to prevent

repetitive ones.
2.
Defining hazards and associated risks and specify necessary action to

mitigate these risk to acceptable level of safety.
SCOPE
This procedure is applicable to all maintenance event/ occurrence that affect
the safety and quality of the maintenance activities.
10.14.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
QA Director is responsible for investigation of maintenance event/

occurrence and base on that to specify remedial or preventive actions.
2.
Director of maintenance centers/ department are responsible for:
3.
10.14.4
a.
Providing clearly, timely

occurrence to QAD
information
of
maintenance
event/
b.
Carrying out initial investigation of maintenance event/ occurrence

and sent the investigation report and associated material to QAD
c.
Supporting QAD investigation.
d.
Performing necessary remedial actions and preventive actions as

required.
VAECOs staff is responsible for providing information of maintenance

event/ occurrence to his/her manager and QAD, supporting QAD for
investigation.
DEFINITIONS
1.
Maintenance event/ occurrence in this context is including but not limited

to: accident, serious incident, incident, occurrence which happen during
maintenance or cause by maintenance.
2.
Accident: an unplanned event or series of events that result in death,

injury, occupational illness, damage to or loss of equipment or property,
or damage to the environment.
3.
Incident: a near miss episode with minor consequences that could have
resulted in greater loss. An unplanned event that could have resulted in
an accident, or did result in minor damage, and indicates the existence
of, though may not define a hazard or hazardous condition.
Page 10.14-1

10.14.5
PROCEDURES
10.14.5.1 Initial investigation by Maintenance Centre/ Department

10.14.5.1.1 Information of maintenance event/ occurrence collection and verification.
1.
In each Maintenance Centre/ Department, maintenance staff shall report

any maintenance event/ occurrence using applicable forms such as
Mandatory Occurrence Report (MOR), Safety/Error Report (VAECO
Form 2013) or Confidential Safety Report (VAECO Form 2014) to his/her
manager and/or related SAG member.
2.
The manager and/or SAG Team leader shall initiate an initial

investigation of the maintenance event/ occurrence by setting up an
investigation team. The SAG member of the center/ department shall be
appointed as the leader of the investigation team. The initial investigation
shall be carried out by the maintenance center/ department itself or in
cooperation with Safety Division or QC Division or other department
depended on the nature, complexity of the event/ occurrence.
10.14.5.1.2 Carrying out initial investigation

1.
2.
The initial investigation should include but not limit to the followings:
a.
Check on the scene and keep the original scene (if necessary);
b.
Take photo and/or video;
c.
Collect concerned evidences;
d.
Interview related personnel and witness.
The leader of investigation team issues Investigation Report (VAECO

Form 2055) and sends it and supporting document to QAD within 48h
from the time of event/ occurrence.
10.14.5.2 Investigation by QAD

10.14.5.2.1 Collection and Verification of
occurrence
1.
information of maintenance event/
QAD receives information of maintenance event/ occurrence from

following sources:
a.
Information of maintenance event/ occurrence founded during

inspection/ maintenance should be timely reported by VAECO staff.
Reports of maintenance event/ occurrence may include Mandatory
Occurrence Report (MOR), Safety/ Error Report or Confidential
Safety Report.
b.
Sending by email to sqd.vaeco@vietnamairlines.com
c.
Sending via the "Safety Information" on the VAECO website
d.
Maintenance event/ occurrence identified through internal audit

report and audit report from authority, operator and customer.
e.
Repair Reports from appropriate maintenance center;
Page 10.14-2

f.
Complaints/ feedback from operator/ customer regarding to

maintenance quality, which are collected monthly by BDD.
2.
Information of maintenance event/ occurrence may be provided via

related Maintenance Center/ Department or directly to QAD.
3.
QA Director or delegated personnel shall verify information of

maintenance event/ occurrence and initiate an investigation.
4.
An investigation team shall be set up with the team leader appointed by

QA Director or delegated personnel.
10.14.5.2.2 Carry out investigation

1.
If investigation team receive Investigation Report and accompanied

document of a maintenance event/ occurrence from maintenance center/
department, then the team shall review the report. The investigation
team leader shall decide to conduct additional investigation or just
update into safety database.
2.
If QAD receive information of maintenance event/ occurrence, then the

investigation team shall carry out initial investigation.
3.
The initial investigation should include but not limit to the followings:
a.
Check on the scene and keep the original scene (if necessary);
b.
Take photo and/or video;
c.
Collect concerned evidences;
d.
Interview related personnel and witness.
4.
Initial investigation to determine whether there was a maintenance error/

violation that contributed to the event. If there was no maintenance error/
violation, an engineering/ technical investigation IAW may continue in
order to determine why some technical system failure (e.g., from metal
fatigue or failure of electronic parts). QAD may request a support from
EGD to investigate, if necessary.
5.
If there was a maintenance error/ violation that caused or contributed to

the event, then a maintenance error/ violation investigation shall be
carried out IAW procedure 10.22.
10.14.5.3 Technical investigation

1.
In the case an technical investigation must be carried out, an

investigation team shall be established with the expert from EGD and/or
Maintenance Center.
2.
Investigation team may contact the manufacturer to get information,

instruction and support.
3.
Basing on the nature, complexity of maintenance event/ occurrence, QA

Director shall ask for a technical meeting with participation of related
personnel and departments. Purposes of the technical comment meeting
are:
Page 10.14-3

a.
Analyzing, investigating, determining the engineering/ technical root

cause of maintenance event/ occurrence;
b.
Evaluating the influence of maintenance event/ occurrence;
c.
Proposing methods to remedy maintenance event/ occurrence and

preventing recurrence of similar maintenance event/ occurrence;
d.
Sharing information and experience.
10.14.5.4 Corrective, preventive and control the remedial action

1.
2.
10.14.6
Base on result of the investigation QAD shall carry out the followings but
not limited to:
a.
Request corrective actions by using Corrective Action Request

(VAECO Form 2033).
b.
Issuing Quality Notice.
c.
Spreading information and experience to all related maintenance

staff by using VEACO Web site; Safety and Quality Bulletin.
d.
Supply information to VAECO training center to update recurrent

training for maintenance staff.
QAD shall follow up all corrective and preventive action and receive
feed-back from maintenance center/ department.
ARCHIVES
1.
The initial Investigation Report and supporting document shall be kept in

maintenance center/ department 02 years since the closed date of the
maintenance event/ occurrence .
2.
Record of investigations should be archived in QAD at least 02 years

since the closed date of the maintenance event/ occurrence. Time of
archives should be extended in case of investigation is in progress.
Page 10.14-4

10.15
QUALITY NOTICE
10.15.1
PURPOSE
10.15 QUALITY NOTICE
To establish the policy and procedure for ensuring that all maintenance staff
of VAECO understanding of any requirements from VAECO's QA.
10.15.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for all personnel in maintenance and quality
systems of VAECO.
10.15.3
10.15.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The QA Director has responsibility for issuing quality notices and

ensures that there is no conflict between the quality notice and current
regulations.
2.
The Quality Audit Division/ Safety Division has responsibility for updating
the quality notice, sending it to related staff via VAECO's website and
monitoring the Read and Sign action of the related staff and quality
notice system.
3.
The related staff has responsibility for understanding and complying with
QNs
PROCEDURES
10.15.4.1 Issuing the Quality notice (QN)

1.
QN may be issued base on the following events:

a.
Change of regulations, maintenance procedures, quality procedures,

VAECO policies;
b.
The result of incident investigation;
c.
The conclusion of quality, technical meeting;
d.
The Customers procedures or inspection programs
e.
The findings from internal/external audits;
f.
The findings in Safety/ Error Report (VAECO Form 2013);
2.
When a QN are referred to related documents, these documents may be

attached with the QN.
3.
QN will be sent to related staff via VAECOs website by Quality Audit

Division or Safety Division.
10.15.4.2 QN System
1.
QN system is a part of quality system, which is used by QAD to inform

important information to related staff. QN system is monitored in
VAECOs website.
2.
All VAECOs staff can access to QN system. The related staff will
confirm their access and understanding of the QN by Read & Sign
acknowledgement/ stamp.
Page 10.15-1

3.
QN is automatically numbered depend on time of issue as issued year,

month and ordinal number of every month. In addition, QN is classified
by property.
10.15.4.3 QN Management
1.
QN to explain clarify regulations and/or emphasize the current

procedures. QN of important work, new policies, procedures, regulations
shall be kept in QN system for at least 2 years, except replaced by other
QN, cancelled or another requirement from Quality Assurance Director.
2.
QN of temporary amendment of RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP procedures:
3.
a.
QAD shall transfer QNs contents to RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP by the

next amendment.
b.
After the amendment of RSQCM/ MOE/ SOP is accepted/ approved

by FAA/ CAAV or Quality Assurance Director, the related QNs shall
be removed from QN system by assigned staff of QAD.
QN of Operator/Customers procedures, regulations.

a.
When VAECO has maintenance contract with new Operator/

Customer, QN mayl be issued for explaining the requirements of
Operator/ Customers procedures. The related Operator/ Customers
procedures shall be sent with QN to all departments for researching,
performing as well as handling related problems of Operator/
Customers aircrafts.
b.
This kind of QN shall be used as an instruction for performing

maintenance work of Operator/Customers aircrafts. Quality
Assurance Director ensures that QNs contents are according to
Operators MME/ document and,approved by customer (if required)
c.
The QN for routine maintenance at ramp station should include (but

not limited to) the following items:
Maintenance document sign-off & related procedure;
Work scope;
Report of accident/ incident;
Technical support procedure;
Special request of customer;
Other necessary items;
d.
The QN for base maintenance in the VAECO hangar should include

(but not limited) the following items:
Introduction;
Procedures;
Approval data;
Non-routine work;
Major repair and alteration;
Page 10.15-2

Certification of work;
Required inspection item;
Inspection buy back;
Job transfer;
Aircraft handling;
Documentation;
Deferrable defect policy;
Rob parts policy;
Customer parts handling procedure;
Technical flight;
Aircraft fueling and defueling;
Engine run;
Customer special operation;
Contract agreement;
Manual control;
Technical support;
Aircraft cleaning;
Aircraft inventory and preliminary inspection;
WP return to customer;
Attachment...
10.15.5
ARCHIVES
The QN shall be kept at QAD at least 2 years since approval date.
Page 10.15-3

10.16
QUALITY AUDIT
10.16.1
PURPOSE
10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
To establish and maintain quality audit system to ensure that all maintenance
activities are in compliance with applicable regulations.
10.16.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to audit all activities of VAECO and its contractors/
suppliers that supply products/ services involved in aircraft/ aircraft
component maintenance of VAECO.
10.16.3
10.16.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
QA Director is responsible for establishing and monitoring Quality Audit

Schedule.
2.
Quality auditor of QAD shall carry out quality audit according to the
approved quality audit schedule. Other staff of QAD/ other Departments
could participate in audit activities.
3.
Directors of departments/ centers are responsible for co-ordination with

QAD in deploying an audit, completing remedial actions, preventing the
recurrence of the non-conformities that they involved.
PROCEDURES
10.16.4.1 Audit schedule

1.
Annually, audit schedule (VAECO Form 2025) is established by Audit

division, reviewed by QA director and approved by President & CEO.
Approved audit schedule is uploaded to VAECO website and noticed in
homepage of VAECO website.
2.
Audit schedule is established to ensure that:

a.
All departments, maintenance centers are audited for compliance

with procedures in RSM&QCM and MOE and other applicable
quality documents at interval not exceed 12 months, and
b.
Sample products of each maintenance center are checked at interval

not exceed 12 months, and
c.
Non-certificated contractors are audited at interval not exceed 12

months.
d.
All line station are audited at interval not exceed 24 months.
e.
Nightshift (for maintenance activities performed at night) is audited at

interval not exceed 12 months.
3.
The audit schedule could be adjusted provided that the interval of

affected subjects shall not exceed 18 months and be approved by QA
Director.
4.
Audit interval should be defined by Audit division base on the result of

reviewing, analyzing the records of quality audit and related information.
However, extension of audit interval should be approved by CAAV and
Page 10.16-1

10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
will not exceed 24 months. Decision for audit interval adjustment include
but not limit to following aspect:
a.
Quantity of Non-conformity (NC) level 1 and 2 of the latest audit;
b.
Quantity of NCs, which have been corrected properly as required

(time-limit and quality);
c.
Quantity of NCs, which have not been corrected properly as

required;
d.
Tendency (increase or decrease) of quantity of NCs;
10.16.4.2 Audit Performance

1.
For the independence and objectiveness of the Audit process, members

of Audit Team must not participated in work that they will examine.
2.
Auditor in charge of monitoring Audit Schedule is responsible for

informing to manager of Audit division for arranging audit scheduled in
next month and issuing Audit Notice (VAECO Form 2026).
3.
Audit Notice shall be sent to all members of the audit team and Director
of the related Departments/ Center at least 5 days before an internal
audit and 10 days before a Contractors/ Suppliers audit.
4.
For audits of new organizations outside VAECO, the audit team Leader
shall contact the auditee to get supporting documents as well as related
procedures. These documents then shall be sent to all members of the
audit team for review.
5.
The audit team leader prepares an Audit Checklist.
6.
7.
a.
The Audit Checklist is created base on the contents of the audit.
b.
Review NCs found in the previous audits and corrective actions

taken, if any.
Audit team leader shall conduct a meeting with all audit team members
before performing audit in order to:
a.
Inform the duties of the audit team, the schedule and the audit
checklist.
b.
Divide the team into smaller groups if necessary and assign duties to
group leaders as well as its members.
c.
Notice highlights during auditing process.
Audit team Leader shall conduct an opening meeting attended by all

members of the audit team, representative of auditee and related
attendants:
a.
Audit team Leader shall present in the meeting the objectives,

scope, schedule and applied documents during audit.
b.
If the audit team is divided into groups, the audit team leader shall
introduce group leaders to the auditee as well as tasks and the
scope of each group for cooperation.
Page 10.16-2

10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
c.
An auditee representative will be assigned for cooperation with audit

team as well as to witness findings during audit time.
d.
Auditee representative shall be required to inform clearly the safety

regulations applied in audited areas and to prepare necessary safety
equipment for the auditors.
e.
During auditing process, in case some specialized equipment are

needed for approaching the audited areas, the auditee shall be in
charge of preparation.
8.
During the auditing process, auditors might apply all possible

approaches such as interviewing, record review or checking sample in
any stage.
9.
The sample check shall require auditors to witness any stage of the
auditing process. The auditors shall not be allowed to ask to repeat any
stages for checking unless findings are found.
10. All item in the audit check list shall be checked during audit time. If any
finding is found, the auditors shall collect evidence and discuss with
Representative of auditee for understanding of the finding..
11. Before closing the meeting, audit team Leader shall gather all his
members for the internal meeting in order to review all the contents of
the checklist, to collect all necessary evidences related to the findings
and to clarify the number, the level and the deadline needed to correct
these findings. The audit team Leader shall make sure that all
information on these findings is sufficient and exact.
12. The findings are classified according to discrepancy levers compared to
standards, procedures and applicable regulations as follows:
a. Non-conformity Level 1: is significant non-compliance with
procedures, applicable regulations. It does not meet safety
standards, maintenance standards; hazards seriously the flight
safety or is a systematic non-conformity. Refused to be audited by
QAD may also be considered as Level 1.
b. Non-conformity Level 2: is non-compliance with procedures,
applicable regulations. It does not meet safety standards and
possibly hazards the flight safety or lowers the maintenance
standard but it is not a systematic non-conformity.
13. After finishing the checking, audit team Leader shall conduct a closing
meeting to announce the results of the audit and findings/ observations
for discussion. All findings shall be understood and accepted by the
auditee during the meeting.
14. Audit report (VAECO Form 2032) and Corrective action request (VAECO
Form 2033) (if any) shall be issued and send to auditee and related
departments/ centers within 5 working days since audit completion date.
10.16.4.3 Audit Report and Corrective action request
1.
Nonconformities found in the audit shall be expressed in detail in Audit

Report by Auditors and sent to Director of relevant departments/ center
Page 10.16-3

10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
accompanying Corrective action requests. Directors are responsible for

deploying corrective actions for NC promptly and send corrective action
report to Audit division within 3 days for Non-conformity Level 1 and
maximum 30 days for Non-conformity Level 2.
2.
The Manager of Audit division is responsible for reporting to QA Director

as soon as finding the Non-conformity Level 1. QA Director will initiate
Additional Corrective Actions if necessary. When Corrective Actions
need a long time to perform, Manager of Audit division will monitor the
implementing process until closing.
3.
If discrepancies occur, Directors of relevant departments might contact

Manager of Audit division to clear the specific Corrective Action
Requests. Disagree between auditor and auditee about Requests and
Corrective Actions will report to Manager of Audit division or finally to QA
Director for final decision.
4.
Auditors are responsible for providing information about NC or

Instructions to help auditee to identify the root cause of non-conformity
but not giving corrective actions.
10.16.4.4 Corrective Action Monitoring and Closing

1.
All Departments that have non-conformities and relevant departments

must carry out remedial actions for non-conformities and send Corrective
Action Report to Audit division before deadline. If the non-conformities
could not be resolved by individual department, QA auditor should be
inform to Audit manager, QA Director for proper dispositions. In case of
manpower shortage or there are discrepancies between departments,
QA Director shall report to President & CEO for final decision.
2.
In a particular cause, which remedial actions are not performed in time,

the related department Director has to send a Remedial Extension
Request (VAECO Form 2034) to QAD, pointing out the reason of the
delay.
3.
10.16.5
a.
For Non-conformity Level 2, Audit division Manager

responsibility to confirm the reason and issue a new deadline.
has
b.
For non-conformity Level 1 or extended Non-conformity Level 2, QA

Director shall directly give an extension or report to President &
CEO.
Every six months the Audit division will make a report of audit activities
and corrective activities to send Quality Assurance Director for review
before sending to President & CEO for overall activities of quality
system.
AUDIT RECORD
1.
Audit Record includes:

a.
Audit Report (VAECO Form 2032);
b.
Corrective Action Request (VAECO Form 2033);
c.
Remedial Extension Request (VAECO Form 2034) (if any);
Page 10.16-4

2.
10.16 QUALITY AUDIT
Audit records have been archived at least 02 years at Audit division

since all corrective actions were completed..
Page 10.16-5

10.17
SUPPLIER CONTROL
10.17.1
PURPOSE
10.17 SUPPLIER CONTROL
To establish a policy and method to evaluate and control supplier of VAECO

ensuring that all aircraft components/ materials and services provided by
suppliers comply with applicable standards and regulations.
10.17.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for evaluation and control of suppliers who provide
VAECO with products/ services.
10.17.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
2.
10.17.4
Logistics Manager is responsible for:

a.
Requesting approval for Product supplier, Support service supplier

and aircraft component maintenance contractor;
b.
Preparing contract, monitoring compliance with contract of VAECO

and Product supplier, Support service supplier and aircraft
component maintenance contractor
QA Director is responsible for supplier evaluation, approval and control.
PROCEDURES
10.17.4.1 General
1.
VAECO use only products and services provided from suppliers, who
have been evaluated and controlled according to this procedure, to
ensure that products and services in accordance with applicable
standards and regulations.
2.
Supplier is an organization who provides VAECO with products/ services

to support aircraft maintenance activities. In order to be convenient for
evaluation, approval and control suppliers are classified as product
suppliers, calibration service suppliers (calibration agencies) and support
service suppliers:
3.
Product supplier is organization who provides products including aircraft

components and materials.
a.
Category (CAT) 1 product supplier is:

Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) whose products are
specified in maintenance data or organization authorized by
OEM;
Organization approved / recognized by aviation authority such as
FAA, EASA, CAAV;
Organization approved / recognized by associations include:
Aviation Suppliers Association (ASA), American National
Standards Institute (ANSI); General Aviation Parts Suppliers
Association (GAPSA); Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE);
Transonic Aviation Consultants, Inc., European Aviation
Suppliers Organisation (EASO).
Page 10.17-1

b.
CAT 2 product supplier is supplier other than CAT 1 product

supplier.
4.
Calibration service supplier is an organization who provides calibration

service for tools and equipment of VAECO and is accredited by
calibration association following ISO 17025 such as International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) members or National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
5.
Support service supplier is an organization provides services other than

calibration such as: analysis, testing of fuel and hydraulic oil, washing
and cleaning of aircraft, etc
10.17.4.2 Supplier evaluation and approval

1.
For CAT 1 product suppliers, QAD do not issue approval certificate.
2.
The CAT 2 product suppliers and support service supplier will be

evaluated and approved as follows:
a.
The Director of LGD is responsible for contacting potential

organization who expect to be VAECOs suppliers, obtaining and
submitting the following documents to QAD:
Application For Supplier Approval (VAECO Form 2003);
Supplier Evaluation Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2004);
Quality manual, if any;
Authorized, approved certificates of supplier that are related to
the provided product/ service, etc.
3.
b.
Director of QAD is responsible for making evaluation of these

suppliers and pointing out all necessary requirements for each
potential product/ service. If any discrepancy or suspicion found
between application documents and applicable requirements, QAD
should inform to suppliers for clarification or arranging onsite audit if
necessary.
c.
Result of reviewing supplier records should be record in Supplier/

Contractor record review (Form 2060) for completed and corrected
application documents.
d.
Supplier approval certificate (VAECO Form 2005) issued for product

supplier or support service supplier is valid up to 01 year.
e.
The original certificate is sent to supplier, one copy is kept at Audit

division.
For calibration service supplier, based on calibration accreditation

certificate granted by NIST or ILAC member and document provided by
Logistics or supplier, QAD will verify the supplier information through
internet and suppliers website. The calibration service supplier satisfies
VAECO requirements will be listed in Recognized Calibration Service
Supplier List (VAECO Form 2062).
Page 10.17-2

4.
To avoid AOG aircraft, QA may evaluate to issue one-off approved for

organization base on organization record provided by Logistics. Record
of these suppliers should be archived 02 years from approval. These
supplier is not list in Approval supplier list.
10.17.4.3 Supplier control program

1.
Audit division of QA Dept. establishes and maintain Supplier control

program to assure the continuous suitability of approved suppliers with
requirements of VAECO.
2.
Control of supplier is conducted through onsite audit (if necessary);

evaluation information provided by Logistic Dept. during operation of
supplier and feedback information from supplier.
3.
CAT 1 product supplier control:

For CAT 1 product supplier, Logistic Dept. issues List of CAT 1 product
suppliers (VAECO Form 2006) with information of their products
provided for VAECO and documentary evidence sends to QAD quarterly.
Audit division shall verify information of these suppliers base on the
information provided by Logistic department and the related information
from the following sources: Maintenance data (VIM, CML, IPC, CMM,
AMM ...); Official website of Manufactures, EASA, and FAA
4.
CAT 2 and support service supplier product supplier control:

a.
Before suppliers approval overdue, Logistics Dept. should send

Supplier Monitoring Sheet (VAECO Form 2011) for that supplier and
provide related information send to QAD. Based on information
provided by Logistics, Audit division will inform to suppliers to
request related document and completion of the following forms:
Application for supplier approval (VAECO Form 2003);
Supplier evaluation questionnaires (VAECO Form 2004).
b.
5.
Audit division may propose QA Director for on-site auditing of CAT 2

product supplier if many non-conformity items found such as no
certificates and documents attached; delay delivery, wrong/
insufficiency information of products,
Calibration service supplier control: Recognized calibration services

supplier list should be reviewed by audit division every 06 months to
confirm suppliers capability from that supplier and official website of
NIST and ILAC members and information from LGD and Component
maintenance centers.
10.17.4.4 Renewal, extension and revocation approval

1.
To maintain validity of approval, supplier must meet the following

conditions:
a.
Products/ Services supplied for VAECO is implemented within

validation of supplier approval certificate;
b.
All necessary records and documents submitted for renewal process

is satisfied as required;
Page 10.17-3

c.
2.
Quality of suppliers
requirements;
products/
services
satisfies
VAECO
Approval of a supplier shall be revoked the in the following cases:

a.
Seriously violate on conditions/ terms specified in the contract

between supplier and VAECO;
b.
Quality of suppliers products/ services supplied for VAECO don't

meet requirements specified in the contract.
10.17.4.5 Approval supplier list
10.17.5
1.
Approval supplier list (VAECO Form 2009), and Recognized calibration

services supplier (VAECO Form 2062) shall be updated after initial,
renewal and extension approval for supplier.
2.
Audit division prepares these lists then submits to QA Director for

approval before being uploaded on the VAECO website.
ARCHIVES
1.
Each record of validity supplier retained at QA at least 02 years since

supplier has been approved.
2.
Approval supplier list (VAECO Form 2009), and Recognized calibration

services supplier (VAECO Form 2062) retained at QA at least 02 years
from issued date.
Page 10.17-4

10.18 CERTIFICATED AND NON-CETIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL
10.18
CERTIFICATED AND NON-CERTIFICATED FACILITY CONTROL
10.18.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the certificated facilities and non-certificated facilities (contractors)
are properly controlled.
10.18.2
SCOPE
This procedure shall be applied for evaluating, approving and monitoring
contractors for work contracted to them by VAECO.
10.18.3
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
2.
10.18.4
BDD is responsible for:

a.
Requesting approval for aircraft/ aircraft engine maintenance

contractor, specialized service contractor;
b.
Preparing record of contractor for QAD review and approval,

monitoring compliance with contract of VAECO.
The QA Director is responsible for ensuring that all the contractors are
properly evaluated and approved before the maintenance, preventive
maintenance, repair and special service being performed by the
contractor.
PROCEDURES
10.18.4.1 Classification of contractors

1.
Certificated contractor is an organization who has an appropriate

authorities approval for the work to be contracted with the VAECO.
2.
Non-certificated contractor is an organization who does not have an

appropriate authorities approval for the work to be contracted with the
VAECO.
10.18.4.2 Evaluation and approval

1.
BDD should contact certificated-contractor to get authorities approval

certificate related to work to be contract with VAECO. QAD should check
the rating, operation specification of this organization and recognize if its
approval certificate is validity and its rating cover work to be contract.
2.
BDD should contact non-certificated contractor to be VAECO contractor

for collecting the following documents to send to QA, including:
3.
a.
Application for contractor approval (VAECO Form 2001);
b.
Contractor evaluation questionnaire (VAECO Form 2002);
c.
Quality manual or equivalent manual;
d.
Related Certificates/ Approvals.
Audit division should evaluate the non-certificated contractors document

and record evaluation result in Supplier/ Contractor Document Review
(VAECO Form 2060).
Page 10.18-1

4.
If non-certificated contractors document is insufficient, a notification with

the filled VAECO Form 2060 sheet shall be sent to the applicant for
correction or additional information.
5.
When necessary, QAD should conduct onsite audit the non-certificated

contractor. Onsite audit for non-certificated contractor will be performed
IAW procedure 10.16 in this manual to confirm that the non-certificated
contractors quality control system is at least equivalent to the VAECO
quality system such as ISO, SAE quality management system or other
system.
6.
The non-certificated contractor that satisfies all the requirements of

VAECO, Audit division issues the Contractor approval certificate
(VAECO Form 2007) with following information:
7.
a.
The contractors name, business address;
b.
The rating and limitation of the work/ service being supplied to

VAECO and expiry date of the approval certificate.
The certificate is valid within one year since the date of issuance. The
original certificate will be sent to the contractor and its copy is retained at
the Audit division.
10.18.4.3 Control of contracted-out functions

1.
2.
VAECO are directly in charge of the work performed by non-certificate

contractor as follows:
a.
EGD or respective CMC will issue EO/ Worksheet for the work to be
performed by the contractor. The EO/ Worksheet shall specify the
work requirements and be sent to the contractor together with any
referred maintenance data.
b.
Non-certificate contractor shall perform the contracted work/

functions IAW applicable maintenance data, record work results and
sign in the VAECO required worksheet step by step.
c.
Upon completion of the VAECO required work the contractor shall

return the component together with the EO/ worksheet and any
accompanied records as required to the VAECO.
d.
Appropriate authorized staff of VAECO shall inspect and/or verify by

test the component (if any) to make sure that it is maintained IAW
applicable maintenance data and the worksheet is properly
completed. He/ she shall also perform final inspection and issue
certificate of release to service for the component (if it is
serviceable).
Any discrepancies reported to QAD from:

a.
Authorized staff when performing verify the work that performed by

the contractor before releasing to service;
b.
Authorized staff when performing incoming inspection;
c.
Random audit at the contractors premises if any.
Page 10.18-2

3.
If any non-conformity found, the QA auditor shall send Corrective Action

Request (VAECO Form 2033) to the contractor for corrective actions.
4.
If the contractor successes to correct the non-conformity the approval

certificate will remain validity otherwise it will be revoked.
5.
The approval certificate of contractor is also revoked if the contractor

violates seriously the conditions/ terms in the signed contract between
contractor and VAECO.
10.18.4.4 Approval certificate control and approved work scope expansion.

1.
The staff of Audit division enters all necessary information of the

contractors that include certificated contractor and non-certificated
contractor approved/ recognized by VAECO in supplier/ contractor
monitoring program, including:
a.
The contractors name, address and contact information.
b.
The approved work/ activities and expiry date of the certificat
2.
Before the expiry date of contractors approval, dedicated QA staff sends

a notice to contractor to provide document for the renewal or expanding
scope of approval certificate.
3.
The evaluation and approval process is the same as for a new applicant.
10.18.4.5 Approved contractor list control

1.
10.18.5
Audit division enters all necessary information of the contractors in

Approved Contractor List (VAECO Form 2008) for QA Director approval ,
including:
a.
Name, address of the contractor;
b.
The class of the contractor;
c.
Approval certificate: approval number, expiry date;
d.
The rating and limitation of the work/ service being supplied to

VAECO.
2.
Approved Contractor List it shall be updated when there is any contractor

approved, renewed or revoked.
3.
The staff of Audit division informs the newly issued list of approved
contractors and uploads it on VAECO website.
ARCHIVES
1.
The Supplier/ Contractor Document Review and applicants document

will be kept at the Audit division at least 2 years from the review date.
2.
The audit report and corrective action request will be kept at the Audit
division at least 2 years from the date of corrective action acceptance.
3.
The contractors approval certificates and Approved Contractor List will

be kept at the Audit division at least 2 years from the approval date.
Page 10.18-3

10.19 COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING
10.19
COMPANY CERTIFICATE APPROVAL HANDLING
10.19.1
PURPOSE
To ensure approval certificates granted for VAECO by the aviation
authorities, international organization and customer are handled IAW
10.19.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to handle VAECO approval certificate granted by
Aviation authorities, international organization and customer.
10.19.3
10.19.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Quality Audit section of QAD is responsible for submitting the required

data and documents to the jurisdiction unit for approval.
2.
Director of BDD is responsible to raise the needs of certificate, and

provide the necessary documents.
PROCEDURES
1.
Jurisdiction unit may be the aviation authorities, or other civil

organization that is capable to issue certificate of qualify or compliance to
some standards or regulations after related surveillance.
2.
Initial application
a.
Evaluation stage
When corporation business is needed, BDD will inform QAD the
name of jurisdiction unit, scope of certificate, and anticipate date
of receiving certificate to QAD. After receiving this requirement,
QAD will contact and submit the intention jurisdiction unit, and try
to acquire the related procedures and requirements for initial
application. If the certified standards and applied procedures
need to be purchased, BDD is responsible to purchase the
required documents and books.
Quality audit section is responsible for contacting the jurisdiction
unit to clarify the application procedures and related regulations,
then evaluate the prepared operations, and estimate the
application cost and schedule. The evaluation results will be
submitted with Recommendation Letter.
After the Recommendation Letter is approved, Quality audit
section will follow the applicable procedure to fill in the necessary
forms and collect the related information and documents. Then,
apply to the jurisdiction unit with formal letter and the above
information.
Quality audit section should follow-up this application case until it
is approved, and will keep in touch with the jurisdiction unit. If
there is need to pay for the application, BDD is responsible for
the payment.
Page 10.19-1

b.
Preparation stage
After the Recommendation Letter is approved, Quality audit
section should convene the related departments to precede the
preparation process, including the revision of SOP and
performance the related training.
Quality audit section will ask the related departments to revise
the SOP, and add the compliance statements in the contents
according to regulations or standards of jurisdiction unit.
Quality audit section should arrange and conduct the necessary
training about the regulations and procedures of the jurisdiction
unit, and request the management department and working
personnel to attend the training.
If the jurisdiction unit request VAECO to assign the certified
personnel to perform the specific job, the head of department
should submit the qualified authorized personnel to QAD for
reviewing. The Quality audit section will prepare the authorized
personnel roster.
Quality audit section should provide the required document, and
ensure the jurisdiction unit accepts the information. If surveillance
is requested by the jurisdiction unit, Quality audit section should
negotiate the schedule.
c.
Audit Stage
When the jurisdiction unit precedes audit operations, the
department should assign the personnel to answer the auditors
questions. If there is Non-conformity items raised by the auditor,
Quality audit section should record and ask the related
departments to resolve it.
Quality audit section should notify the related departments to
reply the corrective actions within time limit. The actions should
be checked and reviewed by Quality audit section first, and then
reply to the certificate authority.
d.
3.
Certificate issuance: Quality audit section should apply for the

certificate. After receiving the certificate, Quality audit section will
copy two sets of the certificate. One is kept in Certificate File, and
the other will be sent to Administration department for hanging on
the wall of the meeting room or reception area. Those certificates
are also scanned and uploaded on VAECO website.
The renew application: Quality audit section should

required document and fill in the application form
certificate renewal before the expiration date amount
by the respective Authority/ Customer, and confirm
authority accepts the application.
start preparing the

and apply for the
of time as required
that the certificate
Application for change to certificate: If there is change to the name,

address, operations specifications of company, Quality audit section
Page 10.19-2

should collect the required document, and fill in the application form
according to the procedures of certificate authority. Then, formally apply
to certificate authority within the time table, and confirm the certificate
authority accepts the application.
4.
10.19.5
Surrender the certificate: When BDD inform that there is no need to keep
the certificate, Quality audit section should write the letter to the
certificate authority for certificate surrender and return the certificate as
required by the authority.
ARCHIVES
Copies of original certificates are archived at Audit and Standard Division.
Page 10.19-3

10.20
CONCESSION
PROCEDURES
10.20.1
PURPOSE
10.20 CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES
FOR
DEVIATION
FROM
ORGANISATIONS
To establish the procedure for controlling deviation from VAECO procedures

in accordance with applicable regulations.
10.20.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for deviation from VAECO procedures provide that
applicable regulations are still kept compliance with.
10.20.3
10.20.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of department/ center in VAECO is responsible for applying the

concession in some unforeseen circumstance that VAECO procedures
cannot be followed. The activities that deviate from VAECO procedures
can only be carried out when concession is approved by QA Director.
2.
Quality Assurance Director is responsible for concession approval when

found that the intended deviation activity is still conforming to applicable
regulations.
PROCEDURES
10.20.4.1 Concession Approval

1.
When requirements in VAECO procedures cannot be conformed, the

Director of related department/ center shall do the following activities and
send a Concession Request (VAECO Form 2054) to Quality Assurance
Director for approval:
a.
Completing the Concession Request, in which the following contents

shall be described sufficiently and in detail:
Detail of deviations and intended deviation activity;
Reason for concession;
Period requested for concession;
Applicable scope of concession;
b.
Relevant documents, if necessary, such as: working instructions, list

of implementation means...
2.
Quality Assurance Director shall sign for concession approval after

ensuring that the intended deviation activities is still conform to
applicable regulations and the concession is necessary. The copy of
approved concession shall be sent to CAAV if the CAAV approved
procedure is affected.
3.
When concession is not accepted, Quality Assurance Director shall

denote the reason and reply to requesting person.
Page 10.20-1

10.20 CONCESSION FOR DEVIATION FROM ORGANISATIONS PROCEDURES
10.20.4.2 Control of the concession after approval
10.20.5
1.
After approval, the approved Concession Request shall be sent to the

requester. QAD will control the implementation process of conditions and
expiry date of the concession.
2.
Related department/ center shall provide information related to corrective

action of the concession for QAD in sufficiently and timely manner.
3.
QAD controls the deadline of the concession and follows up the

implementing process of accompanied condition. The approved
concessions shall be listed for managing by QAD. The closed
concession shall be sent to CAAV if the CAAV approved procedure is
affected.
ARCHIVES
All documents related to concession approval, control process shall be kept
at QAD at least 2 years since approval date.
Page 10.20-2

10.21
QUALITY MONITORING
10.21.1
PURPOSE
10.21 QUALITY MONITORING
To ensure that all maintenance activities conducting in VAECO are monitor

for the compliance with applicable regulations.
10.21.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to all maintenance activities in VAECO.
10.21.3
10.21.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
QAD is responsible for continuously monitoring all respects of

maintenance that conducting by VAECO, and issue necessary corrective
action request for any conformity, so that to improve the maintenance
quality and safety.
2.
All departments/ centers are responsible for implementing any corrective

action issued by QAD.
PROCEDURE
1.
Activities and areas that need to be monitored by QC division of QAD

include:
a.
Working procedure/ instruction compliance;
b.
Aircraft/ aircraft component maintenance activities;
c.
Technical data usage;
d.
Tool/Equipment maintenance and calibration;
e.
Part/ materials preservation during maintenance;
f.
Housing and facility hygienic condition;
g.
Safety, security, fire protection and FOD prevention during

maintenance.
2.
The QC division of the QAD shall arrange QC staff to perform the daily
monitoring according to the Monitoring checklist during the maintenance
activities.
3.
The Non-conformity Report (VAECO Form 2029) will be issued by QC

division for any non-conformity and send it to the Directors of
department/ centers for implementing remedial actions.
4.
The non-conformities are classified IAW para. 15 of 10.16.4.2 and the

corrective action must be carried out and reported to QAD within 3 days
for Non-conformity Level 1 and maximum 30 days for Non-conformity
Level 2.
5.
Any problem for which a corrective action is needed to improve the

quality and/or safety of maintenance, QC manager shall issue Quality
Request (VAECO Form 2059) and send to related department/ center for
implementing.
Page 10.21-1

6.
10.21.5
10.21 QUALITY MONITORING
The non-conformities and problems found by QC division will be weekly

reported to QA director and informed to QA division for procedure
revision if necessary.
ARCHIVES
The Non-conformity and report of remedial actions shall be archived at least
3 years at QC division.
Page 10.21-2

10.22 MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION
10.22
MAINTENANCE ERROR/ VIOLATION DETECT AND RECTIFICATION
10.22.1
PURPOSE
To establish policy and detective method, remedy and repetition prevention
of maintenance error/ violation, in order to improve quality, safety in
10.22.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies for aircraft, components/ engine maintenance
activities at all VAECO maintenance centers/ departments.
10.22.3
10.22.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
QAD is responsible for management of system on detection, remedy and

repetitive prevention of maintenance error/ violation.
2.
SAGs are responsible for:

a.
Providing completely, clearly, timely, accurately information of

maintenance event/ occurrences to QAD and supporting for
investigation.
b.
Performing necessary remedial and preventive actions.
3.
Director of BDD is responsible for periodically establishing and sending

the statistics report on complaints from Operator/ Customer related to
maintenance quality, safety concerns to QAD.
4.
VAECO staff is responsible for providing information of maintenance

error/ violation to his/ her manager and QAD, co-operating and
supporting QAD for investigation.
GENERAL
10.22.4.1 Definition
1.
A maintenance error is a human action (or human behavior) that

unintentionally deviates from the expected action (or behavior).
Example: Part not installed correctly; Part not installed at all, Part
installed in the wrong location; Not enough oil added during servicing;
Inspector did not see the fault; Tool left in the engine cowling.
Maintenance errors are classified to the following categories:
a.
Installation Error
b.
Servicing Error
c.
Repair Error
d.
Fault Isolation/ Test/ Inspection Error
e.
Foreign Object Damage Error
f.
Aircraft/ Equipment Damage Error
g.
Personal Injury Error.
h.
Other.
Page 10.22-1

2.
A violation is a human action (or human behavior) that intentionally

deviates from the expected action (or behavior).
Violations are classified to the following categories:
3.
a.
Routine violation: These are common practice. Often occur with

such regularity that they are automatic. Violating this rule has
become a group norm. Routine violations are condoned by
management.
b.
Exceptional violation: Maintenance Personnel willfully breaks

standing rules while disregarding the consequences
Contributing factor to an error/ violation is anything that negatively affects

how a Maintenance Personnel does his/her job. Contributing factors are
classified into the 10 categories:
a.
Information (e.g. work cards, maintenance manuals, service

bulletins, maintenance tips, non-routines, IPC, etc.)
b.
Equipment/ Tools/ Safety Equipment
c.
Aircraft Design/Configuration/Parts
d.
Job/Task
e.
Technical Knowledge/Skills
f.
Individual Factors
g.
Environment/Facilities
h.
Organizational Factors
i.
Leadership/Supervision
j.
Communication
k.
Other.
10.22.4.2 VAECOs policy in maintenance error/ violation detection, rectification

1.
VAECO establish and maintain the maintenance error/ violation detection

and control system in order to remedy timely maintenance error/ violation
and apply preventive actions.
2.
VAECO utilizes Maintenance Error Decision Aid (MEDA) of BOEING to

process of investigation, rectification and prevention of maintenance
error/ violation.
3.
When discovering occurrences, maintenance error/ violation or potential

risks, VAECO staffs are encouraged to provide the related information to
Safety Division of QAD by using the Mandatory Occurrence Report
(MOR), Safety/ Error Report (VAECO form 2013) or Confidential Safety
Report (VAECO form 2014) and sending it via the "Safety Information"
on the VAECO website or email (sqd.vaeco@vietnamairlines.com).
4.
VAECO has discipline policy in place to deal with violation aspects of

maintenance-caused events. Discipline/ punishment is only effective for
intentional acts based on principle:
Page 10.22-2

10.22.5
a.
Dont punish honest errors.
b.
Dont punish routine violations.
c.
Punish exceptional violations.
PROCEDURES
10.22.5.1 Detecting, collecting of maintenance error/ violation information

Information related to maintenance errors shall be detected, reported,
collected from the sources and by methods as specified in Maintenance
event/ occurrence investigation procedure 10.14.
10.22.5.2 Evaluating and investigating of maintenance error/ violation
1.
2.
3.
VAECO maintenance errors/ violation investigation process is based on

the Maintenance Error Decision Aid (MEDA) philosophy that is:
a.
Maintenance errors are not made on purpose.
b.
Maintenance errors/ violation result from a series of contributing

factors
c.
Most of these contributing factors are part of a VAECO process, and,

therefore, can be improved so that they do not contribute to future,
similar errors/ violation.
Safety Division shall perform investigation using the MEDA Results

(VAECO Form 2016) to define:
a.
The root cause (contributing factors) of maintenance error/ violation.
b.
The ideas for improving/ fixing the contributing factors.
The investigation should include but not limit to the following methods:
a.
Carrying out on-site investigation at the area where maintenance

error/ violation occurred (if necessary);
b.
Collecting concerned evidences such as reports, maintenance

records, pictures, video, voice records and additional information;
c.
Interviewing related personnel (if necessary);
d.
Reviewing, assessing related records and document.
4.
During the interview with the maintenance personnel investigation team

may obtain information that requires follow-up in order to gain full
knowledge about the contributing factors or other circumstances. This
may include follow-up interviews with other maintenance technicians in
the same work group, with production planners. Or, it may include
inspecting something like a tool that the maintenance technician said
was hard to use or the lighting in a room where the maintenance
technician said it hard to see a parts label.
5.
In the case Safety Division staff is not available for investigation due to
working shift or geographical location, the investigation shall be
performed by respective Quality Control Division and/or relative SAG
IAW paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 of 10.22.5.2 of this procedure. The MEDA
Page 10.22-3

Result and concerning documents shall be sent to Safety Division for

reviewing. Safety Division shall request supplemental investigation if
necessary.
6.
The Investigation report (VAECO form 2055) shall be generated by

Safety Division to report the investigation result to VAECO management
as well as spreading on VAECO website.
7.
Error/ violation level and consequence evaluating

a.
Error/violation level and consequence shall be evaluated using the

Error/ Violation Index matrix specified in Form 2055 completion
guidance.
b.
Error/violation level and consequence evaluation shall be based on

following factors:
Consequence;
Nature of error/violation;
Repetitiveness;
Commonality;
Voluntary reporting after incident and co-operation attitude of
involved staff during investigation.
c.
Error/violation evaluation result will be divided in to 4 levels and

specified in Investigation Report.
d.
For RTS staff error/violation which requires immediately preventive

action, the Investigation report (VAECO form 2055) should be sent
to Audit Division for appropriate actions.
e.
For other staff error/ violation and RTS staff error/ violation which
does not require immediately preventive action, the monthly
evaluation result list should be sent to Human Resource for
appropriate actions.
8.
Once all of the interviews/ investigation have taken place, Safety Division
shall update data to a database.
9.
Safety Division does an analysis to find trends in errors or contributing

factors. This type of analysis will probably not be that useful until a
number of investigations have been done at least 20 times or more
because trends might not be visible.
10.22.5.3 Remedying of Maintenance Errors/ Violation

1.
Safety Division issues a request corrective actions by using Corrective

Action Request (VAECO Form 2033) or Non-conformity Report (VAECO
Form 2029) and send to related Centre/ Departments
2.
Remedial Action Request for maintenance error/ violation is based upon

the following:
a.
Recommendation, instruction from authorities, operators;
Page 10.22-4

b.
Repetitive, effect level of maintenance error/ violation;
c.
Cause of maintenance error/ violation;
d.
Experience in remedial activities.
10.22.5.4 Methods to prevent recurrence of maintenance error/ violation

1.
2.
10.22.6
In order to have systematically and synchronously effective methods for

preventing recurrence of maintenance errors/ violation, some preventive
methods shall be applied as follows:
a.
Improving of working environment;
b.
Supplying of adequately tools, equipment for maintenance;
c.
Revising of SOP procedures, maintenance/ working instructions;
d.
Issuing of quality notice IAW procedure 10.15;
e.
Revising of human factor recurrence training content;
f.
Implementing of technical meeting.
Safety Division shall provide feedback on maintenance error/ violation

event/ occurrence to related technicians/ inspector. It is important to
provide feedback to the maintenance technicians/ inspectors to let them
know what improvements are being made. This will show them that the
process is being used to make improvements and is not being used to
punish maintenance technicians/ inspector.
ARCHIVES
Records related to maintenance error investigation, remedial action,
prevention shall be retained at Safety Division of QAD at least 02 years since
the closed date of the occurrence/ events.
Page 10.22-5

10.23
ASSESSOR QUALIFYING
10.23.1
PURPOSE
10.23 ASSESSOR QUALIFYING
To ensure the assessment of assessor candidate is performed in compliance

with applicable requirements.
10.23.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies for assessment of assessor candidate regarding to
technical knowledge and VAECO procedures/ requirements.
10.23.3
10.23.4
10.23.5
GENERAL
1.
Assessor is approved to perform qualifying assessment for company

authorization in compliance with requirement of quality system.
2.
There are two kinds of assessor:

a.
Technical assessor (Aircraft/ Component maintenance, specialized

inspection technical assessor).
b.
Company/ customer procedure assessor.
ASSESSOR DUTIES
1.
To prepare the assessment material and interview questions.
2.
To report the assessment result to Examination Board Leader/ Quality

Assurance Director.
ASSESSOR AUTHORITIES
Within endorsed scope approved rating, independently performing the
assessment.
10.23.6
PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
Technical Assessor
a.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/ university, or

being graduated from technical college/ university.
b.
Holding authorization at equivalent with or higher than the level of

assessing subject for at least 02 years or having at least 04 year
experience in assessing subject.
c.
Being trained in Human factor.
d.
Company/ customer procedure Assessor

a.
Being graduated from aeronautical technical college/ university, or

being graduated from technical college/ university and being trained
in basic aeronautic technical course.
b.
Being thoroughly familiar with applicable regulations of competent

authorities.
c.
Being thoroughly familiar with applicable VAECO and customers

procedures.
Page 10.23-1

10.23.7
d.
Being trained in Human factor.
e.
f.
Having at least 03 years of experience in aviation.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
10.23.8
Assessor assessment and approval process

a.
Anyone may propose an assessor to Quality Assurance Director.
b.
The Quality Audit Division shall collect records from the candidate,
preliminary assess and schedule an interview (if requested by
Quality Assurance Director).
c.
The Quality Assurance Director may interview the candidate to

evaluate his/her knowledge and ability.
d.
If candidates meet the requirements, the Quality Assurance Director

will approve the assessor with detail approved rating. The Assessor
Roster will revise to update any changes in the approved assessor
name and/or ratings.
Assessors approval shall be terminated if:

a.
His authorization/ licence have been invalid.
b.
Failing to accomplish the functions, duties and responsibilities of an

assessor.
ARCHIVES
1.
The Assessor Roster and assessor records shall be maintained by the

Quality Assurance Department.
2.
Assessor records shall be kept on file in Quality Assurance Department

for two years after termination of the assessor approval.
Page 10.23-2

10.24
QUALIFYING EXAMINATION
10.24.1
PURPOSE
To ensure qualifying examination are performed in compliance with

10.24.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies for the multiple-choice and interview exam
preparation and assessment to qualify the maintenance staff.
10.24.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The assigned staff of QAD has responsibility for multiple-choice and interview
exam preparation and arrangement.
10.24.4
PROCEDURE
10.24.4.1 MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONNAIRE PREPARATION

1.
The Quality Assurance staff should select the questions from, but not
limited to, the accepted question banks. The question level is based on
ATA 104.
2.
The number of question and level for technical exam is as the following:
a.
For initial and renewal exam of component Inspection and RTS staff:
50 level 4 questions.
b.
For initial and renewal exam of Structure repair staff: 70 level 3

questions.
c.
For initial and renewal exam of Cabin repair staff: 50 level 2

questions.
d.
For initial and renewal exam of IFE repair staff: 50 level 2 questions.
Note: Technical multiple choice exam is not applicable to A/C

inspection and return to service staffs.
3.
The number of question for regulation and procedure exam is as the

following:
a.
Inspection and RTS staff Category A: 30 questions
b.
Inspection and RTS staff Category B: 50 questions
c.
Inspection and RTS staff Category C: 20 questions
d.
Component Inspection and RTS staff: 30 questions
e.
Structure repair staff: 30 questions
f.
Cabin repair staff: 20 questions
g.
IFE repair staff: 20 questions
h.
Borescope inspection staff: 20 questions
i.
A/C repair staff: 30 question
Page 10.24-1

4.
The VAECO staff should use VAECO Form 2040 to prepare

questionnaires for multiple choice test.
10.24.4.2 INTERVIEW/ PRACTICAL ASSESSMENT

The interview/ practical assessment is applicable to the candidate to ensure
that his/ her capability, knowledge, skill to be met the applied job positions
requirement.
1.
For the Technical subject, within the scope of authorization applied, the
interview/ practical assessment shall cover 06 criterion below:
a.
Skill of using, lookup data maintenance;
b.
Compliance with the guidance of maintenance materials;
c.
Practical skill according to job requirements;
d.
Skill of using tools, instrumentation/ test including specialized

equipment, the use of removable devices, perform maintenance;
e.
Skill of handling situations arising in maintenance;
f.
Complete maintenance records.
Interview/ Practical assessment content for each category shall be

defined as following table:
No.
1
Category
Assessment content
A.1A.18
B1-Airframe
Module 1: Aircraft General

Module 2: Airframe
Module 6.1: MEL items required
B1-Powerplant

Module 3: Power plant
B2-Electrical

Module 4: Electrical
B2-Avionic

Module 5: Avionic
ARS
Module 1: Standard practice

Module 2: Specific maintenance/ repair
practice
A/C repair
IAW appropriate A/C repair category, such as

Zone 128/ 567/ 34/ E&A
Interview/ Practical assessment & result shall be recorded in

Authorization Assessment Sheet (Appendix of VAECO Form 2046)
Page 10.24-2

2.
For the regulation and procedure interview subject, the assessment

includes review of incorrect answers in Multiple-choice Answer Sheet
and appropriate checklist in Authorization Assessment Sheet (VAECO
Form 2046)
10.24.4.3 EXAMINATION ARRANGEMENT

1.
There are 02 type of exams including multiple-choice exam and

interview/ practical assessment.. Applicable type of exams shall be
decided by QA Director. In case that both multiple-choice and interview/
practical assessment are required, the candidate has to pass the
multiple-choice exam before taking part in interview/ practical
assessment..
In the multiple-choice exam, each candidate is provided a Multiple
Choice Test Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) and Multiple-choice
Answer Sheet (VAECO Form 2041) to record the answer. All multiplechoice questionnaires should be gathered just after the exam completed
by the proctor and then returned to QAD.
10.24.5
2.
The QAD staff will review the candidate answers. The pass mark of the
multiple-choice exam is 75%.
3.
The interview/ practical assessment is not applicable to candidate who

apply for renewal authorization only.
4.
If the candidate does not pass all required exams, his/ her pass result
will be reserved within 06 months for multiple-choice exam and within 06
months for interview exam.
5.
Regulation and procedure exam may be exempted if the candidate is

being authorized at equal or higher level to the authorization applied.
6.
Regulation & procedure multiple choice exam for category B

authorization renewal is not required if the authorization has been
upgraded from category A to category B within 06 months.
7.
The exam results will be summarized by QAD staff and informed to

Human Resource Department.
ARCHIVES
1.
Multiple Choice Test Questionnaires (VAECO Form 2040) is kept at the

QAD for at least 2 years since exam date.
2.
Multiple-choice Answer Sheet (VAECO Form 2041) and Authorization

Assessment Sheet (VAECO Form 2046) are kept in appropriate
maintenance staff record for at least 5 years since exam date.
Page 10.24-3

10.25 TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION)
10.25
TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION)
10.25.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the temporary authorization is granted in compliance with
10.25.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies for the temporary authorization to perform unforeseen
event at the out-station.
10.25.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The QA Director or delegated person has responsibility for approving the
dispensation for appropriate maintenance staff.
10.25.4
PROCEDURE
1.
In the unforeseen cases, where an aircraft is grounded and there is no

appropriate inspection and return to service personnel available at the
out-station, a temporary authorization may be issued to suitable
candidate.
2.
Candidate shall contact the MCC to inform about the defect of aircraft
and contact the respective Technical Planning Division to request a
technical assistance if necessary.
3.
If the defect has been determined, the candidate shall contact directly
QA Director or delegated person to request a dispensation.
4.
QA Director or delegated person should review the experience and

license of the candidate. The candidate shall have a valid maintenance
license with appropriate category and type/rating for defect(s)
rectification or deferment, issued or recognized by the competent
authority. The maintenance license is not applied to the candidate who is
qualifying without license.
5.
QA Director or delegated person may interview candidate via telephone

to assure candidates capability to carry out the work(s), if there is doubt
about his competence.
6.
QA Director or delegated person approve a supplemental authorization

by granting dispensation number to satisfied candidate. The condition/
limitation, preventive action, follow up action may be required. The
validity of the dispensation is one time accepted otherwise specified in
the dispensation.
7.
By the supplemental authorization, authorized personnel shall perform

maintenance procedures or deferment of defect, complete maintenance
records with dispensation number entry.
8.
Authorized person is responsible to complete Dispensation sheet

(VAECO Form 2052) and send to QC Division within 02 days since
approval date.
Issue: 02, Revision: 02, Date: 08 MAY 2012
Page 10.25-1

10.25.5
10.25 TEMPORARY AUTHORIZATION (DISPENSATION)
ARCHIVES
The approved Dispensation (VAECO Form 2052) is kept at the respective
QC Division. Every month all approved Dispensations are sent to QA Division
for archive at least 2 years since approval date.
Issue: 02, Revision: 02, Date: 08 MAY 2012
Page 10.25-2

10.26
INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING
10.26.1
PURPOSE
10.26 INSTRUCTOR QUALIFYING
To ensure the instructor assessment and qualifying are performed in

compliance with applicable VAECO AMOTP/RSTP and authority
requirements.
10.26.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for VAECO instructor qualifying.
10.26.3
INSTRUCTOR CATEGORY
1.
Instructor categories are defined as following:

a.
Basic aircraft maintenance instructor
b.
Aircraft type training instructor
c.
Engine run-up instructor
d.
Human factors instructor
e.
Ground equipment instructor
f.
Dangerous goods instructor
g.
Aviation security instructor
h.
SMS instructor
i.
Specialized instructor
j.
Regulation and procedure instructor
k.
Aviation English instructor
l.
ATA 300 instructor
m. AMASIS instructor
2.
3.
Basic aircraft maintenance and aircraft type training instructor are

classified into two function groups as follows:
a.
Airframe and Power plant
b.
Avionic and Electrical
Specialized instructor approval including, but not limited to the following

functions:
a.
Components maintenance
b.
In-Flight Entertainment maintenance
c.
Structure repair
d.
ATC transponder and Altimeter test and inspection
e.
Borescope inspection
f.
Standard practise
g.
Ground handling
Page 10.26-1

10.26.4
h.
EWIS, CDCCL
i.
Specific tool/ equipment training
INSTRUCTOR PRIVILEGES AND LIMITATION

Within endorsed scope of approved rating and function, instructor is allowed
to perform the instruction in accordance with approved training course
curriculum.
10.26.5
QUALIFYING PROCEDURE
10.26.5.1 Application process

1. Anyone may apply for instructor approval by sending application (VAECO
Form 2067) to Training Director.
2. Training center shall collect records from the candidate, preliminary
assess against correspondence instructor PNA before forwarding to
Quality Assurance Department for qualifying process.
10.26.5.2 Assessment and qualification process
1.
The Quality Assurance Director evaluates the candidate by reviewing

documentation, attending demo class, or other means to determine that
the individual is capable of imparting information and knowledge as
required.
2.
Demo instruction for instructor approval shall be organized as following:

a.
Instructor qualification board: Quality director establish the

qualification board which consist of three to five assessors, including
at least one assessor holding authorization which compatible with
the assessing rating/ function.
b.
Demo instruction
Demo instruction subjects/ content decided by qualification
board, based on the random pickup from the scope of
candidates application (at least 04 subjects/ ATAs for basic/ type
training).
Each candidate shall be assessed in a period of maximum 08
hours.
c.
Qualification board evaluation

Assessors attend the demo instruction for each subject/ ATA and
fill out the Instructor Evaluation Sheet (VAECO Form 2068).
Quality Audit Division shall collect Evaluation Sheets for each
subject from assessors and average the evaluations using
Instructor Evaluation Result Sheet (VAECO Form 2069).
One criteria in evaluation sheet is considered as acceptable if the
average point of all assessors for that criteria is not under 3, and
one subject is considered as acceptable when every criteria is
acceptable.
Page 10.26-2

3.
When candidate meets all requirements, the Quality Audit Division shall
issue the Instructor Approval (VAECO Form 8019) with detail functions
to Quality Director for approval.
4.
For subjects within CAAV approved rating, QAD will submit a list of
instructor together with related records/ certificates (as required) to
CAAV for approval.
5.
QAD shall update Instructor Roster and make it available to authorities

upon request.
10.26.5.3 Maintain proficiency/ Validity of approval

To maintain the validity of approval, following conditions shall be satisfied:
10.26.6
1.
VAECOs approval is valid, and
2.
CAAV approval is valid (if applied), and
3.
Applicant is still employed by VAECO, and
4.
Applicant shall conduct the privileges in any consecutive 24 months

period, or complete the recurrent training on the related subjects every
24 months.
ARCHIVES
Instructor qualifying records shall be kept on file in Quality Assurance
Department for two years after the termination of instructor approval.
Page 10.26-3

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE & TRAINING PROC.
PART 11
HUMAN RESOURCE AND

TRAINING PROCEDURES
Page 11-1

11.1
POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT
11.1.1
PURPOSE
11.1 POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT
To ensure all working positions in VAECO is assessed and controlled in

accordance with current applicable requirements.
11.1.2
11.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Relevant departments and maintenance centers are responsible for

making a proposal to Quality Assurance Department for any new job that
needs to be created within their unit to ensure their smooth operation.
2.
Director of QAD is responsible for determining level of expertise,

knowledge, skills and experience required for proposed job.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Departments and maintenance centers shall make new job proposal in

POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT (VAECO Form 8031) and send to
QAD. The proposal for assessment should include the brief description
of essential responsibilities and tasks/duties of position. The new job
proposal should be ignited in case of
a.
Current employee transfers to a new job, or is assigned a task to

which she/he is unfamiliar or has no previous training.
b.
Change in factors that affect the Company, including the introduction

of a new process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system,
or component.
QAD shall determine the minimum requirements for each position

including, but not limited to, following:
a.
Knowledge required for the job including the introduction of a new

process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system, or
component
b.
skill
c.
license
d.
experience
QAD shall determine the minimum requirements for each position based
on the following factor:
a.
Approved RSM/ QCM, MOE and SOP.
b.
Requirements in CFR 14 part 145, part 43 and other applicable

parts,
c.
Applicable requirements specified in VAR parts and other applicable

requirements of CAAV...
The approved POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT then send to HRD for

Employee need assessment.
Page 11.1-1

11.2 EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD
11.2
EMPLOYEE NEED ASSESSMENT AND TRAINING RECORD
11.2.1
PURPOSE
11.2.2
1.
Each employee who is assigned to perform or support maintenance,

preventive maintenance, or alterations, and inspection functions will be
capable of performing the assigned task. The Company ensures that
employees are capable by assessing their abilities against job
qualifications, and filling any gap with training. This section describes
that assessment process.
2.
Individual training records will be retained by HRD.
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
11.2.3
Human Resource Department:

a.
Ensuring that these procedures are used appropriately.
b.
Developing an Employee Needs Assessment for each employee

using the program and ensuring that an appropriate training plan is
established for each employee.
c.
Ensuring that all records are accurately documented and filed in a

timely manner.
Quality Assurance Department:

a.
Establishing the Company needs assessment (Position Needs

Assessment).
b.
Implementing employee assessment (Further Employee Needs

Assessment).
Training Center:
a.
Ensuring that the training program and its procedures are used
appropriately.
b.
Implementing training plan.
Maintenance Centers and Departments:

a.
Assigning current employees suitable job positions.
b.
Making employees aware of the program and their responsibilities in

it.
PROCEDURE
1.
Needs Assessment is required under the following conditions:

a.
New employee joins the company: HRD must assign each new
employee an appropriate job position.
b.
Current employee transfers to a new job position or is assigned a

task in which she/he is unfamiliar or has no previous training:
Maintenance centers/ Departments must update, revise proposed
employee assigned roster and send the roster to HRD.
Page 11.2-1

c.
2.
Change in factors that affect the Company, including the introduction

of a new process, method, material, tool, or aircraft model, system,
or component: QAD must establish, revise, and approve these
changing job positions and send it to HRD.
Update changes in personnel and job position.

All changes in personnel and job position above will be updated into
software by HRD.
3.
Initial employee needs assessment.

To determine training needs, each employees abilities will be assessed
against the requirements of the job by analyzing:
4.
a.
Initial evaluation of employee training records will be carried out by

the HRD: Evaluate the employee through reviewing records of
training provided previously, testing or observation (by QAD,
Training center, Maintenance centers, Departments) to determine
the skills and knowledge possessed and complete an Employee
Assessment form. Use an Employee Assessment Form to document
the employees demonstrated capability.
b.
Analyze the gap between the employees current skills and

knowledge as stated on the Employee Assessment, and the skills
and knowledge required for the job as stated on the Position Needs
Assessment to determine which courses are required in order to
provide the employee with the additional capability to perform his
assigned duties. HRD will document the plan for each individual on
an Employee Training Plan form.
c.
HRD will schedule the employee for classes listed on the Employee
Training Plan, make master training plan, and send it to Training
center.
d.
For employees satisfying skill and knowledge requirements as stated

on the position needs assessment, HRD will make general
examination plan and send it to QAD.
Implementing training.
Training center implements training courses and send training result
back to HRD to update database.
5.
6.
Further employee needs assessment.

a.
QAD in co-operation with Training center, related Maintenance

centers and departments carries out further evaluation by testing or
observation employees knowledge and skills.
b.
Employee remedial training courses after examination must be

classified from the training list by training codes, recorded in the
comments part of employee needs assessment form, and sent to
HRD to rectify an employees demonstrated lack of knowledge or
skill.
Updating training and examination result.
Page 11.2-2

Training result from Training center and examination result from QAD
(including employee remedial training courses) will be updated into
individuals training record by HRD.
7.
Re-assessing employee training needs again.

Employee needs assessment is repeated to analyze and fill the gap with
training again.
11.2.4
ARCHIVES
1.
Detailed records, relating to individual employee training will be

maintained for a period of two years after employee separation by HRD,
including:
a.
Archives in the software including the following forms generated by

the training program:
Employee Training Record.
Employee Needs Assessment.
Employee Training Plan.
b.
2.
Archives in the locked cabinet.
Available individual training certificates are managed, updated, and

stored in the locked cabinet by HRD.
Page 11.2-3

11.3
TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT
11.3.1
PURPOSE
11.3 TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT
This procedure stipulates regulations of a training course arrangement.

11.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for training course arrangement activities.
11.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division are
responsible for arranging training courses.
11.3.4
PROCEDURE
Training courses are arranged by the TC based on approved annual training
plan or request from HRD or from other departments/centers of VAECO or
from Customers.
11.3.4.1
Training course arrangement

1.
For arrangement a training courses at the TC, the Training Division/

Southern Training Division shall:
a.
Evaluate criteria necessary to implement the training course

including: timetable, instructors and training location. In some cases,
instructors and training location may be outside rented; however,
both shall meet current requirements.
b.
Prepare a Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007) when all

necessary criteria to implement the training course are satisfied and
submit to the Training Division manager for review, then to the TCD
for approval under delegation of the VAECO President and CEO.
2.
The Training Division informs the approved Training Course Plan

(VAECO Form 8007) to the HRD/ the other Departments/ Centers of the
VAECO/ Customers for providing attendance trainee list and to related
instructors for implementation.
3.
The HRD is responsible to make sure that all the attendant meet the
prerequisite of the training course before providing the properly trainee
list to the TC. Any attendant that does not meet the prerequisites will not
be qualified as completion of the training course.
4.
After receiving attendance trainee list, the Training Division/

Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division implements the
training course IAW Procedure 11.5. The Training Division is responsible
for controlling of trainees prerequisites.
5.
After the training course is completed, the Training Division/ Southern

Training Division shall collect/ complete/ store all relevant
information/documents to the Training Record IAW Procedure 11.9.
6.
Except special cases, within 10 working days after the training course is
completed, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall
prepare a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) and submit to
Page 11.3-1

11.3 TRAINING COURSE ARRANGEMENT
the Training Division manager for review then to the TCD for issuing
Certificates/ Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) IAW Procedure
11.10, if requested.
7.
11.3.4.2
11.3.5
The TCD shall send a Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) and
Certificates/ Attestations- VAECO Form 8001/8002 (if any) to the HRD/
Customer.
Outsourcing training course arrangement

1.
The Administrative Division carries out procedures of selection,

negotiation and signing a contract with a training provider (hereafter
called as provider). The selected provider must have capability and
scope of training IAW current requirements or be accepted by the
VAECO President & CEO.
2.
After a training contract is signed, the Administrative Division shall

cooperate with the contracted provider to implement the training course.
3.
After the training course is completed, the Administrative Division shall

collect/ complete all relevant information/ documents to Training Records
IAW Procedure 11.9.
4.
Except special cases, within 10 working days after the training course is
completed, the Administrative Division manager shall prepare a Training
Course Report (VAECO Form 8014) attached with certificates (if any)
and submits to the TCD.
5.
The TCD shall send the Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014)
and certificates (if any) to the HRD.
ARCHIVES
The records related to training course arrangement are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.3-2

11.4
TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION
11.4.1
PURPOSE
11.4 TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION
This procedure stipulates requirements for training courses preparation.

11.4.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for training courses preparation.
11.4.3
RESPONSIBILITY
responsible for preparing training courses.
11.4.4
PROCEDURE
11.4.4.1
Training materials preparation

1.
Training materials includes Training Course Curriculums (VAECO Form

8015), training documents and reference documents (if any).
2.
The Training Division manager shall assign instructors to prepare

training materials.
3.
Training Course Curriculums (VAECO Form 8015), Training Worksheet

(VAECO Form 8016) are prepared based on followings:
4.
5.
6.
11.4.4.2
a.
Objective/subject of the training course.
b.
Regulations for training of Authorities/Company.
c.
Training requirements of Authorities/ QAD/ Manufactures/

Companys RSTP/Departments of company/Customer.
Training documents should systematically demonstrate knowledge/skills

with level as requirements of the Training Course Curriculum (VAECO
Form 8015) and are prepared based on followings:
a.
Training/Maintenance manuals of Manufactures.
b.
Manuals/requirements of Authorities/QAD/Customer
Reference documents (if any) which provide trainees more information

related to the training course including but not limited to:
a.
Training software, training aid program such as: CBT, VACBI
b.
Video/ picture, illustration, visual training tools for a lecture.
c.
Maintenance Manuals such as: AMM, ASM, TSM...
d.
Acronym handbooks, safety notices, Flight Deck Procedures,

troubleshooting checklists
The Training Division shall submit training materials to the TCD for
acceptance and/ or approval applying process, if necessary.
Training materials revising, supplementing and updating

1.
The Training Division manager shall assign instructors to revise,

supplement, and update training materials. Training materials are revised
referring to these followings:
Page 11.4-1

11.4.4.3
a.
Changes in Training/maintenance manuals of Manufactures.
b.
Changes in actual configuration of A/C or components.
c.
Requirements, feedback from actual working experiences,

Authorities, manufactures, QAD, Customers, Instructors or
trainees
2.
These revised training materials shall be submitted to the TCD for

acceptance and/ or approval applying process, if necessary.
3.
The original training materials are managed by the Training Division.

Copies shall be distributed to the Administrative Division/ Southern
Training Division or instructors.
4.
The up-to-dated information in training materials shall be presented at a

next recurrent training course to people who have been completed the
training course.
Preparation for training course:

1.
2.
3.
11.4.5
11.4 TRAINING COURSES PREPARATION
The Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare

necessary forms, including:
a.
Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006).
b.
Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008).
c.
Training Course Critique (VAECO Form 8005), if any.
The Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division shall ensure:

a.
Classroom, workshop is tidy, well ventilated and illuminated.
b.
The sufficiency of tools, equipment and materials.
c.
The sufficiency of training documents and reference documents for

each individual trainee.
If training courses are implemented at a location other than the TC, the
Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division cooperates with incharge person authorized to prepare for training as required above.
ARCHIVES
The records related to training course preparation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.4-2

11.5
TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION
11.5.1
PURPOSE
11.5 TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION
This procedure stipulates regulations for training course implementation.

11.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for training course implementation.
11.5.3
11.5.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Training Division/ Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division

are responsible for assigning Instructors for training course.
2.
Trainees are responsible for obeying regulations in this procedure.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Assigned instructors should:

a.
Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC.
b.
Present at least 5 minutes prior to training time, checks training

facilities. If it is not suitable for training, inform the Administrative
Division/ Southern Training Division manager for further actions.
c.
Register attendance trainees and ensure trainees sign and fill all
information to Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006) and
Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008)..
d.
Inform trainees of all related regulations including regulation of

security, safety, fire protection, warning and caution of maintenance
tasks (if any).
e.
Manage trainees in the whole time of training IAW current

regulations.
f.
Halt of all regulation violations then inform to Training Division/

Southern Training Division manager.
g.
Return facilities back original status after finishing the training.
For theoretical training, instructors shall lecture on the content of

approved Training Course Curriculum and may:
a.
Use reference documents and training aid equipment to help

trainees easy to acquire knowledge/skill.
b.
Give event exercises to trainees for discussion or give questions to

evaluate knowledge acquired by trainees.
c.
Except Instructors presentation time, trainees can be self-study with

training aid equipment. During this time, instructors should be
present to guide trainees and answer their questions.
For Practical training/Task training, instructors shall instruct and

supervise all tasks performed by each individual trainee. The completion
of training shall be indicated by signature in Training Worksheet (VAECO
Form 8016) or equivalent.
Page 11.5-1

4.
11.5 TRAINING COURSE IMPLEMENTATION
Trainees should:
a.
Obey all current regulations of the VAECO and the TC. All cases of
regulation violation will result in penalty IAW current regulations
b.
Obey all requirements of instructors and the training course.
c.
Present at classroom or training location on time. If trainee is late for

training up to 15 minutes, he/she will be not permitted to enter the
classroom.
d.
Ask instructor for leave and the Training Division/ Southern Training
Division or the TCD for absence from the training course.
If trainee does not attend the training course less than 8 training
hours (one day) without permission, he/she will be recorded in a
Training Record, forbidden to attend training courses and exams
arranged by the TC for 06 months.
If trainee does not attend the training course more than 8 training
hours (one day) or whole training course (regardless the number
of training hours) without permission, he/she will be recorded in a
Training Record, forbidden to attend training courses and exams
arranged by the TC for 18 months.
Forbidden time is calculated from the end of the course that
trainee does not attend without leave.
e.
11.5.5
Sign and fill all necessary information into training course forms.
ARCHIVES
The records related to training course implementation are kept IAW SOP
11.9.
Page 11.5-2

11.6
EXAM ARRANGEMENT
11.6.1
PURPOSE
11.6 EXAM ARRANGEMENT
This procedure stipulates regulations for an exam (including TOEFA)

arrangement.
11.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for exam arrangement activities of the TC.
11.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Training Division/ Southern Training Division are responsible for
arranging exams IAW this procedure.
11.6.4
PROCEDURE
11.6.4.1
Exam arrangement
1.
Exams are arranged IAW the approved Training Course Plan (VAECO
Form 8007) or by an order of the TCD to evaluate knowledge/ skill/
experiences. Test of Aviation English-DOCWISE (TOEFA) is arranged in
order to evaluate capability of understanding, reading and writing
Techinical Aviation English of technicians.
2.
In some cases, exam location may be outside of the TC; however, it

should meet current requirements.
3.
Methods of exam used in TC:
4.
11.6.4.2
a.
Multiple choice exam method without using of references, exam

marks are decided by percentage of right answers per total number
of questions. Pass mark is 75% after taking in to account of penalty
for exam regulations violation. For TOEFA, only the Multiple choice
exam method is applied.
b.
Other exam methods: essay question, interview or practical

assessment references can be allowed, results are decided by 10
score scale or pass/fail criteria. Pass mark is 5/10 after taking in to
account of penalty for exam regulations violation.
To arrange an exam, the Training Division/ Southern Training Division

manager assigns and supervises assessor in charge to prepare exam
materials and facilities. Exam implementation is performed IAW
procedure 11.8.
Exam failure and exam retaking

1.
Trainee can retake failed subjects for one time only. The answers of
questions in retaking exam must be different at least 75% from the first
exam.
2.
Time for exam retaking will be arranged by the Training Division/

Southern Training Division after failed trainee is reviewed by respective
instructor(s).
3.
If trainee fails the retaking exam, he/she must wait for at least 3 months
since the latest exam and report to his/her Director for registration with
Page 11.6-1

11.6 EXAM ARRANGEMENT
the HRD or TCD and will be arranged by the HRD to learn the failed
subjects and take respective exam again.
11.6.5
4.
If trainee have learned again but still failed at respective exam (both the
first exam and exam retake), he/she must report to his/her Director for
registration with the HRD or TCD and will be arranged by the HRD to
learn entire the training course for second time.
5.
If the trainee cannot pass this training course, the Company leaders will
be informed for further action.
ARCHIVES
The documents related to exam arrangement are are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.6-2

11.7
EXAM PREPARATION
11.7.1
PURPOSE
11.7 EXAM PREPARATION
This procedure stipulates regulations for exam preparation.

11.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for exam preparation activities of the TC.
11.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Training Division/ Southern Training Division and assigned assessors
are responsible for preparing exam materials and location IAW this
procedure.
11.7.4
PROCEDURE
11.7.4.1
Exam materials preparation

1.
Exam materials includes Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012)

and Question Bank (if any).
2.
The Training Division manager shall assign assessors to prepare exam

materials.
3.
Instructors who conduct a subject/ chapter of a training course are

responsible for preparation questions of that subject/ chapter. Questions
are prepared IAW. following requirements:
a.
Quantity, content and level of questions must be based on current

training course materials.
b.
Multiple choices question shall have at least 3 answers, in which

there is only one correct answer.
c.
Other questions are prepared for an assay writing, an interview and

a practice assessment. All kinds of these questions must have its
own answer attached therewith.
4.
Assessor who is assigned to prepare the Question Bank of a training

course shall collect questions from instructors of those training course
and updates to the Question Bank. Only authorized person can access
to the Question Bank.
5.
Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) are prepared based on

principles:
a.
Each exam must have at least 02 Exam Questionnaires with the

same level and number of questions but at least 75% of answers
difference.
b.
Questions are chosen from the Question Bank of the training course,
in such a way that questions stick close to knowledge/skill that
trainees have been learnt.
c.
For a multiple choice exam, number of questions in must be

correlative to training duration and stipulated from 1 to 5 questions
for each training hour.
Page 11.7-1

d.
11.7.4.2
For other exams (not multiple choice one), number of questions

must be correlative to amount of knowledge/skills/experiences to be
evaluated.
Preparation for exam implementation

1.
2.
3.
11.7.5
11.7 EXAM PREPARATION
The Training Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare all

necessary exam forms, including:
a.
Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012).
b.
Answer Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012).
c.
Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009).
d.
Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006) (applied for

TOEFA)
The Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division shall prepare all

conditions for exam as following:
a.
Exam room is tidy, well ventilated and illuminated.
b.
Equipment and materials (if any) are sufficient as required.
c.
Draft papers for examinees (if any) are sufficient as required.
If exam is implemented at a location other than the TC, the

Administrative Division/ Southern Training Division cooperate with
authorized person of that location to prepare all conditions.
ARCHIVES
The records related to exam preparation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.7-2

11.8
EXAM IMPLEMENTATION
11.8.1
PURPOSE
11.8 EXAM IMPLEMENTATION
This procedure stipulates regulations for implementing of an exam.

11.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for exam implementing activities of the TC.
11.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.

and assigned assessors are responsible for implementing an exam
arranged by the TC IAW this procedure.
2.
Examinees attend an exam arranged by the TC, are responsible for

obeying relevant regulations in this procedure.
11.8.4
PROCEDURE
11.8.4.1
Exam Implementation
1.
2.
For implementing an exam, assessors shall:

a.
Present at least 5 minutes prior to the exam and check exam room,
if exam room is not suitable for the exam, inform the Administrative
Division/ Southern Training Division Manager of non-conformity for
further actions.
b.
Register examinees and check staff ID, arrange examinees in exam

room, ensure distance between examinees as far as required.
c.
Make examinees acknowledge all related regulations.
d.
Deliver Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) and Answer

Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012) to examinees in such a principle
that adjacent examinees do not receive the same Exam Question
(VAECO Form 8010/8012).
e.
Manage exam time, always present in exam room to supervise

examinees; not permit unauthorized people to enter exam room.
Keep strictly exam discipline, deal with exam regulation violated
cases, and record to the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009).
f.
Ensure examinees sign and fill all information to training courses

forms before leaving exam room.
g.
After exam completion, tidy up, return exam room to original status
After time for exam/preparation is over, assessors shall:

a.
Collect all the Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012), Answer

Sheets (VAECO Form 8011/8012), scratch paper delivered to
examinees (if any) and perform mark the exam or interview or
assessment.
b.
Summarize exam result, submit to the Training Division/ Southern

Training Division manager for review and inform to examinees.
c.
Explain examinees' questions if any.
Page 11.8-1

d.
11.8.4.2
Complete and file Exam Records IAW procedure 11.9.
Exam regulations and disciplinary measures

1.
2.
Assessors implementing an exam arranged by the TC should:

a.
b.
An assessor is consider as violated against exam regulations if:

he/she discloses the exam questions/ answers, leaves his/her
assigned position during exam time, helps examinees to do exam,
ignores examinees violation cases.
c.
If an assessor is detected to violate exam regulation, he/she will be

suspended or revoked his/her assessor approval.
Examinees attend an exam arranged by the TC should:

a.
b.
Present at exam room on time. If trainee is late for exam up to 5

minutes, he/she will be not permitted to attend the exam.
c.
Obey all requirements of assessors, exam and current regulations.

When having questions, examinees shall ask the assessor and only
talk if permitted by the assessor.
d.
Sign and fill full information in all exam forms as required.
e.
An examinee is consider as violated against exam regulations if

he/she discusses or makes noises or lets his/her cell phone rings.
For this case: he/she will be warned and marked as the first violation
by the assessor's signature onto the respective column of the
f.
If examinee continues violation above article for second time, he/she

will be marked as the second violation by the assessor's signature
onto the respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form
8009). For this case: his/her exam result will be deducted 10% of
scores of each chapter or subject of the exam.
g.
Using electronic devices (including cell phone) in exam room or

marking on the Exam Questions (VAECO Form 8010/8012) by
examinee are not permitted in any cases, if examinee do so his/her
exam result will be deducted 50% of scores of each chapter or
subject of the exam.
h.
If examinee continues violation above article for third time or brings

unauthorized reference documents into exam room or uses cell
phone/electronic devices or looks at answer sheet of other
examinee, he/she will be marked onto his/her answer sheet and the
respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). For
this case: his/her exam result will be deducted 100% of scores of
each chapter or subject of the exam and recorded into a Training
Record.
i.
If examinee refuses to conform to assessors' orders or cheats in the

exam, he/she will be suspended from the exam and marked onto the
Page 11.8-2

respective column of the Minutes of Exam (VAECO Form 8009). For

this case: he/she will be cancelled all exam results of the training
course, is expelled from the training course, recorded in a Training
Record, forbidden to attend any training course or exam arranged by
the TC for 12 months. If violated examinee is VAECO staff, he/she
will be applied additional disciplinary measures as regulated. An
examinee is consider cheat if he/she uses unauthorized reference
documents in exam room or copies answer sheet of other examinee
or let other examinee copies his/her answer sheet.
j.
11.8.5
If an exam that have numerous of exam regulation violated cases,

the Training Division manager shall assess level of violating and
reports to the TCD for cancellation of the exam result if necessary.
ARCHIVES
The records related to exam implementation are kept IAW SOP 11.9.
Page 11.8-3

11.9 TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE
11.9
TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE
11.9.1
PURPOSE
This procedure stipulates regulations of completion and storage of Training
Records.
11.9.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for training record managing activities of the TC.
11.9.3
RESPONSIBILITY
responsible for completing and storing Training Records IAW this procedure.
11.9.4
PROCEDURE
11.9.4.1
Training Records completion

1.
Training Records includes:

a.
Training Course Records.
b.
Exam (including TOEFA) Records.
2.

is responsible for collecting/recording information/documents concerned
with courses/exams in Training Records.
3.
For training courses/exams performed in Ho Chi Minh City Satellite

Facility, after collecting/recording, the Southern Training Division shall
send the original Training Record to the Training Division for storage;
another copy can be kept at the Southern Training Division for reference
purpose.
4.
For outsourcing training courses, after collecting and recording, the

Administrative Division shall send the original Training Record to the
Training Division for storage, other copy can be kept at the
Administrative Division for reference purpose.
5.
Information/documents listed below are collected and recorded in

Training Records, except for section b, c, d, e, f which are NOT applied
to outsourcing training courses.
6.
a.
Title, code and date of performed training course.
b.
Training Course Critique (VAECO Form 8005), if any
c.
Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006).
d.
Training Course Plan (VAECO Form 8007).
e.
Training Attendance Record (VAECO Form 8008).
f.
Exam Result (VAECO Form 8013)
g.
Training Course Report (VAECO Form 8014)
h.
All documents concerned with training course, if any.
Information listed below are collected and recorded in Exam Record:
Page 11.9-1

11.9.4.2
11.9 TRAINING RECORDS COMPLETION AND STORAGE
a.
Title, code and date of performed training course or title, code and
date of performed exam (applied for TOEFA Records).
b.
c.
Exam Question (VAECO Form 8010/8012).
d.
Exam Answers (VAECO Form 8011/8012) of examinees.
e.
Participant Data Collection (VAECO Form 8006), TOEFA Report

(VAECO Form 8004) (applied for TOEFA Record).
f.
All documents concerned with performed exam or TOEFA, if any.
Training Records storage

1.
The Training Division stores all Training Records of training courses,

which has been performed by the TC, as hard-copy and/or soft-copy (if
any). Training Records are kept at least 5 years since the training course
completion.
2.
Storage of Training Course Records:

a.
Training Course Records are stored in cabinet and arranged to files

with label of group and time frame of performed training courses.
b.
Each Training Course Record file consists of:

A list of Training Course Records kept in the file.
Training Records kept separately and in a time orderly manner.
Each record has all information/documents as described in item
5, section 11.9.4.1 above.
3.
Storage of Exam Records:

a.
Exam Records are stored in file cabinets and arranged to files with
label of title and time frame of performed training courses. TOEFA
Records are stored in specified file cabinets.
b.
Each Exam Record file consists of:

A list of Exam/TOEFA Records kept in the file.
Exam/TOEFA Records kept separately and in a time orderly
manner. Each record has all information/documents as described
in item 6, section 11.9.4.1 above.
4.
The training/ examination records and related documents are kept in

Training Course Record room and Exam Record room of Training
Division of the TC.
Page 11.9-2

11.10 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION
11.10
ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION
11.10.1
PURPOSE
This procedure stipulates regulations for issuance of certificates/ attestations.
11.10.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for certificate/ attestation issuing activities of the
TC.
11.10.3
11.10.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Training Division/ Southern Training Division Manager are

responsible for reporting training course/TOEFA result IAW this
procedure.
2.
The TCD is responsible for issuing Certificates/Attestations (VAECO

Form 8001/8002/8003) IAW this procedure.
PROCEDURE
11.10.4.1 Issuance of certificates/ attestations for Training courses.

1.
After a training course at the TC has been accomplished, the Training

Division/ Southern Training Division prepares a Training Course Report
(VAECO Form 8014), prints Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form
8001/8002) (if any), submits to the Training Division manager for review
and then sends to the TCD.
2.
Based on the Training Division manager suggestion and Training Course

Report, the TCD signs and issues Certificates/Attestations (VAECO
Form 8001/8002) (if any) for trainees that are qualified as completion of
the training course.
3.
Trainees are qualified as completion of the training course and can

receive Certificates/Attestations (VAECO Form 8001/8002) depending
on requirements of the Training Course Curriculum (VAECO Form 8015),
if he/she:
a.
For the training course is arranged on classroom:

is not expelled from the training course, and
Attends at least 90% of training duration, and
Passes all exams (including retaking exam) required by the
training course.
b.
For the training course is arranged on the workshop/aircraft

(practical/task training):
Is not expelled from the training course, and
Attends at least 90% of training duration, and
Performs required tasks in related practical/task training record
and is confirmed by instructors of completion of those tasks.
c.
For the training course is arranged on website (online):
Page 11.10-1

11.10 ISSUANCE OF CERTIFICATE/ ATTESTATION
Does not be expelled from the training course, and

Read and understand training document of course, which is post
on the Company website, and
Confirm on the read and sign form of the training course, which
is post on the Company website.
4.
If one of the mentioned requirements is not met trainees will not be

qualified as completion of the training course and will not receive a
Certificate/Attestation (VAECO Form 8001/8002).
5.
If a trainee only completes a part of the training course and have get
permission of the TCD, his/her training result can be reserved for 12
months from date of training course complete. Before the end of
reserved period, he/she must register with the Training Division/
Southern Training Division to learn remaining part of the training course.
If all the requirements of the training course are met, he/she will be
qualified as completion of the training course and can receive a
Certificate/Attestation (VAECO Form 8001/8002).
11.10.4.2 Issuance of certificates for TOEFA
11.10.5
1.
After a TOEFA at the TC has been accomplished, the Training Division/

Southern Training Division prepares a TOEFA Report (VAECO Form
8004), prints Certificates of Achievement (VAECO Form 8003) (if any),
submits to the Training Division manager for review and then sends to
the TCD.
2.
Based on the Training Division manager suggestion and TOEFA

Records, the TCD signs and issues Certificates of Achievement (VAECO
Form 8003) (if any) for examinees that are qualified as pass the exam.
3.
The examinee taking the TOEFA will receive a Certificates of

Achievement (VAECO Form 8003) respective with score after pass the
exam and a have a validation period of 5 years since exam date.
ARCHIVES
The original Certificates/ Attestations are sent to HRD.
The copy of Certificates/ Attestations shall be kept at Training Division of the
TC at least 5 years since the training course completion.
Page 11.10-2

11.11
TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW
11.11.1
PURPOSE
11.11 TRAINING ACTIVITIES REVIEW
This procedure stipulates the regulations for training activities review.

11.11.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for training activities reviewing of the TC.
11.11.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Training Division manager is responsible for reviewing training activities
of the TC IAW this procedure.
11.11.4
PROCEDURE
1.
11.11.5
Upon receiving the non-conformity report/ recommendations from audits

of the Authorities/ QAD/ Customer or poor feedback from Instructors/
Examiner/ Trainees/ Examinees (via the Training course critique-VAECO
Form 8005 or equivalent) or the requirement of the TCD, the Training
Division manager is responsible for review effective training activities of
TC including, but not limited to:
a.
TC procedures and obedience to the procedures of divisions and

personal via training activities.
b.
Training List (VAECO Form 8017).
c.
Instructor Roster (VAECO Form 8018).
d.
Training Records.
e.
Training/exam materials.
f.
The condition of facilities, classroom/workshop and equipment.
2.
After review, the Training Division manager makes a review report to

define the cause to influence the quality and effect of training activities at
the TC and send to the TCD.
3.
Based on the review report of the Training Division manager, the TCD
will consider and direct the related division/personnel to implement all
corrective actions for improving the quality of the training activities in the
TC including procedures amendment suggestion (if necessary).
ARCHIVES
The records related to training review activities are kept at Training Division
of the TC at least 5 years after reviewing completion.
Page 11.11-1

PART 12 PROCEDURES FOR VNA
PART 12
SPECIFIC PROCEDURES
FOR VNA
Page 12-1

12.1 AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION
12.1
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION
12.1.1
PURPOSE
To establish the procedure and requirements for evaluating and
implementing of Airworthiness Directive and Mandatory/ Alert SB (hereafter
called AD) on VNA aircrafts and components.
12.1.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for evaluating, implementing of AD on VNA
aircrafts and components
12.1.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.

a.
controlling, evaluating and raising orders to implement all ADs

related to VNA aircrafts, VNA components.
b.
issuing WO to implement AD.
2.
Director of assigned maintenance center is responsible for implementing

AD.
3.
Director of LGD is responsible for supplying components/ material/ Toolequipment for implementing AD on-wing and ensuring all ADs applicable
to VNA components and in stock or shop visit (outside VAECO) shall be
implemented.
4.
Director of QAD is responsible for monitoring AD compliance to ensure

airworthiness of VNA aircrafts, VNA components.
12.1.4
PROCEDURES
12.1.4.1
AD acquisition
12.1.4.2
1.
The EGD delegates the qualified engineering staff to check the EASAs
website, FAAs website on a daily basis to ensure the on time receiving
of emergency ADs.
2.
Qualified engineering staff acquires the A320/A321/A330, B777, F70 and

ATR72 ADs from the following sources:
a.
EASA: EGD downloads the ADs issued by EASA from its website
once every two weeks;
b.
FAA: EGD downloads the ADs issued by FAA from its website once
every two weeks.
AD preliminary evaluation and registration

After the acquisition of a new AD, the qualified engineering staff shall:
1.
Preliminarily evaluates that AD to determine whether it is:

a.
Applicable to VNA aircraft; or
b.
Applicable to engines and APUs installed on the above aircraft; or
c.
Applicable to aircraft appliances or equipment;
Page 12.1-1

2.
12.1.4.3
12.1.4.4
Register that AD on the LIST OF AD if:

a.
It is applicable to VNA aircraft, engines, components; or
b.
It has not been clearly classified or its effectively has not been
determined yet.
AD detailed evaluation
1.
Newly received ADs are evaluated by filling in the Form VNA-TE-F60.
2.
Qualified engineering staff evaluates in one AD Evaluation Sheet:

a.
The ADs, which are issued by different Authorities but have the
same content/requirements.
b.
The AD issued by the authority who issues the Type Certificate is

the AD to evaluate. ADs issued by other authorities are Related
ADs;
c.
Different revisions of an AD. The latest revision is the AD to

evaluate.
3.
AD Evaluation Sheet will be revised to update information. AD Evaluation

Sheet is numbered as follows: A/C type/YYYY.XXX. In which YYYY is
year; XXX is ordinal number.
4.
Qualified engineering staff follows the following steps in AD detailed

evaluation:
a.
Determine which types of aircraft, aircraft components the AD is

applicable to;
b.
Compare these applicable aircraft, aircraft component types with the

list of VNA aircraft, aircraft components to determine which aircraft,
aircraft components the AD is applicable to;
c.
If the AD is not applicable/closed to any VNA aircraft, aircraft

components, write down the reasons and attach the proof to the
evaluation form;
d.
If the AD is applicable to VNA aircraft, aircraft components, write the

affected aircraft model/MSN and/or the affected aircraft components
P/N, S/N into Applicable to field.
Implementation of an AD applicable to aircraft, on-wing aircraft

components
1.
Qualified engineering staff shall:

a.
Determine the provisions and compliance time of the AD;
b.
Register the AD on AMASIS system:

Filling EFFECTIVITY field with A if the AD is applicable to aircraft;
Filling effectively field with P if the AD is applicable to on-wing
aircraft component.
c.
Issue Engineering Order (EO) to comply with the requirements of the

AD;
Page 12.1-2

d.
Issue EO Spare & Tool List (ESTL VAECO Form 3010) to order
necessary spare parts, materials and tools; The necessary spare
parts, materials and tools used for each EO shall be entered in
AMASIS.
e.
Update the EO, ESTL number into the correspondent AD Evaluation

Sheet, the list of ADs for airframe, engine, equipment, and the
AMASIS system;
f.
Submit AD Evaluation Sheet, EO and ESTL to EG director or

authorized personnel for approval;
g.
Forward the approved EO and ESTL to Maintenance Planning

Division for monitoring;
h.
If an AD requests to update operational manual and AMS:

Send a request to update documents to Technical Dept. of VNA
or OCC. Clearly indicate the compliance time of the AD and
request of the official feedback after completing that document;
Update the related information into the list of AD after receiving
the official feedback from VNA.
2.
12.1.4.5
EGD shall:
a.
Schedule to perform an EO for each aircraft, on-wing component;
b.
Order spares, materials and tooling;
c.
Issue WO and send to MCC for deployment.
3.
Accomplishment of the EO linked to ADs is mandatory and must be on

time as authoritys requirements.
4.
Results of AD accomplishment will be reported to VNA by EGD. In case

an AD cannot be performed, MCC shall notify to EGD to work out
appropriate solutions.
Implementation of an AD applicable to engines, aircraft equipment in

store or in shop visit
1.
Qualified engineering staff shall

a.
Issue and send AD/SB REQUISITION (VAECO Form 3011) sent to

LGD, including:
Reference of requested AD;
List of affected engines, aircraft equipment;
Method of compliance and due date, which may be: at the next
shop visit, at shop visit when part exposed or send to shop before
the deadline.
b.
2.
Update the AD/SB Requisition reference into the correspondent AD

Evaluation Sheet, the list of ADs for airframe, engine, equipment,
and the AMASIS system;
If implementing of an AD is out of VAECO capability, LGD shall
Page 12.1-3

12.1.5
a.
Notify to VNA to work out appropriate solutions,
b.
Send the engines, aircraft equipment to the approved agency follow

order from VNA.
3.
If implementing of an AD is within the VAECO capability, LGD shall issue

a MAINTENANCE/ REPAIR REQUEST (IN-HOUSE REPAIR) (VAECO
Form 4002) to appropriate maintenance center.
4.
The assigned maintenance center shall arrange to complete the order

and report abnormalities to LGD.
ARCHIVES
1.
AD Evaluation Sheets are archived in EGD for at least 2 years after

aircraft out of service.
2.
List of ADs is located in VAECO ENGINEERING folder in the host

computer of EGD. The printed copy of this list is archived for individual
aircraft and is regularly updated.
Page 12.1-4

12.2 SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT
12.2
SERVICE BULLETIN (SB) EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT
12.2.1
PURPOSE
To establish the procedure and requirements
implementing SB on VNA aircrafts and components.
12.2.2
for
evaluating
and
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for evaluating, implementing of SB on VNA aircrafts
and components
12.2.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of EGD is responsible for controlling, evaluating, raising EO,

scheduling to implement applicable SB to VNA aircrafts, VNA
components.
2.
Director of maintenance center is responsible for implementing SB.
3.
Director of LGD is responsible for supplying components/ material/ Toolequipment for implementing SB on-wing and ensuring all SB applicable
to VNA components in stock or shop visit (outside VAECO) shall be
implemented.
4.
Director of QAD is responsible for monitoring SB implementation.
12.2.4
PROCEDURES
12.2.4.1
SB acquisition
1.
2.
12.2.4.2
AD/SB Control Team Leader acquires SBs from the following sources:
a.
VNA Library;
b.
Manufacturers, directly or through their website.
AD/SB Control Team Leader updates the List of New SBs whenever
acquires new SBs.
SB preliminary evaluation
1.
The AD/SB Control Team Leader sort the new SBs and forward them to
applicable team of Engineering Division.
2.
Qualified engineering staff preliminary evaluates the new SBs following

the steps below:
a.
Compare the EFFECTIVITY of the SB to the list of VNA aircraft,

aircraft components to determine which aircraft, aircraft components
are affected by the SB;
b.
Classify SBs into the following categories:

Not Applicable (N/A);
Open;
Closed.
c.
Fill in and send the SB Preliminary Evaluation Sheet (VAECO Form

3024) to AD/SB Control Team leader.
Page 12.2-1

12.2.4.3
12.2.4.4
SB detailed evaluation
1.
The SBs which classified N/A is not necessary for detailed evaluation.
2.
Qualified engineering staff shall define the necessity and advantages of

SB implementation basing on maintenance experience, Reliability
program, aircraft status, aircraft equipment status and the estimated cost
for implementation.
3.
When SB is evaluated as to be performed, qualified engineering staff

determines:
a.
The specific aircraft, aircraft components to which the SB will be

performed;
b.
Means of compliance: on-wing, at VAECO, at shop visit, or roll over

campaign within the fleet;
c.
Plan and time to implement the SB;
d.
Investment on specific materials, tool and equipment.
4.
When SB is evaluated as not to be performed (rejected), qualified

engineering staff specifies the reason of rejection.
5.
Fill all the above information and evaluation judgment in SB Evaluation

Sheet (VNA Form VNA-TE-F64) and send it to EGD Director for approval
before sending to VNA.
6.
If the SB is a new revision, determine the changes in the requirements of

SB and update the related documents if necessary.
7.
If the SB is applicable to aircraft components, send a copy of the

approved SB Evaluation Sheet to appropriate maintenance center to
examine the feasibility.
Implementation of an SB applicable to aircraft, on-wing aircraft

components
1.
After receiving the approved SB Evaluation Sheet form VNA, qualified

engineering staff shall
a.
Register the SB in AMASIS system:

Filling effectively field with A if the SB is applicable to aircraft and
with P if the SB is applicable to on-wing aircraft component
(VSB).
In case of modification links with SB applicable to aircraft, create
MOD number linked to SB. This MOD number will be closed
automatically when the SB is closed.
In case of MOD links with a VSB applicable to aircraft
component, besides updating VSB (EFFECTIVITY P), qualified
engineering staff should update the cover SB (EFFECTIVITY A)
issued by aircraft manufacturer and create MOD number linked to
this SB. MOD number (SB) will be closed manually when all the
components installed on the A/C are incorporated the VSB.
Page 12.2-2

2.
12.2.4.5
b.
Issue and get approval for EO, ESTL. EO and all spares/ materials
and equipment, tools required to perform the EO shall be entered
the AMASIS;
c.
Forward the approved EO and ESTL to Maintenance Planning

Division for monitoring.
d.
Record information in List of SBs for Aircraft and List of SBs for
Aircraft Component.
Maintenance Planning Division shall:

a.
Schedule to perform an EO for each aircraft, on-wing component;
b.
Order spares, materials and tooling;
c.
Issue and send to MCC for deployment.
3.
EGD shall monitor the SB implementation, report the result to the aircraft
manufacturer and VNA to update operational and maintenance
documents
4.
In case an SB cannot be performed in VAECO, EGD shall notify to VNA

to work out appropriate solutions.
Implementation of an SB applicable to engines, aircraft equipment in

store or in shop visit
1.
After receiving the approved VNA SB Evaluation Sheet form, qualified

engineering staff shall
a.
Issue AD/SB Requisition (VAECO Form 3011) including:

Content of SB;
List of affected engines, aircraft;
Method of compliance and related maintenance instructions.
b.
12.2.5
Send the approved AD/ SB Requisition to Logistics Department.
2.
If implementing of an SB is in VAECO capability, LGD send a copy of the

SB Evaluation and the AD/ SB Requisition to appropriate maintenance
center to implement.
3.
If implementing of an SB is out of VAECO capability, LGD shall notify

VNA to work out appropriate solutions, or send component to other
approved agency.
ARCHIVES
1.
Preliminary Evaluation sheet and SB Evaluation Sheet (Form VNA-TEF64) are archived in EGD at least two years after aircraft out of service.
2.
List of SBs for Aircraft and List of SBs for Aircraft Components are
located in VAECO ENGINEERING folder in the host computer of EGD.
3.
Evaluated SBs (paper copy) are collected by AD/SB Control Team and
send to VAECO Technical Library for archives.
Page 12.2-3

12.3 AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL
12.3
AD, SB, MOD AND EO COMPLIANCE CONTROL
12.3.1
PURPOSE
To establish the procedure and requirements for controlling of AD, SB, MOD
and EO compliance.
12.3.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling of AD, SB, MOD and EO
implementation on VNA aircrafts and components
12.3.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
EGD director is responsible for monitoring the compliance of AD, SB.
2.
LGD director is responsible for updating the AD/SB compliance of

components during shop visit into AMASIS.
12.3.4
PROCEDURES
12.3.4.1
CONTROL OF AD COMPLIANCE
1.
2.
CONTROL OF AD
COMPONNENTS
COMPLIANCE
FOR
AIRCRAFT,
ON-WING
a.
When EO is closed, the linked AD will be automatically closed in

AMASIS
b.
EGD shall monitor status of the applicable AD in AMASIS. For the

AD which still OPEN in AMASIS, EGD should monthly check and
adjust the AD schedule (if necessary) in order to ensure the AD will
be complied on time.
c.
Monthly, EGD should send the list of ADs (applied to VNA aircraft) to
inform VNA Technical Department the compliance status.
CONTROL OF AD COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS

DURING SHOP VISIT
a.
During the incoming inspection of components, store inspector

should make sure that the requirement of the AD/SB REQUISITION
(VAECO Form 3011) affected to that components was complied
with.
b.
For the AD was complied, store inspector shall update AD status in

AMASIS as follow:
Create an WO from AD schedule.
Close WO with Complied date, Flight hours, Flight Cycles of
components at compliance time.
c.
For the components which the AD are still OPEN, EGD re-evaluate
schedule. If necessary, request LGD adjust schedule in order to
ensure the AD will be complied on time for all components.
d.
Monthly, EGD send the list of ADs for component to inform VNA
Technical Department the compliance status.
Page 12.3-1

e.
12.3.4.2
The List of ADs needed pay attention when inspecting/receiving

engines, components is posted in VAECO website. The list is
updated when there is a new concerned AD in order to help store
inspectors define the airworthiness of components during
acceptance.
CONTROL OF SB COMPLIANCE
1.
2.
CONTROL OF
COMPONENT
SB
COMPLIANCE
FOR
AIRCRAFT,
ON-WING
a.
When EO is closed, the linked SB will be automatically closed in

AMASIS.
b.
EGD shall monitor status of the applicable SB in AMASIS.
c.
For the SB which still OPEN in AMASIS, EGD shall monthly check
and adjust schedule if necessary.
d.
Monthly, the List of SBs was performed is sent to VNA Technical

Department to inform compliance status.
CONTROL OF SB COMPLIANCE FOR AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS

DURING SHOP VISIT
a.
During the incoming inspection of components, store inspector

should make sure that the requirement of the AD/SB REQUISITION
(VAECO Form 3011) affected to that components was complied with
in the shop. One copy of the shop report should be sent to EGD for
updating SB status in AMASIS.
b.
For the SB was complied, store inspector shall update SB status in

AMASIS as follow:
Create an WO from SB schedule.
Close WO with Complied date, Flight hours, Flight Cycles of
components at compliance time.
c.
12.3.4.3
For the components which the SB are still OPEN, re-evaluate and
request LGD to adjust schedule if necessary.
CONTROL OF MODIFICATIONS
1.
For the modifications linked with aircraft SB, after SB has been closed in
AMASIS, modification will be automatically closed.
2.
For the modifications linked with VSB applicable to aircraft components,

after VSB has been carried out on all the installed component, qualified
engineering staff closes the related aircraft SBs by creating and closing
WO with reference to VSB. Modification will be automatically closed in
AMASIS after aircraft SB is closed.
3.
Qualified Engineering staff informs AD/ SB control Team Leader the

status of modification.
4.
AD/ SB control Team Leader informs status of modification to

manufacture in order to update maintenance data.
Page 12.3-2

12.3.4.4
CONTROL OF EO COMPLIANCE
EGD is responsible to monitor the compliance of EO IAW the specified
deadline. The compliance of EO for each A/C is updated and controlled in
AMASIS.
Page 12.3-3

12.4
ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING
12.4.1
PURPOSE
12.4 ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING
To monitor the condition of Engines installed on VNA aircrafts.

12.4.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for VNA engines.
12.4.3
RESPONSIBILITY
The Director of EGD is responsible for implementing of this procedure.
12.4.4
PROCEDURES
12.4.4.1
ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING PROGRAM

Currently, VNA has contracts with the engine manufacturers for the following
Engine condition monitoring (ECM) programs:
12.4.4.2
1.
Diagnostic website for GE engines
2.
ADEM website for IAE and PW engines.
GATHERING ENGINE DATA

1.
2.
12.4.4.3
12.4.4.4
The engine operation data is gathered by Aircraft DMU (Data

Management Unit) system and generated into REPORTS:
a.
Engine Cruise Report during cruise phase.
b.
Engine Take off report during takeoff phase.
These REPORTS are printed automatically after each flight or sent

automatically via ACARS/ATSU system to the server in the airline
ground station. These data are forwarded to engine manufacturers for
processing.
UPDATE DATA INTO ECM PROGRAM and EVALUATE ENGINE

OPERATION CONDITION
1.
By the contracts, engine manufacturers are responsible for update data

to ECM program and evaluate the engine operation condition.
2.
When an alert level or abnormal trend (shift) is found, engine

manufacturer will issue a maintenance request to VNA and EGD by Email.
3.
When receipt a maintenance request, EGD reviews the data and

launches the adequate actions (by EO/ER) to carry out the
recommendation of the manufacturer.
4.
At interval depend on the engine type, qualified engineer of EGD shall

trigger the ECTM report and evaluate the engine health. The adequate
actions (by EO/ER) should be launched if any abnormal shift is
detected.
WEEKLY REPORT AND BACK UP ENGINE DATA BASE

1.
The weekly report (presented by EGTM and SLOATL parameter, engine

on-watch list) shall be generated every Friday in designed forms. These
Page 12.4-1

12.4 ENGINE CONDITION MONITORING
reports are also archived in PDF file and numbered in according to the
week order.
2.
The weekly report will be sent to VNA Technical department.
3.
Engine manufacturers are responsible for backing-up the data.
Page 12.4-2

12.5 ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF A/C CONFIG
12.5
ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION
12.5.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to set up and control of aircraft configuration
(KARDEX) in AMASIS system for VNA.
12.5.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for all VNA aircraft.
12.5.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.

a.
Creating structure of the A/C, assembly/subassembly in AMASIS

IAW the definition of VNA.
b.
Entering all control required components installed on the newly

received A/C, engine, APU and landing gear in to AMASIS.
c.
Updating (adding/ removing/ replacing) sub-assemblies/ components

of engine assemblies, landing gear assemblies after shop visits.
2.
RTPD is responsible for removing/ installing the components during the

ramp maintenance.
3.
BTPD is responsible for removing/ installing the components during the

base maintenance.
12.5.4
PROCEDURES
12.5.4.1
CREATE KARDEX STRUCTURE

1.
For a new Aircraft configuration, Technical Department of VNA shall

establish a KARDEX structure.
2.
Based on KARDEX structure established by Technical Department of

VNA, EGD shall updated it into AMASIS.
3.
KARDEX structure of aircraft is built as follows:
4.
a.
Create equipment Reference Card.
b.
Create assemblies structure.
c.
Create KARDEX structure in accordance with ATA 100 system.
d.
Create equipment position bases on aircraft structure.
Equipment position is represented by 7 digits:

a.
XX-YYYY is the position of equipment that is not belongs to any

assemblies, in which:
XX- is ATA number; YYYY- is order number of equipment in ATA;
Example: the KARDEX position of AIRCON PACK in ATA 21 is
21-0003.
b.
XXYYYKZ is the position of equipment that is belong to an

assemblies, in which:
Page 12.5-1

12.5 ESTABLISHMENT AND CONTROL OF A/C CONFIG
XX- is ATA number; YYY- is the order number of equipment in

assemblies
K- is the order number of assembly in the ATA (if in an ATA has
some assemblies)
Z- position characteristic number (left:1; center: 0; right: 2)
Example: position 3200121 is of UPPER CARDAN that is belong
to SIDE STAY assembly of Left Landing Gear, ATA 32
c.
When equipment positions are created, the following parameters

must be updated
Part number and Description of equipment.
FIN number and aircraft zone (if possible)
The structure number of assembly
12.5.4.2
INSTALL THE EQUIPMENT TO THE KARDEX POSITION

When the KARDEX structure is available, based on Aircraft Delivery
Document and the A/C Acceptance Certificate, EGD shall determine the
equipments data and input the S/N, TSN, CSN, date of installation of the
Hard time and life-limit part/ component into the KARDEX position;
12.5.4.3
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION AND ASSEMBLIES CONTROL

1.
2.
EGD shall monitor KARDEX system to detect discrepancies. The

discrepancies may be:
a.
Equipment is not installed in its position.
b.
Installed Equipment in KARDEX has P/N or S/N different from the

actual P/N and S/N on the A/C.
When the discrepancies are identified, EGD requests the related

department correction to eliminate the discrepancies.
Page 12.5-2

12.6 SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT
12.6
SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT
12.6.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to set up technical management system for new
aircraft of VNA.
12.6.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for all VNA aircraft.
12.6.3
RESPONSIBILITY
12.6.4
PROCEDURES
12.6.4.1
RESEARCH, DEFINE THE REQUIRED RESOURCES TO MAINTAN NEW

AIRCRAFT
Once VAECO is planning to maintain a new aircraft, Project Development
Manager of EGD will:
12.6.4.2
1.
Take part in defining the maintenance work scope that VAECO is

responsible for the new aircraft.
2.
Based on assigned work scope for VAECO, combine with VAC

Technical Department and contact A/C, engine manufacturer to
determine the required resources, such as:
a.
Requirements of ground support equipment and shops,
b.
Requirements of man power,
c.
Requirements of spare part, materials and specific/standard tools,
d.
Requirements of maintenance data.
3.
Evaluate the capability of VAECO and propose the investment.
4.
Forward a summarized report to EGD Director and VAECO President &

CEO
UPDATE TECHNICAL INFORMATION OF AICRAFT INTO SYSTEM

Once receiving new aircraft, System Team Leader shall carry out the
followings:
1.
Receive aircraft technical documents (Aircraft delivery document, AD/SB

list, Mod List, Structure Repair Document) from operator.
2.
Set up AD/SB monitoring system,
3.
Set up ECM system for engines,
4.
Establish a control system of structure repair,
5.
Establish a control system of Loadable software on the A/C,
6.
Create aircraft structure into AMASIS system.
7.
Inform LPD to add on-wing the component into AMASIS system.
8.
For other requirements, report to the EGD Director for solution.
Page 12.6-1

12.6.4.3
12.6 SET UP TECHNICAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR NEW AIRCRAFT
TECHNICAL DOCUMENT CONTROL

When receiving new aircraft, upon request from Project Development
Manager and Engineering Manager, Hanoi Library Leader will:
1.
Contact the Operator to establish a system of receiving and purchasing

technical document.
2.
Distribute technical document to the user as needed.
3.
Set up a technical document updating system.
Page 12.6-2

12.7 CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
12.7
CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
12.7.1
PURPOSE
To establish a procedure to monitor the system condition of VNA aircraft.
12.7.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to system condition monitoring for all VNA aircraft.
12.7.3
RESPONSIBILITY
12.7.4
PROCEDURES
12.7.4.1
EVALUATION OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM CONDITION

1.
The evaluation of aircraft system condition is carried out by relevant

team of EGD.
2.
GARTHER INFORMATION
Bi-weekly, the following information is collected for evaluation:
3.
a.
AOG reports, delay or cancellation reports, MOR reports from

maintenance centers;
b.
Post Flight Reports received from SITA, AHM, DMA;
c.
PIREPs and MAREPs in Tech Log; Information in the AMASIS

system.
d.
Defect T/S Information from maintenance centers; concessions

which are applying for the A/C.
e.
Reliability program, if available.
EVALUATION OF SYSTEM CONDITION

Based on the above information, condition of each aircraft system is
evaluated by:
4.
a.
Reliability of the system or equipment (indicate by the rate of delay,

cancellation, AOG related to system/ equipment);
b.
Repetitive defects that havent been rectified for long time;
c.
Same defects that occurs on several aircraft
IDENTIFYING OF DETERIORATIVE ROOT CAUSE

For the deteriorated systems, based on maintenance data (SIL, TFU,
OIT and SB) or recommendations from manufacturer, the reason of
deterioration shall be figure out and identical defect that may occur in the
fleet can be focused.
12.7.4.2
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TO IMPROVE THE RELIABLITY OF AIRCRAFT

SYSTEMS
1.
When the reason of system deterioration is identified, the Team Leaders

shall figure out the solution to improve the reliability of aircraft systems.
The solutions can be:
Page 12.7-1

12.7 CONDITION MONITORING OF AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
a.
Implementation of modifications.
b.
Recommendation of troubleshooting to maintenance centers.
c.
Request to inspect or replace equipment if needed to detect and

prevent defects.
d.
Request to change AMS to compromise with aircraft operation

condition.
e.
Request to increase stock level if needed.
Page 12.7-2

12.8 CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS
12.8
CONTROL OF PRELOAD REQUIREMENTS
12.8.1
PURPOSE
To ensure all necessary spare parts, materials, tools and equipment (preload
requirements) are adequate before performing of any maintenance activities.
12.8.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to prepare preload requirements for the
maintenance of VNA aircrafts.
12.8.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.

a.
Establishing and updating preload requirements to perform routine

maintenance tasks referred from AMS and CMS tasks;
b.
Determining and updating

Engineering Order (EO).
c.
Evaluating new technology/ method to perform current maintenance

works that affect the requirements of tools/ equipment and/or
spare/materials for updating in AMASIS and giving instruction/
support to all related department/ center for preparation and
application.
preload
requirements
to
perform
2.
[Deleted]
3.
Director of RMC/ BMC are responsible for determining preload

requirements for any non-routine tasks (SRO, NRC, ADD rectification) that
arising during maintenance.
4.
Director of LGD is responsible for preparing preload of spare parts and

materials.
5.
Director of CMC is responsible for:

a.
Preparing preload of tools and equipment for A/C maintenance.
b.
Determining preload requirements to maintain A/C component listed

in the applicable chapter of Capability list manuals.
12.8.4
PROCEDURE
12.8.4.1
General
1.
Spare parts/ materials, tools and equipment to perform any maintenance

activities on Aircraft/ Aircraft component should be entered in AMASIS
system.
2.
The following type are used to defined spare part/ materials, tools and
equipment required or may be required to perform a maintenance tasks in
the AMASIS:
a.
CO: material (including Oil, Fuel, Hydraulic fluid, lock wire, cloth) mandatory item.
b.
EP: non-chemical material/ spare (including seal/ filters...)

mandatory item.
Page 12.8-1

c.
TO: tool mandatory item.
d.
AR: spare as required (only need when theres defect).
e.
TA: tool as required (only need when theres defect).
Note: Mandatory item is material, spare or tool which must be used to

carry out the task (including removal/installation for access if it is
mandatory).
12.8.4.2
12.8.4.3
Definition of preload requirements

1.
For routine tasks, Maintenance planner of EGD bases on AMS and CMS
manuals and the related maintenance data such as AMM, IPC to define
the requirements of spares/ materials and tools/ equipment (preload
requirements) for each AMS and CMS tasks and enter the AMASIS.
2.
For EO, Engineering engineer bases on related maintenance data such as

AD, SB, AMM, IPC, EM to define preload requirements and enter the
AMASIS.
3.
For SRO and other defect rectification work. the assigned staff of
respective RMC/ BMC where issues SRO, NRC or raises ADD bases on
related maintenance data such as SRM, AMM, IPC to define preload
requirements and enter the AMASIS.
4.
For component maintenance follow-up sheet, the workshop engineering

staff bases on CMM and other related maintenance data to define preload
requirements and enter the AMASIS.
Preparation and update of preload requirements

1.
The Engineering engineer of EGD shall evaluate the change in

technology/ method lead to change in the requirements of tools/
equipment and/or spare/materials to perform the maintenance work and
update in AMASIS.
2.
Relevant engineering staff shall monitor the performance of issued EOs.

Whenever there is a change of spares/ materials and/or tools/ equipment
specified in relevant maintenance data such as AD, SB, AMM, SRM,
CMM, EM that affected to any opening or repeated EO, the EGD must
revise the affected EO and update the changes in the AMASIS.
3.
For WPs/ WOs issued by EGD, the Maintenance planner of EGD shall
review preload requirements if the AMS, CMS or related maintenance
data are revised then update all the changes in tools/ equipment and/ or
part/ materials in AMASIS. EGD shall re-issue lists of spares/ materials
and tools/ equipment and inform to LGD and/or respective CMC for
preparing.
4.
For WOs issued by MCC, the Maintenance planner of MCC shall review
preload requirements if the AMM, IPC and other maintenance data are
revised then update all the changes in tools/ equipment and/ or part/
materials in AMASIS. MCC shall inform all concerning changes to LGD
and/or respective CMC for preparing..
Page 12.8-2

5.
12.8.4.4
Refer to SOP 9.5.4.2 for procedure of issuance of spares/ materials to

perform the maintenance work.
Correction of preload requirements after the work completion

1.
2.
After the WP/ WO are completed, if there is a difference between

prepared spares/ materials with the real maintenance need, respective
maintenance center will report all discrepancies to MCC. The MCC shall
review WOs issued by itself and forward to EGD for review WOs/ task
cards issued by EGD:
a.
If the discrepancy is due to incorrect issuance of spares/ materials,

the MCC/ EGD will inform to LGD for correction.
b.
If the discrepancy belongs to a routine task, the correction will be

performed by the maintenance planner.
c.
If the discrepancy belongs to an opening/ repeated EO, correction will

be performed by the engineering staff.
d.
If the discrepancy belongs to a repeated SRO, EGD/ MCC will inform

respective BMC for correction.
e.
If the discrepancy belongs to a WO for ADD rectification the

correction will be performed by MCC staff in connection with the RTS
staff.
Maintenance planner of EGD shall re-issue all affected list of preload

requirements, upload on VAECO website and inform LGD and/or
respective CMC for preparing (if necessary).
Page 12.8-3

12.9 COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
12.9
COMPLIANCE OF AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
12.9.1
PURPOSE
To ensure all aircraft maintenance requirements are controlled IAW the
applicable regulation requirements.
12.9.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied to all maintenance activities on the VNA A/C.
12.9.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
The Director of EGD is responsible for controlling the AMS and CMS;
preparing and scheduling to perform work packs (WPs); issuing Work
Order to MCC for deploying..
2.
The Director of MCC is responsible for controlling the performance of all

line maintenance and other assigned WOs and scheduling to perform.
3.
The Director of RMC is responsible for performing all assigned line

maintenance and other WOs/ WPs.
4.
The Director of BMC is responsible for performing base maintenance

work packs and other assigned WOs.
12.9.4
PROCEDURE
12.9.4.1
General
1.
VAECO controls VNA aircraft maintenance requirements based on the

AMS and CMS as specified in the contract between VAECO and VNA.
2.
AMASIS system is used to control the performance of the AMS and CMS
tasks. If there is a difference between the information in AMASIS and the
paper records the information in paper records is considered as priority.
3.
The maintenance requirements in AMS and CMS are categorized as

below:
a.
Line checks,
b.
Base checks,
c.
Out-of-phase maintenance tasks (other than line checks).
4.
The line checks are defined as Pre-flight/ Transit check, Terminal/ Daily
check, Weekly check, Line check, Phase check (except A12)
5.
The base check is defined as check Phase check A12, 2A, 4A, C, 2C
6.
The Out of Phase Maintenance (OPM) requirements specified in AMS/

CMS include:
7.
a.
AMS/ CMS tasks of which the interval is different to any base

checks' interval;
b.
Tasks requested to maintain/ replace life-limit part & time-control

items (hard-time components);
The OPM maintenance requirements raised by EGD/ RMC/ BMC/ CIMC

include, but not limited to:
Page 12.9-1

12.9.4.2
a.
Engineering Orders;
b.
Structure Repair Orders;
Control of Line check and other OPM requirements performed at ramp

maintenance (line maintenance)
1.
Monthly, EGD maintenance planner must forecast all OPM requirements

for each A/C within 6 months (or equivalent flight hours and flight cycles).
The list of spares/ materials required to perform those OPM
requirements is sent to LGD for preparation.
2.
All maintenance tasks of a line check is listed in relevant AMS by the

VNA. Whenever there is a new revision of the AMS. EGD shall inform
the MCC about the effective date of new AMS. The MCC will request the
relevant RTPD for replacing the applicable Line Check forms in the
technical log book of respective A/Cs.
3.
MCC shall control all line checks (except preflight, transit and terminal/
daily checks) and all assigned OPM requirements (AMS/ CMS OPM
tasks, SROs...). EGD shall assign all OPM requirements which have
interval less than A check or equivalent (750FH/ 04MO) to MCC for
managing. EGD shall control all OPM requirements other than those
assigned to MCC and issue WO to MCC 10 days prior to the deadline for
deployment.
4.
MCC shall issue WO to perform all line checks (except line checks to be
performed every flight or daily) and managed OPM requirements with
interval more than daily. MCC shall check preload requirements and
schedule all issued or assigned WOs and send to appropriate
maintenance center for performance.
5.
Assigned TPD shall control all daily/ terminal checks and other OPM
requirements with interval not more than daily and ensure that they are
not due at outstation where does not have capability to perform.
6.
MCC shall determine which line checks and another OPM requirements
for each A/C to be entered in OPM Requirement Control Sheet (VAECO
Form 1003) and issue the prepared Control Sheet to relevant RTPD for
placing on technical log book of respective A/C.
7.
Daily, the schedule of all WOs to be performed on the following day for
appropriate maintenance center (Work For Today sheet) shall be
prepared by the MCC and send to TPD of HAN and HCM and DAD RMC
and CIMC for deployment. MCC shall ensure that all WOs are not due at
outstation where does not have capability to perform those WOs.
8.
At the shift beginning the respective RTPD shall send the daily schedule
to squad manager/ shift leader for assigning the work to maintenance
team/ staff.
9.
The RTS staff shall perform the assigned line check, WO and record in
the relevant technical log page and WO (if any) and then enter date,
technical log page number, next due and stamp in the OPM Requirement
Control Sheet (if the requirement is specified in the Control Sheet).
Page 12.9-2

10. The RTS staff shall review all line check deadlines before release the
A/C to service to ensure they have enough time for the A/C returned to
the station that can perform the due line check. The RTS staff shall
immediately notify the respective RTPD and MCC of any line checks that
could not be performed as requested due to any reason.
11. When an OPM requirement needs to be performed but there is not a WO
RTS staff shall inform to respective TPD and MCC for issuing WO for
performance.
12. Only inspection/ maintenance due to any deferred defects shall be
entered in OPM Requirement Control Sheet by the RTS staff during
ramp maintenance.
13. When an OPM Requirement is closed or raised the RTS staff shall fill in
VAECO Form 5004 (Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement Notice)
and send to MCC by hand/ fax/ scan and e-mail to assigned message
box mcc on VAECO Website.
12.9.4.3
Control of Base check and OPM requirements performed in base

maintenance
1.
The EGD shall contact VNA for the information of 4 month base check
plan, request changes to the plan if the plan is not suitable with the
VAECO and update the plan to the VAECO website.
2.
The work pack of a base check is prepared by EGD including:

a.
All tasks with respective letter check and/or routine tasks (in the
AMS/ CMS) with interval/ threshold required to perform same as the
interval of the base check.
b.
OOP maintenance requirements (EO/ SRO) with interval/ threshold

required to perform same as the interval of the base check.
3.
The maintenance planning division of EGD uploads the work pack on

VAECO website and informs the MCC for receiving. MCC will evaluate
and add additional work in to the WP before assigning the relevant
Maintenance Center to perform. The assigned BTPD must inform the
MCC whenever there is any problem occurred lead to a change of the
planned check date.
4.
The respective TPD must enter performance date and all necessary
information of each task/ WO in the AMASIS as soon as possible and no
later than 12 hours after the task/ WO is completed.
5.
If a WP or some task could not be performed due to any reason, the

respective TPD must notify MCC for further action as follows:
a.
MCC shall determine whether a task is withdrawn from the WP or

not. If the task is not due it can be withdrawn from a WP. MCC shall
control all tasks/ WO with the due date less than next A check or
equivalent and issue WO to relevant RMC at appropriate time for
performance Other tasks/ WOs will be transferred to EGD for
controlling.
Page 12.9-3

b.
6.
12.9.5
If the task is due and could not be withdrawn from the WP or whole
WP could not be performed before the deadline, the MCC shall
inform to EGD for composing variation/ concession request IAW
SOP 12.11.
When an OPM requirement is closed/ raised/ revised the respective RTS

staff fill in VAECO Form 5004 (Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement
Notice) and send to respective TPD for summary and forwarding to MCC
via message box mcc on VAECO Website. MCC shall create new OPM
Control Sheets and send to the TPD for printing out and replacing the old
one keeping in the technical log book when A/C is released to service.
ARCHIVE
The Out-Of-Phase Maintenance Requirement Control Sheets are removed
from the Technical Log book when a next base check of the A/C is performed
and kept in the respective work package.
Page 12.9-4

12.10 CONTROL OF MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN AMASIS
12.10
CONTROL OF MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN AMASIS
12.10.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the information of maintenance activities and spares is updated
into AMASIS adequately, accurately and in time IAW VAECO and VNA
requirements.
12.10.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling maintenance activities and spares
information of VNA aircraft and component in AMASIS.
12.10.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
12.10.4
EGD Director is responsible for:

a.
Cooperating with VNA to establish the VAECO computer network

system, including software, connections to AMASIS to support
maintenance information control;
b.
Cooperating with VNA Technical Department to define the

appropriate authorized functions of VAECO staff.
c.
Setting up the monitoring system and maintaining to ensure stable

operation of the VAECO computer network system.
Director of departments/ centers are responsible for:

a.
Ensuring that only authorized staffs are update the AMASIS;
b.
Ensuring that maintenance and spare information is updated

adequately, accurately and timely into AMASIS IAW VAECO and
VNA requirements;
PROCEDURE
12.10.4.1 General
VAECO utilizes AMASIS of VNA to support maintenance operation
information control.
1.
The server of AMASIS is located at Aviation Informatics &

Telecommunication Joint Stock Company (AITS). AITS is responsible for
maintaining, developing and ensuring safe operation of the whole system
in VNA.
2.
AMASIS combines several Modules, which are used to support

maintenance operation control of aircraft and aircraft components as
follows:
a.
Controlling aircraft maintenance schedule;
b.
Keeping track of aircraft flight hours, flight cycles and maintenance

information in the Technical Log;
c.
Controlling removal/ installation of aircraft components, aircraft

configurations, landing gears, engines, APU and life limit parts;
d.
Controlling materials and spare parts, tools and equipment in store,

stock level etc;
Page 12.10-1

e.
3.
Controlling the implementation of ADs and SBs.
AMASIS data are daily backed up by AITS .
12.10.4.2 Updating and processing maintenance information in AMASIS

1.
Each department/ center is responsible for updating and processing

maintenance information in each MODULE of AMASIS according to
authorized functions.
2.
EGD shall
a.
Enter information about ADs, SBs, EOs, AOTs applied for VNA
aircraft/ aircraft components into AMASIS, including reference
numbers, titles, due dates, manpower, requirements of tools/
equipment and spare parts/ materials, and related information.
b.
Set up configurations of KARDEX for each aircraft and assemblies.
c.
Control aircraft configurations and update information of subassemblies/ components into AMASIS.
d.
Update information of maintenance activities and close Work Orders

after finishing Work packs performed by other maintenance
organizations contracted with VNA.
e.
Update the requirements of materials and spare parts, tools and

equipment required for carrying out task cards specified in the AMS,
CMS.
3.
MCC shall issue WO in AMASIS to assign a maintenance work (OPM

requirements and ADD rectification) to appropriate maintenance center
and control all opened WOs to ensure that they are performed as
schedule.
4.
LGD shall
a.
Update the information of approved Suppliers, including: Name,

address, provided services
b.
Enter the information of materials and spare parts to be stored,

including: part number/ serial number, quantity, shelf time, inspection
date, overhaul, certificate number into AMASIS basing on attached
component documents and lists of maintenance required
components that are issued by EGD. Update the stock of materials
and spare parts after issuing materials and spare parts for
maintenance/ production.
c.
Specify additional work and WO such as implements of ADs,

modifications and other technical recommendations when issuing
repair order.
d.
Update the implements of AD, SB.
e.
Update sufficient information such as supplier name, priority,

delivery date, cost when issuing purchase order.
Page 12.10-2

f.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Update information such as part number, serial number, quantity,

date, time, flight number if delivering materials/ spares to third
partner.
BMC shall
a.
Update information of components installed on aircraft during base

maintenance.
b.
Update information of maintenance task/ WO performance and close

WO/ WP after completion.
c.
Update information of Structure Repair Order including: reference

number, work description, due date, required manpower, tools and
equipment, materials/ spare parts and other related information.
d.
Update parts/ materials used for component maintenance (as

workshop procedures). Close Follow-up sheet and reset the
accumulated times/ cycles/ days corresponding to the work
performed on the component which are managed in AMASIS after
maintenance completion.
RMC shall
a.
Daily update information of route, flight time, landing cycle, engine oil
uplift and fuel uplift for each flight
b.
Update information of aircraft component repair/ replacement.
c.
Update information of defect rectification and Out-Of-Phase task

performance. Close WO/ WP after accomplishing.
CMC shall
a.
Update parts/ materials used for component maintenance/ repair.

Close Follow-up sheet and reset the accumulated times/ cycles/
days corresponding to the work performed on the component which
are managed in AMASIS after maintenance/ repair completion.
b.
Update information of status, quantity, location, borrowing of specific

tools and equipment.
CIMC shall
a.
Issue WO in AMASIS to perform a cabin interior/ IFE work.
b.
Update parts/ materials used for component maintenance (as

workshop procedures). Close Follow-up sheet and reset the
accumulated times/ cycles/ days corresponding to the work
performed on the component which are managed in AMASIS after
maintenance completion
The AMASIS user shall ensure that the information updated in AMASIS
is adequate and accurate as specified in the maintenance record.
Page 12.10-3

12.11 VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL
12.11
VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL
12.11.1
PURPOSE
To establish the procedure for proposing and controlling variation/
concession for VNA A/C.
12.11.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for proposing and controlling of variation/
concession in maintenance for VNA A/C.
12.11.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
12.11.4
EGD is responsible for:

a.
proposing a variation to extend the time interval in AMS, CMS.
b.
proposing a concession for deviation from current approved/

accepted maintenance data
2.
Director of MCC is responsible for proposing the need for concession to

extend the rectification due date of ADDs except cabin interior/ IFE
defects.
3.
Director of CIMC is responsible for proposing the need for concession to

extend the rectification due date of cabin interior/ IFE ADDs.
4.
Director of QAD is responsible for assessing the necessary of

concession and forwarding request to VNA for approval.
PROCEDURES
12.11.4.1 Variation/ concession request

12.11.4.1.1 Variation for maintenance task cannot be completed within AMS, CMS
time limit.
1.
If task(s) cannot be completed within AMS time limit caused by VAECO,

the EGD shall:
a.
Negotiate with VNA to maintenance re-scheduling.
b.
Create and send the VARIATION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSDAIR 042) associated with supporting documents to the Safety
Division of QAD, include but not limited to:
Spare part/ tool confirmation,
Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023),
Purchase Order of LGD
Aircraft current status: flight hours, flight/engine cycle,
Expected tasks performing date.
c.
2.
Make the plan for tasks performing after concession approved.
Safety Division manager confirms correct information then send the

Variation Request and associated documentations to VNA MOC division
for further action.
Page 12.11-1

12.11.4.1.2 Concession for extending the ADD time limit

1.
If an cabin interior/ IFE ADD can not be rectified on time which caused
by VAECO, CIMC shall
a.
Inform VNA MOC the need for concession and get documented
request (Such as SITA, Fax, Email).
b.
Create and send the CONCESSION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSDAIR 040) associated with supporting documentations to the QC HAN
Division, include but not limited to:
Spare part information confirmation provided by LGD,
Equipment/ tool information confirmation provided by CMC,
Intended action and Troubleshooting have been carried out,
Aircraft current status: flight hours, flight/engine cycle, quantity
the outstanding ADD type B,
Expected rectification date
2.
If an ADD other than the one mentioned in para. 1. above can not be
rectified on time caused by VAECO, MCC shall
a.
Inform to VNA about the need of a concession and get documented

request (Such as SITA, Fax, Email) from the MOC of VNA for
creating a Concession Request.
b.
Create and send the CONCESSION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSDAIR 040) associated with supporting documentations to the QC HAN
Spare part information confirmation provided by LGD
Equipment/ tool information confirmation provided by CMC,
Intended action and Troubleshooting have been carried out,
Aircraft current status: flight hours, flight/engine cycle, quantity
the outstanding ADD type B,
Expected rectification date.
c.
3.
Make the plan for ADD rectification on AMASIS after concession

approved.
QC Division manager confirms correct information then send the

Concession request and associated documentations to VNA MOC
division for further action.
12.11.4.1.3 Concession for deviation from current approved/ accepted maintenance

data.
1.
EGD shall
Page 12.11-2

a.
Inform to VNA about the need of a concession and get a

documented request (Such as SITA, Fax, Email) from the MOC of
VNA for creating a Concession Request.
b.
Create and send CONCESSION REQUEST (Form CAAV/FSSD-AIR

040) associated with supporting documentations to the relevant QC
Proposed solutions: Design drawings, working instruction or
technical procedure
Related document/ letter from manufacturer, if any
2.
QC Division manager evaluates the proposed solution, confirms correct

information then send the Concession Request and associated
documentations to VNA MOC division for further action.
12.11.4.2 Variation/ concession condition and compliance control
12.11.5
1.
After receiving the approved concession for an ADD, approved variation

for letter check and for emergency equipment in EEL, MCC will send a
copy of such concession/variation to the appropriate maintenance center
to put in the technical log book of the affected aircraft.
2.
MCC shall send to CIMC the approved concession raised by CIMC for
controlling.
3.
MCC shall send to EGD the approved variation/ concession of the WP/
OPM requirements under controlled by EGD for controlling.
4.
MCC, CIMC control the condition and time limits of the approved
concessions on AMASIS by:
a.
Updating information of concession to AMASIS.
b.
Making plan for the ADD rectification before the concession deadline
and follow-up.
ARCHIVES
1.
The original of the approved variation/ concession is archived by VNA.
2.
A copy of the approved variation and maintenance data concession are

archived at EGD at least one year since close date.
3.
A copy of the approved ADD concession is archived at MCC, CIMC at

least one year since close date.
Page 12.11-3

12.12
CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT
12.12.1
PURPOSE
12.12 CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT
To control and confirm the status of an in-service component that is involved

in a defect system in compliance with applicable requirements.
12.12.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for a component removed from VNA aircraft, for
which the serviceability of the part is to be verified during trouble shooting.
12.12.3
12.12.4
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Inspection& RTS staff is responsible for sending component that need to

be held with attached necessary documents to related TPD.
2.
BTPD is responsible for transfer component need to be held to RTPD

after completing base maintenance.
3.
RTPD is responsible for:

a.
Monitoring to determine status of the hold component and returning

component to VAECO store.
b.
Keeping hold components in Hold area with storage conditions as

required by component manufacturer.
PROCEDURE
12.12.4.1 General
1.
Hold item is component removed from defective system during trouble

shooting and temporary quarantined waiting for its status to be
confirmed.
2.
To confirm status of hold item, it is replaced with other serviceable

component and monitoring result of defect rectification on relevant
system.
3.
The authorized staff shall make a decision for holding component in

following circumstances:
a.
The defect with fault message related to various components and/or

various cause. The defect rectification was carried out by fault
elimination method.
b.
Defect is intermittent fault, which is hard to confirm cause,

replacement of components have to be carried out repetitively.
c.
There is a suspicion about the reliability of replaced components.
12.12.4.2 Controlling of Hold Item

1.
When a component needed to be held, Inspection & RTS staff shall:

a.
Remove component from aircraft IAW. related AMM,
b.
Perform component preservation and packaging as required,
c.
Complete and attach Hold Item Tag (VAECO Form 0022) to the
component, then sends component to related RTPD/ BTPD. The
Page 12.12-1

12.12 CONTROL OF HOLD COMPONENT
right hand side of VAECO Form 0005 shall be used to remark as

Hold item and sent to Technical Record staff together with
Technical log page.
2.
For ramp maintenance, RTPD shall register component to the monitoring

program then send the component to Hold area for keeping; The
technical record staff of respective RMC shall remove that hold item from
A/C as type 5 (cannibalization).
3.
For base maintenance, BTPD shall send the component to RTPD for
monitoring and keeping as specified in item 2 above.
4.
The RMC shall ensure the Hold components to be kept IAW conditions
required by component manufacturer.
5.
Base on related technical information provided from MCC, The hold item
will be monitored by RTPD as follows:
a.
Monitor the existence of defect on aircraft system related to the Hold

item;
b.
Confirm status of Hold item:

The Hold item is confirmed unserviceable if the defect is not
recurred in minimum of 3 flights but not excess 3 flight days.
The Hold item is considered serviceable if the defect is recurred
in minimum of 3 flights but not excess 3 flight days.
c.
Return the component right after hold period (not later than 3 hours
since the status is confirmed).
12.12.4.3 Returning a component after a hold period

1.
The Inspection & RTS staff reviews information related to the Hold item
which provided by related RTPD.
2.
If the Hold item was considered serviceable, the Inspection & RTS staff
issues the Re-certified certificate (Form 5001) and sends to VAECO
store together with the completed Hold Item Tag and evidences
confirming serviceable status of component.
3.
If the Hold item was confirmed unserviceable, the Inspection & RTS staff
raises and sends Unserviceable Tag (Form 0005/ right hand portion) to
VAECO store together with the completed Hold Item Tag and evidences
confirming unserviceable status of component.
4.
LGD shall perform the incoming inspection as per specified in 9.1 or

receiving of defective component as per specified in 9.6 accordingly.
Page 12.12-2

12.13 CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS
12.13
CONTROL OF EMERGENCY EQUIPMENTS
12.13.1
PURPOSE
To ensure that status of emergency equipment installed on aircraft is valid
and controlled to meet the applicable requirements.
12.13.2
SCOPE
This procedure applies for the emergency equipment installed in the cockpit,
cabin, galleys and lavatories that have hard time limitation or life limit on the
VAECO managed aircrafts.
12.13.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
12.13.4

a.
Monitoring maintenance time limits and life limits of emergency

equipment being installed on appropriate aircraft;
b.
Issuing WO to maintain and replace the emergency equipment being

installed on appropriate aircraft.
Director of LGD is responsible for:

a.
Monitoring maintenance time limits and life limits of emergency

equipment being preserved in the stores;
b.
Tagging the Inspection tag (VAECO Form 0014) for emergency

equipment when performing incoming inspection of the emergency
equipment.
3.
Director of CMCs/ CIMC are responsible for tagging (VAECO Form

0014) on the emergency equipment after performing scheduled
inspection, maintenance specified in the maintenance data (CMM) or List
of aircraft component required maintenance (VAECO Form 1001).
4.
Directors of RMCs and BMCs are responsible for tagging (VAECO form
0014) on the emergency equipments after maintaining/ replacing
emergency equipment being installed on the A/C as specified in WO.
5.
Directors of Administration Department is responsible for tagging the

Inspection tag (VAECO Form 0014) for emergency equipment when
supplementing/ substituting medicine in the First Aid Kit.
PROCEDURE
1.
Basing on Aircraft Maintenance Schedule (AMS), the EGD creates (and

updates) the List of aircraft component required maintenance and send
to the LGD and the Maintenance Centers (this List is also uploaded in
the Technical Report of the EGD on the VAECO website).
2.
List of emergency equipment together with all work type to be tagged

with Inspection tag is enumerated in the appendix #1.
3.
For newly received A/C, basing on its delivery documents, the EGD
issues WO with information of manufacture date, maintain/ overhaul
date, next maintenance/ overhaul date and life-limit (if applicable) and
Page 12.13-1

send to the appropriate maintenance centers to complete the Inspection

Tags and stick on the appropriate emergency equipment.
4.
For the operating A/C, EGD controls maintenance deadlines and life limit
of the emergency equipment IAW intervals specified in appropriate AMS.
When issuing WO to maintain/ replace the emergency equipment the
EGD must provide information to determine the next due date of the
work performed.
5.
If an equipment has many different maintenance time limits, each

maintenance time limit will show on one Inspection tag.
6.
When performing incoming inspection of any emergency equipment

specified in Appendix 1, if any type of work has not been tag with
VAECO Inspection Tag (VAECO Form 0014), the LGD shall complete an
Inspection Tag basing on List of aircraft component required
maintenance (VAECO Form 1001) issued by the EGD. When deliver an
emergency equipment to install on the A/C, the LGD must ensure that all
necessary Inspection Tags are affixed on the equipment and all stamp/
tag/ label showing the shelf life (storage life) are removed.
7.
When checking the status of the use of emergency equipment being

installed on aircraft, the staff of Line and Base Maintenance Centers
must ensure the maintenance deadline/ Life limit specified in all
Inspection Tags are valid. If an Inspection Tag found blurred or lost the
maintenance center may request the MCC for the necessary information
to complete another tag and affixed on the equipment. In the case that
the expiry date of the equipment cannot be determined, related
equipment is considered unserviceable.
Page 12.13-2

Appendix 1: List of emergency equipment required to affix VAECO Inspection Tag

Description
Portable fire
extinguisher
Portable O2 cylinder
Portable O2 mask
Smoke hood (PBE)
First aid kit
Medical Kit
Universal Precaution
Kit (UPK)
Work type
Weight check
Hydrostatic test
Manufacture
Hydrostatic test
Manufacture
Manufacture
Medicine
supplement
Manufacture
Medical item
supplement
Replace Battery
Megaphone
Portable ELT
Infant life-vest
LGD
CMC
BMC
LGD
LGD
LGD
LGD
LGD
Administration
Dept.
LGD
Administration
Dept.
RMC or BMC
or CIMC
Manufacture
(applied for Battery LGD
inside)
Manufacture
(applied for Battery LGD
inside)
CMC
Restoration
LGD
Passenger and spare

Restoration
life-vest
Crew life-vest
Dept./ Center
Restoration
CVR, DFDR
Flashlight
Replace Battery
Tagging after maintenance

Tagging after incoming inspection
LGD
Overhaul
Replace ULB
Battery

(on ELT)
LGD
CMC
Survival kit
Crew O2 cylinder
O2 generator
Lavatory fire
extinguisher bottle

Tagging after weighing
Tagging after supplement or
replacement of medicine
Tagging after supplement or
replacement of medical item
Tagging after replacing the battery
(on Megaphone)
CMC
Hydrostatic test and

CMC
restoration
CMC
Weight check
LGD
Manufacture
LGD
Hydrostatic test
LGD
Manufacture
LGD
Slide raft
Remark

CMC
LGD
LGD
RMC or BMC
RMC or BMC
or CIMC

(on CVR or DFDR)
Tagging after replacing ULB battery
(on CVR or DFDR)
Tagging after replacing battery
Page 12.13-3

12.14 COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT
12.14
COMPONENT ROBBERY/SWAPPING ON VNA AIRCRAFT
12.14.1
PURPOSE
To ensure the robbery/ swapping of component on VNA aircraft meet all
12.14.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling of activities related component
robbery (cannibalization)/ swapping on VNA aircraft.
12.14.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
12.14.4
Director of related MCC is responsible for:

a.
Evaluating the defect and A/C status, proposing solution and

requesting the relevant maintenance center to rob/swap aircraft
components;
b.
Requesting for robbery permission from VNA,
Directors of relevant maintenance center are responsible for component

robbery/swapping IAW maintenance data and VNA procedures.
1.
In case of components cannot be supplied on time, robbery/ swapping of

aircraft components may be considered as alternative solution.
2.
Robbery/ swapping of aircraft components shall be always conformed to

VNA MME manual and Line maintenance manual.
3.
Robbery of components from other aircraft should only be applied when

agreed by VNA Technical Department.
4.
Robbery of aircraft components is not recommended if the robbed

component has existing defects and/ or maintenance/ inspection
requirement.
5.
In case that an aircraft component with repaired structure defects is

robbed the P/N, S/N, description, old and new position of the component
shall be reported to EGD for updating structure damage map and
records. The related dent & buckle charts shall be updated (if the
damage has been existing on the dent and buckle chart of robbed A/C).
6.
The RTS staff of relevant maintenance centers must follow procedure

10.10 to issue Re-certified Certificate for the robbed component/ part.
However, its not necessary to issue Re-certified certificate if the robbed
aircraft component is directly installed on the other aircraft at same
location and by same Inspection & RTS staff.
7.
If robbing component has to be installed on A/C at another location, it is

sent to LGD by the respective maintenance center. The LGD shall
perform packaging and deliver to requested station.
8.
When robbery/ swap of components from aircrafts RTS staff should do

the following, but not limited to:
Page 12.14-1

9.
12.14.5
a.
Open related switch/ CB, make it collared and attach the Warning
tag (VAECO Form 0006) to that switch/ CB,
b.
Remove component IAW relevant AMM,
c.
Attach Warning tag to position of removed component.
d.
Perform liquid drainage and preservation as required by relevant

AMM,
e.
Cap the tube/lines ends with blanking caps/plugs to prevent

contamination.
f.
Cover connectors and stow loose wires.
g.
Order the spare part for both aircrafts (the A/C is installed with the
component and the A/C is robbed the component).
h.
After component is installed back to the A/C, remove all related

warning tags and inform to maintenance team leader who is working
in same area/ system (if any).
i.
Enter the GRN information as Robbed from VN-xxxx (A/C

registration number) when installation of a robbing component is
performed.
The maintenance center that performs removal WO shall close it in

AMASIS upon completion and updates the status of the moved
component in AMASIS. The copy of completed WO and Request For
Supply (VAECO Form 4023) for robbed A/C shall be sent to the TPD of
maintenance center who manages the robbed A/C for further action. The
requesting center shall update the event in Aircraft Event item of
Technical Information menu of VAECO website.
PROCEDURE
12.14.5.1 ROBBERY/ SWAPPING DEMAND

When having the demand for robbery of aircraft components, MCC shall
a.
Evaluate the relevant aircraft defect status, logistics information and

flight plan,
b.
Propose aircraft component robbery to VNA Technical Department,
c.
Inform the related RMC/BMC to request co-operation.
d.
Assign appropriate maintenance center to rob component upon

receiving the order from VNA Technical Department. The
assignment determination is based on time, workload and location of
the A/C to be robbed and the A/C to be installed the component.
12.14.5.2 SWAP OF COMPONENTS

1.
RTS staff initiatively performs the swap IAW VNA line maintenance
procedure and records the work into Technical Log.
2.
In the case of swap components between aircrafts managed by RMC

and BMC for troubleshooting on the Ramps aircraft at night time, MCC
Page 12.14-2

will issue WO to appropriate RMC for performance and inform related

BMC.
12.14.5.3 ROBBERY OF COMPONENTS
12.14.5.3.1 COMPONENT TO BE ROBBED ON AIRCRAFT MANAGED BY RMC
1.
MCC issues removal WO and send to respective RMC for removing

required component. If the robbery demand is from BMC, the WO shall
be referred to the requesting NRC. The RTS staff shall remove the
component and record the work IAW VNA line maintenance procedure.
2.
In addition to VNA line maintenance procedure, The RTS staff shall

record into Technical Log of robbed aircraft the following information:
a.
The reference number of robbery order from VNA Technical

Department (if any) in the Defect block of the first entry.
b.
Request for installation of removed component in the Defect block

of the second entry.
3.
If the robbing component is required to be installed on A/C in line

maintenance, the appropriate RMC staff will perform installation and
record in Technical log.
4.
If the robbing component is required to be installed on A/C in base

maintenance, the appropriate BMC staff will perform installation and
record the work in the requesting NRC.
5.
For robbed A/C, the authorized staff of respective RMC will perform
installation and certify in Technical Log when the spare part is available.
12.14.5.3.2 COMPONENT TO BE ROBBED ON AIRCRAFT MANAGED BY BMC

1.
If the robbing component is to be installed on A/C managed by the same

BMC, the appropriate BMC staff will perform the removal and installation
and record the work in appropriate NRCs that will be placed in respective
WP.
2.
If the robbing component is to be installed on A/C managed by other

BMC, MCC will issue removal WO with reference to the requesting
NRC and send to appropriate maintenance center for removal. The
installation of the robbing component on the required A/C shall be
recorded in the requesting NRC.
3.
If the robbing component is to be installed on A/C managed by RMC,

MCC will issue removal WO and send to appropriate maintenance
center for removal. The installation of the robbing component on the
required A/C shall be recorded in the Technical log.
4.
When the spare part is available, authorized staff of respective BMC will
perform installation and record the work in the requesting NRC.
Page 12.14-3

12.15
HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS
12.15.1
PURPOSE
12.15 HANDLING OF VNA AIRCRAFT EVENTS
To ensure occurrences (incidents/ accidents) and maintenance events of

VNA A/C are handled IAW applicable requirements of Authorities and VNA.
12.15.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for handling VNA aircraft occurrences (incidents/
accidents) and maintenance events.
12.15.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
3.
4.
12.15.4
Director of related maintenance center is responsible for:

a.
Performing the necessary job in emergency situation, isolating,

keeping the A/C and doing the preliminary assessment;
b.
Gathering information and making the preliminary reports about

incident/ accident and sending to MCC.
c.
Providing resources, planning and

processes for the assigned WP/WO.
managing
maintenance
MCC Director is responsible for:

a.
Issuing WP/WO to rectify the A/C undergone an occurrence
b.
Creating and deploying maintenance plan to rectify or preserve the

A/C during AOG period.
c.
Assigning the appropriate maintenance center for managing the

aircraft and carrying out the rectification/ preservation maintenance
plan;
EGD Director is responsible for:

a.
Issuing WP/WO to perform a maintenance event (other than an

occurrence).
b.
Contacting manufacturer for technical solution as requested from

MCC; providing the approved/ acceptable technical data required to
perform the work.
c.
Issuing the EO (if needed) for rectifying the A/C.
QAD Director is responsible for:

a.
Obtaining any required approvals from the local Aviation Authority

(For the work to be performed outside of Vietnam);
b.
Ensuring that all maintenance performed in accordance with the

requirements of concerned Authorities.
PROCEDURE
12.15.4.1 Aircraft occurrences happened at VAECO facilities/ stations

1.
Whenever an A/C get an occurrence the appropriate RTS staff shall

perform necessary inspection in order to discover all visual damage and
report to his/ her TPD.
Page 12.15-1

2.
The respective TPD shall make all necessary report such as delay
report/ AOG report, defect report, initial MOR and sent to MCC with
necessary documents. The respective TPD shall gather related
information/ report and make new entry in Aircraft Event of Technical
Information menu in VAECO Website.
3.
For incident that the rectification is within RMC capability, the respective
RMC shall perform defect rectification. If there is a difficulty RMC shall
notify to MCC for further action. Basing on the workload and situation of
the RMC, MCC shall determine to assign the A/C to appropriate BMC for
rectification.
4.
For incident/ accident which is out of RMC capability, MCC shall assign
the A/C to appropriate BMC for rectification.
5.
Based on the workload the assigned BMC shall determine to nominate a

foreman and/ or production planner to manage/ control all rectification
activities. Each WO performed during rectification will be made an entry
in the technical log and certified accordingly.
6.
If a WP is created, all WOs issued to rectify the A/C shall be added to the
WP by the issuer and additional work during maintenance process shall
be added by the maintenance center.
7.
After completion of all rectification activities the assigned authorized staff

shall perform all necessary inspections to ensure A/C is serviceable
before releasing the A/C to service..
8.
The TPD shall enter the performance information in AMASIS and A/C
Event of Technical Information menu of VAECO website to close WO/
WP when rectification process is accomplished. All rectification records
are gathered by respective TPD and transferred to Technical Record
Section of EGD for keeping..
12.15.4.2 Aircraft occurrences happened at non-VAECO stations

1.
For aircraft occurrences happen at non-VAECO station, MOC of VNA is

main responsible for taking over the aircraft, giving request to rectify
defects, contacting MCC for technical support.
2.
The MCC will cooperate with related maintenance centers, EGD and
LGD to prepare man powers, materials/ spares, tools/ equipment,
maintenance data, maintenance documents and transfer to the A/C
position for rectification.
3.
The MCC shall make new entry in Aircraft Event of Technical

Information Menu of VAECO Website. The required materials/ spare
parts and tools/ equipment for rectification shall be ordered by the MCC.
The number of Request for Supply shall be updated in VAECO website.
4.
MCC will create a WP in AMASIS for gathering rectification work and

assign appropriate maintenance center to control the WP and close it
when rectification process is accomplished.
Page 12.15-2

5.
Each WO performed during rectification will be made an entry in the

technical log and certified accordingly before the A/C is released to
service.
12.15.4.3 Aircraft maintenance events

1.
Aircraft maintenance event is a WP performance such as a group of

tasksother than Phase checks, occurrence rectification and base
maintenance.
2.
EGD shall prepare a WP of the maintenance event and send to MCC for
deploying.
3.
MCC shall check the WP, add appropriate WOs for OPM performance or
ADD rectification and assign an appropriate maintenance center for
performance based on:
a.
Capability of maintenance center,
b.
The location of aircraft,
c.
Workload (standard WP and added work).
4.
The assigned maintenance center shall, based on the workload,

determine to assign production planner to control the performance of WP
and foreman to manage aircraft and maintenance activities.
5.
The assigned maintenance center shall assign an appropriate RTS staff

to carry out the preliminary inspection of whole aircraft to determine nonroutine tasks prior to performing maintenance.
6.
All defects found during preliminary inspection and in-process inspection

shall be transferred to NRC for rectification.
7.
After all the tasks and additional work are completed and signed by
appropriate authorized staff, the production planner/ assigned staff shall
check and gather all task cards and additional worksheets (WO, EO,
SRO, NRC) of the WP for final inspection.
8.
The assigned RTS staff shall perform final inspection IAW paragraph
10.5.7.3 and certify the completion of the maintenance event into
technical log.
9.
The production planner/ assigned staff shall update the performance of

the WP in AMASIS and transfer the WP to Technical Records section of
EGD for keeping.
10. The hand-over of the A/C is performed IAW SOP 6.3.4.17.

12.15.5
ARCHIVES
Maintenance records are kept at least 2 years since A/C is released to
service..
Page 12.15-3

12.16 STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR
12.16
STRUCTURE DAMAGE REPAIR
12.16.1
PURPOSE
To ensure structure damage repair is performed and controlled in
accordance with current applicable regulations.
12.16.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for structure repairs on VNA aircraft.
12.16.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
2.
3.
4.
12.16.4
Ramp maintenance Director is responsible for:

a.
Detecting structure damages occurring at ramp maintenance,
b.
Evaluation the damages and release aircraft to service with

deferrable structure damages in accordance maintenance data
(SRM, AMM) and customer procedures,
Base maintenance Director is responsible for:

a.
Detecting structure damages in base maintenance,
b.
Evaluating and performing structure damage repairs which are

mentioned in SRM,
c.
Repairing structure damages which are not mentioned in SRM in

accordance with instructions from EGD.
d.
Sending Technical Assistance Request together with the SDR to

EGD in case the damage repair is not given in the SRM.
Engineering Director is responsible to:

a.
Contact manufacturer or approved designed organizations to get

approval of repair scheme in case of structure damages are not
mentioned in SRM;
b.
Control structure repair status and update the structure repair map.
Director of QAD is responsible for verifying repair scheme and contacting

CAAV to get approval if necessary.
DETECT AND
MAINTENANCE
1.
EVALUATE
STRUCTURAL
DAMAGES
IN
RAMP
If structure damage is detected in Ramp maintenance, Inspection & RTS

staff shall:
a.
Evaluate the damage according to SRM, AMM, etc.;
b.
Make a Structure Damage Report - SDR (VAECO Form 3016)

describing in details the damage with attached picture if necessary
and send it to the RTPD. The SDR should include, but not limited to:
Damage description and damaged structure parts.
Dimensions of damages (length, width, depth),
Page 12.16-1

Location of damage in correlated to main aircraft structure (the

distance from damage edges to primary aircraft structure, etc.).
c.
12.16.5
Request Non-destructive inspection (NDI), if required by SRM,

AMM
2.
If the damage shall be repaired before flight, the Inspection & RTS staff
shall immediately inform to respective RTPD for contacting with local
BMC (HAN and SGN) for assistance. To prevent from AOG status the
local BMC shall support the RMC to bring the A/C back to airworthy
status for operation.
3.
The RTPD completes the SDR and sends to MCC via assigned message
box mcc of VAECO website. MCC shall review the SDR and send to
EGD for update structure damage map and control list and assign
relevant BMC for issuing SRO..
4.
If the damage is within SRM/ AMM allowable limit or can be deferred,

location of the damage if visible from outside A/C is recorded in DENT
AND BUCKLE CHART. The deferred structure repair shall be controlled
IAW 12.16.8.
5.
In case the repair is required within a time limit, MCC will assign a BMC
shall evaluate to determine whether the damage mention in SRM or not.
a.
If the damage is mentioned in SRM, the assigned BMC shall follow

instruction in 12.16.6.
b.
If the damage is not mentioned in SRM, the BMC will send a TAR to
EGD to follow instruction in 12.16.7.
DETECT AND
MAINTENANCE
1.
EVALUATE
STRUCTURAL
DAMAGE
IN
BASE
During base maintenance, when structure damages are found,

Inspection & RTS staff shall:
a.
Make a Structure Damage Report - SDR (VAECO Form 3016)

describing in details the damage with attached picture if necessary.
The SDR should include, but not limited to:
Damage description and damaged structure parts.
Dimensions of damages (length, width, depth);
Location of damage in correlated to main aircraft structure (the
distance from damage edges to primary aircraft structure, etc.);
Non-destructive inspection (NDI) results, if required by SRM,
AMM
b.
Raise a NRC with attached SDR and send to the Dock Control room.
One copy of the SDR is sent to EGD.
c.
If the damage is within SRM/ AMM allowable limit or the repair is not
performed but can be deferrable, location of the damage if visible
from outside A/C is recorded in DENT AND BUCKLE CHART. The
deferred structure repair shall be controlled IAW 12.16.8.
Page 12.16-2

2.
12.16.6
12.16.7
Based on SDR, Inspection & RTS staff shall evaluate the structure
damage according to SRM, AMM, etc.
a.
If the damage is mentioned in SRM, BMC shall follow instruction in

12.16.6.
b.
If the damage isnt mentioned in SRM, BMC shall send a TAR to

EGD to follow instruction in 12.16.7.
REPAIR OF STRUCTURE DAMAGE WITHIN SRM LIMIT

1.
If the repair instruction covered by SRM, AMM, the appropriate structure

repair staff of assigned BMC creates Structural Repair Order (SRO VAECO Form 6009) in accordance with SOP 8.2 and Request for Supply
(VAECO Form 4023) to carry out the repair. The SRO shall be sent to
respective BTPD for review and acceptance. In case the defect
rectification has to be performed on A/C at ramp maintenance and out of
BTPD working time, the SRO shall be sent to respective RTPD for
review and acceptance. All the information of SRO and the Request for
Supply must be entered in AMASIS.
2.
If the repair is deferred, the SRO and Request for Supply must be issued
before the due time and within 3 days since the reporting date. The BMC
forwards the SRO and the Request for Supply to MCC. For structure
damages risen during a work pack performance (to be lasted more than
3 days), BMC could send the deferred SRO to MCC just before the A/C
is released to service.
3.
The damage rectification deferment is controlled IAW 12.16.8.
REPAIR OF STRUCTURE DAMAGE WHICH IS OUT OF SRM LIMIT

1.
When receiving the TAR of structure damage, qualified structure

engineer of EGD shall:
a.
Based on SRM, AMM, re-evaluate the damage and request further

inspections if necessary.
b.
Update the related information into Structure Repair Control List.
c.
Send the following information to manufacturer for repair scheme:

Detailed description, location(s), dimension(s) of damage;
Results of performed inspections;
Aircraft data: MSN, Registration, Flight hours, Flight cycles;
Suggest a preliminary repair scheme, which is capable to
VAECO (if possible).
2.
When receiving the repair scheme from manufacturer, EGD issue EO in

accordance with SOP 8.6 and Spares and tool list. All the information of
EO and Spares/ Materials and Tools must be entered in AMASIS, EGD
shall issue WO and send to MCC with the EO for deploying to perform..
3.
MCC shall schedule and assign relevant BMC at suitable time to carry
out the repair.
Page 12.16-3

4.
After accomplishment of the repair, one copy of EO sign-off sheet should

be sent to EGD for reporting the result to manufacturer.
5.
Repair approval:
6.
12.16.8
a.
For the A/Cs which the primary airworthiness Authority is EASA (AIB
aircrafts, F70, ATR 72), the repairs should be approved by a Design
Organization Approval (DOA) office in the relevant forms (RAS,
RDAS, SRAS).
b.
For the A/Cs which the primary airworthiness Authority is FAA

(Boeing aircrafts), the major repairs should be approved by FAA in
form 8100-9, the minor repairs follow manufacturer instructions are
acceptable.
In case of complicated structure repairs which are out of VAECO

capability, EGD shall report to VNA to work out the appropriate solutions.
CONTROL OF DEFERRED STRUCTURE REPAIR

1.
If the EO/ SRO for the repair are issued before releasing the aircraft to
service, no more action is required.
2.
If the EO/ SRO for the repair cannot be issued before releasing the
aircraft to service, the RTS staff shall raise an ADD type B for the
damage. The ADD number should be recorded in the SDR, EO/SRO for
tracking purpose.
3.
If the repetitive inspection is required, the inspection requirement,

interval and due should be recorded in OOP Maintenance Requirement
Control Sheet (VAECO Form 1003).
4.
When EO/SRO is issued, EGD/BMC shall send the EO/SRO to MCC.

The MCC shall inform appropriate RTPD to clear the ADD: Assigned
Inspection & RTS staff shall write down a following statement in action
taken box of the technical log:
The deferred structure defect was transferred to SRO No.
SRO/xxx/xx/xxx. ADD Bxxx is cleared, or
The deferred structure defect was transferred to EO No. EOxxx.
ADD Bxxx is cleared
Note: All repetitive maintenance required for the deferred structure defect
specified in OOP Maintenance Requirement Control Sheet (if any) is still
open until the SRO is performed.
12.16.9
5.
MCC shall control and schedule the performance for the EO/ SRO with
deferred time limit less than A check interval or equivalent. MCC shall
send EO/ SRO other than those controlled by itself to EGD for control.
6.
EGD shall update list of structure repair for each A/C and upload on
VAECO website whenever there is new structure damage found/
repaired.
REPAIR DOCUMENTS
1.
The numbering system of SDR as follow: SDR/xxx/yy/zzz. In which:
Page 12.16-4

a.
2.
xxx is the code of maintenance center

Maintenance center
HAN Base Maintenance Center
HAN Ramp Maintenance Center
HCM Base Maintenance Center
HCM Ramp Maintenance Center
DAD Ramp Maintenance Center
b.
yy is the year
c.
zzz is the order number of SDR
Code
HBM
HLM
SBM
SLM
DLM
In order to monitor the repair, the SRO and SRR should be numbered as
the same reference of SDR.
For example: with the same repair, SDR/SLM/11/005 should have
SRO/SLM/11/005 and SRR/SLM/11/005.
3.
If damage has a temporary repair and then followed by a permanent

repair, Item 1 and Item 2 should be added in the references of the SRO
and SRR.
For example: with the same damage SDR/SLM/11/005, temporary repair
documents are SRO/SLM/11/005 Item 1 and SRR/SLM/11/005 Item 1,
permanent repair documents are SRO/SLM/11/005 Item 2 and
SRR/SLM/11/005 Item 2.
4.
After completing the SRO, BMC shall complete STRUCTURAL REPAIR

REPORT (SRR) (VAECO Form 6010) with the details of performed
repair
5.
The BMC shall send the records of structure damaged repair to EGD via
assigned message box haneng of VAECO website just after repair
completion and no later than 24 hours since completion time:
6.
a.
Completed SRO, SRR, Detail drawings or sketch of the repair, or
b.
Completed EO.
EGD reviews the repair document and updates the information into
Structure Repair Control List and upload the List on VAECO website. If
any discrepancy is found, request BMC to rectify it.
12.16.10 ARCHIVES
1.
The SDR, SRO, SRR, EO and all related document are transferred and
kept IAW Aircraft maintenance record handling procedure.
2.
EGD controls and stores the copy of repair documents for at least 2
years since aircraft withdraw from service.
Page 12.16-5

12.17 CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT
12.17
CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT
12.17.1
PURPOSE
To ensure acceptable deferred defects (ADD) and arising maintenance
requirements are performed IAW applicable regulatory requirements.
12.17.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for controlling of ADD and arising maintenance
requirements including re-inspection after rectification.
12.17.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
Director of MCC is responsible for:

a.
Controlling all ADDs except cabin interior/ IFE defects that are
transferred to CIMC.
b.
Planning and issuing WO to perform ADD rectification;
2.
Director of RMC/ BMC is responsible for performing assigned WO and

update the performance information in AMASIS (including the cabin
interior/ IFE defect rectification).
3.
Director of CIMC is responsible for:

a.
4.
12.17.4
Controlling all cabin interior/ IFE defects transferred from MCC.
Planning and issuing WO and performing cabin interior/ IFE defect

rectification.
PROCEDURE
1.
When a defect is discovered and need to be deferred, appropriate

authorized staff shall raise ADD IAW VNA LMM, procedure 2.3 (for a
structure damage, refer to SOP 12.16 for additional requirements).
2.
The RTS staff of related maintenance center shall carry out

troubleshooting and related maintenance as specified in the
maintenance data as soon as possible (within 72 hours for cabin and IFE
defects); issue Out of Phase Maintenance Requirement Notice (VAECO
Form 5004) for any arising maintenance requirements.
3.
If the ADD has the operation limit or causes ETOPS, RVSM to be

downgraded, authorized staff shall notify to respective RTPD/ BTPD and
MCC before commencing the affected flight.
4.
Respective RTPD/ BTPD staff shall enter the information of the defect
into AMASIS, create a deferred WO and enter all requirements of part/
materials, tool/ equipment in the Ingredients of the deferred WO.
5.
Staff of Respective TPD shall generate requisition for all item in the
ingredients to issue Request for Supply (VAECO Form 4023) for
troubleshooting or just after defect determination. The Request for
Supply of part/ materials is sent to LGD for handling. The Request for
Supply of tool/ equipment is informed to respective CMC for handling.
The handling action shall be entered in AMASIS.
6.
[deleted].
Page 12.17-1

12.17 CONTROL OF ACCEPTABLE DEFERED DEFECT
7.
MCC shall determine and transfer all cabin interior/ IFE defects to CIMC
for controlling and rectifying. MCC shall control all remaining ADDs, plan,
issue WO and assign appropriate maintenance center to clear the ADD
at soonest opportunity before due date.
8.
CIMC shall control all cabin interior/ IFE ADDs, plan, issue WO and
assign cabin interior/ IFE rectification team to clear the ADD at soonest
opportunity before due date.
9.
The assigned RTS staff shall perform the ADD rectification as requested
work in the WO. Respective RTPD/ BTPD staff shall update the
information of ADD rectifying performance in AMASIS (including the
cabin interior/ IFE defect rectification).
10. If the WO are performed but does not help to clear the ADD, the RTS
staff shall notify to respective TPD for deleting all no-longer needed part/
materials and/or T&E that have been declared in Ingredients of the
deferred WO and issuing Request for closure of requisite item (VAECO
Form 4025). The respective TPD staff shall send the Request for closure
of requisite item to LGD for cancelling the order.
11. If the ADD is cleared the RTS staff shall certify in the WO and transfer
the records to the TPD to close all requisition item and close the WO in
the AMASIS.
Page 12.17-2

12.18
AIRCRAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
12.18.1
PURPOSE
12.18 AIRCAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
To establish a procedure for controlling of the loadable software

configuration, for VNA aircrafts.
12.18.2
SCOPE
This procedure is applied for VNA Airbus and Boeing aircrafts.
12.18.3
RESPONSIBILITY
1.
12.18.4

a.
Set up and control of the aircraft software configuration.
b.
Duplicate the software for VNA aircraft IAW instruction of

manufacturer.
2.
Director of LGD is responsible for procuring the software spare disks

IAW the Request for Supply of the EGD or maintenance staff.
3.
Director of RMC, BMC are responsible for updating the software disk and
the software list stow on the cockpit; report any lost, discrepancy of
software disk on the aircraft to EGD for further action.
PROCEDURE
1.
Software Back-up:
a.
General requirements: a personal computer with an updated virus

protection, security protected and not networked can be used to
copy software media. The duplicated software media should be
identically labeled to the original software media and stamped. The
software back-up is only performed if it is allowed to copy by the
vendor.
b.
Source of the software:

Purchase from the vendor.
Download from the vendors website in accordance with the
technical instructions.
Software disks accompanied with the aircraft at the time of
delivery.
c.
2.
The assigned EGD staff will copy/download the software to the

server. The software stored in the folder of the server with the name
is identical for each aircraft type, ATA, part number of the software.
Duplicate the software disk:

a.
For Airbus aircraft, the software disk allowed to duplicate is indicated

in SIL 00-063.
b.
For Boeing aircraft, the software disk (Boeing and Supplier

Furnished Equipment) can be duplicated using Disk Copy Tool P/N
D6-82505.
Page 12.18-1

c.
3.
12.18 AIRCAFT SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
For software of BFE (Buyer Supply Equipment), it is necessary to

have the permission from the vendor before duplicating.
Aircraft Software Configuration Management:

a.
For Airbus aircraft, the loadable software disks and the VAECO
Form 3028 Cockpit stowed media .
b.
For Boeing aircraft, the loadable software disks and the VAECO
Form 3029 Loadable Software Diskette/ Media Binders is stowed in
the cockpit.
c.
Software configuration monitor/ update:

If the modification result in the software part number changes, the
software disk and the new VAECO Form 3028 or VAECO Form
3029 will be provided together with EO. When the EO is
accomplished, the technical staff should update the software disk
and new list on the cockpit according to EO requirement.
During the maintenance which a new software part number
required (not followed by EO), technical staff must notify EGD to
provide new software disk and update the software list of
subjected aircraft.
4.
12.18.5
Software configuration review schedule: The software list of each aircraft

will be checked at 2A check interval. The technical staff should inform
EGD any discrepancy for rectification.
ARCHIVES
The software list of each aircraft will be kept at the EGD. One copy of the list
is stored together with the software disk on the aircraft.
Page 12.18-2

PART 13 FORMS
PART 13
FORMS
Page 13-1

PART 13 FORMS
13.1
13.1 VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE TO COMPLETION
VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION

VAECO forms and guidance to complete each form are separated in VAECO
Form manual.
Page 13.1-1

PART 13 FORMS
13.2
13.2 AUTHORITY AND CUSTOMER FORM AND GUIDANCE TO COMPLETION
AUTHORITY AND
COMPLETION
CUSTOMER
FORM
AND
GUIDANCE
FOR
Authority and Customer forms used by VAECO and guidance to complete

those forms are separated in VAECO Form manual.
Page 13.2-1

VAECO Standard Operating Procedures

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

VAECO Standard Operating Procedures

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Vietnam Airlines Corporation

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING COMPANY LTD.

A: Noi Bai International Airport, Hanoi, Vietnam T: 84-4-38843290 F: 84-4-38865176 W: www.vaeco.com.vn

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

Issue: 02, Revision: 00, Date: 01 FEB 2012

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.1 TABLE OF CONTENT

GENERAL ................................................................................................... 1-1

TABLE OF CONTENT ......................................................................................... 1.1-1

PROCESSES .............................................................................................. 3-1

GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 4-1

AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROCEDURES .......................... 5-1

RAMP AND BASE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................. 6-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 06, Date: 04 OCT 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.1 TABLE OF CONTENT

COMPONENT MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................ 7-1

MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PROCEDURES .............................................. 8-1

MAINTENANCE DATA CONTROL ...................................................................... 8.1-1

LOGISTICS PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 9-1

PART/ MATERIALS INCOMING INSPECTION & RECEIVING ............................ 9.1-1

PART 10 QUALITY SYSTEM PROCEDURES ......................................................... 10-1

INSPECTION AND RETURN TO SERVICE PERSONNEL ................................ 10.1-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date: 24 SEP 2014

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.1 TABLE OF CONTENT

CERTIFICATE OF RETURN TO SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE RELEASE ISSUANCE

PART 11 HUMAN RESOURCE AND TRAINING PROCEDURES ........................... 11-1

POSITION NEED ASSESSMENT ...................................................................... 11.1-1

PART 12 SPECIFIC PROCEDURES FOR VNA ...................................................... 12-1

AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVE EVALUATION AND IMPLEMENTATION ......... 12.1-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 06, Date: 04 OCT 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.1 TABLE OF CONTENT

VNA VARIATION/ CONCESSION CONTROL ................................................. 12.11-1

PART 13 FORMS ...................................................................................................... 13-1

VAECO FORM AND GUIDANCE FOR COMPLETION ...................................... 13.1-1

Issue: 02, Revision: 06, Date: 04 OCT 2013

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.2 RECORD OF REVISIONS

Issue No. Revision No.

Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date: 24 SEP 2014

VIETNAM AIRLINES ENGINEERING CO. LTD.

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

1.3 SUMMARY OF AMENDMENT

: Standard Operating Procedures

To update Summary of amendment

To update List of Effective Pages

+ To add some abbreviations.

+ To add Organizational chart of Cabin Interior

+ To add the responsibility of director of CIMC to

+ To add CIMC responsibility to return defective

+ To add CIMC responsibility to issue Work Request

+ To add CIMC responsibility to issue worksheet for

+ To move responsibility of seat cover and curtain

Issue: 02, Revision: 10, Date: 24 SEP 2014